Cypress CY8C22113 Psoc mixed signal array Datasheet

CY8C22113, CY8C22213
PSoC™ Mixed Signal Array
Preliminary Data Sheet
For Silicon Revision A
December 22, 2003
Cypress MicroSystems
2700 162nd Street SW
Building D
Lynnwood, WA 98037
Phone: 800.669.0557
FAX: 425.787.4641
http://www.cypress.com
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
© Cypress MicroSystems, Inc. 2003. All rights reserved. PSoC™ (Programmable System-on-Chip™) is a trademark of
Cypress MicroSystems, Inc. All other trademarks or registered trademarks referenced herein are property of the respective
corporations.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Cypress MicroSystems assumes no responsibility for
the use of any circuitry other than circuitry embodied in a Cypress MicroSystems product. Nor does it convey or imply any
license under patent or other rights. Cypress MicroSystems does not authorize its products for use as critical components in
life support systems where a malfunction or failure may reasonably be expected to result in significant injury to the user. The
inclusion of Cypress MicroSystems’ products in life-support system applications implies that the manufacturer assumes all
risk of such use and in doing so, indemnifies Cypress MicroSystems against all charges.
2
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
Contents
SECTION A OVERVIEW
13
Features ...........................................................................................................................................13
Getting Started .................................................................................................................................14
Development Kits ................................................................................................................14
Tele-Training .......................................................................................................................14
Consultants .........................................................................................................................14
Technical Support ...............................................................................................................14
Application Notes ................................................................................................................14
Top-Level Architecture .....................................................................................................................15
Development Tools ..........................................................................................................................16
PSoC Designer Software Subsystems ................................................................................16
Hardware Tools ...................................................................................................................17
User Modules and Development Process ........................................................................................17
Ordering Information ........................................................................................................................19
Organization and Conventions .........................................................................................................20
Document Organization ......................................................................................................20
Document Conventions .......................................................................................................20
1.
Pin Information .......................................................................................................23
1.1
1.2
2.
Pin Summary .......................................................................................................................23
Pinouts .................................................................................................................................24
Packaging Information ............................................................................................27
2.1
2.2
Packaging Dimensions.........................................................................................................27
Thermal Impedances ..........................................................................................................30
SECTION B CORE ARCHITECTURE
31
Top-Level Core Architecture ............................................................................................................31
Core Register Summary ...................................................................................................................32
3.
CPU Core (M8C) ....................................................................................................35
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
December 22, 2003
Internal Registers .................................................................................................................35
Address Spaces ...................................................................................................................35
Instruction Set Summary......................................................................................................37
Instruction Format ................................................................................................................38
3.4.1
One-Byte Instructions.....................................................................................38
3.4.2
Two-Byte Instructions.....................................................................................38
3.4.3
Three-Byte Instructions ..................................................................................39
Addressing Modes ...............................................................................................................39
3.5.1
Source Immediate ..........................................................................................39
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
3
Contents
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
3.6
4.
Supervisory ROM (SROM) ...................................................................................... 45
4.1
4.2
4.3
5.
6.2
Architectural Description ......................................................................................................61
Register Definitions..............................................................................................................61
7.2.1
ABF_CR0 Register ........................................................................................61
Internal Main Oscillator (IMO) ................................................................................. 63
8.1
8.2
4
Architectural Description ......................................................................................................55
6.1.1
Digital IO ........................................................................................................55
6.1.2
Global IO........................................................................................................55
6.1.3
Analog IO .......................................................................................................56
6.1.4
GPIO Block Interrupts ....................................................................................56
Register Definitions..............................................................................................................58
6.2.1
PRTxDR Registers.........................................................................................58
6.2.2
PRTxIE Registers ..........................................................................................58
6.2.3
PRTxGS Registers.........................................................................................58
6.2.4
PRTxDMx Registers ......................................................................................58
6.2.5
PRTxICx Registers ........................................................................................59
Analog Output Drivers ............................................................................................ 61
7.1
7.2
8.
Architectural Description ......................................................................................................52
Register Definitions..............................................................................................................53
5.2.1
INT_CLRx Register........................................................................................53
5.2.2
INT_MSKx Register .......................................................................................53
5.2.3
INT_VC Register............................................................................................53
5.2.4
CPU_F Register.............................................................................................53
General Purpose IO (GPIO) .................................................................................... 55
6.1
7.
Architectural Description ......................................................................................................45
4.1.1
Additional SROM Feature ..............................................................................46
4.1.2
SROM Function Descriptions.........................................................................46
Register Definitions..............................................................................................................49
4.2.1
CPU_SCR1 Register .....................................................................................49
Clocking ...............................................................................................................................49
Interrupt Controller ................................................................................................. 51
5.1
5.2
6.
3.5.2
Source Direct .................................................................................................40
3.5.3
Source Indexed..............................................................................................40
3.5.4
Destination Direct...........................................................................................40
3.5.5
Destination Indexed .......................................................................................41
3.5.6
Destination Direct Source Immediate ............................................................41
3.5.7
Destination Indexed Source Immediate .........................................................41
3.5.8
Destination Direct Source Direct....................................................................42
3.5.9
Source Indirect Post Increment......................................................................42
3.5.10
Destination Indirect Post Increment ...............................................................42
Register Definitions..............................................................................................................43
3.6.1
CPU_F (Flag) Register ..................................................................................43
Architectural Description ......................................................................................................63
Register Definitions..............................................................................................................63
8.2.1
IMO_TR Register ...........................................................................................63
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
9.
Contents
Internal Low Speed Oscillator (ILO) ........................................................................65
9.1
9.2
Architectural Description ......................................................................................................65
Register Definitions ..............................................................................................................65
9.2.1
ILO_TR Register ............................................................................................65
10. 32 kHz Crystal Oscillator (ECO) ..............................................................................67
10.1
10.2
Architectural Description ......................................................................................................67
10.1.1
ECO External Components............................................................................68
Register Definitions ..............................................................................................................68
10.2.1
OSC_CR0 Register........................................................................................68
10.2.2
ECO_TR Register ..........................................................................................69
10.2.3
CPU_SCR1 Register......................................................................................69
11. Phase Locked Loop (PLL) .......................................................................................71
11.1
11.2
Architectural Description ......................................................................................................71
Register Definitions ..............................................................................................................71
11.2.1
OSC_CR0 Register........................................................................................71
11.2.2
OSC_CR2 Register........................................................................................72
12. Sleep and Watchdog ..............................................................................................73
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
Architectural Description ......................................................................................................73
12.1.1
32 kHz Clock Selection ..................................................................................73
12.1.2
Sleep Timer ....................................................................................................74
12.1.3
Sleep Bit.........................................................................................................74
Application Description.........................................................................................................74
Register Definitions ..............................................................................................................75
12.3.1
INT_MSK0 Register .......................................................................................75
12.3.2
RES_WDT Register .......................................................................................75
12.3.3
OSC_CR0 Register........................................................................................75
12.3.4
CPU_SCR1 Register......................................................................................76
12.3.5
ILO_TR Register ............................................................................................76
12.3.6
ECO_TR Register ..........................................................................................76
12.3.7
CPU_SCR0 Register......................................................................................76
Timing Diagrams ..................................................................................................................77
12.4.1
Sleep Sequence.............................................................................................77
12.4.2
Wake Up Sequence .......................................................................................78
12.4.3
Bandgap Refresh ...........................................................................................79
12.4.4
Watchdog Timer (WDT) .................................................................................79
Power Consumption.............................................................................................................80
SECTION C REGISTER REFERENCE
81
Register Conventions .......................................................................................................................81
Register Mapping Tables .................................................................................................................81
Register Map 0 Table: User Space ..............................................................................82
Register Map 1 Table: Configuration Space ................................................................83
13. Register Details ......................................................................................................85
13.1
December 22, 2003
Bank 0 Registers..................................................................................................................86
13.1.1
PRTxDR ........................................................................................................86
13.1.2
PRTxIE ..........................................................................................................87
13.1.3
PRTxGS ........................................................................................................88
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
5
Contents
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.4
13.1.5
13.1.6
13.1.7
13.1.8
13.1.9
13.1.10
13.1.11
13.1.12
13.1.13
13.1.14
13.1.15
13.1.16
13.1.17
13.1.18
13.1.19
13.1.20
13.1.21
13.1.22
13.1.23
13.1.24
13.1.25
13.1.26
13.1.27
13.1.28
13.1.29
13.1.30
13.1.31
13.1.32
13.1.33
13.1.34
13.1.35
13.1.36
13.1.37
13.1.38
13.1.39
13.1.40
13.1.41
13.1.42
13.1.43
13.1.44
13.1.45
13.1.46
13.1.47
13.1.48
13.1.49
13.1.50
13.1.51
13.1.52
13.1.53
13.1.54
13.1.55
13.1.56
13.1.57
6
PRTxDM2 .....................................................................................................89
DxBxxDR0 ....................................................................................................90
DxBxxDR1 ....................................................................................................91
DxBxxDR2 ....................................................................................................92
DxBxxCR0 ....................................................................................................93
DxBxxCR0 ....................................................................................................94
DxBxxCR0 ....................................................................................................95
DxBxxCR0 ....................................................................................................96
DCBxxCR0 ....................................................................................................97
DCBxxCR0 ....................................................................................................98
DCBxxCR0 ....................................................................................................99
DCBxxCR0 ..................................................................................................100
AMX_IN ......................................................................................................101
ARF_CR .....................................................................................................102
CMP_CR0 ...................................................................................................103
ASY_CR .....................................................................................................104
CMP_CR1 ...................................................................................................105
ACBxxCR3 ..................................................................................................106
ACBxxCR0 ..................................................................................................107
ACBxxCR1 ..................................................................................................108
ACBxxCR2 ..................................................................................................109
ASCxxCR0 ..................................................................................................110
ASCxxCR1 ..................................................................................................111
ASCxxCR2 ..................................................................................................112
ASCxxCR3 ..................................................................................................113
ASDxxCR0 ..................................................................................................114
ASDxxCR1 ..................................................................................................115
ASDxxCR2 ..................................................................................................116
ASDxxCR3 ..................................................................................................117
RDIxRI ........................................................................................................118
RDIxSYN ....................................................................................................119
RDIxIS ........................................................................................................120
RDIxLT0 ......................................................................................................121
RDIxLT1 ......................................................................................................122
RDIxRO0 ...................................................................................................123
RDIxRO1 ....................................................................................................124
I2C_CFG .....................................................................................................125
I2C_SCR .....................................................................................................126
I2C_DR .......................................................................................................127
I2C_MSCR ..................................................................................................128
INT_CLR0 ...................................................................................................129
INT_CLR1 ...................................................................................................131
INT_CLR3 ...................................................................................................132
INT_MSK3 ..................................................................................................133
INT_MSK0 ..................................................................................................134
INT_MSK1 ..................................................................................................135
INT_VC .......................................................................................................136
RES_WDT ..................................................................................................137
DEC_DH .....................................................................................................138
DEC_DL ......................................................................................................139
DEC_CR0 ...................................................................................................140
DEC_CR1 ...................................................................................................141
CPU_F ........................................................................................................142
CPU_SCR1 .................................................................................................143
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2
Contents
13.1.58 CPU_SCR0 .................................................................................................144
Bank 1 Registers................................................................................................................145
13.2.1
PRTxDM0 ....................................................................................................145
13.2.2
PRTxDM1 ....................................................................................................146
13.2.3
PRTxIC0 ......................................................................................................147
13.2.4
PRTxIC1 ......................................................................................................148
13.2.5
DxBxxFN .....................................................................................................149
13.2.6
DxBxxIN ......................................................................................................151
13.2.7
DxBxxOU ....................................................................................................152
13.2.8
CLK_CR0 ....................................................................................................154
13.2.9
CLK_CR1 ....................................................................................................155
13.2.10 ABF_CR0 ....................................................................................................156
13.2.11
AMD_CR1 .................................................................................................157
13.2.12 ALT_CR0 ....................................................................................................158
13.2.13 GDI_O_IN ...................................................................................................159
13.2.14 GDI_E_IN ....................................................................................................160
13.2.15 GDI_O_OU ..................................................................................................161
13.2.16 GDI_E_OU ..................................................................................................162
13.2.17 OSC_CR4 ...................................................................................................163
13.2.18 OSC_CR3 ...................................................................................................164
13.2.19 OSC_CR0 ...................................................................................................165
13.2.20 OSC_CR1 ...................................................................................................166
13.2.21 OSC_CR2 ...................................................................................................167
13.2.22 VLT_CR ......................................................................................................168
13.2.23 VLT_CMP ....................................................................................................169
13.2.24 IMO_TR .......................................................................................................170
13.2.25 ILO_TR ........................................................................................................171
13.2.26 BDG_TR ......................................................................................................172
13.2.27 ECO_TR ......................................................................................................173
SECTION D DIGITAL SYSTEM
175
Top-Level Digital Architecture ........................................................................................................175
Digital Register Summary ..............................................................................................................176
14. Global Digital Interconnect (GDI) .......................................................................... 177
14.1
14.2
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................177
Register Definitions ............................................................................................................179
14.2.1
GDI_O_IN and GDI_E_IN Registers............................................................179
14.2.2
GDI_O_OU and GDI_E_OU Registers ........................................................179
15. Array Digital Interconnect (ADI) ............................................................................ 181
15.1
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................181
16. Row Digital Interconnect (RDI) .............................................................................. 183
16.1
16.2
16.3
December 22, 2003
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................183
Register Definitions ............................................................................................................186
16.2.1
RDIxRI Register ...........................................................................................186
16.2.2
RDIxSYN Register .......................................................................................186
16.2.3
RDIxIS Register ...........................................................................................186
16.2.4
RDIxLTx Registers .......................................................................................187
16.2.5
RDIxROx Registers......................................................................................187
Timing Diagram .................................................................................................................187
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
7
Contents
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17. Digital Blocks ....................................................................................................... 189
17.1
17.2
17.3
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................189
17.1.1
Input Multiplexers.........................................................................................189
17.1.2
Input Clock Resynchronization ....................................................................190
17.1.3
Output De-Multiplexers ................................................................................191
17.1.4
Block Chaining Signals ................................................................................191
17.1.5
Timer Function .............................................................................................192
17.1.6
Counter Function .........................................................................................192
17.1.7
Dead Band Function ....................................................................................193
17.1.8
CRCPRS Function .......................................................................................194
17.1.9
SPI Protocol Function ..................................................................................195
17.1.10 SPI Master Function ....................................................................................196
17.1.11 SPI Slave Function ......................................................................................196
17.1.12 Asynchronous Transmitter Function ............................................................197
17.1.13 Asynchronous Receiver Function ................................................................197
Register Definitions............................................................................................................198
17.2.1
DxBxxDRx Registers ...................................................................................198
17.2.2
DxBxxCR0 Register .....................................................................................203
17.2.3
INT_MSK1 Register .....................................................................................203
17.2.4
DxBxxFN Registers......................................................................................203
17.2.5
DxBxxIN Registers.......................................................................................204
17.2.6
DxBxxOU Registers .....................................................................................204
Timing Diagrams................................................................................................................204
17.3.1
Timer Timing ................................................................................................205
17.3.2
Counter Timing ............................................................................................206
17.3.3
Dead Band Timing .......................................................................................206
17.3.4
CRCPRS Timing ..........................................................................................208
17.3.5
SPI Mode Timing .........................................................................................208
17.3.6
SPIM Timing ................................................................................................209
17.3.7
SPIS Timing .................................................................................................212
17.3.8
Transmitter Timing .......................................................................................215
17.3.9
Receiver Timing ...........................................................................................216
SECTION E ANALOG SYSTEM
219
Top-Level Analog Architecture ......................................................................................................219
Analog Register Summary .............................................................................................................221
18. Analog Interface ................................................................................................... 223
18.1
18.2
8
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................223
18.1.1
Analog Data Bus Interface ...........................................................................223
18.1.2
Analog Comparator Bus Interface................................................................223
18.1.3
Analog Column Clock Generation................................................................225
18.1.4
Decimator and Incremental ADC Interface ..................................................226
18.1.5
Analog Modulator Interface (Mod Bits) ........................................................226
18.1.6
Analog Synchronization Interface (Stalling) .................................................226
18.1.7
SAR Hardware Acceleration ........................................................................226
Register Definitions............................................................................................................228
18.2.1
CMP_CR0 Register .....................................................................................228
18.2.2
CMP_CR1 Register .....................................................................................228
18.2.3
ASY_CR Register ........................................................................................228
18.2.4
DEC_CR0 Register......................................................................................229
18.2.5
DEC_CR1 Register......................................................................................229
18.2.6
CLK_CR0 Register ......................................................................................230
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
18.2.7
18.2.8
18.2.9
Contents
CLK_CR1 Register.......................................................................................230
AMD_CR1 Register......................................................................................230
ALT_CR0 Register .......................................................................................230
19. Analog Array ........................................................................................................ 231
19.1
19.2
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................231
19.1.1
Analog Comparator Bus...............................................................................233
Temperature Sensing Capability........................................................................................233
20. Analog Input Configuration ................................................................................... 235
20.1
20.2
Register Definitions ............................................................................................................235
20.1.1
AMX_IN Register .........................................................................................235
20.1.2
ABF_CR0 Register.......................................................................................235
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................236
21. Analog Reference ................................................................................................. 237
21.1
21.2
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................237
Register Definitions ............................................................................................................238
21.2.1
ARF_CR Register ........................................................................................238
22. Switched Capacitor Block ..................................................................................... 239
22.1
22.2
22.3
Architectural Description ...................................................................................................240
Application Description.......................................................................................................241
Register Definitions ............................................................................................................241
22.3.1
ASCxxCR0 Register.....................................................................................242
22.3.2
ASCxxCR1 Register.....................................................................................242
22.3.3
ASCxxCR2 Register.....................................................................................242
22.3.4
ASCxxCR3 Register.....................................................................................243
22.3.5
ASDxxCR0 Register.....................................................................................243
22.3.6
ASDxxCR1 Register.....................................................................................243
22.3.7
ASDxxCR2 Register.....................................................................................243
22.3.8
ASDxxCR3 Register.....................................................................................244
23. Continuous Time Block ......................................................................................... 245
23.1
23.2
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................245
Register Definitions ............................................................................................................247
23.2.1
ACBxxCR0 Register.....................................................................................247
23.2.2
ACBxxCR1 Register.....................................................................................247
23.2.3
ACBxxCR2 Register.....................................................................................247
23.2.4
ACBxxCR3 Register.....................................................................................247
SECTION F SYSTEM RESOURCES
251
Top-Level System Resources Architecture ....................................................................................251
System Resources Register Summary ..........................................................................................252
24. Digital Clocks ....................................................................................................... 253
24.1
December 22, 2003
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................253
24.1.1
Internal Main Oscillator ................................................................................253
24.1.2
Internal Low Speed Oscillator ......................................................................254
24.1.3
32 kHz Crystal Oscillator..............................................................................254
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
9
Contents
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
24.2
24.1.4
External Clock..............................................................................................254
Register Definitions............................................................................................................256
24.2.1
INT_CLR0 Register......................................................................................256
24.2.2
INT_MSK0 Register .....................................................................................256
24.2.3
OSC_CR0 Register......................................................................................256
24.2.4
OSC_CR1 Register......................................................................................257
24.2.5
OSC_CR2 Register......................................................................................257
24.2.6
OSC_CR3 Register......................................................................................258
24.2.7
OSC_CR4 Register......................................................................................258
25. Decimator ............................................................................................................ 259
25.1
25.2
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................259
Register Definitions............................................................................................................259
25.2.1
DEC_DH Register........................................................................................259
25.2.2
DEC_DL Register ........................................................................................260
25.2.3
DEC_CR0 Register......................................................................................260
25.2.4
DEC_CR1 Register......................................................................................260
26. I2C ....................................................................................................................... 261
26.1
26.2
26.3
26.4
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................261
26.1.1
Basic I2C Data Transfer...............................................................................261
Application Description ......................................................................................................263
26.2.1
Slave Operation ...........................................................................................263
26.2.2
Master Operation .........................................................................................264
Register Definitions............................................................................................................265
26.3.1
I2C_CFG Register .......................................................................................265
26.3.2
I2C_SCR Register .......................................................................................267
26.3.3
I2C_DR Register..........................................................................................269
26.3.4
I2C_MSCR Register ....................................................................................269
Timing Diagrams................................................................................................................270
26.4.1
Clock Generation .........................................................................................270
26.4.2
Enable and Command Synchronization.......................................................271
26.4.3
Basic Input/Output Timing............................................................................271
26.4.4
Status Timing ...............................................................................................272
26.4.5
Master Start Timing ......................................................................................273
26.4.6
Master Restart Timing .................................................................................274
26.4.7
Master Stop Timing ......................................................................................274
26.4.8
Master/Slave Stall Timing ............................................................................275
26.4.9
Master Lost Arbitration Timing .....................................................................275
26.4.10 Master Clock Synchronization .....................................................................276
27. POR and LVD ...................................................................................................... 277
27.1
27.2
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................277
Register Definitions............................................................................................................277
27.2.1
VLT_CR Register .........................................................................................277
27.2.2
VLT_CMP Register ......................................................................................277
28. Internal Voltage Reference ................................................................................... 279
28.1
28.2
10
Architectural Description ....................................................................................................279
Register Definitions............................................................................................................279
28.2.1
BDG_TR Register ........................................................................................279
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Contents
29. System Resets ..................................................................................................... 281
29.1
29.2
29.3
Register Definitions ............................................................................................................281
29.1.1
CPU_SCR0 Register....................................................................................281
29.1.2
CPU_SCR1 Register....................................................................................282
Timing Diagrams ................................................................................................................282
29.2.1
Power On Reset (POR)................................................................................282
29.2.2
External Reset (XRES) ................................................................................282
29.2.3
Watchdog Timer Reset (WDR).....................................................................282
29.2.4
Reset Details ................................................................................................284
Power Consumption...........................................................................................................285
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
287
Absolute Maximum Ratings .........................................................................................................288
Operating Temperature ................................................................................................................288
DC Electrical Characteristics ..........................................................................................................289
DC Chip-Level Specifications ............................................................................................289
DC General Purpose IO (GPIO) Specifications ................................................................289
DC Operational Amplifier Specifications ...........................................................................290
DC Analog Output Buffer Specifications ...........................................................................292
DC Analog Reference Specifications ................................................................................293
DC Analog PSoC Block Specifications .............................................................................293
DC POR and LVD Specifications ......................................................................................294
DC Programming Specifications .......................................................................................295
AC Electrical Characteristics ..........................................................................................................296
AC Chip-Level Specifications ............................................................................................296
AC General Purpose IO (GPIO) Specifications .................................................................296
AC Operational Amplifier Specifications ...........................................................................297
AC Digital Block Specifications .........................................................................................299
AC Analog Output Buffer Specifications ...........................................................................300
AC External Clock Specifications ......................................................................................301
AC Programming Specifications .......................................................................................301
AC I2C Specifications .......................................................................................................302
SECTION H REVISION HISTORY
December 22, 2003
303
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
11
Contents
12
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
SECTION A OVERVIEW
The PSoC™ family consists of many Mixed Signal Array with On-Chip Controller devices. These devices are designed to
replace multiple traditional MCU-based system components with one, low cost single-chip programmable component. A
PSoC device includes configurable blocks of analog and digital logic, as well as programmable interconnect. This architecture
allows the user to create customized peripheral configurations, to match the requirements of each individual application. Additionally, a fast CPU, Flash program memory, SRAM data memory, and configurable IO are included in a range of convenient
pin-outs.
The Overview section discusses the Features, Getting Started, Top-Level Architecture, Development Tools, User Modules
and Development Process, along with Ordering Information. It also lists the Conventions used in this document. This section
encompasses the following chapters:
■
Pin Information on page 23
■
Packaging Information on page 27
Features
■
Powerful Harvard Architecture Processor
–M8C Processor Speeds to 24 MHz
–Low Power at High Speed
–3.0 to 5.25 V Operating Voltage
–Industrial Temperature Range: –40°C to
+85°C
■
Precision, Programmable Clocking
–Internal ±2.5% 24/48 MHz Oscillator
–High Accuracy 24 MHz with Optional 32 kHz
Crystal and PLL
–Optional External Oscillator, up to 24 MHz
–Internal Oscillator for Watchdog and Sleep
■
Advanced Peripherals (PSoC Blocks)
–3 Rail-to-Rail Analog PSoC Blocks Provide:
— —Up to 14-Bit ADCs
— —Up to 8-Bit DACs
— —Programmable Gain Amplifiers
— —Programmable Filters and Comparators
–4 Digital PSoC Blocks Provide:
— —8- to 32-Bit Timers, Counters and PWMs
— —CRC and PRS Modules
— —Full-Duplex UART
— —SPI Masters or Slaves
— —Connectable to all GPIO Pins
–Complex Peripherals by Combining Blocks
■
Programmable Pin Configurations
–25 mA Drive on all GPIO
–Pull up, Pull down, High Z, Strong, or Open
Drain Drive Modes on all GPIO
–Up to 8 Analog Inputs on GPIO
–One 30 mA Analog Output on GPIO
–Configurable Interrupt on all GPIO
■
Additional System Resources
■
Flexible On-Chip Memory
–2K Bytes Flash Program Storage
50,000 Erase/Write Cycles
–256 Bytes SRAM Data Storage
–In-System Serial Programming (ISSP)
–Partial Flash Updates
–Flexible Protection Modes
–EEPROM Emulation in Flash
December 22, 2003
–I2C Slave, Master, and Multi-Master to
400 kHz
–Watchdog and Sleep Timers
–User-Configurable Low Voltage Detection
–Integrated Supervisory Circuit
–On-Chip Precision Voltage Reference
■
Complete Development Tools
–Free Development Software (PSoC
Designer)
–Full-Featured, In-Circuit Emulator and
Programmer:
Full-Speed Emulation
Complex Breakpoint Structure
128K Bytes Trace Memory
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
13
SECTION A OVERVIEW
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Getting Started
The quickest path to understanding the PSoC silicon is through the PSoC Designer software GUI. This data sheet is useful for
understanding the details of the PSoC integrated circuit, but is not a good starting point for a new PSoC developer seeking to
get a general overview of this new technology.
PSoC developers are not required to build their own ADCs, DACs, and other peripherals. Embedded in the PSoC Designer
software are the individual data sheets, performance graphs, and PSoC User Modules (graphically selected code packets) for
the peripherals, such as the incremental ADCs, DACs, LCD controllers, op amps, low-pass filters, etc. With simple GUI-based
selection, placement, and connection, the basic architecture of a design may be developed within PSoC Designer software
without ever writing a single line of code.
Development Kits
Development Kits are available from the following distributors: Digi-Key, Avnet, Arrow, and Future. The online store at
Cypress.com (http://www.onfulfillment.com/cypressstore/) contains development kits, C compilers, and all accessories for
PSoC development. Go to the Online Store web site and click on PSoC (Programmable System-on-Chip) to view a current list
of available items.
Tele-Training
PSoC "Tele-training" is available for beginners and is taught by a live marketing or application engineer over the phone.
Please see http://www.cypress.com/support/training.cfm for more details. Five training classes are available to accelerate the
learning curve including introduction, designing, debugging, advanced design, advanced analog, as well as application-specific classes covering topics like PSoC and the LIN bus.
Consultants
Certified PSoC Consultants offer everything from technical assistance to completed PSoC designs. To contact or become a
PSoC Consultant go to the following web site, http://www.cypress.com/support/cypros.cfm.
Technical Support
PSoC application engineers take pride in fast and accurate response. They can be reached with a 4-hour guaranteed
response at http://www.cypress.com/support/login.cfm.
Application Notes
A long list of application notes will assist you in every aspect of your design effort. Go to http://www.cypress.com/design/
results.cfm to locate the PSoC application notes.
14
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION A OVERVIEW
Top-Level Architecture
The figure below illustrates the top-level architecture of the PSoC CY8C22xxx.
SYSTEM BUS
Port 1
Port 0
Analog
Drivers
Global Digital Interconnect
Global Analog Interconnect
PSoC CORE
Supervisory ROM (SROM)
SRAM
Flash Nonvolatile Memory
CPU Core (M8C)
Interrupt
Controller
24 MHz Internal Main
Oscillator (IMO)
Sleep and
Watchdog
Internal Low Speed
Oscillator (ILO)
32 kHz Crystal
Oscillator (ECO)
Phased Locked Loop (PLL)
DIGITAL SYSTEM
ANALOG SYSTEM
Digital PSoC
Block Array
DB
DB
DC
Analog PSoC
Block Array
Analog
Refs
CT
Analog
Input
Muxing
DC
SC
SC
Digital Row
Digital
Clocks
Decimator
Analog Column
I2C
POR and LVD
System Resets
Internal
Voltage
Reference
SYSTEM RESOURCES
PSoC CY8C22xxx Top-Level Block Diagram
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
15
SECTION A OVERVIEW
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Development Tools
The Cypress MicroSystems PSoC Designer is a Microsoft®
Windows-based, integrated development environment for
the Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC) devices. The
PSoC Designer runs on Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows Millennium (Me), or Windows XP.
(Reference the PSoC Designer Functional Flow diagram
below.)
the PSoC, and debug the application. This system provides
design database management by project, an integrated
debugger with In-Circuit Emulator, in-system programming
support, and the CYASM macro assembler for the CPUs.
PSoC Designer also supports a high-level C language compiler developed specifically for the devices in the family.
PSoC Designer helps the customer to select an operating
configuration for the PSoC, write application code that uses
Context Sensitive Help
Results
Commands
Graphical Designer Interface
Importable Design Database
Device Database
PSoC Configuration Sheet
PSoCTM
Application Database
Project Database
Manufacturing Information File
User Modules Database
Emulation Pod
In-Circuit Emulator
Device Programmer
PSoC Designer Subsystems
PSoC Designer Software Subsystems
Device Editor
PSoC Designer has several main functions. In the Design
Editor you can easily configure a design and APIs are automatically generated for the user modules. The Device Editor
subsystem allows the user to select different onboard analog and digital components called user modules using the
PSoC blocks. Examples of user modules are ADCs, DACs,
Amplifiers, and Filters.
The device editor also supports easy development of multiple configurations and dynamic reconfiguration. Dynamic
configuration allows for changing configuration at run time.
16
PSoC Designer sets up power-on initialization tables for
selected PSoC block configurations and creates source
code for an application framework. The framework contains
software to operate the selected components and, if the
project uses more than one operating configuration, contains routines to switch between different sets of PSoC block
configurations at runtime. PSoC Designer can print out a
configuration sheet for given project configuration for use
during application programming in conjunction with the
Device Data Sheet. Once the framework is generated, the
user can add application-specific code to flesh out the
framework. It’s also possible to change the selected components and regenerate the framework.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION A OVERVIEW
Design Browser
Online Help System
The Design Browser allows users to select and import preconfigured designs into the user’s project. User’s can easily
browse a catalog of preconfigured designs to facilitate timeto-design. Recent examples provided in the tools include a
300-baud modem, Lin Bus master and slave, fan controller,
and magnetic card reader.
The online help system displays online, context-sensitive
help for the user. Designed for procedural and quick reference, each functional subsystem has its own context-sensitive help. This system also provides tutorials and links to
FAQs and an Online Support Forum to aid the designer in
getting started.
Application Editor
Hardware Tools
In the Application Editor you can edit your C language and
Assembly language source code. You can also assemble,
compile, link, and build.
In-Circuit Emulator
Assembler. The macro assembler allows the assembly
code to be merged seamlessly with C code. The link libraries automatically use absolute addressing or can be compiled in relative mode, and linked with other software
modules to get absolute addressing.
C Language Compiler. An ANSI C language compiler supports Cypress MicroSystems’ PSoC family devices (except
for 64-bit doubles). Even if you have never worked in the C
language before, the product quickly allows you to create
complete C programs for the PSoC family devices.
A low cost, high functionality ICE (In-Circuit Emulator) is
available for development support. This hardware has the
capability to program single devices.
The emulation consists of a base unit that connects to the
PC by way of the parallel port. The base unit is universal
and will operate with all PSoC devices. Emulation pods for
each device family are available separately. The emulation
pod takes the place of the PSoC device in the target board
and performs full speed (24 MHz) operation.
The embedded, optimizing C compiler provides all the features of C tailored to the PSoC architecture. It comes complete with embedded libraries providing port and bus
operations, standard keypad and display support, and
extended math functionality.
Debugger
The PSoC Designer Debugger subsystem provides hardware in-circuit emulation, allowing the designer to test the
program in a physical system while providing an internal
view of the PSoC device. Debugger commands allow the
designer to read and write program and data memory, read
and write IO registers, read and write CPU registers, set and
clear breakpoints, and provide program run, halt, and step
control. The debugger also allows the designer to create a
trace buffer of registers and memory locations of interest.
PSoC Development Tool Kit
User Modules and Development Process
The development process for the PSoC is different than a
traditional fixed function microcontroller. The flexibility of the
PSoC architecture comes from configurable analog and digital hardware blocks called PSoC Blocks. These blocks have
the capability to implement a wide variety of user selectable
functions. Each block has several registers that allow you to
select the function. These registers also determine the interconnections between this block and other blocks, as well as
the connection to the I/O pins (reference the figure below).
To make the entire development process of your project
easier, the PSoC Designer Integrated Development Environment (IDE) has libraries of open source code software
modules, called “User Modules,” that simplify the configura-
December 22, 2003
tion process. These user modules have been created to
make selecting and implementing peripheral functions very
easy. User modules come in analog, digital, and mixed signal varieties. Each user module contains all the register settings to implement the selected function and also contains
Application Programmer Interface (API) software to make
the interface to your source code simple.
The development process starts when you open a new
project. You than pick a set of user modules, as the basis of
the custom configuration for that project. You can view the
details of all the available user modules inside the development software and pick the user modules that are perfect for
your application. You then must assign each of these user
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
17
SECTION A OVERVIEW
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
modules to hardware resources. You also make the interconnections between the user modules, and between the
user modules and the I/O pins. This process step takes
place in the Device Editor subsystem within PSoC Designer.
There are two views inside this step: one for selecting user
modules and one for assigning them to the hardware blocks
and interconnecting them. The last action in this step is to
“Generate Application,” which causes the development software to automatically generate the required files for the
selected configuration.
Device Editor
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Browse libraries of User Module
View datasheets for User
Modules
Select individual User Modules
to add to configuration
Calculate resource requirements
for slected User Modules
User Module
Selection View
Assign User Modules to
Hardware PSoC Blocks
Make interconnections between
User Modules
Make interconnections to device
pins
User Module
Placement View
"Generate
Application"
Application Editor
!
!
!
!
Edit source code files written in
C and Assembly language
Assemble/Compile
See breakpoints
"Make" function for generation of
enitre project including subfiles
Source Code
Editor
"Make" Automatic Object
Code Generation
!
!
!
!
!
Interface to In-Circuit Emulator
for debug
Define complex break events
Enable trace capability
View contents of program/
register/ram space
Run/stop/step program
Debugger
Interface
to
In-Circuit Emulator
User Modules and Development Process Flow Chart
The next step in the process is to write your main program,
and any other sub-routines required by your application.
This step takes place in the Application Editor subsystem.
You will have all the subroutines automatically generated for
the user modules you have chosen and the source code for
these routines can be viewed in this step as well. The different files created for the project are all contained in a tree
structure for easy reference. The development software has
18
a handy “Make” function, which assembles and compiles all
source files, and links them into an object file ready for the
debugging process.
The last step in development takes place in the Debugger
subsystem. This is where the object code is downloaded
into the In-Circuit Emulator and run. The Debugger is both
the interface to the ICE and also contains an advanced set
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION A OVERVIEW
of tools for finding and removing bugs from your software.
Some of the capabilities of the tools are full-speed emula-
tion, defining complex breakpoint events, and a large trace
memory.
Ordering Information
The following table lists the PSoC Device family’s key features and ordering codes.
-40C to +85C
4
3
8 Pin (150 Mil) SOIC
CY8C22113-24SI
2
256
No
-40C to +85C
4
20 Pin (300 Mil) DIP
CY8C22213-24PI
2
256
No
-40C to +85C
4
20 Pin (210 Mil) SSOP
CY8C22213-24PVI
2
256
No
-40C to +85C
20 Pin (210 Mil) SSOP
(Tape and Reel)
CY8C22213-24PVIT
2
256
No
20 Pin (300 Mil) SOIC
CY8C22213-24SI
2
256
20 Pin (300 Mil) SOIC
(Tape and Reel)
CY8C22213-24SIT
2
32 Pin (5x5 mm) MLF
CY8C22213-24LFI
2
December 22, 2003
4
1
No
3
6
4
1
No
3
16
8
1
Yes
4
3
16
8
1
Yes
-40C to +85C
4
3
16
8
1
Yes
No
-40C to +85C
4
3
16
8
1
Yes
256
No
-40C to +85C
4
3
16
8
1
Yes
256
No
-40C to +85C
4
3
16
8
1
Yes
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
(Columns of 3)
6
(Rows of 4)
XRES Pin
No
Analog Outputs
256
Analog Inputs
Temperature Range
2
Digital IO Pins
Switch Mode Pump
Analog PSoC Blocks
RAM (Bytes)
CY8C22113-24PI
Ordering Code
8 Pin (300 Mil) DIP
Package
Flash (Kbytes)
Digital PSoC Blocks
PSoC Device Family Key Features
19
SECTION A OVERVIEW
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Organization and Conventions
Document Organization
Units of Measure
This document is organized into the following sections:
The following table lists the units of measure used in this
document.
■
Overview
■
Architecture
■
Registers
■
Symbol
Units of Measure
oC
degree Celsius
Digital System
AC
alternating current
■
Analog System
dB
decibels
■
System Resources
DC
direct current
■
Electrical Specifications
fF
femto Farad
■
Revision History
Hz
hertz
Each section and its associated chapters is organized
according to PSoC functionality. If applicable, all chapters
have a brief introduction, an architectural/application
description, register definitions, and timing diagrams. The
last section, Electrical Specifications, has no chapters associated with it and presents the PSoC device’s electrical
specifications. The Revision History section chronologically
lists the document’s history.
k
kilo, 1000
K
210, 1024
KB
1024 bytes
Kbit
1024 bits
kHz
kilohertz
kΩ
kilohm
MHz
megahertz
MΩ
megaohm
Document Conventions
µA
microampere
µs
microsecond
Register Conventions
µV
microvolts
The following table lists the register conventions that are
specific to this document.
Convention
Example
‘x’ in a register
name
ACBxxCR1
µVrms
microvolts root-mean-square
mA
milliampere
ms
millisecond
mV
millivolts
Multiple instances/address ranges of the
same register.
nA
nanoamphere
nanosecond
Description
RW
RW:00
Read and write register or bit(s)
ns
R
R:00
Read register or bit(s)
nV
nanovolts
W
W:00
Write register or bit(s)
Ω
ohm
L
RL:00
Logical register or bit(s)
pF
pico Farad
C
RC:00
Clearable register or bit(s)
pp
peak-to-peak
00
RW:00
Reset value is 0x00
XX
RW:XX
Register is not reset
0,
0,04h
Register is in bank 0
1,
1, 23h
Register is in bank 1
x,
x,F7h
Empty, grayedout table cell
Register exists in register bank 0 and register bank 1
ppm
parts per million
sps
samples per second
σ
sigma: one standard deviation
V
volts
Reserved bit or group of bits, unless otherwise stated.
Numeric Naming
Hexidecimal numbers are represented with all letters in
uppercase with an appended lowercase ‘h’ (for example,
‘14h’ or ‘3Ah’). Hexidecimal numbers may also be represented by a ‘0x’ prefix, the C coding convention. Binary
numbers have an appended lowercase ‘b’ (for example,
01010100b’ or ‘01000011b’). Numbers not indicated by an
‘h’ or ‘b’ are decimal.
20
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION A OVERVIEW
Acronyms Used
The following table lists the acronyms that are used in this
document.
Acronym
AC
AI
API
APOR
BC
CMRR
CPU
CRC
CT
DAC
DC
DNL
DO
ECO
Description
alternating current
analog input
application programming interface
analog power on reset
broadcast clock
common mode rejection ratio
central processing unit
cyclic redundancy check
continuous time
digital-to-analog converter
direct current
differential nonlinearity
digital or data output
external crystal oscillator
EEPROM
electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
FB
feedback
FSR
full scale range
GIE
global interrupt enable
GPIO
general purpose IO
ICE
in-circuit emulator
IDE
integrated development environment
ILO
internal low speed oscillator
INL
integral nonlinearity
IO
input/output
IOW
IO write
IPOR
imprecise power on reset
IRA
interrupt request acknowledge
IRQ
interrupt request
ISR
interrupt service routine
ISSP
in-circuit system serial programming
IVR
interrupt vector read
LFSR
linear feedback shift register
LPF
low pass filter
LSB
least-significant bit
LUT
lookup table
MISO
master-in-slave-out
MOSI
master-out-slave-in
MSB
most-significant bit
PC
program counter
PD
power down
PDDSC
power system sleep duty cycle
PGA
programmable gain amplifier
POR
power on reset
PPOR
precision power on reset
PRS
pseudo random sequence
PSoC™
Programmable System-on-Chip
PSRR
power supply rejection ratio
PVT
process voltage temperature
PWM
pulse width modulator
December 22, 2003
Acronym
Description
RAM
random access memory
RAS
ROM access strobe
RETI
return from interrupt
RI
row input
RO
row output
ROM
read only memory
SAR
successive approximation register
SC
switched capacitor
SNR
signal-to-noise ratio
SOI
start of instruction
SP
stack pointer
SPD
sequential phase detector
SPI
serial peripheral interconnect
TC
terminal count
VCO
voltage controlled oscillator
WDT
watchdog timer
WDR
watchdog reset
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
21
SECTION A OVERVIEW
22
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
1.
Pin Information
This chapter lists, describes, and illustrates the PSoC device pins and pinouts. Table 1-1 presents a summary of the device
pins, and the following tables and illustrations detail a representation of the device’s pinouts.
1.1
Pin Summary
Table 1-1. PSoC Device Pin Descriptions
Pin Name
Description
Input/Output
Vdd
Supply Voltage
Power
Vss
Ground
Power
XRES
External Reset (Active High)
Input
P0[0] – P0[4]
Port 0[0], 0[1], 0[2], 0[3], 0[4], Analog Input
Input/Output
P0[5]
Port 0[5], Analog Input/Output
Input/Output
P0[6] – P0[7]
Port 0[6], 0[7], Analog Input
Input/Output
P1[0]
Port 1[0], XTALOut/SDATA /
P1[1]
Port 1[1], XTALIn/SCLK / I2C SCL
Input/Output
P1[2]
Port 1[2]
Input/Output
P1[3]
Port 1[3]
Input/Output
P1[4]
Port 1[4], EXTCLK
P1[5]
Port 1[5],
P1[6]
Port 1[6]
P1[7]
Port 1[7],
December 22, 2003
I2C
I2C
SDA
Input/Output
Input/Output
Input/Output
SDA
Input/Output
I2C
Input/Output
SCL
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
23
1. Pin Information
1.2
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Pinouts
The PSoC devices are available in a variety of packages. Refer to the following information for details on individual devices.
Note that every port pin (labeled with a “P”), except for Vss, Vdd, and XRES in the following tables and illustrations, is capable
of Digital IO.
Table 1-2. 8-Pin Part Pinout (PDIP, SOIC)
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Description
Description
Pin
No.
Description
1
P0[5], A in, out
4
Vss
7
P0[4], A in
2
P0[3], A in
5
P1[0], XTALout, I2C SDA
8
Vdd
3
P1[1], XTALin, I2C SCL
6
P0[2], A in
LEGEND A: analog, D: digital, IO: input or output.
AIO, P0[5]
AI, P0[3]
I2C SCL, XTALin, P1[1]
Vss
1
2
3
4
PDIP / SOIC
Vdd
P0[4], AI
P0[2], AI
P1[0], XTALout, I2C SDA
8
7
6
5
Table 1-3. 20-Pin Part Pinout (PDIP, SSOP, SOIC)
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Description
Description
Pin
No.
Description
1
P0[7], A in
8
P1[3]
15
XRES
2
P0[5], A in, out
9
P1[1], XTALin, I2C SCL
16
P0[0], A in
3
P0[3], A in
10
Vss
17
P0[2], A in
4
P0[1], A in
11
P1[0], XTALout, I2C SDA
18
P0[4], A in
5
Vss
12
P1[2]
19
P0[6], A in
6
P1[7], I2C SCL
13
P1[4], EXTCLK
20
Vdd
14
P1[6]
7
P1[5],
I2C
SDA
LEGEND A: analog, D: digital, IO: input or output.
AI, P0[7]
AIO, P0[5]
AI, P0[3]
AI, P0[1]
Vss
I2C SCL, P1[7]
I2C SDA, P1[5]
P1[3]
I2C SCL, XTALin, P1[1]
Vss
24
1
2
3
4
5
PDIP / SSOP /
6
SOIC
7
8
9
10
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
Vdd
P0[6], AI
P0[4], AI
P0[2], AI
P0[0], AI
XRES
P1[6]
P1[4], EXTCLK
P1[2]
P1[0], XTALout, I2C SDA
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
1. Pin Information
Table 1-4. 32-Pin Part Pinout (MLF)
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Description
Description
Pin
No.
Description
1
NC
12
Vss
23
P0[0], A in
2
NC
13
P1[0], XTALout, I2C SDA
24
P0[2], A in
3
NC
14
P1[2]
25
NC
4
NC
15
P1[4], EXTCLK
26
P0[4], A in
5
Vss
16
NC
27
P0[6], A in
6
NC
17
P1[6]
28
Vdd
7
P1[7], I2C SCL
18
XRES
29
P0[7], A in
8
2
P1[5], I C SDA
19
NC
30
P0[5], A in, out
9
NC
20
NC
31
P0[3], A in
10
P1[3]
21
NC
32
P0[1], A in
22
NC
11
2
P1[1], XTALin, I C SCL
LEGEND A: analog, D: digital, IO: input or output, NC: no connection.
P0[3] AI
P0[5] AIO
P0[7] AI
Vdd
P0[6] AI
P0[4] AI
NC
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
P0[1] AI
Note The MLF package has a center pad that must be connected to the same ground as the Vss pin.
MLF
(Top View)
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P0[2] AI
P0[0] AI
NC
NC
NC
NC
XRES
P1[6]
NC
P1[3]
XTALin, I2C SCL P1[1]
Vss
XTALout, I2C SDA P1[0]
P1[2]
EXTCLK P1[4]
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Vss
NC
I2C SCL P1[7]
I2C SDA P1[5]
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
25
1. Pin Information
26
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
2.
Packaging Information
This chapter presents and illustrates the packaging specifications for the PSoC device, along with the thermal impedances for
each package.
2.1
Packaging Dimensions
51-85075 *A
Figure 2-1. 8-Lead (300-Mil) PDIP
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
27
2. Packaging Information
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
51-85066 *B
Figure 2-2. 8-Lead (150-Mil) SOIC
51-85011-A
Figure 2-3. 20-Lead (300-Mil) Molded DIP
28
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
2. Packaging Information
51-85077 *C
Figure 2-4. 20-Lead (210-Mil) SSOP
51-85024 *B
Figure 2-5. 20-Lead (300-Mil) Molded SOIC
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
29
2. Packaging Information
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
X = 138 MIL
Y = 138 MIL
32
51-85188 **
Figure 2-6. 32-Lead (5x5 mm) MLF
2.2
Thermal Impedances
Table 2-1. Thermal Impedances per Package
30
Package
Typical ΘJA
8 PDIP
123 oC/W
8 SOIC
185oC/W
20 PDIP
109 oC/W
20 SSOP
117 oC/W
20 SOIC
81 oC/W
32 MLF
22 oC/W
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
SECTION B
CORE ARCHITECTURE
The Architecture section discusses the core components of the PSoC device and the registers associated with those components. This section encompasses the following chapters:
■
CPU Core (M8C) on page 35
■
Internal Main Oscillator (IMO) on page 63
■
Supervisory ROM (SROM) on page 45
■
Internal Low Speed Oscillator (ILO) on page 65
■
Interrupt Controller on page 51
■
32 kHz Crystal Oscillator (ECO) on page 67
■
General Purpose IO (GPIO) on page 55
■
Phase Locked Loop (PLL) on page 71
■
Analog Output Drivers on page 61
■
Sleep and Watchdog on page 73
Top-Level Core Architecture
The figure below displays the top-level architecture of the PSoC’s core. Each component of the figure is discussed at length
in this section.
Port 1
Port 0
Analog
Drivers
SYSTEM BUS
Supervisory ROM (SROM)
SRAM
Flash Nonvolatile Memory
CPU Core (M8C)
Interrupt
Controller
24 MHz Internal Main
Oscillator (IMO)
Internal Low Speed
Oscillator (ILO)
Sleep and
Watchdog
32 kHz Crystal
Oscillator (ECO)
Phased Locked Loop (PLL)
PSoC Core Block Diagram
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
31
SECTION B CORE ARCHITECTURE
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Core Register Summary
The table below lists all the PSoC registers that the core of the device uses.
Summary Table of the Core Registers
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
Carry
Zero
GIE
RL : 00
M8C REGISTERS
M8C Register
x,F7h
XOI
CPU_F
Related Registers
1,E0h
OSC_CR0
x,FFh
CPU_SCR0
32k Select
PLL Mode
GIES
No Buzz
WDRS
Sleep[1:0]
PORS
CPU Speed[2:0]
Sleep
RW : 00
STOP
RW : 17
IRAMDIS
RW : 00
SUPERVISORY ROM (SROM) REGISTER
x,FEh
CPU_SCR1
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER REGISTERS
0,DAh
INT_CLR0
0,DBh
INT_CLR1
VC3
0,DDh
INT_CLR3
INT_MSK3
ENSWINT
0,E0h
INT_MSK0
VC3
0,E1h
INT_MSK1
INT_VC
x,F7h
CPU_F
Analog 1
GPIO
DCB03
0,DEh
0,E2h
Sleep
Sleep
DCB02
DBB01
Analog 1
GPIO
DCB03
V Monitor
RW : 00
DBB00
RW : 00
I2C
RW : 00
I2C
RW : 00
V Monitor
RW : 00
RW : 00
DCB02
DBB01
DBB00
Carry
Zero
GIE
Pending Interrupt[7:0]
RC : 00
XOI
RL : 00
GENERAL PURPOSE IO (GPIO) REGISTERS
0,00h
PRT0DR
Data Input[7:0]
0,01h
PRT0IE
Interrupt Enables[7:0]
RW : 00
RW : 00
0,02h
PRT0GS
Global Select[7:0]
RW : 00
RW : FF
0,03h
PRT0DM2
Drive Mode 2[7:0]
1,00h
PRT0DM0
Drive Mode 0[7:0]
RW : 00
1,01h
PRT0DM1
Drive Mode 1[7:0]
RW : FF
1,02h
PRT0IC0
Interrupt Control 0[7:0]
RW : 00
1,03h
PRT0IC1
Interrupt Control 1[7:0]
RW : 00
0,04h
PRT1DR
Data Input[7:0]
RW : 00
0,05h
PRT1IE
Interrupt Enables[7:0]
RW : 00
0,06h
PRT1GS
Global Select[7:0]
RW : 00
RW : FF
0,07h
PRT1DM2
Drive Mode 2[7:0]
1,04h
PRT1DM0
Drive Mode 0[7:0]
RW : 00
1,05h
PRT1DM1
Drive Mode 1[7:0]
RW : FF
1,06h
PRT1IC0
Interrupt Control 0[7:0]
RW : 00
1,07h
PRT1IC1
Interrupt Control 1[7:0]
RW : 00
ANALOG OUTPUT DRIVER REGISTER
1,62h
ABF_CR0
ABUF1EN0
ACol1Mux
Bypass
PWR
RW : 00
INTERNAL MAIN OSCILLATOR (IMO) REGISTER
1,E8h
IMO_TR
Trim[7:0]
W : 00
INTERNAL LOW SPEED OSCILLATOR (ILO) REGISTER
1,E9h
Bias Trim[1:0]
ILO_TR
Freq Trim[3:0]
W : 00
32 kHz CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR (ECO) REGISTER
1,E0h
OSC_CR0
1,EBh
ECO_TR
x,FEh
CPU_SCR1
32k Select
PLL Mode
No Buzz
Sleep[1:0]
CPU Speed[2:0]
RW : 00
PSSDC[1:0]
W : 00
IRAMDIS
RW : 00
PHASE LOCKED LOOP (PLL) REGISTERS
1,E0h
OSC_CR0
32k Select
1,E2h
OSC_CR2
PLLGAIN
32
PLL Mode
No Buzz
Sleep[1:0]
CPU Speed[2:0]
EXTCLKEN
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
IMODIS
RW : 00
SYSCLKX2
DIS
RW : 00
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION B CORE ARCHITECTURE
Summary Table of the Core Registers (continued)
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
Analog 1
V Monitor
RW : 00
ECO EX
IRAMDIS
RW : 00
SLEEP AND WATCHDOG REGISTERS
0,E0h
INT_MSK0
0,E3h
RES_WDT
x,FEh
CPU_SCR1
1,E0h
OSC_CR0
1,E9h
ILO_TR
1,EBh
ECO_TR
x,FFh
CPU_SCR0
VC3
Sleep
GPIO
WDSL_Clear
ECO EXW
32k Select
PLL Mode
No Buzz
Sleep[1:0]
Bias Trim[1:0]
W : 00
CPU Speed[2:0]
RW : 00
Freq Trim[3:0]
W : 00
PSSDC[1:0]
GIES
W : 00
WDRS
PORS
Sleep
STOP
W : XX
LEGEND
L: The AND, OR, and XOR flag instructions can be used to modify this register.
#: Access is bit specific. Refer to register detail for additional information.
X: The value for power on reset is unknown.
x: An “x” before the comma in the address field indicates that this register can be accessed or written to no matter what bank is used.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
33
SECTION B CORE ARCHITECTURE
34
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
3.
CPU Core (M8C)
This chapter explains the CPU Core, called M8C, and its associated registers. It covers the internal M8C registers, address
spaces, instruction formats, and addressing modes. For additional information concerning the M8C instruction set, reference
the Assembly Language User Guide available at the Cypress.com web site.
Table 3-1. M8C Registers
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
Carry
Zero
GIE
RL : 00
M8C Register
x,F7h
CPU_F
XOI
Related Registers
1,E0h
OSC_CR0
x,FF
CPU_SCR0
32k Select
PLL Mode
GIES
No Buzz
WDRS
Sleep[1:0]
PORS
CPU Speed[2:0]
Sleep
RW : 00
STOP
RW : 17
LEGEND
L: The AND, OR, and XOR flag instructions can be used to modify this register.
x: An “x” before the comma in the address field indicates that this register can be accessed or written to no matter what bank is used.
The M8C is a four MIPS 8-bit Harvard architecture microprocessor. Code selectable processor clock speeds from 93.7
kHz to 24 MHz allow the M8C to be tuned to a particular
application’s performance and power requirements. The
M8C supports a rich instruction set which allows for efficient
low-level language support.
With the exception of the F register, the M8C internal registers are not accessible via an explicit register address. The
internal M8C registers are accessed using instructions such
as:
■
■
■
3.1
■
Internal Registers
■
The M8C has five internal registers that are used in program
execution. The following is a list of these registers.
■
■
■
■
■
Accumulator (A)
Index (X)
Program Counter (PC) – internal use only
Stack Pointer (SP)
Flags (F)
The F register may be read by using address F7h in either
register bank.
3.2
All of the internal M8C registers are eight bits in width except
for the PC which is 16 bits wide. Upon reset, A, X, PC, and
SP are reset to 00h. The Flag register (F) is reset to 02h,
indicating that the Z flag is set.
With each stack operation, the SP is automatically incremented or decremented so that it always points to the next
stack byte in RAM. If the last byte in the stack is at address
FFh the Stack Pointer will wrap to RAM address 00h. It is
the firmware developer’s responsibility to ensure that the
stack does not overlap with user-defined variables in RAM.
December 22, 2003
MOV A, expr
MOV X, expr
SWAP A, SP
OR F, expr
JMP LABEL
Address Spaces
The M8C has three address spaces: ROM, RAM, and registers. The ROM address space includes the supervisory
ROM (SROM) and the Flash. The ROM address space is
accessed via its own address and data bus. Figure 3-1 illustrates the arrangement of the PSoC microcontroller address
spaces.
The ROM address space is composed of the Supervisory
ROM and the on-chip Flash program store. Flash is organized into 64-byte blocks. The user need not be concerned
with program store page boundaries, as the M8C automatically increments the 16-bit PC on every instruction making
the block boundaries invisible to user code. Instructions
occurring on a 256-byte Flash page boundary (with the
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
35
3. CPU Core (M8C)
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
bit in the Flag register is set or cleared (set for Bank1,
cleared for Bank0). The common convention is to leave the
bank set to Bank0 (XIO cleared), switch to Bank1 as
needed (set XIO), then switch back to Bank0.
exception of jmp instructions) incur an extra M8C clock
cycle as the upper byte of the PC is incremented.
The register address space is used to configure the PSoC
microcontroller’s programmable blocks. It consists of two
banks of 256 bytes each. To switch between banks, the XIO
A
M8C
X
PC
SP
F
IOW
IOR
XIO
DB[7:0]
MW
MR
DA[7:0]
ID[7:0]
Registers
ROM
RAM
Bank 0
256 Bytes
PC[15:0]
Page 0
256 Bytes
SROM
Bank 1
256 Bytes
LEGEND
M: Total number of Flash blocks in device
XIO: Register bank selection
IOR: Register read
IOW: Register write
MR: Memory read
MW: Memory write
Flash
M x 64
Byte Blocks
Figure 3-1. M8C Microcontroller Address Spaces
36
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
3.3
3. CPU Core (M8C)
Instruction Set Summary
The instruction set is summarized below in Table 3-2. It is described in detail in the PSoC Designer Assembly Language User
Guide (reference the Cypress.com web site).
Table 3-2. Instruction Set Summary
Bytes
Flags
Cycles
Instruction Format
Opcode Hex
Bytes
Cycles
Flags
Opcode Hex
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode Hex
Instruction Format
Instruction Format
Flags
00 15
1 SSC
2D
8
2 OR [X+expr], A
Z
5A
5
2 MOV [expr], X
01
4
2 ADD A, expr
C, Z
2E
9
3 OR [expr], expr
Z
5B
4
1 MOV A, X
02
6
2 ADD A, [expr]
C, Z
2F 10
3 OR [X+expr], expr
Z
5C
4
1 MOV X, A
03
7
2 ADD A, [X+expr]
C, Z
30
9
1 HALT
5D
6
2 MOV A, reg[expr]
Z
04
7
2 ADD [expr], A
C, Z
31
4
2 XOR A, expr
Z
5E
7
2 MOV A, reg[X+expr]
Z
05
8
2 ADD [X+expr], A
C, Z
32
6
2 XOR A, [expr]
Z
5F 10
3 MOV [expr], [expr]
06
9
Z
3 ADD [expr], expr
C, Z
33
7
2 XOR A, [X+expr]
Z
60
5
2 MOV reg[expr], A
07 10
3 ADD [X+expr], expr
C, Z
34
7
2 XOR [expr], A
Z
61
6
2 MOV reg[X+expr], A
08
4
1 PUSH A
35
8
2 XOR [X+expr], A
Z
62
8
3 MOV reg[expr], expr
09
4
2 ADC A, expr
C, Z
36
9
3 XOR [expr], expr
Z
63
9
3 MOV reg[X+expr], expr
0A
6
2 ADC A, [expr]
C, Z
37 10
3 XOR [X+expr], expr
Z
64
4
1 ASL A
C, Z
0B
7
2 ADC A, [X+expr]
C, Z
38
5
2 ADD SP, expr
65
7
2 ASL [expr]
C, Z
0C
7
2 ADC [expr], A
C, Z
39
5
2 CMP A, expr
66
8
2 ASL [X+expr]
C, Z
0D
8
2 ADC [X+expr], A
C, Z
3A
7
2 CMP A, [expr]
67
4
1 ASR A
C, Z
0E
9
3 ADC [expr], expr
C, Z
3B
8
2 CMP A, [X+expr]
if (A=B)
Z=1
7
2 ASR [expr]
C, Z
0F 10
3 ADC [X+expr], expr
C, Z
3C
8
3 CMP [expr], expr
if (A<B)
C=1
68
69
8
2 ASR [X+expr]
C, Z
10
4
1 PUSH X
3D
9
3 CMP [X+expr], expr
6A
4
1 RLC A
C, Z
11
4
2 SUB A, expr
C, Z
3E 10
2 MVI A, [ [expr]++ ]
6B
7
2 RLC [expr]
C, Z
12
6
2 SUB A, [expr]
C, Z
3F 10
2 MVI [ [expr]++ ], A
6C
8
2 RLC [X+expr]
C, Z
13
7
2 SUB A, [X+expr]
C, Z
40
4
1 NOP
6D
4
1 RRC A
C, Z
14
7
2 SUB [expr], A
C, Z
41
9
3 AND reg[expr], expr
Z
6E
7
2 RRC [expr]
C, Z
15
8
2 SUB [X+expr], A
C, Z
42 10
3 AND reg[X+expr], expr
Z
6F
8
2 RRC [X+expr]
C, Z
16
9
3 SUB [expr], expr
C, Z
43
3 OR reg[expr], expr
Z
70
4
2 AND F, expr
C, Z
17 10
3 SUB [X+expr], expr
C, Z
44 10
3 OR reg[X+expr], expr
Z
71
4
2 OR F, expr
C, Z
18
5
1 POP A
45
3 XOR reg[expr], expr
Z
72
4
2 XOR F, expr
C, Z
19
4
2 SBB A, expr
C, Z
46 10
3 XOR reg[X+expr], expr
Z
73
4
1 CPL A
Z
1A
6
2 SBB A, [expr]
C, Z
47
8
3 TST [expr], expr
Z
74
4
1 INC A
C, Z
Z
9
9
Z
1B
7
2 SBB A, [X+expr]
C, Z
48
9
3 TST [X+expr], expr
Z
75
4
1 INC X
C, Z
1C
7
2 SBB [expr], A
C, Z
49
9
3 TST reg[expr], expr
Z
76
7
2 INC [expr]
C, Z
1D
8
2 SBB [X+expr], A
C, Z
4A 10
3 TST reg[X+expr], expr
Z
77
8
2 INC [X+expr]
C, Z
1E
9
3 SBB [expr], expr
C, Z
4B
5
1 SWAP A, X
Z
78
4
1 DEC A
C, Z
1F 10
3 SBB [X+expr], expr
C, Z
4C
7
2 SWAP A, [expr]
Z
79
4
1 DEC X
C, Z
20
5
1 POP X
4D
7
2 SWAP X, [expr]
7A
7
2 DEC [expr]
C, Z
21
4
2 AND A, expr
Z
4E
5
1 SWAP A, SP
7B
8
2 DEC [X+expr]
C, Z
22
6
2 AND A, [expr]
Z
4F
4
1 MOV X, SP
23
7
2 AND A, [X+expr]
Z
50
4
2 MOV A, expr
24
7
2 AND [expr], A
Z
51
5
2 MOV A, [expr]
25
8
2 AND [X+expr], A
Z
52
6
2 MOV A, [X+expr]
26
9
Z
7C 13
3 LCALL
Z
7D
7
3 LJMP
Z
7E 10
1 RETI
Z
7F
8
1 RET
5
2 JMP
3 AND [expr], expr
Z
53
5
2 MOV [expr], A
8x
27 10
3 AND [X+expr], expr
Z
54
6
2 MOV [X+expr], A
9x 11
2 CALL
28 11
1 ROMX
Z
55
8
3 MOV [expr], expr
Ax
5
2 JZ
29
4
2 OR A, expr
Z
56
9
3 MOV [X+expr], expr
Bx
5
2 JNZ
2A
6
2 OR A, [expr]
Z
57
4
2 MOV X, expr
Cx
5
2 JC
2B
7
2 OR A, [X+expr]
Z
58
6
2 MOV X, [expr]
Dx
5
2 JNC
2C
7
2 OR [expr], A
Z
59
7
2 MOV X, [X+expr]
Ex
7
2 JACC
Note 1 Interrupt routines take 13 cycles before execution resumes at Interrupt Vector table.
Fx 13
2 INDEX
C, Z
Z
Note 2 The number of cycles required by an instruction is increased by 1 for instructions that span 256 byte boundaries in the Flash memory space.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
37
3. CPU Core (M8C)
3.4
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Instruction Format
3.4.2
The M8C has a total of seven instruction formats which use
instruction lengths of one, two, and three bytes. All instruction bytes are fetched from the program memory (Flash)
using an address and data bus that are independent from
the address and data buses used for register and RAM
access.
While examples of instructions will be given in this section,
refer to the PSoC Designer Assembly Language User Guide
for detailed information on individual instructions.
3.4.1
One-Byte Instructions
Many instructions, such as some of the MOV instructions,
have single-byte forms because they do not use an address
or data as an operand. As shown in Table 3-3, one-byte
instructions use an 8-bit opcode. The set of one-byte
instructions can be divided into four categories according to
where their results are stored.
Table 3-3. One-Byte Instruction Format
Byte 0
8-bit opcode
The first category of one-byte instructions are those that do
not update any registers or RAM. Only the one-byte NOP
and SSC instructions fit this category. While the Program
Counter is incremented as these instructions execute they
do not cause any other internal M8C registers to be updated
nor do these instructions directly affect the register space or
the RAM address space. The SSC instruction will cause
SROM code to run which will modify RAM and M8C internal
registers.
The second category has only the two PUSH instructions in
it. The PUSH instructions are unique because they are the
only one-byte instructions that cause a RAM address to be
modified. These instructions automatically increment the SP.
The third category has only the HALT instruction in it. The
HALT instruction is unique because it is the only single-byte
instruction that causes a user register to be modified. The
HALT instruction modifies user register space address FFh
(CPU_SCR).
Two-Byte Instructions
The majority of M8C instructions are two bytes in length.
While these instructions can be divided into categories identical to the one-byte instructions this would not provide a
useful distinction between the three two-byte instruction formats that the M8C uses.
Table 3-4. Two-Byte Instruction Formats
Byte 0
Byte 1
4-bit opcode 12-bit relative address
8-bit opcode
8-bit data
8-bit opcode
8-bit address
The first two-byte instruction format shown in Table 3-4 is
used by short jumps and calls: CALL, JMP, JACC, INDEX,
JC, JNC, JNZ, JZ. This instruction format uses only 4-bits
for the instruction opcode leaving 12-bits to store the relative
destination address in a two’s-complement form.These
instructions can change program execution to an address
relative to the current address by -2048 or +2047.
The second two-byte instruction format (Table 3-4) is used
by instructions that employ the Source Immediate addressing mode (“Source Immediate” on page 39). The destination
for these instructions is an internal M8C register while the
source is a constant value. An example of this type of
instruction would be ADD A, 7.
The third two-byte instruction format is used by a wide range
of instructions and addressing modes. The following is a list
of the addressing modes that use this third two-byte instruction format:
■
■
■
■
■
■
Source Direct (ADD A, [7])
Source Indexed (ADD A, [X+7])
Destination Direct (ADD [7], A)
Destination Indexed (ADD [X+7], A)
Source Indirect Post Increment (MVI A, [7])
Destination Indirect Post Increment (MVI [7], A)
For more information on addressing modes see “Addressing
Modes” on page 39.
The final category for single-byte instructions are those that
cause internal M8C registers to be updated. This category
holds the largest number of instructions: ASL, ASR, CPL,
DEC, INC, MOV, POP, RET, RETI, RLC, ROMX, RRC,
SWAP. These instructions can cause the A, X, and SP registers or SRAM to be updated.
38
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
3.4.3
3. CPU Core (M8C)
Three-Byte Instructions
The three-byte instruction formats are the second most
prevalent instruction formats. These instructions need three
bytes because they either move data between two
addresses in the user-accessible address space (registers
and RAM) or they hold 16-bit absolute addresses as the
destination of a long jump or long call.
The instructions use an 8-bit opcode leaving room for a 16bit destination address.
The second three-byte instruction format shown in Table 3-5
is used by the following two addressing modes:
■
■
Table 3-5. Three-Byte Instruction Formats
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
8-bit opcode
16-bit address (MSB, LSB)
8-bit opcode
8-bit address
8-bit data
8-bit opcode
8-bit address
8-bit address
The first instruction format shown in Table 3-5 is used by the
LJMP and LCALL instructions. These instructions change
program execution unconditionally to an absolute address.
3.5
The third three-byte instruction format is for the Destination
Direct Source Direct addressing mode which is used by only
one instruction. This instruction format uses an 8-bit opcode
followed by two 8-bit addresses. The first address is the
destination address in RAM while the second address is
source address in RAM. The following is an example of this
instruction: MOV [7], [5].
Addressing Modes
The M8C has ten addressing modes:
■ Source Immediate
■ Source Direct
■ Source Indexed
■ Destination Direct
■ Destination Indexed
3.5.1
Destination Direct Source Immediate (ADD [7], 5).
Destination Indexed Source Immediate (ADD [X+7],
5).
■
■
■
■
■
Destination Direct Source Immediate
Destination Indexed Source Immediate
Destination Direct Source Direct
Source Indirect Post Increment
Destination Indirect Post Increment
Source Immediate
For these instructions the source value is stored in operand
1 of the instruction. The result of these instructions is placed
in either the M8C A, F, or X register as indicated by the
instruction’s opcode. All instructions using the Source Immediate addressing mode are two bytes in length.
Table 3-6. Source Immediate
Opcode
Instruction
Operand 1
Immediate Value
Source Immediate Examples:
Source Code
Machine Code
Comments
ADD
A, 7
01 07
The immediate value 7 is added to the Accumulator. The result is
placed in the Accumulator.
MOV
X, 8
57 08
The immediate value 8 is moved into the X register.
AND
F, 9
70 09
The immediate value of 9 is logically AND’ed with the F register and
the result is placed in the F register.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
39
3. CPU Core (M8C)
3.5.2
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Source Direct
For these instructions the source address is stored in operand 1 of the instruction. During instruction execution the
address will be used to retrieve the source value from RAM
or register address space. The result of these instructions is
placed in either the M8C A or X register as indicated by the
instruction’s opcode. All instructions using the Source Direct
addressing mode are two bytes in length.
Table 3-7. Source Direct
Opcode
Instruction
Operand 1
Source Address
Source Direct Examples:
Source Code
Machine Code
Comments
ADD
A, [7]
02 07
The value in memory at address 7 is added to the Accumulator and the
result is placed into the Accumulator.
MOV
A, REG[8]
5D 08
The value in the register space at address 8 is moved into the Accumulator.
3.5.3
Source Indexed
For these instructions the source offset from the X register is
stored in operand 1 of the instruction. During instruction
execution the current X register value is added to the signed
offset to determine the address of the source value in RAM
or register address space. The result of these instructions is
placed in either the M8C A or X register as indicated by the
instruction’s opcode. All instructions using the Source
Indexed addressing mode are two bytes in length.
Table 3-8. Source Indexed
Opcode
Instruction
Operand 1
Source Index
Source Indexed Examples:
Source Code
Machine Code
Comments
ADD
A, [X+7]
03 07
The value in memory at address X+7 is added to the Accumulator. The
result is placed in the Accumulator.
MOV
X, [X+8]
59 08
The value in RAM at address X+8 is moved into the X register.
3.5.4
Destination Direct
For these instructions the destination address is stored in
the machine code of the instruction. The source for the operation is either the M8C A or X register as indicated by the
instruction’s opcode. All instructions using the Destination
Direct addressing mode are two bytes in length.
Table 3-9. Destination Direct
Opcode
Instruction
Operand 1
Destination Address
Destination Direct Examples:
Source Code
Machine Code
Comments
ADD
[7], A
04 07
The value in the Accumulator is added to memory, at address 7. The
result is placed in memory at address 7. The Accumulator is
unchanged.
MOV
REG[8], A
60 08
The Accumulator value is moved to register space at address 8. The
Accumulator is unchanged.
40
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
3.5.5
3. CPU Core (M8C)
Destination Indexed
For these instructions the destination offset from the X register is stored in the machine code for the instruction. The
source for the operation is either the M8C A register or an
immediate value as indicated by the instruction’s opcode. All
instructions using the Destination Indexed addressing mode
are two bytes in length.
Table 3-10. Destination Indexed
Opcode
Instruction
Operand 1
Destination Index
Destination Indexed Example:
Source Code
Machine Code
Comments
ADD
05 07
The value in memory at address X+7 is added to the Accumulator. The
result is placed in memory at address X+7. The Accumulator is
unchanged.
3.5.6
[X+7], A
Destination Direct Source Immediate
For these instructions the destination address is stored in
operand 1 of the instruction. The source value is stored in
operand 2 of the instruction. All instructions using the Desti-
nation Direct Source Immediate addressing mode are three
bytes in length.
Table 3-11. Destination Direct Source Immediate
Opcode
Instruction
Operand 1
Operand 2
Destination Address
Immediate Value
Destination Direct Source Immediate Examples:
Source Code
Machine Code
Comments
ADD
[7], 5
06 07 05
The value in memory at address 7 is added to the immediate value 5.
The result is placed in memory at address 7.
MOV
REG[8], 6
62 08 06
The immediate value 6 is moved into register space at address 8.
3.5.7
Destination Indexed Source Immediate
For these instructions the destination offset from the X register is stored in operand 1 of the instruction. The source
value is stored in operand 2 of the instruction. All instruc-
tions using the Destination Indexed Source Immediate
addressing mode are three bytes in length.
Table 3-12. Destination Indexed Source Immediate
Opcode
Instruction
Operand 1
Destination Index
Operand 2
Immediate Value
Destination Indexed Source Immediate Examples:
Source Code
Machine Code
Comments
ADD
[X+7], 5
07 07 05
The value in memory at address X+7 is added to the immediate value
5. The result is placed in memory at address X+7.
MOV
REG[X+8], 6
63 08 06
The immediate value 6 is moved into the register space at address
X+8.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
41
3. CPU Core (M8C)
3.5.8
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Destination Direct Source Direct
Only one instruction uses this addressing mode. The destination address is stored in operand 1 of the instruction. The
source address is stored in operand 2 of the instruction. All
instructions using the Destination Direct Source Direct
addressing mode are three bytes in length.
Table 3-13. Destination Direct Source Direct
Opcode
Instruction
Operand 1
Operand 2
Destination Address
Source Address
Destination Direct Source Direct Example:
Source Code
Machine Code
Comments
MOV
5F 07 08
The value in memory at address 8 is moved to memory at address 7.
3.5.9
[7], [8]
Source Indirect Post Increment
Only one instruction uses this addressing mode. The source
address stored in operand 1 is actually the address of a
pointer. During instruction execution the pointer’s current
value is read to determine the address in RAM where the
source value will be found. The pointer’s value is incremented after the source value is read. For PSoC microcontrollers with more than 256 bytes of RAM, the Data Page
Read (DPR_DR) register is used to determine which RAM
page to use with the source address. Therefore, values from
pages other than the current page may be retrieved without
changing the Current Page Pointer (CPP_DR). The pointer
is always read from the current RAM page. For information
on the DPR_DR and CPP_DR registers, see the device data
sheet.
Table 3-14. Source Indirect Post Increment
Opcode
Instruction
Operand 1
Source Address Pointer
Source Indirect Post Increment Example:
Source Code
Machine Code
Comments
MVI
3E 08
The value in memory at address 8 (the indirect address) points to a
memory location in RAM. The value at the memory location pointed to
by the indirect address is moved into the Accumulator. The indirect
address, at address 8 in memory, is then incremented.
3.5.10
A, [8]
Destination Indirect Post Increment
Only one instruction uses this addressing mode. The destination address stored in operand 1 is actually the address of
a pointer. During instruction execution the pointer’s current
value is read to determine the destination address in RAM
where the Accumulator’s value will be stored. The pointer’s
value is incremented after the value is written to the destination address. For PSoC microcontrollers with more than 256
bytes of RAM, the Data Page Write (DPW_DR) register is
used to determine which RAM page to use with the destination address. Therefore, values may be stored in pages
other than the current page without changing the Current
Page Pointer (CPP_DR). The pointer is always read from
the current RAM page. For information on the DPR_DR and
CPP_DR registers, see the device data sheet.
Table 3-15. Destination Indirect Post Increment
Opcode
Instruction
42
Operand 1
Destination Address Pointer
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
3. CPU Core (M8C)
Destination Indirect Post Increment Example:
Source Code
Machine Code
Comments
MVI
3F 08
The value in memory at address 8 (the indirect address) points to a
memory location in RAM. The Accumulator value is moved into the
memory location pointed to by the indirect address. The indirect
address in memory, at address 8, is then incremented.
3.6
3.6.1
[8], A
Register Definitions
CPU_F (Flag) Register
The Flag register has four chip dependent bits (FL[7:4]) and
four dedicated bits (FL[3:0]), as shown in Table 3-1.
3.6.1.1
Chip-Dependent Flag Bits
The chip-dependent Flag bits have no effect internally on
the M8C. These bits are manipulated by the user with the
Flag-Logic opcodes (for example, XOR F, 80h). Bit Definitions for the PSoC Mixed Signal Array family are as follows.
Bits 7, 6, and 5: Reserved.
Bit 4: XOI. IO Bank Select. This bit is used to select
between register banks, in order to support more than 256
registers.
3.6.1.2
Dedicated Flag Bits
The dedicated Flag bits are described as follows.
Bit 3: Reserved.
Bit 2: Carry. Carry Flag. This bit is set or cleared in
response to the result of several instructions. It may also be
manipulated by the Flag-Logic opcodes (for example, OR F,
4). See the PSoC Designer Assembly Guide User Manual
for more details.
Bit 1: Zero. Zero Flag. This bit is set or cleared in response
to the result of several instructions. It may also be manipulated by the Flag-Logic opcodes (for example, OR F, 2). See
the PSoC Designer Assembly Guide User Manual for more
details.
Bit 0: GIE. Global Interrupt Enable. The state of this bit
determines whether interrupts (by way of the IRQ) will be
recognized by the M8C. This bit is set or cleared by the user,
using the Flag-Logic opcodes (e.g., OR F, 1). GIE is also
cleared automatically by the interrupt routine, after the flag
byte has been stored on the stack.
For GIE=1, the M8C samples the IRQ input for each instruction. For GIE=0, the M8C ignores the IRQ.
For additional information, reference the CPU_F register on
page 142.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
43
3. CPU Core (M8C)
44
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
4.
Supervisory ROM (SROM)
This chapter discusses the Supervisory ROM (SROM) and its associated register. It covers both the physical SROM block
and the code stored in the SROM for the PSoC devices.
Table 4-1. SROM Register
Address
x,FEh
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
CPU_SCR1
Bit 0
Access
IRAMDIS
RW:00
LEGEND
x: An “x” before the comma in the address field indicates that this register can be accessed or written to no matter what bank is used.
The SROM holds code that is used to boot the part, calibrate
circuitry, and perform Flash operations. The functions of the
SROM may be accessed in normal user code, operating
from Flash.
4.1
Architectural Description
The SROM is used to boot the part and provide interface
functions to the Flash macros. (Table 4-2 lists the SROM
functions.) The SROM functions are accessed by executing
the Supervisory System Call instruction (SSC) which has an
opcode of 00h. Prior to executing the SSC the M8C’s accumulator needs to be loaded with the desired SROM function
code from Table 4-2. Undefined functions will cause a HALT
if called from user code. The SROM functions are executing
code with calls; therefore, the functions require stack space.
With the exception of Reset, all of the SROM functions have
a parameter block in SRAM that must be configured before
executing the SSC. Table 4-3 lists all possible parameter
block variables. The meaning of each parameter, with
regards to a specific SROM function, is described later in
this chapter.
Table 4-2. List of SROM Functions
Function Code
00h
Function Name
SWBootReset
Stack Space Needed
Two important variables that are used for all functions are
KEY1 and KEY2. These variables are used to help discriminate between valid SSCs and inadvertent SSCs. KEY1 must
always have a value of 3Ah, while KEY2 must have the
same value as the stack pointer when the SROM function
begins execution. This would be the SP value when the SSC
opcode is executed, plus three. If either of the keys do not
match the expected values, the M8C will halt (with the
exception of the SWBootReset function). The following code
puts the correct value in KEY1 and KEY2. The code starts
with a halt, to force the program to jump directly into the
setup code and not run into it.
halt
SSCOP:
mov [KEY1], 3ah
mov X, SP
mov A, X
add A, 3
mov [KEY2], A
Table 4-3. SROM Function Variables
Variable Name
KEY1 / COUNTER / RETURN CODE
SRAM Address
0,F8h
KEY2 / TMP
0,F9h
BLOCKID
0,FAh
POINTER
0,FBh
0
CLOCK
0,FCh
01h
ReadBlock
7
Reserved
0,FDh
02h
WriteBlock
10
DELAY
0,FEh
03h
EraseBlock
9
Reserved
0,FFh
06h
TableRead
3
07h
CheckSum
3
08h
Calibrate0
4
09h
Calibrate1
3
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
45
4. Supervisory ROM (SROM)
4.1.1
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Additional SROM Feature
The SROM has the following additional SROM feature.
Return Codes: These aid in the determination of success
or failure of a particular function. The return code is stored in
KEY1’s position in the parameter block. The CheckSum and
TableRead functions do not have return codes because
KEY1’s position in the parameter block is used to return
other data.
Table 4-4. SROM Return Code Meanings
Return Code Value
Description
00h
Success
01h
Function not allowed due to level of protection on
block
02h
Software reset without hardware reset
03h
Fatal error, SROM halted
Note Read, write, and erase operations may fail if the target
block is read or write protected. Block protection levels are
set during device programming.
Table 4-5 documents the value of all the SRAM addresses in
page zero, after a successful SWBootReset. A cell in the
table with “xx” in it, indicates that the SRAM address is not
modified by the SWBootReset function. A hex value in a cell
indicates that the address should always have the indicated
value after a successful SWBootReset.
A cell with a “??” in it indicates that the value, after a
SWBootReset, is determined by the value of IRAMDIS in
CPU_SCR1. If IRAMDIS is not set, these addresses will be
initialized to 00h. If IRAMDIS is set, these addresses will not
be modified by a SWBootReset. The IRAMDIS bit allows
variables to be preserved even if a watchdog reset occurs.
The IRAMDIS bit is reset by all system resets except Watchdog reset. Therefore, this bit is only useful for Watchdog
resets and not general resets.
Table 4-5. SRAM Map Post SWBootReset
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0x00
0x00
0x00
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
0xC_
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
0xD_
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0xE_
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0xF_
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00
??
??
0x00
0x02
xx
0x00
0x00
0xn
xx
0x00
0x00
Address
0x0_
0x1_
4.1.2
4.1.2.1
SROM Function Descriptions
SWBootReset Function
0x3_
The SROM function SWBootReset is the function that is
responsible for transitioning the device from a reset state to
running user code. See the Types of Resets chapter for
more information on what events will cause the SWBootReset function to execute.
The SWBootReset function is executed whenever the
SROM is entered with an M8C accumulator value of 00h:
the SRAM parameter block is not used as an input to the
function. This will happen, by design, after a hardware reset,
because the M8C's accumulator is reset to 00h or when
user code executes the SSC instruction with an accumulator
value of 00h.
The SWBootReset's calibration function, Calibrate1, transfers the calibration data one byte at a time from Flash to
SRAM. As the bytes are transferred, the sum of the bytes,
plus a hard coded offset value of EBh, is calculated in a 2byte SRAM variable (CHECKSUM). If at the end of the
transfer the value of CHECKSUM (plus the offset value of
EBh) is zero, the SWBootReset function uses the values
stored in SRAM to calibrate the registers in the PSoC
device. If CHECKSUM has a non-zero value, the IRES bit in
CPU_SCR1 is set, which causes a hardware reset similar to
a POR event. For more information on this condition, see
“System Resets” on page 281.
If the checksum of the calibration data is zero, the
SWBootReset function ends by setting the M8C registers
(CPU_SP, CPU_PC, CPU_X, CPU_F, CPU_A) to 00h, after
writing 00h to most SRAM addresses, and then begins to
execute user code at address 0000h.
46
0x2_
0x4_
0x5_
0x6_
0x7_
0x8_
0x9_
0xA_
0xB_
Address F8h is the return code byte for all SROM functions,
for this function, the only acceptable values are 00h and
02h. Address FCh is the fail count variable. After POR,
WDR, or XRES, the variable is initialized to 00h by the
SROM. Each time the checksum fails, the fail count is incremented. Therefore, if it takes two passes through
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
4. Supervisory ROM (SROM)
SWBootReset to get a good checksum, the fail count would
be 01h.
4.1.2.2
Read Block Function
The ReadBlock function is used to read 64 contiguous bytes
from Flash: a block. The number of blocks in a device is simply the total number of bytes divided by 64. For the
CY8C22xxx, the Flash contains 32 blocks of 64 bytes.
The first thing this function does is check the protection bits
and determine if the desired BLOCKID is readable. If read
protection is turned on, the ReadBlock function will exit setting the accumulator and KEY2 back to 00h. KEY1 will have
a value of 01h, indicating a read failure.
If read protection is not enabled, the function will read 64
bytes from the Flash using a ROMX instruction and store the
results in SRAM using an MVI instruction. The first of the 64
bytes will be stored in SRAM at the address indicated by the
value of the POINTER parameter. When the ReadBlock
completes successfully the accumulator, KEY1 and KEY2
will all have a value of 00h.
Table 4-6. ReadBlock Parameters (01h)
Name
Address
KEY1
0,F8h
3Ah
Description
KEY2
0,F9h
Stack Pointer value, when SSC is executed.
BLOCKID
0,FAh
Flash block number
POINTER
0,FBh
First of 64 addresses in SRAM where
returned data should be stored.
4.1.2.3
WriteBlock Function
The WriteBlock function is used to store data in the Flash.
Data is moved 64 bytes at a time from SRAM to Flash using
this function.
The first thing the WriteBlock function does is check the protection bits and determine if the desired BLOCKID is writeable. If write protection is turned on, the WriteBlock function
will exit setting the accumulator and KEY2 back to 00h.
KEY1 will have a value of 01h, indicating a write failure.
Table 4-7. WriteBlock Parameters (02h)
Name
Address
KEY1
0,F8h
Description
3Ah
KEY2
0,F9h
Stack Pointer value, when SSC is executed.
BLOCKID
0,FAh
Flash block number (00h – 3Fh).
POINTER
0,FBh
First of 64 addresses in SRAM, where
the data to be stored in Flash is located
prior to calling WriteBlock.
CLOCK
0,FCh
Clock divider used to set the write pulse
width.
DELAY
0,FEh
For a CPU speed of 12 MHz set to 56h.
4.1.2.4
EraseBlock Function
The EraseBlock function is used to erase a block of 64 contiguous bytes in Flash.
The first thing the EraseBlock function does is check the
protection bits and determine if the desired BLOCKID is
writeable. If write protection is turned on, the EraseBlock
function will exit setting the accumulator and KEY2 back to
00h. KEY1 will have a value of 01h, indicating a write failure.
To set up the parameter block for the EraseBlock function,
correct key values must be stored in KEY1 and KEY2. The
block number to be erased must be stored in the BLOCKID
variable and the CLOCK and DELAY values must be set
based on the current CPU speed. For more information on
setting the CLOCK and DELAY values, see “Clocking” on
page 49.
Table 4-8. EraseBlock Parameters (03h)
Name
Address
KEY1
0,F8h
Description
3Ah
KEY2
0,F9h
Stack Pointer value, when SSC is executed.
BLOCKID
0,FAh
Flash block number (00h – 3Fh).
CLOCK
0,FCh
Clock divider used to set the erase
pulse width.
DELAY
0,FEh
For a CPU speed of 12 MHz set to 56h.
The configuration of the WriteBlock function is straight forward. The BLOCKID of the Flash block, where the data is
stored, must be determined and stored at SRAM address
FAh. Valid BLOCKID values are between 00h and.
The SRAM address of the first of the 64 bytes to be stored in
Flash must be indicated using the POINTER variable in the
parameter block (SRAM address FBh).
Finally, the CLOCK and DELAY value must be set correctly.
The CLOCK value determines the length of the write pulse
that will be used to store the data in the Flash. The CLOCK
and DELAY values are dependent on the CPU speed and
must be set correctly. Refer to “Clocking” on page 49 for
additional information.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
47
4. Supervisory ROM (SROM)
4.1.2.5
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Table 4-9. TableRead Parameters (06h)
TableRead Function
The TableRead function gives the user access to part-specific data stored in the Flash during manufacturing. It also
returns a Revision ID for the die (not to be confused with the
Silicon ID stored in Table 0).
Name
Address
KEY1
0,F8h
Description
3Ah
KEY2
0,F9h
Stack Pointer value, when SSC is executed.
BLOCKID
0,FAh
Table number to read.
Table 4-10. Table with Assigned Values in Flash Macro 0
F8h
F9h
Table 0
Silicon ID
Table 1
Voltage
Reference trim
for 3.3 V
Main
Oscillator trim
for 3.3 V
reg[1,EA]
reg[1,E8]
M
B
FAh
FBh
FCh
FDh
FEh
FFh
(May be used for serialization in the future.)
Room
Temperature
Calibration
for 3.3V
Hot
Temperature
Calibration
for 3.3V
Voltage
Reference trim
for 5 V
Main
Oscillator trim
for 5 V
reg[1,EA]
reg[1,E8]
Room
Temperature
Calibration
for 5V
Hot
Temperature
Calibration
for 5V
Table 2
Table 3
4.1.2.6
Mult
M
Checksum Function
B
4.1.2.8
The Checksum function calculates a 16-bit checksum over a
user specifiable number of blocks, within a single Flash
macro (Bank) starting from block zero. The BLOCKID
parameter is used to pass in the number of blocks to calculate the checksum over. A BLOCKID value of 1 will calculate
the checksum of only block 0, while a BLOCKID value of 0
will calculate the checksum of all 256 user blocks.
The 16-bit checksum is returned in KEY1 and KEY2. The
parameter KEY1 holds the lower 8 bits of the checksum and
the parameter KEY2 holds the upper 8 bits of the checksum.
The checksum algorithm executes the following sequence
of three instructions over the number of blocks times 64 to
be checksumed.
romx
add [KEY1], A
adc [KEY2], 0
Mult
00h
01h
Calibrate1 Function
While Calibrate1 is a completely separate function from
Calibrate0, they perform the same function, which is to
transfer the calibration values stored in a special area of the
Flash to their appropriate registers. What is unique about
Calibrate1 is that it calculates a checksum of the calibration
data and, if that checksum is determined to be invalid,
Calibrate1 will cause a hardware reset by setting the IRES
bit of CPU_SCR1.
The Calibrate1 function uses SRAM to calculate a checksum of the calibration data. The POINTER value is used to
indicate the address of a 30 byte buffer used by this function. When the function completes, the 30 bytes will be set
to 00h.
Calibrate1 was created as a sub function of SWBootReset.
However, the Calibrate1 function code was added to provide
direct access. For more information on how Calibrate1
works, see the SWBootReset section.
Table 4-11. Checksum Parameters (07h)
Name
Address
Table 4-13. Calibrate1 Parameters (09h)
Description
KEY1
0,F8h
3Ah
Name
Address
KEY2
0,F9h
Stack Pointer value, when SSC is executed.
KEY1
0,F8h
3Ah
KEY2
0,F9h
Stack Pointer value, when SSC is executed.
POINTER
0,FBh
First of 32 SRAM addresses used by
this function.
BLOCKID
4.1.2.7
0,FAh
Number of Flash blocks to calculate
checksum on.
Description
Calibrate0 Function
The Calibrate0 function transfers the calibration values
stored in a special area of the Flash to their appropriate registers.
Table 4-12. Calibrate0 Parameters (08h)
Name
Address
KEY1
0,F8h
3Ah
KEY2
0,F9h
Stack Pointer value, when SSC is executed.
48
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
4.2
4. Supervisory ROM (SROM)
Register Definitions
4.2.1
CPU_SCR1 Register
The CPU_SCR1 register is used to convey status and control of events related to internal resets and watchdog reset.
Bits 7 to 1: Reserved.
Bit 0: IRAMDIS. The Initialize RAM Disable bit is a control
bit that is readable and writeable. The default value for this
bit is 0, which indicates that the maximum amount of SRAM
should be initialized on reset to a value of 00h. When the bit
is set, the minimum amount of SRAM is initialized after a
watchdog reset. For more information on this bit, see the
“SROM Function Descriptions” on page 46.
For additional information, reference the CPU_SCR1 register on page 143.
4.3
Clocking
The values M, B, and Mult are found in Flash Table 3. The
user must supply a value for T, which is the ambient temperate in degrees Celsius. The calculated value CLOCKW is
used for write operations, while CLOCKE is used for erase
operations.
CLOCK E × Mult
CLOCK W = -----------------------------------------64
Equation 1
Equation 2
CPU
B
M×T
CLOCK E = ------------ ⋅ -------------------6- – -------------------------6- – 89
5648 12 × 10 1536 × 10
Equation 2 is valid for CPU speeds from 3 MHz up to 12
Mhz. The clock and delay parameters support Flash operations.
The other clocking related parameter is “DELAY.” For 12
MHz operation, the value is 56h. For other CPU speeds, the
following equation may be used.
–6
( 100 × 10 ) × CPU – 84
DELAY = ------------------------------------------------------------13
December 22, 2003
Equation 3
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
49
4. Supervisory ROM (SROM)
50
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
5.
Interrupt Controller
This chapter presents the Interrupt Controller and its associated registers. The interrupt controller provides a mechanism for a
hardware resource in PSoC Mixed Signal Array devices to change program execution to a new address, without regard to the
current task being performed by the code being executed.
Table 5-1. Interrupt Controller Registers
Address
0,DAh
Name
INT_CLR0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
VC3
Sleep
GPIO
0,DBh
INT_CLR1
0,DDh
INT_CLR3
0,DEh
INT_MSK3
ENSWINT
0,E0h
INT_MSK0
VC3
0,E1h
INT_MSK1
0,E2h
INT_VC
x,F7h
CPU_F
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
DCB03
Sleep
Bit 1
Analog 1
DCB02
GPIO
Access
RW : 00
DBB00
RW : 00
I2C
RW : 00
DBB01
Analog 1
DCB03
Bit 0
V Monitor
I2C
RW : 00
V Monitor
RW : 00
RW : 00
DCB02
DBB01
DBB00
Carry
Zero
GIE
Pending Interrupt[7:0]
RC : 00
XOI
RL : 00
LEGEND
L: The AND, OR, and XOR flag instructions can be used to modify this register.
C: Cearable register or bits.
x: An “x” before the comma in the address field indicates that this register can be accessed or written to no matter what bank is used.
The interrupt controller and its associated registers allow the
user’s code to respond to an interrupt from almost every
functional block in the PSoC devices. Interrupts for all the
digital blocks and each of the analog columns are available,
as well as interrupts for supply voltage, sleep, variable
clocks, and a general GPIO (pin) interrupt.
The registers associated with the interrupt controller allow
interrupts to be disabled either globally or individually. The
registers also provide a mechanism by which a user may
clear all pending and posted interrupts, or clear individual
posted or pending interrupts. A software mechanism is provided to set individual interrupts. Setting an interrupt by way
of software is very useful during code development, when
one may not have the complete hardware system necessary
to generate a real interrupt.
Table 5-2. CY8C22xxx Interrupt Table
Interrupt
Priority
Interrupt
Address
Interrupt Name
0 (highest)
0000h
Reset
1
0004h
Supply voltage monitor
3
000Ch
Analog column 1
6
0018h
VC3
7
001Ch
GPIO
8
0020h
PSoC block DBB00
9
0024h
PSoC block DBB01
10
0028h
PSoC block DCB02
11
002Ch
PSoC block DCB03
24
0060h
I2C
25 (lowest)
0064h
Sleep timer
The following table lists all interrupts and the priorities that
are available in the PSoC device.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
51
5. Interrupt Controller
5.1
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Architectural Description
A block diagram of the PSoC Interrupt Controller is shown in
Figure 5-1. It illustrates the notion of posted and pending
interrupts.
...
Interrupt Taken
or
INT_CLRx Write
Posted
Interrupt
Priority
Encoder
Interrupt Vector
Pending
Interrupt
Interrupt
Request
R
1
D
M8C Core
Q
. . .
Interrupt
Source
(Timer,
GPIO, etc.)
GIE
CPU_F[0]
INT_MSKx
Mask Bit Setting
Figure 5-1. Interrupt Controller Block Diagram
The sequence of events that occur during interrupt processing is as follows:
1. An interrupt becomes active, either because (a) the
interrupt condition occurs (e.g., a timer expires), (b) a
previously posted interrupt is enabled through an update
of an interrupt mask register, or (c) an interrupt is pending and GIE is set from 0 to 1 in the CPU Flag register.
2. The current executing instruction finishes.
3. The internal interrupt routine executes, taking 13 cycles.
During this time, the following actions occur:
❐ The PCH, PCL, and Flag register (CPU_F) are
pushed onto the stack (in that order).
❐ The CPU_F register is then cleared. Since this clears
the GIE bit to 0, additional interrupts are temporarily
disabled.
❐ The PCH (PC[15:8]) is cleared to zero.
❐ The interrupt vector is read from the interrupt controller and its value placed into PCL (PC[7:0]). This sets
the program counter to point to the appropriate
address in the interrupt table (e.g., 001Ch for the
GPIO interrupt).
4. Program execution vectors to the interrupt table. Typically, a LJMP instruction in the interrupt table sends execution to the user's Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) for
this interrupt.
5. The ISR executes. Note that interrupts are disabled
since GIE = 0. In the ISR, interrupts can be re-enabled if
desired by setting GIE = 1 (take care to avoid stack overflow in this case).
6. The ISR ends with a RETI instruction. This pops the Flag
register, PCL, and PCH from the stack, restoring those
registers. The restored Flag register re-enables interrupts, since GIE = 1 again.
52
7. Execution resumes at the next instruction, after the one
that occurred before the interrupt. However, if there are
more pending interrupts, the subsequent interrupts will
be processed before the next normal program instruction.
Interrupt Latency. The time between the assertion of an
enabled interrupt and the start of its ISR can be calculated
from the following equation.
Latency =
Time for current instruction to finish +
Time for internal interrupt routine to execute +
Time for LJMP instruction in interrupt table to execute.
For example, if the 5-cycle JMP instruction is executing
when an interrupt becomes active, the total number of CPU
clock cycles before the ISR begins would be as follows.
(1 to 5 cycles for JMP to finish) +
(13 cycles for interrupt routine) +
(7 cycles for LJMP) = 21 to 25 cycles.
In the example above, at 24 MHz, 25 clock cycles take
1.042 us.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
5.2
5. Interrupt Controller
Register Definitions
behavior of the INT_CLRx registers. See the INT_CLRx register in this section for more information.
Table 5-1 gives an overview of all registers related to interrupt controller operation. The following text presents details
on the use of each register.
5.2.1
INT_CLRx Register
There are three interrupt clear registers (INT_CLR0,
INT_CLR1, and INT_CLR3) which may be referred to in
general as INT_CLRx. The INT_CLRx registers are similar
to the INT_MSKx registers in that they hold a bit for each
interrupt source. However, functionally the INT_CLRx registers are similar to the INT_VC register, although their operation is completely independent. When an INT_CLRx register
is read any bits that are set indicate an interrupt has been
posted for that hardware resource. Therefore, reading these
registers gives the user the ability to determine all posted
interrupts.
The way an individual bit value written to an INT_CLRx register is interpreted is determined by the Enable Software
Interrupt (ENSWINT) bit in INT_MSK3[7]. When ENSWINT
is cleared (the default state) writing 1's to an INT_CLRx register has no effect. However, writing 0's to an INT_CLRx register, when ENSWINT is cleared, will cause the
corresponding interrupt to be cleared. If the ENSWINT bit is
set, any 0's written to the INT_CLRx registers will be
ignored. However, 1's written to an INT_CLRx register, while
ENSWINT is set, will cause an interrupt to be posted for the
corresponding interrupt. Enabling software interrupts allows
a user's code to create software interrupts that can aid in
debugging interrupt service routines, by eliminating the
need to create the system level interactions that may be
necessary to create a hardware interrupt.
For additional information, reference the INT_CLR0 register
on page 129, the INT_CLR1 register on page 131, and the
INT_CLR3 register on page 132.
5.2.2
Each interrupt source may require configuration at a block
level. Refer to other chapters of this document for information on how to configure an individual interrupt source.
For additional information, reference the INT_MSK0 register
on page 134, the INT_MSK1 register on page 135, and the
INT_MSK3 register on page 133.
5.2.3
INT_VC Register
The interrupt vector clear register (INT_VC) performs two
different functions. When the register is read, the least significant byte of the highest priority pending interrupt is
returned. For example, if the GPIO and I2C interrupts were
pending and the INT_VC register was read, the value 1Ch
would be read. However, if no interrupt were pending, the
value 00h would be returned. This is the reset vector in the
interrupt table; however, reading 00h from the INT_VC register should not be considered to be an indication that a system reset is pending. Rather, reading 00h from the INT_VC
register simply indicates that there are no pending interrupts. The highest priority interrupt, indicated by the value
returned by a read of the INT_VC register, is removed from
the list of pending interrupts when the M8C performs an
Interrupt Vector Read (IVR). The clear of the highest priority
pending interrupt occurs asynchronously.
Reading the INT_VC has limited usefulness. If interrupts are
enabled, a read to the INT_VC register would not be able to
determine that an interrupt was pending before the interrupt
was actually taken. However, while in an interrupt, a user
may wish to read the INT_VC register to see what the next
interrupt will be. When the INT_VC register is written, with
any value, all pending and posted interrupts are cleared by
asserting the clear line for each interrupt.
For additional information, reference the INT_VC register on
page 136.
INT_MSKx Register
There are three interrupt mask registers (INT_MSK0,
INT_MSK1, and INT_MSK3) which may be referred to in
general as INT_MSKx. If cleared, each bit in an INT_MSKx
register prevents an interrupt from becoming a pending
interrupt (input to the priority encoder). However, an interrupt may still post even if its mask bit is zero. All INT_MSKx
bits are independent of all other INT_MSKx bits. If an
INT_MSKx bit is set, the interrupt source associated with
that mask bit may generate an interrupt that will become a
pending interrupt. For example, if INT_MSK0[5] is set and at
least one GPIO pin is configured to generate an interrupt,
the interrupt controller will allow a GPIO interrupt request to
post and become a pending interrupt for the M8C to respond
to. If a higher priority interrupt is generated before the M8C
responds to the GPIO interrupt, the higher priority interrupt
will be pending and not the GPIO interrupt. INT_MSK3[7]
(ENSWINT) is a special non-mask bit that controls the
December 22, 2003
5.2.4
CPU_F Register
Only the GIE bit in the CPU_F register is related to the interrupt controller. This bit is the Global Interrupt Enable. When
this bit is set, the M8C will take a pending interrupt. When
the GIE bit is cleared, the M8C will not take any interrupts.
By default, this bit is cleared. To set or clear this bit, the AND
F, expr, or OR F, expr, or XOR F, expr instructions must be
used. (Written another way: AND/OR/XOR F, expr instructions must be used.) The GIE flag bit is covered in more
detail in the chapter titled “CPU Core (M8C)” on page 35.
For additional information, reference the CPU_F register on
page 142.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
53
5. Interrupt Controller
54
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
6.
General Purpose IO (GPIO)
This chapter discusses the General Purpose IO (GPIO) and its associated registers. The GPIO blocks provide the interface
between the M8C core and the outside world. They offer a large number of configurations to support several types of input/
output operations for both digital and analog systems.
Table 6-1. GPIO Registers
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
0,xxh
PRTxDR
Data Register
RW : 00
0,xxh
PRTxIE
Bit Interrupt Enables
RW : 00
0,xxh
PRTxGS
Global Select
RW : 00
0,xxh
PRTxDM2
Drive Mode 2
RW : FF
1,xxh
PRTxDM0
Drive Mode 0
RW : 00
1,xxh
PRTxDM1
Drive Mode 1
RW : FF
1,xxh
PRTxIC0
Interrupt Control 0
RW : 00
1,xxh
PRTxIC1
Interrupt Control 1
RW : 00
LEGEND
xx: An “x” after the comma in the address field indicates that there are multiple instances of the register. For an expanded address listing of these registers,
refer to the “Core Register Summary” on page 32.
6.1
Architectural Description
The GPIO contains input buffers, output drivers, register bit
storage, and configuration logic for connecting the PSoC
device to the outside world.
IO Ports are arranged with (up to) 8 bits per port. Each full
port contains eight identical GPIO blocks, with connections
to identify a unique address and register bit number for each
block. Therefore, the registers shown in Table 6-1 are actually for a GPIO port (eight GPIO blocks), where the bit position indicates which of the eight GPIO bit blocks is controlled
in the GPIO port.
Each GPIO block can be used for the following types of IO:
■
■
■
Digital IO (digital IO controlled by software)
Global IO (digital PSoC block IO)
Analog IO (analog PSoC block IO)
Each IO pin also has several possible drive modes, as well
as interrupt capabilities. While all GPIO pins are identical
and provide digital IO, some pins may not connect internally
for global or analog functions.
The main block diagram for the GPIO block is illustrated in
Figure 6-1. Note that some pins do not have all of the functionality shown, depending on internal connections.
December 22, 2003
6.1.1
Digital IO
One of the basic operations of the GPIO ports is to allow the
M8C to send information out of the chip and get information
into the M8C from outside the chip; this is accomplished by
way of the port data register (PRTxDR). Writes from the
M8C to the PRTxDR store the data state, one bit per GPIO.
In the standard non-bypass mode, the pin drivers drive the
pin in response to this data bit, with a drive strength determined by the drive mode setting (see below). The actual
voltage on the pin depends on the drive mode and the external load.
The M8C may read the value of a port by reading the
PRTxDR. When the M8C reads the PRTxDR, the current
value of the pin voltage is translated into a logic value and
returned to the M8C. These operations read the pin voltage,
not the data drive state stored in the local PRTxDR register
bit latch.
6.1.2
Global IO
The GPIO ports are also used to interconnect signals to and
from the digital PSoC blocks, as global inputs or outputs.
The global IO feature of each GPIO (port pin) is off by
default. To access the feature, two parameters must be
changed. To configure a GPIO as a global input the port global select bit must be set for the desired GPIO using the
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
55
6. General Purpose IO (GPIO)
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
PRTxGS register. Also, the drive mode for the GPIO must
be set to the digital Hi-Z state. (Refer to “PRTxDMx Registers” on page 58 for more information.) To configure a GPIO
as a global output, the port global select bit must again be
set. But in this case, the drive state must be set to any of the
non-Hi-Z states.
6.1.3
Analog IO
Analog signals can pass between the chip core and chip
pins through the block’s AOUT pin. This provides a resistive
path (~300 ohms) directly through the block. For analog
modes, the GPIO block is typically configured into a High
Impedance Analog Drive mode (Hi-Z).
6.1.4
GPIO Block Interrupts
Each GPIO block can be individually configured for interrupt
capability. Blocks are configured by pin interrupt enables
and also selection of the interrupt state. Blocks can be set to
interrupt when the pin is high, low, or when it changes from
the last time it was read. The block provides an open-drain
interrupt output (INTO) that is connected to other GPIO
blocks in a wire-OR fashion.
Once INTO pulls low, it will continue to hold INTO low until
one of these conditions changes: a.) the pin Interrupt Enable
is cleared; b.) the voltage at PIN transitions to the opposite
state; c.) in interrupt-on-change mode, the GPIO data register is read, thus setting the local interrupt level to the opposite state; or d.) the interrupt mode is changed so that the
current pin state does not create an interrupt. Once one of
these conditions is met, the INTO releases. At this point,
another GPIO pin (or this pin again) could assert its INTO
pin, pulling the common line low to assert a new interrupt.
Note the following behavior from this level-release feature. If
one pin is asserting INTO and then a second pin asserts its
INTO, when the first pin releases its INTO, the second pin is
already driving INTO and thus no change will be seen, i.e.,
no new interrupt would be asserted on the GPIO interrupt.
Care must be taken, using polling and/or the states of the
GPIO pin and global Interrupt Enables, to catch all interrupts
among a set of wire-OR GPIO blocks.
All pin interrupts that are wire-OR’ed together are tied to the
same system GPIO interrupt. Therefore, if interrupts are
enabled on multiple pins, the user’s interrupt service routine
must use some user designed mechanism, to determine
which pin was the source of the interrupt.
Using a GPIO interrupt requires the following steps:
1. Set interrupt mode in the GPIO pin block.
2. Enable the bit interrupt in the GPIO block.
3. Set mask bit for the (global) GPIO interrupt.
4. Assert the overall Global Interrupt Enable.
These last two steps are common to all interrupts and are
described in “Interrupt Controller” on page 51.
The first two steps, bit interrupt enable and interrupt mode,
are set at the GPIO block level (i.e., at each port pin), by
way of the block’s configuration registers.
At the GPIO block level, asserting the INTO line depends
only on the bit interrupt enable and the state of the pin relative to the chosen interrupt mode. At the chip level, due to
their wire-OR nature, the GPIO interrupts are neither true
edge-sensitive interrupts nor true level-sensitive interrupts.
They could be considered edge-sensitive for asserting, but
level-sensitive for release of the wire-OR interrupt line.
If no GPIO interrupts are asserting, a GPIO interrupt will
occur whenever a GPIO pin Interrupt Enable is set and the
GPIO pin transitions (if not already transitioned) appropriately high or low (to match the interrupt mode configuration).
Once this happens, the INTO line will pull low to assert the
GPIO interrupt. (This assumes the other system-level
enables are on, such as setting the global GPIO interrupt
enable and the Global Interrupt Enable.) Note that setting
the pin Interrupt Enable may immediately assert INTO, if the
Interrupt Mode conditions are already being met at the pin.
56
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
6. General Purpose IO (GPIO)
Input Path
BYP
DM1
DM0
Global
Input Bus
Read PRTxDR
Drive Modes
DM2 DM1
DM0
Data Bus
Mode
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Resistive Pull Down
Strong Drive
High Impedence
Resistive Pull Up
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Open Drain, Drives High
Slow Strong Drive
High Impedence Analog
Open Drain, Drives Low
I2C Input
RESET
DM[2:0]=110b
D
CELLRD
R
EN
Q
QinLatch
(To Readmux,
Interrupt Logic)
Analog Input
Output Path
Vpwr
BYP
Vpwr
Write PRTxDR
2:1
Global Output Bus
2:1
DATA
5.6K
Drive
Logic
I2C Output
I2C Enable
DM2
DM1
DM0
Slew
Control
PIN
5.6K
Analog Output
Figure 6-1. GPIO Block Diagram
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
57
6. General Purpose IO (GPIO)
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
The interrupt logic portion of the block is shown in Figure 6-2.
INTERRUPT LOGIC
IE
IM1
IM0
Falling
INTO
IM1
IM0
Change
QinLatch
S
D Q
CELLRD
Interrupt Mode
IM1 IM0
Output
EN R
IM0
IM1
0
0
1
1
Rising
0
1
0
1
Disabled
Low
High
Change from last read
INBUF
Figure 6-2. GPIO Interrupt Mode Block Diagram
6.2
Register Definitions
6.2.2
For a selected GPIO block, the individual registers are
addressed as shown in Table 6-2. In the register names, the
‘x’ is the port number, configured at the chip level (x = 0 to 7
typically). DA[1:0] refers to the two LSB of the register
address.
All register values are readable, except for the PRTxDR register; reads of this register return the pin state instead of the
register bit state.
Table 6-2. Internal Register Bit Addressing
XOI
DA[1:0]
0
00b
PRTxDR
0
01b
PRTxIE
0
IE
Interrupt Enable
0
10b
PRTxGS
0
BYP
Global Select
0
11b
PRTxDM2
1
DM2
Drive Mode, Bit 2
1
00b
PRTxDM0
0
DM0
Drive Mode, Bit 0
1
01b
PRTxDM1
1
DM1
Drive Mode, BIt 1
1
10b
PRTxIC0
0
IM0
Intrpt. Mask, Bit 0
1
11b
PRTxIC1
0
IM1
Intrpt. Mask, Bit 1
6.2.1
Register
Resets to:
0
(Name)
DIN
Function
Data
PRTxIE Registers
The PRTxIE register is used to enable/disable the interrupt
enable internal to the GPIO block. A ‘1’ enables the INTO
output at the block, a ‘0’ disables INTO so it can only be HiZ.
For additional information, reference the PRTxIE register on
page 87.
6.2.3
PRTxGS Registers
The PRTxGS register is used to select the block for connection to global inputs or outputs. Writing this register high
enables the global bypass (BYP=1 in Figure 6-1). If the drive
mode is set to digital Hi-Z (DM[2:0] = 010b), then the pin is
selected for global input (PIN drives to the Global Input
Bus). In non-Hi-Z modes, the block is selected for global
output (the Global Output Bus drives to PIN), bypassing the
data register value (assuming I2C Enable=0).
If the PRTxGS register is written to zero, the global in/out
function is disabled for the pin.
For additional information, reference the PRTxGS register
on page 88.
PRTxDR Registers
Writing the PRTxDR register bit sets the output drive state
for the pin to high (for DIN=1) or low (DIN=0), unless a
bypass mode is selected (either I2C Enable=1 or the global
select register written high).
Reading PRTxDR returns the actual pin state, as seen by
the input buffer. This may not be the same as the expected
output state, if the load pulls the pin more strongly than the
pin’s configured output drive.
For additional information, reference the PRTxDR register
on page 86.
6.2.4
PRTxDMx Registers
There are eight possible drive modes for each port pin.
Three mode bits are required to select one of these modes,
and these three bits are spread into three different registers
(PRTxDM0, PRTxDM1, and PRTxDM2). The bit position of
the effected port pin (Example: Pin[2] in Port 0) is the same
as the bit position of each of the three Drive Mode register
bits that control the drive mode for that pin (Example: Bit[2]
in PRT0DM0, bit[2] in PRT0DM1 and bit[2] in PRT0DM2).
The three bits from the three registers are treated as a
group. These are referred to as DM2, DM1, and DM0, or
58
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
6. General Purpose IO (GPIO)
together as DM[2:0]. Drive modes are shown in Table 6-3.
Table 6-3. Pin Drive Modes
Drive Mode
DM[2:0]
Pin State
Description
The interrupt mode must be set to one of the non-zero
modes listed in Table 6-4, in order to get an interrupt from
the pin.
Table 6-4. GPIO Interrupt Modes
000b
Resistive pull down
Strong high, resistive low
001b
Strong drive
Strong high, strong low
00b
Bit interrupt disabled, INTO de-asserted
010b
High impedance
Hi-Z high and low, digital input
enabled
01b
Assert INTO when PIN = low
011b
Resistive pull up
Resistive high, strong low
100b
Open drain high
Slow strong high, Hi-Z low
101b
Slow strong drive
Slow strong high, slow strong low
110b
High impedance,
analog (reset state)
Hi-Z high and low, digital input disabled (for zero power) (reset state)
111b
Open drain low
Slow strong low, Hi-Z high
For analog IO, the drive mode should be set to one of the
Hi-Z modes, either 010b or 110b. The 110b mode has the
advantage that the block’s digital input buffer is disabled, so
no “crowbar” current flows even when the analog input is not
close to either power rail. When digital inputs are needed on
the same pin as analog inputs, the 010b Drive mode should
be used. If the 110b Drive mode is used, the pin will always
be read as a zero by the CPU and the pin will not be able to
generate a useful interrupt. (It is not strictly required that a
Hi-Z mode be selected for analog operation).
For global input modes, the drive mode must be set to 010b.
This GPIO provides a default drive mode of high impedance
(Hi-Z). This is achieved by forcing the reset state of all
PRTxDM1 and PRTxDM2 registers to FFh.
The resistive drive modes place a resistance in series with
the output, for low outputs (mode 000b) or high outputs
(mode 011b). Strong drive mode 001b gives the fastest
edges at high DC drive strength. Mode 101b gives the same
drive strength but with slower edges. The Open drain modes
(100b and 111b) also use the slower edge rate drive. These
modes enable open drain functions such as I2C mode 111b
(although the slow edge rate is not slow enough to meet the
I2C fast mode specification).
For additional information, reference the PRTxDM2 register
on page 89, the PRTxDM0 register on page 145, and the
PRTxDM1 register on page 146.
Interrupt Mode IM[1:0]
Description
10b
Assert INTO when PIN = high
11b
Assert INTO when PIN = change from last
read
The GPIO interrupt mode “disabled” (00b) disables interrupts from the pin, even if the GPIO’s bit interrupt enable is
on (from the PRTxIE register).
Interrupt mode 01b means that the block will assert the
interrupt line (INTO) when the pin voltage is low, providing
the block’s bit interrupt enable line is set (high).
Interrupt mode 10b means that the block will assert the
interrupt line (INTO), when the pin voltage is high, providing
the block’s bit interrupt enable line is set (high).
Interrupt mode 11b means that the block will assert the interrupt line (INTO) when the pin voltage is the opposite of the
last state read from the pin (again providing the block’s bit
interrupt enable line is set high). This mode switches
between low mode and high mode, depending on the last
value that was read from the port during reads of the data
register (PRTxDR). If the last value read from the GPIO was
0, the GPIO will subsequently be in interrupt high mode. If
the last value read from the GPIO was 1, the GPIO will then
be in interrupt low mode.
Last Value Read From Pin was 0
Pin State Waveform
(a)
GPIO pin
interrupt
enable set
Pin State Waveform
(b)
Interrupt
occurs
GPIO pin
interrupt
enable set
Interrupt
occurs
Last Value Read From Pin was 1
6.2.5
PRTxICx Registers
Pin State Waveform
The interrupt mode for the pin is determined by bits in two
registers: PRTxIC1 and PRTxIC0. These are referred to as
IM1 and IM0, or together as IM[1:0].
There are four possible interrupt modes for each port pin.
Two mode bits are required to select one of these modes
and these two bits are spread into two different registers
(PRTxIC0 and PRTxIC1). The bit position of the effected
port pin (Example: Pin[2] in Port 0) is the same as the bit
position of each of the Interrupt Control register bits that
control the interrupt mode for that pin (Example: Bit[2] in
PRT0IC0 and bit[2] in PRT0IC1). The two bits from the two
registers are treated as a group.
December 22, 2003
(c)
GPIO pin
interrupt
enable set
Pin State Waveform
(d)
Interrupt
occurs
GPIO pin
interrupt
enable set
Interrupt
occurs
Figure 6-3. GPIO Interrupt Mode 11b
Figure 6-3 assumes that the GIE is set, GPIO interrupt mask
is set, and that the GPIO interrupt mode has been set to
11b. The change interrupt mode is different from the other
modes, in that it relies on the value of the GPIO’s read latch
to determine if the pin state has changed. Therefore, the
port that contains the GPIO in question must be read during
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
59
6. General Purpose IO (GPIO)
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
every interrupt service routine. If the port is not read, the
interrupt mode will act as if it is in high mode when the latch
value is 0 and low mode when the latch value is 1.
For additional information, reference the PRTxIC0 register
on page 147 and the PRTxIC1 register on page 148.
60
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
7.
Analog Output Drivers
This chapter presents the Analog Output Drivers and its associated register. The analog output drivers provide a means for
driving analog signals off-chip.
Table 7-1. Analog Output Driver Register
Address
1,62h
7.1
Name
ABF_CR0
Bit 7
ACol1Mux
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Architectural Description
The PSoC device has one analog driver used to output analog values. For a detailed drawing of the analog output drivers in relation to the analog system, reference the Analog
Input Configuration chapter on page 235.
7.2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
Bypass
PWR
RW : 00
Register Definitions
Table 7-1 presents an overview of all registers related to the
analog output drivers. The following section presents a
detail on the use of the register’s bits.
7.2.1
ABF_CR0 Register
This register controls analog input muxes from Port 0, and
the output buffer amplifiers that drive column outputs to
device pins.
P0[5]
Bit 7: ACol1MUX. A mux selects the output of column 0
input mux or column 1 input mux. When set, this bit sets the
column 1 input to column 0 input mux output.
Array
Bit 6: Reserved.
ACB01
ASD11
Bit 5: ABUF1EN0. This bit enables or disables the column
output amplifiers.
ASC21
Bits 4, 3, and 2: Reserved.
Bit 1: Bypass. Bypass mode connects the amplifier input
directly to the output. When this bit is set, all amplifiers controlled by the register will be in bypass mode.
Figure 7-1. Analog Output Drivers
The PSoC device has one analog driver used to output analog values on port pins. This driver is a resource available to
all the analog blocks in the column. The user can select one
analog block per column to drive a signal on its analog output bus (ABUS), to serve as the input to the analog driver for
that column. The output from the analog output driver for the
column can be enabled and disabled using the Analog Output Driver register ABF_CR0.
December 22, 2003
Bit 2
ABUF1EN0
Bit 0: PWR. This bit is used to set the power level of the
amplifiers. When this bit is set, all amplifiers controlled by
the register will be in a high power.
For additional information, reference the ABF_CR0 register
on page 156.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
61
7. Analog Output Drivers
62
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
8.
Internal Main Oscillator (IMO)
This chapter briefly presents the Internal Main Oscillator (IMO) and its associated register. The IMO produces clock signals of
24 MHz and 48 MHz.
Table 8-1. Internal Main Oscillator Register
Address
1,E8h
8.1
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
IMO_TR
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Trim[7:0]
Architectural Description
The Internal Main Oscillator outputs two clocks: a SYSCLK,
which can be the internal 24 MHz clock or an external clock,
and a SYSCLK2X that is always twice the SYSCLK frequency. In the absence of a high-precision input source from
the 32 kHz crystal oscillator, the accuracy of the internal 24
MHz/48 MHz clocks will be +/-2.5% over temperature variation and two voltage ranges (3.3V +/-.3V and 5.0V +/-5%).
No external components are required to achieve this level of
accuracy.
There is an option to phase lock this oscillator to the External Crystal Oscillator. The choice of crystal and its inherent
accuracy will determine the overall accuracy of the oscillator. The External Crystal Oscillator must be stable prior to
locking the frequency of the Internal Main Oscillator to this
reference source.
The IMO can be disabled when using an external clocking
source. Also, the frequency doubler circuit, which produces
SYSCLK2X, can be disabled to save power. Note that when
using an external clock, if SYSCLK2X is needed, then the
IMO can not be disabled. Registers for controlling these
operations are found in the Digital Clocks chapter on
page 253.
December 22, 2003
Bit 4
8.2
8.2.1
Access
W : 00
Register Definitions
IMO_TR Register
The device specific value for 5 volt operation is loaded into
the Internal Main Oscillator Trim Register (IMO_TR) at boot
time. The Internal Main oscillator will operate within specified tolerance over a voltage range of 4.75V to 5.25V, with
no modification of this register. If the device is operated at a
lower voltage, user code must modify the contents of this
register. For operation in the voltage range of 3.3V +/-.3V,
this can be accomplished with a Table Read command to
the Supervisor ROM, which will supply a trim value for operation in this range. For operation between these Voltage
ranges, user code can interpolate the best value using both
available factory trim values.
Bits 7 to 0: Trim. These bits are used to trim the Internal
Main Oscillator. A larger value in this register will increase
the speed of the oscillator.
For additional information, reference the IMO_TR register
on page 170.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
63
8. Internal Main Oscillator (IMO)
64
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
9.
Internal Low Speed Oscillator (ILO)
This chapter briefly explains the Internal Low Speed Oscillator (ILO) and its associated register. The Internal Low Speed
Oscillator produces a 32 kHz clock.
Table 9-1. Internal Low Speed Oscillator Register
Address
Name
1,E9h
ILO_TR
9.1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bias Trim[1:0]
Architectural Description
The oscillator operates in three modes: normal power, low
power, and off. The normal power mode consumes more
current to produce a more accurate frequency. The low
power mode is always used when the part is in a power
down (sleep) state and can be selected during non-sleep,
but provides less frequency accuracy.
9.2
9.2.1
Bit 1
Bit 0
Freq Trim[3:0]
Access
W : 00
Table 9-2. Bias Current in PTAT
Bias Current
The Internal Low Speed Oscillator is an internal low speed
oscillator of nominally 32 kHz. It is available to generate
Sleep wake-up interrupts and Watchdog resets. This oscillator can also be used as a clocking source for the Digital
PSoC blocks.
Bit 2
Bit 5
Bit 4
Medium Bias
0
0
Maximum Bias
0
1
Minimum Bias
1
0
Not needed *
1
1
* About 15% higher than the minimum bias.
Bits 3 to 0: Freq Trim. Four bits are used to trim the frequency. Bit 0 is the LSB, Bit 3 is the MSB. Bit 3 gets inverted
inside the register; therefore, a code of 8h turns all current
sources off (f=0 kHz), a code of 0h turns only the MSB current source on (f=mid-scale), and a code of 7h turns on all
the current sources (f=max).
For additional information, reference the ILO_TR register on
page 171.
Register Definitions
ILO_TR Register
This register sets the adjustment for the ILO. The device
specific value, placed in the trim bits of this register at boot
time, is based on factory testing.
It is strongly recommended that the user not alter the
register value.
Bits 7 and 6: Reserved.
Bits 5 and 4: Bias Trim. Two bits are used to set the bias
current in the PTAT Current Source. Bit 5 gets inverted, so
that a medium bias is selected when both bits are 0. The
bias current is set according to Table 9-2.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
65
9. Internal Low Speed Oscillator (ILO)
66
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
10. 32 kHz Crystal Oscillator (ECO)
This chapter briefly explains the 32 kHz Crystal Oscillator (ECO) and its associated register. The 32 kHz crystal oscillator circuit allows the user to replace the internal low speed oscillator with a more precise time source at low cost and low power.
Table 10-1. Crystal Oscillator Register
Address
Name
1,E0h
OSC_CR0
1,EBh
ECO_TR
x,FEh
CPU_SCR1
10.1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
32k Select
PLL Mode
No Buzz
Bit 3
Sleep[1:0]
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
CPU Speed[2:0]
Access
RW : 00
PSSDC[1:0]
W : 00
IRAMDIS
Architectural Description
The crystal oscillator circuit uses an inexpensive watch crystal and two small valued load capacitors as external components. All other components are on the PSoC chip. The
crystal oscillator may be configured to provide a reference to
the internal main oscillator in PLL mode for generating a
more accurate 24 MHz system clock.
The XTALIn and XTALOut pins support connection of a
32.768 kHz watch crystal. To run from the external crystal,
Bit 7 of the Oscillator Control 0 Register (OSC_CR0) must
be set (default is off). The only external components are the
crystal and the two load capacitors that connect to Vdd.
Transitions between the internal and external oscillator
domains may produce glitches on the clock bus.
During the process of activating the ECO, there must be a
hold-off period before using it as the 32 kHz source. This
hold off period is partially implemented in hardware using
the Sleep Timer. Firmware must set up a sleep period of one
second (maximum ECO settling time), and then enable the
ECO in the OSC_CR0 register. At the one second time-out
(the Sleep Interrupt), the switch is made by hardware to the
ECO. If the ECO is subsequently deactivated, the ILO will
again be activated and the switch is made back to the ILO
immediately.
The firmware steps involved in switching between the internal low speed oscillator to the 32 kHz Crystal Oscillator are
as follows.
1. At reset, the chip begins operation, using the internal low
speed oscillator.
2. Select sleep interval of 1 second using bits[4:3] in the
Oscillator Control 0 Register (OSC_CR0), as the oscillator stabilization interval.
December 22, 2003
Bit 4
RW:00
3. Enable the 32 kHz Crystal Oscillator, by setting bit [7] in
Oscillator Control 0 Register (OSC_CR0) to 1.
4. The 32 kHz Crystal Oscillator becomes the selected
source, at the end of the one-second interval on the
edge created by the Sleep Interrupt logic. The one-second interval gives the oscillator time to stabilize, before it
becomes the active source. The Sleep Interrupt need
not be enabled for the switch-over to occur. Reset the
sleep timer (if this does not interfere with any ongoing
real-time clock operation), to guarantee the interval
length. Note that the internal low speed oscillator continues to run, until the oscillator is automatically switched
over by the sleep timer interrupt.
5. It is strongly advised to wait the one-second stabilization
period prior to engaging the PLL mode to lock the Internal Main Oscillator frequency to the 32 kHz Crystal
Oscillator frequency.
Note 1 The internal low speed oscillator switches back
instantaneously by writing the 32K Select control bit to zero.
Note 2 If the proper settings are selected in PSoC
Designer, the above steps are automatically done in
boot.asm.
Note 3 Transitions between oscillator domains may produce glitches on the 32K clock bus. Functions that require
accuracy on the 32K clock should be enabled after the transition in oscillator domains.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
67
10. 32 kHz Crystal Oscillator (ECO)
10.1.1
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
10.2
ECO External Components
The External Crystal Oscillator component connections and
selections are illustrated in Figure 10-1.
Vdd
C2
XTALIn
P1[1]
XTALOut
P1[0]
Crystal
Figure 10-1. External Crystal Oscillator Connections
■
■
Crystal – 32.768 kHz watch crystal such as Edson C002RX.
Capacitors – C1, C2 use NPO ceramic caps.
Use the equation below if you do not employ PLL mode.
C1 = C2 = 25 pF - (Package Cap) - (Board Parasitic Cap)
If you do employ PLL with the External Crystal Oscillator,
see Application Note AN2027 under Support at
http://www.Cypress.com/ for equation and details. An error
of 1 pF in C1 and C2 gives about a 3 ppm error in frequency.
Table 10-2: Typical Package Capacitance on Crystal
Pins
Package
8 PDIP
10.2.1
OSC_CR0 Register
Bit 7: 32k Select. By default, the 32 kHz clock source is
the Internal Low-Speed Oscillator (ILO). Optionally, the
External Crystal Oscillator (ECO) may be selected.
Vdd
C1
Register Definitions
Package Capacitance
2.8 pF
8 SOIC
2.0 pF
20 PDIP
3.0 pF
20 SSOP
2.6 pF
20 SOIC
2.5 pF
32 MLF
2.0 pF
Bit 6: PLL Mode. This is the only bit in the OSC_CR0 register that directly influences the PLL. When set, this bit
enables the PLL. The EXTCLKEN bit in the OSC_CR2 register should be set low during PLL operation.
Bit 5: No Buzz. Normally, when the Sleep bit is set in the
CPU_SCR register, all chip systems are powered down,
including the Band Gap reference. However, to facilitate the
detection of POR and LVD events at a rate higher than the
Sleep Interval, the Band Gap circuit is powered up periodically for about 60 us at the Sleep System Duty cycle (set in
ECO_TR), which is independent of the Sleep Interval and
typically higher. When the No Buzz bit is set, the Sleep System Duty Cycle value is overridden, and the Band Gap circuit is forced to be on during sleep. This results in faster
response to an LVD or POR event (continuous detection as
opposed to periodic), at the expense of slightly higher average sleep current.
Bits 4 and 3: Sleep[1:0]. The available sleep interval
selections are shown in Table 10-3. It must be remembered
that when the ILO is the selected 32 kHz clock source, sleep
intervals are approximate.
Table 10-3. Sleep Interval Selections
Sleep Interval
OSC_CR[4:3]
Sleep Timer
Clocks
Sleep Period
(nominal)
Watchdog
Period (nominal)
00b (default)
64
1.95 ms
01b
512
15.6 ms
6 ms
47 ms
10b
4096
125 ms
375 ms
11b
32,768
1 sec
3 sec
Bits 2, 1 and 0: CPU Speed[2:0]. The PSoC M8C may
operate over a range of CPU clock speeds (Table 10-4),
allowing the M8C’s performance and power requirements to
be tailored to the application.
The reset value for the CPU Speed bits is zero. Therefore,
the default CPU speed is one-eighth of the clock source.
The internal main oscillator is the default clock source for
the CPU speed circuit; therefore, the default CPU speed is 3
MHz.
The CPU frequency is changed with a write to the
OSC_CR0 register. There are eight frequencies generated
from a power-of-2 divide circuit, which are selected by a 3bit code. At any given time, the CPU 8:1 clock multiplexer is
selecting one of the available frequencies, which is re-synchronized to the 24 MHz master clock at the output.
68
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
10. 32 kHz Crystal Oscillator (ECO)
Regardless of the CPU speed bit’s setting, if the actual CPU
speed is greater than 12 MHz, the 24 MHz operating
requirements apply. An example of this scenario is a device
that is configured to use an external clock, which is supplying a frequency of 20 MHz. If the CPU speed register’s
value is 0b011, the CPU clock will be 20 MHz. Therefore,
the supply voltage requirements for the device are the same
as if the part was operating at 24 MHz off of the internal
main oscillator. The operating voltage requirements are not
relaxed until the CPU speed is at 12.0 MHz or less.
Table 10-4. OSC_CR0[2:0] Bits: CPU Speed
Bits
Internal Main Oscillator
External Clock
000b
3 MHz
EXTCLK/ 8
001b
6 MHz
EXTCLK/ 4
010b
12 MHz
EXTCLK/ 2
011b
24 MHz
EXTCLK/ 1
100b
1.5 MHz
EXTCLK/ 16
101b
750 kHz
EXTCLK/ 32
110b
187.5 kHz
EXTCLK/ 128
111b
93.7 kHz
EXTCLK/ 256
For additional information, reference the OSC_CR0 register
on page 165.
10.2.2
ECO_TR Register
The External Crystal Oscillator Trim register (ECO_TR) sets
the adjustment for the External Crystal Oscillator. The
device specific value placed in this register at boot time is
based on factory testing. This register does not adjust the
frequency of the External Crystal Oscillator. It is recommended that the user not alter the bits in this register.
Bits 7 and 6: PSSDC[1:0]. These bits are used to set the
sleep duty cycle.
Bits 5 to 0: Reserved.
For additional information, reference the ECO_TR register
on page 173.
10.2.3
CPU_SCR1 Register
The CPU_SCR1 register is used to convey status and control of events related to internal resets and watchdog reset.
Bits 7 to 1: Reserved.
Bit 0: IRAMDIS. The Initialize RAM Disable bit is a control
bit that is readable and writeable. The default value for this
bit is 0, which indicates that the maximum amount of SRAM
should be initialized on reset to a value of 00h. When the bit
is set, the minimum amount of SRAM is initialized after a
watchdog reset. For more information on this bit, see the
“SROM Function Descriptions” on page 46.
For additional information, reference the CPU_SCR1 register on page 143.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
69
10. 32 kHz Crystal Oscillator (ECO)
70
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
11. Phase Locked Loop (PLL)
This chapter briefly presents the Phase Locked Loop (PLL) and its associated registers.
Table 11-1. Phase Locked Loop Registers
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
1,E0h
Address
OSC_CR0
32k Select
PLL Mode
No Buzz
1,E2h
OSC_CR2
PLLGAIN
11.1
Name
Architectural Description
Although the PLL tracks crystal accuracy, it requires time to
lock onto the reference frequency when first starting. The
length of time depends on the PLLGAIN controlled by bit 7
of the OSC_CR2 register. If this bit is held low, the lock time
will be less than 10 ms. If this bit is held high, the lock time
will be on the order of 50 ms. After lock is achieved, it is recommended that this bit be forced high to decrease the jitter
on the output. If longer lock time is tolerable, the PLLGAIN
bit can be held high all the time.
After the External Crystal Oscillator has been selected and
enabled, the following procedure should be followed to
enable the PLL and allow for proper frequency lock.
■
■
■
Select a CPU frequency of 3 MHz or less.
Enable the PLL.
Wait between 10 and 50 ms, depending on the
OSC_CR2 register bit 7.
Set CPU to a faster frequency, if desired. To do this,
write the bits CPU Speed[2:0] in the OSC_CR0 register.
The CPU frequency will immediately change when these
bits are set.
If the proper settings are selected in PSoC Designer, the
above steps are automatically done in boot.asm.
December 22, 2003
Bit 3
Bit 2
Sleep[1:0]
11.2
11.2.1
Bit 1
Bit 0
CPU Speed[2:0]
EXTCLKEN
A Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) function generates the system
clock with crystal accuracy. It is designed to provide a
23.986 MHz oscillator when utilized with an external 32.768
kHz crystal.
■
Bit 4
IMODIS
Access
RW : 00
SYSCLKX2
DIS
RW : 00
Register Definitions
OSC_CR0 Register
Bit 7: 32k Select. By default, the 32 kHz clock source is
the Internal Low-Speed Oscillator (ILO). Optionally, the
External Crystal Oscillator (ECO) may be selected.
Bit 6: PLL Mode. This is the only bit in the OSC_CR0 register that directly influences the PLL. When set, this bit
enables the PLL. The EXTCLKEN bit in the OSC_CR2 register should be set low during PLL operation.
Bit 5: No Buzz. Normally, when the Sleep bit is set in the
CPU_SCR register, all chip systems are powered down,
including the Band Gap reference. However, to facilitate the
detection of POR and LVD events at a rate higher than the
Sleep Interval, the Band Gap circuit is powered up periodically for about 60 us at the Sleep System Duty cycle (set in
ECO_TR), which is independent of the Sleep Interval and
typically higher. When the No Buzz bit is set, the Sleep System Duty Cycle value is overridden, and the Band Gap circuit is forced to be on during sleep. This results in faster
response to an LVD or POR event (continuous detection as
opposed to periodic), at the expense of slightly higher average sleep current.
Bits 4 and 3: Sleep[1:0]. The available sleep interval
selections are shown in Table 11-2. It must be remembered
that when the ILO is the selected 32 kHz clock source, sleep
intervals are approximate.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
71
11. Phase Locked Loop (PLL)
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
11.2.2
Table 11-2. Sleep Interval Selections
Sleep Interval
OSC_CR[4:3]
00b (default)
Sleep Timer
Clocks
64
Sleep Period
(nominal)
1.95 ms
Watchdog
Period (nominal)
6 ms
01b
512
15.6 ms
47 ms
10b
4096
125 ms
375 ms
11b
32,768
1 sec
3 sec
Bits 2, 1, and 0: CPU Speed[2:0]. The PSoC M8C may
operate over a range of CPU clock speeds (Table 11-3),
allowing the M8C’s performance and power requirements to
be tailored to the application.
The reset value for the CPU Speed bits is zero. Therefore,
the default CPU speed is one-eighth of the clock source.
The internal main oscillator is the default clock source for
the CPU speed circuit; therefore, the default CPU speed is 3
MHz.
The CPU frequency is changed with a write to the
OSC_CR0 register. There are eight frequencies generated
from a power-of-2 divide circuit, which are selected by a 3bit code. At any given time, the CPU 8:1 clock multiplexer is
selecting one of the available frequencies, which is re-synchronized to the 24 MHz master clock at the output.
Regardless of the CPU speed bit’s setting, if the actual CPU
speed is greater than 12 MHz, the 24 MHz operating
requirements apply. An example of this scenario is a device
that is configured to use an external clock, which is supplying a frequency of 20 MHz. If the CPU speed register’s
value is 0b011, the CPU clock will be 20 MHz. Therefore,
the supply voltage requirements for the device are the same
as if the part was operating at 24 MHz off of the internal
main oscillator. The operating voltage requirements are not
relaxed until the CPU speed is at 12.0 MHz or less.
OSC_CR2 Register
Bit 7: PLLGAIN. This is the only bit in the OSC_CR2 register that directly influences the PLL. When set, this bit keeps
the PLL in a low gain mode.
Bits 6 to 3: Reserved.
Bit 2: EXTCLKEN. When the EXTCLKEN bit is set, the
external clock becomes the source for the internal clock
tree, SYSCLK, which drives most chip clocking functions. All
external and internal signals, including the 32 kHz clock,
whether derived from the internal low speed oscillator (ILO)
or the crystal oscillator, are synchronized to this clock
source. If an external clock is enabled, PLL mode should be
off.
Bit 1: IMODIS. When set, the Internal Main Oscillator is disabled. If the doubler is enabled (SYSCLKX2DIS=0), the
Internal Main oscillator will be forced on.
Bit 0: SYSCLKX2DIS. When set, the Internal Main Oscillator’s doubler is disabled. This will result in a reduction of
overall device power, on the order of 1 mA. It is advised that
any application that does not require this doubled clock
should have it turned off.
For additional information, reference the OSC_CR2 register
on page 167.
Table 11-3. OSC_CR0[2:0] Bits: CPU Speed
Bits
Internal Main Oscillator
External Clock
000b
3 MHz
EXTCLK/ 8
001b
6 MHz
EXTCLK/ 4
010b
12 MHz
EXTCLK/ 2
011b
24 MHz
EXTCLK/ 1
100b
1.5 MHz
EXTCLK/ 16
101b
750 kHz
EXTCLK/ 32
110b
187.5 kHz
EXTCLK/ 128
111b
93.7 kHz
EXTCLK/ 256
For additional information, reference the OSC_CR0 register
on page 165.
72
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
12. Sleep and Watchdog
This chapter discusses the Sleep and Watchdog operations and its associated registers.
Table 12-1. Sleep and Watchdog Registers
Address
Name
0,E0h
INT_MSK0
0,E3h
RES_WDT
x,FEh
CPU_SCR1
1,E0h
OSC_CR0
1,E9h
ILO_TR
1,EBh
ECO_TR
x,FFh
CPU_SCR0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
VC3
Sleep
GPIO
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 0
Access
Analog 1
Bit 2
Bit 1
V Monitor
RW : 00
ECO EX
IRAMDIS
RW : 00
WDSL_Clear
W : 00
ECO EXW
32k Select
PLL Mode
No Buzz
Sleep[1:0]
CPU Speed[2:0]
Bias Trim[1:0]
RW : 00
Freq Trim[3:0]
W : 00
PSSDC[1:0]
GIES
W : 00
WDRS
PORS
Sleep
STOP
W : XX
LEGEND
X: The value for power on reset is unknown.
x: An “x” before the comma in the address field indicates that this register can be accessed or written to no matter what bank is used.
*: This bit is read only.
The goal of sleep operation is to reduce average power consumption as much as possible. The system has a sleep
state that can be initiated under firmware control. In this
state, the CPU is stopped at an instruction boundary and the
24/48 MHz oscillator, the Flash memory module, and bandgap-voltage reference are powered down. The only blocks
that remain in operation are the 32 kHz oscillator (external
crystal or internal), PSoC blocks clocked from the 32 kHz
clock selection, and the supply voltage monitor circuit.
Analog PSoC blocks have individual power down settings
that are controlled by firmware, independently of the sleep
state. Continuous time analog blocks may remain in operation, since they do not require a clock source. Typically,
however, switched capacitor analog blocks will not operate
since the internal sources of clocking for these blocks are
stopped.
The system can only wake up from sleep as a result of an
interrupt or reset event. The Sleep timer can provide periodic interrupts to allow the system to wake up, poll peripherals, or do real-time functions and then go to sleep again.
GPIO (pin) interrupts, supply monitor interrupt, analog column interrupts, and timers clocked externally or from the 32
kHz clock are examples of asynchronous interrupts that can
also be used to wake the system up.
The Watchdog Timer (WDT) circuit is designed to assert a
hardware reset to the device after a pre-programmed interval, unless it is periodically serviced in firmware. This func-
December 22, 2003
tionality serves to reboot the system in the event of a CPU
crash. It can also restart the system from the CPU halt state.
Once the WDT is enabled, it can only be disabled by an
external reset (XRES) or a power on reset (POR). A WDT
reset will leave the WDT enabled. Therefore, if the WDT is
used in an application, all code (including initialization code)
must be written as though the WDT is enabled.
12.1
Architectural Description
Device components that are involved in sleep and watchdog
operation are the selected 32 kHz clock (external crystal or
internal), the Sleep timer, the sleep bit in the CPU_SCR0
register, the sleep circuit (to sequence going into and coming out of sleep), the band gap refresh circuit (to periodically
refresh the reference voltage during sleep), and the Watchdog timer.
12.1.1
32 kHz Clock Selection
By default, the 32 kHz clock source is the Internal LowSpeed Oscillator (ILO). Optionally, the External Crystal
Oscillator (ECO) may be activated. This selection is made in
bit 7 of the OSC_CR0 register. Selecting the ECO as the
active source for the 32 kHz clock allows the Sleep timer
and sleep interrupt to be used in real-time applications.
Regardless of the clock source selected, the 32 kHz clock
plays a key role in sleep functionality. It runs continuously
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
73
12. Sleep and Watchdog
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
and is used to sequence system wakeup. It is also used to
periodically refresh the bandgap voltage during sleep.
12.1.2
Sleep Timer
The Sleep timer is a 15-bit, up counter clocked by the currently selected 32 kHz clock source, either the ILO or ECO.
This timer is always enabled. The exception to this is within
an ICE (in-circuit emulator) in debugger mode and the Stop
bit in the CPU_SCR0 is set; the Sleep timer is disabled, so
that the user will not get continual Watchdog resets when a
breakpoint is hit in the debugger environment.
If the associated Sleep timer interrupt is enabled, a periodic
interrupt to the CPU is generated based on the sleep interval selected from the OSC_CR0 register. The Sleep timer
functionality does not need to be directly associated with
sleep state. It can be used as a general-purpose timer interrupt regardless of sleep state.
The reset state of the Sleep timer is a count value of all
zeros. There are two ways to reset the Sleep timer. Any
hardware reset, i.e., power-on reset (POR), external reset
(XRES) or Watchdog reset (WDR) will reset the Sleep timer.
There is also a method that allows the user to reset the
Sleep timer in firmware. A write of 38h to the RES_WDT
register clears the Sleep timer. (Note: Any write to
RES_WDT register also clears the Watchdog timer.) Clearing the Sleep timer may be done at anytime to synchronize
the Sleep timer operation to CPU processing. A good example of this is after POR. The CPU hold-off due to voltage
ramp, etc., may be significant. In addition, a significant
amount of program initialization may be required. However,
the Sleep timer starts counting immediately after POR and
will be at an arbitrary count when user code begins execution. In this case, it may be desirable to clear the Sleep timer
before enabling the sleep interrupt initially, to ensure that the
first sleep period will be a full interval.
12.1.3
Sleep Bit
Sleep is initiated in firmware by setting the SLEEP bit (bit 3)
in the System Control register (CPU_SCR0). To wake up the
system, this register bit is cleared asynchronously by any
enabled interrupt. However, there are two special features of
this register bit that ensures proper sleep operation. First,
the write to set the register bit is blocked, if an interrupt is
about to be taken on that instruction boundary (immediately
after the write. Second, there is a hardware interlock to
ensure that once set, the sleep bit may not be cleared by an
incoming interrupt until the sleep circuit has finished performing the sleep sequence and that the system wide power
down signal has been asserted. This prevents the sleep circuit from being interrupted in the middle of the process of
system power down, possibly leaving the system in an indeterminate state.
74
12.2
Application Description
The following are notes regarding sleep as it relates to firmware and application issues.
1. If an interrupt is pending, enabled, and scheduled to be
taken at the instruction boundary after the write to the
sleep bit, the system will not go to sleep. The instruction
will still execute, but it will not be able to set the SLEEP
bit in the CPU_SCR0 register. Instead, the interrupt will
be taken and the effect of the sleep instruction is
ignored.
2. The global interrupt enable (CPU_F register) does not
need to be enabled to wake the system out of sleep
state. Individual interrupt enables, as set in the interrupt
mask registers, are sufficient. If the global interrupt
enable is not set, the CPU will not service the ISR associated with that interrupt. However, the system will wake
up and continue executing instructions from the point at
which it went to sleep. In this case, the user must manually clear the pending interrupt or subsequently enable
the global interrupt enable bit and let the CPU take the
ISR. If a pending interrupt is not cleared, it will be continuously asserted, and although the sleep bit may be written and the sleep sequence executed, as soon as the
device enters Sleep mode, the sleep bit will be cleared
by the pending interrupt and Sleep mode will be exited.
3. On wake up, the instruction immediately after the sleep
instruction will be executed before the interrupt service
routine (if enabled). The instruction after the sleep
instruction is pre-fetched before the system actually
goes to sleep. Therefore, when an interrupt occurs to
wake the system up, the pre-fetched instruction is executed and then the interrupt service routine is executed.
(If the global interrupt enable is not set, instruction execution will just continue where it left off before sleep).
4. If PLL mode is enabled, CPU frequency must be
reduced to 3 MHz before going to sleep. Since the PLL
will overshoot as it attempts to re-lock after wakeup, the
CPU frequency must be relatively low. It is recommended to wait 10 ms after wakeup, before normal CPU
operating frequency may be restored.
5. Analog power must be turned off by firmware, before
going to sleep. The system sleep state does not control
the analog array. There are individual power controls for
each analog block and global power controls in the reference block. These power controls must be manipulated
by firmware.
6. If the global interrupt enable bit is disabled, it can be
safely enabled just before the instruction that writes the
sleep bit. It is usually undesirable to get an interrupt on
the instruction boundary, just before writing the sleep bit.
This means that on the return from interrupt, the sleep
command will be executed, possibly bypassing any firmware preparations that need to be made in order to go to
sleep. To prevent this, disable interrupts before preparations are made. After sleep preparations, enable global
interrupts and write the sleep bit with the two consecutive instructions as follows.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
12. Sleep and Watchdog
and f,~01h // disable global interrupts
(prepare for sleep, could be many instructions)
or f,01h // enable global interrupts
mov reg[ffh],08h // Set the sleep bit
Due to the timing of the global interrupt enable instruction, it is not possible for an interrupt to occur immediately after that instruction. The earliest the interrupt could
occur is after the next instruction (write to the sleep bit)
has been executed. Therefore, if an interrupt is pending,
the sleep instruction will be executed; but as described in
#1, the sleep instruction will be ignored. The first instruction executed after the ISR will be the instruction after
sleep.
12.3
12.3.1
Register Definitions
INT_MSK0 Register
The INT_MSK0 register holds bits that are used by several
different resources. The digital clocks only use bit 7 of the
INT_MSK0 register for the VC3 clock and bits zero through
six are used by other resources. The Sleep bit (bit 6) controls whether the Sleep timer may be used as an interrupt
source. For a full discussion of the INT_MSK0 register, see
the Interrupt Controller chapter on page 51.
For additional information, reference the INT_MSK0 register
on page 134.
12.3.2
Bit 5: No Buzz. Normally, when the Sleep bit is set in the
CPU_SCR register, all chip systems are powered down,
including the Band Gap reference. However, to facilitate the
detection of POR and LVD events at a rate higher than the
Sleep Interval, the Band Gap circuit is powered up periodically for about 60 us at the Sleep System Duty cycle (set in
ECO_TR), which is independent of the Sleep Interval and
typically more frequent. When the No Buzz bit is set, the
Sleep System Duty Cycle value is overridden, and the Band
Gap circuit is forced to be on during sleep. This results in
faster response to an LVD or POR event (continuous detection as opposed to periodic), at the expense of slightly
higher average sleep current.
Bits 4 and 3: Sleep[1:0]. The available sleep interval
selections are shown in Table 12-2. It must be remembered
that when the ILO is the selected 32 kHz clock source, sleep
intervals are approximate.
Table 12-2. Sleep Interval Selections
Sleep Interval
OSC_CR[4:3]
Sleep Timer
Clocks
Sleep Period
(nominal)
Watchdog
Period
(nominal)
00b (default)
64
1.95 ms
6 ms
01b
512
15.6 ms
47 ms
10b
4096
125 ms
375 ms
11b
32,768
1 sec
3 sec
RES_WDT Register
This write-only register has two functions. A write of any
value will clear the Watchdog Timer. A write of 38h will clear
both the Watchdog Timer (WDT) and the Sleep Timer. It is
important to recall that the WDT is designed to timeout at 3
rollover events of the Sleep Timer. Therefore, if only the
WDT is cleared, the next Watchdog Reset will occur anywhere from two to three times the current Sleep Interval setting. If the Sleep Timer is near the beginning of its count, the
WD timeout will be closer to three times. However, if the
Sleep Timer is very close to its terminal count, the WD timeout will be closer to two times. To ensure a full three times
timeout, both the WDT and the Sleep Timer may be cleared.
In applications that need a real-time clock, and thus cannot
reset the Sleep Timer when clearing the WDT, the duty cycle
at which the WDT must be cleared should be no greater
than two times of the Sleep Interval.
For additional information, reference the RES_WDT register
on page 137.
12.3.3
enables the PLL. The EXTCLKEN bit in the OSC_CR2 register should be set low during PLL operation.
OSC_CR0 Register
Bit 7: 32k Select. By default, the 32 kHz clock source is
the Internal Low-Speed Oscillator (ILO). Optionally, the
External Crystal Oscillator (ECO) may be selected.
Bits 2, 1, and 0: CPU Speed[2:0]. The PSoC M8C may
operate over a range of CPU clock speeds (Table 12-3),
allowing the M8C’s performance and power requirements to
be tailored to the application.
The reset value for the CPU Speed bits is zero. Therefore,
the default CPU speed is one-eighth of the clock source.
The internal main oscillator is the default clock source for
the CPU speed circuit; therefore, the default CPU speed is 3
MHz. See “External Clock” on page 254 for more information on the supported frequencies for externally supplied
clocks.
The CPU frequency is changed with a write to the
OSC_CR0 register. There are eight frequencies generated
from a power-of-2 divide circuit, which are selected by a 3bit code. At any given time, the CPU 8:1 clock multiplexer is
selecting one of the available frequencies, which is re-synchronized to the 24 MHz master clock at the output.
Regardless of the CPU speed bit’s setting, if the actual CPU
speed is greater than 12 MHz, the 24 MHz operating
requirements apply. An example of this scenario is a device
that is configured to use an external clock, which is supplying a frequency of 20 MHz. If the CPU speed register’s
value is 011b, the CPU clock will be 20 MHz. Therefore, the
supply voltage requirements for the device are the same as
if the part was operating at 24 MHz off of the internal main
Bit 6: PLL Mode. This is the only bit in the OSC_CR0 register that directly influences the PLL. When set, this bit
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
75
12. Sleep and Watchdog
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
oscillator. The operating voltage requirements are not
relaxed until the CPU speed is at 12.0 MHz or less.
Table 12-3. OSC_CR0[2:0] Bits: CPU Speed
Bits
Internal Main Oscillator
External Clock
000b
3 MHz
EXTCLK/ 8
001b
6 MHz
EXTCLK/ 4
010b
12 MHz
EXTCLK/ 2
011b
24 MHz
EXTCLK/ 1
100b
1.5 MHz
EXTCLK/ 16
101b
750 kHz
EXTCLK/ 32
110b
187.5 kHz
EXTCLK/ 128
111b
93.7 kHz
EXTCLK/ 256
The External Crystal Oscillator Trim register (ECO_TR) sets
the adjustment for the External Crystal Oscillator. The value
placed in this register is based on factory testing. This register does not adjust the frequency of the External Crystal
Oscillator. It is recommended that the user does not alter the
bits in this register.
Bits 5 to 0: Reserved.
For additional information, reference the ECO_TR register
on page 173.
12.3.7
CPU_SCR1 Register
This register contains bits (3 and 2) that ensure high Watchdog Reset integrity. Since the 32 kHz oscillator source may
be programmatically switched between the ECO and ILO,
the switch-over must only be allowed to occur if the external
crystal system actually exists. These bits are not reset by a
Watchdog Reset event.
Bits 7 to 1: Reserved.
Bit 0: IRAMDIS. The Initialize RAM Disable bit is a control
bit that is readable and writeable. The default value for this
bit is 0, which indicates that the maximum amount of SRAM
should be initialized on reset to a value of 00h. When the bit
is set, the minimum amount of SRAM is initialized after a
watchdog reset. For more information on this bit, see the
“SROM Function Descriptions” on page 46.
For additional information, reference the CPU_SCR1 register on page 143.
12.3.5
ECO_TR Register
Bits 7 and 6: PSSDC[1:0]. These bits are used to set the
sleep duty cycle.
For additional information, reference the OSC_CR0 register
on page 165.
12.3.4
12.3.6
ILO_TR Register
This register sets the adjustment for the ILO. The device
specific value, placed in the trim bits of this register at boot
time, is based on factory testing.
It is strongly recommended that the user not alter the
register value.
CPU_SCR0 Register
The bits of the CPU_SCR0 register are used to convey status and control of events for various functions of a PSoC
device.
Bit 7: GIES. The Global Interrupt Enable Status bit is a
read only status bit and its use is discouraged. The GIES bit
is a legacy bit which was used to provide the ability to read
the GIE bit of the CPU_F register. However, the CPU_F register is now readable. When this bit is set, it indicates that
the GIE bit in the CPU_F register is also set which, in turn,
indicates that the microprocessor will service interrupts.
Bit 6: Reserved.
Bit 5: WDRS. The WatchDog Reset Status bit is normally
zero, but set whenever a watchdog reset occurs. The bit is
readable and clearable by writing a zero to its bit position in
the CPU_SCR0 register. This bit may not be set.
Bit 4: PORS. The Power-On Reset Status (PORS) bit and
watchdog enable bit will be set automatically by a POR or
external reset. If the bit is cleared by user code, the watchdog timer will be enabled. Once cleared, the only way to
reset the PORS bit is to go through a POR or external reset.
Thus, there is no way to disable the watchdog timer, other
than to go through a POR or external reset.
Bit 3: Sleep. The Sleep bit is used to enter low power
Sleep mode when set, as described in this chapter.
Bits 7 and 6: Reserved.
Bits 2 and 1: Reserved.
Bits 5 and 4: Bias Trim.
Bits 3 to 0: Freq Trim. Four bits are used to trim the frequency. The value is set in the factory and should not be
changed.
For additional information, reference the ILO_TR register on
page 171.
Bit 0: STOP. The STOP bit is readable and writeable.
When set, the PSoC M8C will stop executing code until a
reset event occurs. This can be either a POR, watchdog
reset, or external reset. If an application wants to stop code
execution until a reset, the preferred method would be to
use the HALT instruction rather than a register write to this
bit.
For additional information, reference the CPU_SCR0 register on page 144.
76
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
12.4
12.4.1
12. Sleep and Watchdog
Timing Diagrams
Sleep Sequence
The SLEEP bit is an input into the sleep logic circuit. This
circuit is designed to sequence the device into and out of the
hardware sleep state. The hardware sequence to put the
device to sleep is shown in Figure 12-1 and is defined as follows.
1. Firmware sets the SLEEP bit in the CPU_SCR0 register.
The Bus Request (BRQ) signal to the CPU is immediately asserted. This is a request by the system to halt
CPU operation at an instruction boundary.
2. Due to the specific timing of the register write, the CPU
issues a Bus Request Acknowledge (BRA) on the following positive edge of the CPU clock.
Firmware write to
SCR SLEEP bit
causes an
immediate BRQ.
CPU captures
BRQ on next
CPUCLK edge.
3. The sleep logic waits for the following negative edge of
the CPU clock and then asserts a system-wide Power
Down (PD) signal. In Figure 12-1, the CPU is halted and
the system-wide power down signal is asserted.
The system-wide PD (power down) signal controls three
major circuit blocks: The Flash memory module, the internal
main oscillator (24/48 MHz oscillator, or IMO), and the bandgap voltage reference. These circuits transition into a zero
power state. The only operational circuits on chip are the
ILO (or optional ECO), the bandgap refresh circuit, and the
supply voltage monitor circuit. Note that the system sleep
state does not apply to the analog array. Power down settings for individual analog blocks and references must be
done in firmware, prior to executing the sleep instruction.
CPU
responds
with a BRA.
On the falling edge of
CPUCLK, PD is asserted.
The 24/48 MHz system clock
is halted, the Flash and
bandgap are powered down.
CPUCLK
IOW
SLEEP
BRQ
BRA
PD
Figure 12-1. Sleep Sequence
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
77
12. Sleep and Watchdog
12.4.2
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Wake Up Sequence
Once asleep, the only event that can wake the system up is
an interrupt. The global interrupt enable of the CPU flag register does not need to be set. Any unmasked interrupt will
wake the system up. It is optional for the CPU to actually
take the interrupt after the wakeup sequence.
The wake up sequence is synchronized to the 32 kHz clock
for purposes of sequencing a startup delay, to allow the
Flash memory module enough time to power up before the
CPU asserts the first read access. Another reason for the
delay is to allow the IMO, Bandgap, and LVD/POR circuits
time to settle before actually being used in the system. As
shown in Figure 12-2, the wake up sequence is as follows.
1. The wake up interrupt occurs and is synchronized by the
negative edge of the 32 kHz clock.
Sleep Timer or GPIO
interrupt occurs.
2. At the following positive edge of the 32 kHz clock, the
system wide PD signal is negated. The Flash memory
module, IMO, and bandgap circuit are all powered up to
a normal operating state.
3. At the following positive edge of the 32 kHz clock, the
current values for the precision POR and LVD have settled and are sampled.
4. At the following negative edge of the 32 kHz clock (after
about 15 µs, nominal), the BRQ signal is negated by the
sleep logic circuit. On the following CPUCLK, BRA is
negated by the CPU and instruction execution resumes.
Note that in Figure 12-2 fixed function clocks, such as
Flash, IMO, and bandgap, have about 15 µs to start up.
The wake-up times (interrupt to CPU operational) will range
from 75 to 105 µs.
Interrupt is double sampled by
32K clock and PD is negated to
system.
CPU is restarted after 90
ms (nominal).
CLK32K
INT
LVD/PPOR is valid
SLEEP
PD
BANDGAP
LVD PPOR
ENABLE
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
LVD/POR
CPUCLK/
24 Mhz
(Not to Scale)
BRQ
BRA
CPU
Figure 12-2. Wakeup Sequence
78
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
12.4.3
12. Sleep and Watchdog
Bandgap Refresh
12.4.4
During normal operation, the bandgap circuit provides a
voltage reference (VREF) to the system, for use in the analog blocks, Flash, and low voltage detect (LVD) circuitry.
Normally, the bandgap output is connected directly to the
VREF signal. However, during sleep, the bandgap reference
generator block and LVD circuits are completely powered
down. The bandgap and LVD blocks are periodically reenabled during sleep in order to monitor for low voltage conditions.
This is accomplished by turning on the bandgap periodically,
allowing it time to start up for a full 32K clock period and
connecting it to VREF to refresh the reference voltage for
the following 32K clock period as shown in Figure 12-3.
During the second 32K clock period of the refresh cycle, the
LVD circuit is allowed to settle during the high time of the
32K clock. During the low period of the second 32K clock,
the LVD interrupt is allowed to occur.
Bandgap is turned on,
but not yet connected
to VREF.
Bandgap output is
connected to VREF.
Voltage is refreshed.
Bandgap is powered
down until next
refresh cycle.
CLK32K
Band Gap
Watchdog Timer (WDT)
On device boot up, the WDT is initially disabled. The PORS
bit in the System Control register controls the enabling of the
WDT. On boot, the PORS bit is initially set to '1', indicating
that either a POR or XRES event has occurred. The WDT is
enabled by clearing the PORS bit. Once this bit is cleared
and the Watchdog timer is enabled, it cannot be subsequently disabled (the PORS bit cannot be set to '1' in firmware, it can only be cleared). The only way to disable the
Watchdog function, after it is enabled, is through a subsequent POR or XRES. Although the WDT is disabled during
the first time through initialization code after a POR or
XRES, all code should be written as if it is enabled (i.e., the
WDT should be cleared periodically). This is because, in the
initialization code after a WDR event, the Watchdog Timer is
enabled, so all code must be cognizant of this.
The Watchdog timer is three counts of the Sleep Timer interrupt output and therefore, the watchdog interval is three
times the selected Sleep Timer interval. The available selections for the Watchdog interval are shown in Table 12-2.
When the Sleep Timer interrupt is asserted, the watchdog
timer increments. When the counter reaches three, a terminal count is asserted. This terminal count is registered by
the 32 kHz clock. Therefore, the WDR (Watchdog Reset)
signal will go high after the following edge of the 32 kHz
clock and be held asserted for 1 cycle (30us nominal). The
flip-flop that registers the WDT terminal count is not reset by
the WDR signal when it is asserted, but is reset by all other
resets. This timing is shown in Figure 12-4.
VREF
VREF is slowly
leaking to ground.
Low voltage monitors are
active during CLK32 low.
Figure 12-3. Bandgap Refresh Operation
CLK32K
SLEEP INT
WD COUNT
The rate at which the refresh occurs is related to the 32 kHz
clock and controlled by the Power System Sleep Duty Cycle
(PDDSC, bits [7:6] of the ECO_TR register). Table 12-4 enumerates the available selections. The default setting (128
sleep timer counts) is applicable for many applications, giving a typical average device current under 5 µA.
Table 12-4. Power System Sleep Duty Cycle Selections
PSSDC
Sleep Timer Counts
00b (default)
256
Period (Nominal)
8 ms
01b
1024
31.2 ms
10b
64
2 ms
11b
16
500 us
2
3
0
WD RESET
(WDR)
Figure 12-4. Watchdog Reset
Once enabled, the WDT must be periodically cleared in firmware. This is accomplished with a write to the RES_WDT
register. This write is data independent, so any write will
clear the Watchdog timer. (Note: A write of 38h will also
clear the Sleep timer). If for any reason the firmware fails to
clear the WDT within the selected interval, the circuit will
assert WDR to the device. WDR is equivalent in effect to
any other reset. All internal registers are set to their reset
state. An important aspect to remember about WDT resets
is that RAM initialization can be disabled (IRAMDIS in
CPU_SCR1). In this case, the SRAM contents are unaffected, so that when a WDR occurs, program variables are
persistent through this reset.
In practical application, it is important to know that the
Watchdog Timer interval can be anywhere between two and
three times the Sleep Timer interval. The only way to guarantee that the WDT interval is a full 3X of the Sleep interval
is to clear the Sleep timer (write 38h) when clearing the
WDT register. However, this is not possible in applications
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
79
12. Sleep and Watchdog
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
that use the Sleep timer as a real-time clock. In the case
where firmware clears the WDT register without clearing the
Sleep timer, this can occur at any point in a given Sleep
Timer interval. If it occurs just before the terminal count of a
Sleep Timer interval, the resulting WDT interval will be just
over 2X of the Sleep Timer interval.
12.5
Power Consumption
Sleep mode power consumption consists of the following
items. The typical block currents shown do not represent
maximums. These currents do not include any analog block
currents that may be on during sleep mode.
Table 12-5. Continuous Currents
IPOR
1 uA
ICLK32 (ILO/ECO)
1 uA
While the CLK32 can be turned off in sleep, this mode is not
useful since it makes it impossible to restart unless an IPOR
reset occurs. (The sleep bit can’t be cleared without
CLK32.) During the sleep mode buzz, the band-gap is on for
two cycles and the LVD circuitry is on for one cycle. Timeaveraged currents from periodic sleep mode ‘buzz’, with
periodic count of N, are listed in Table 12-6.
Table 12-6. Time-Averaged Currents
IBG (Band-gap)
(2/N) * 60 uA
ILVD (LVD comparators)
(2/N) * 50 uA
Table 12-7 lists example currents for N=256 and N=1024.
Device leakage currents add to the totals in the table.
Table 12-7. Example Currents
N=256
N=1024
IPOR
1
1
CLK32
1
1
IBG
0.46
0.12
ILVD
0.4
0.1
Total
2.9 uA
2.2 uA
80
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
SECTION C
REGISTER REFERENCE
The Register Reference section discusses the registers of the PSoC device. It lists all the registers in mapping tables, in offset order. For easy reference, each register is linked to a detailed description located in the following chapter. This section
encompasses the following chapter:
■
Register Details on page 85
Register Conventions
Register Mapping Tables
The register conventions specific to this section and the
Register Details chapter are listed in the following table.
The PSoC device has a total register address space of 512
bytes. The register space is also referred to as IO space and
is broken into two parts. The XOI bit in the Flag register
determines which bank the user is currently in. When the
XOI bit is set, the user is said to be in the “extended”
address space or the “configuration” registers.
Convention
Description
Empty, grayed-out
table cell
Illustrates a reserved bit or group of bits.
‘x’ before the comma
in an address
Indicates the register exists in register bank 1 and
register bank 2.
‘x’ in a register name
Indicates that there are multiple instances/address
ranges of the same register.
RW
Read and write register or bit(s)
R
Read register or bit(s)
W
Write register or bit(s)
L
Logical register or bit(s)
C
Clearable register or bit(s)
#
Access is bit specific
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
81
SECTION C REGISTER REFERENCE
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Register Map 0 Table: User Space
Page
80
C0
81
C1
82
C2
83
C3
ASD11CR0
84
RW
114
C4
ASD11CR1
85
RW
115
C5
ASD11CR2
86
RW
116
C6
ASD11CR3
87
RW
117
C7
88
C8
89
C9
8A
CA
8B
CB
8C
CC
8D
CD
8E
CE
8F
CF
90
D0
91
D1
92
D2
93
D3
ASC21CR0
94
RW
110
D4
ASC21CR1
95
RW
111
D5
ASC21CR2
96
RW
112
I2C_CFG
D6
ASC21CR3
97
RW
113
I2C_SCR
D7
98
I2C_DR
D8
99
I2C_MSCR
D9
9A
INT_CLR0
DA
9B
INT_CLR1
DB
9C
DC
9D
INT_CLR3
DD
9E
INT_MSK3
DE
9F
DF
A0
INT_MSK0
E0
A1
INT_MSK1
E1
A2
INT_VC
E2
A3
RES_WDT
E3
A4
DEC_DH
E4
A5
DEC_DL
E5
A6
DEC_CR0
E6
A7
DEC_CR1
E7
A8
E8
A9
E9
AA
EA
AB
EB
AC
EC
AD
ED
AE
EE
AF
EF
RDI0RI
B0
RW
118
F0
RDI0SYN
B1
RW
119
F1
RDI0IS
B2
RW
120
F2
RDI0LT0
B3
RW
121
F3
RDIOLT1
B4
RW
122
F4
RDI0RO0
B5
RW
123
F5
RDI0RO1
B6
RW
124
F6
B7
CPU_F
F7
B8
F8
B9
F9
BA
FA
BB
FB
BC
FC
BD
FD
BE
CPU_SCR1
FE
BF
CPU_SCR0
FF
# Access is bit specific. Refer to indicated page for details.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
Access
106
107
108
109
RW
#
RW
#
RW
RW
125
126
127
128
129
131
RW
RW
132
133
RW
RW
RC
W
RC
RC
RW
RW
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
RL
142
#
#
143
144
Addr
(0,Hex)
RW
RW
RW
RW
Name
102
103
104
105
Page
RW
#
#
RW
Access
101
Addr
(0,Hex)
82
RW
Name
Page
00
RW
86
40
01
RW
87
41
02
RW
88
42
03
RW
89
43
04
RW
86
44
05
RW
87
45
06
RW
88
46
07
RW
89
47
08
48
09
49
0A
4A
0B
4B
0C
4C
0D
4D
0E
4E
0F
4F
10
50
11
51
12
52
13
53
14
54
15
55
16
56
17
57
18
58
19
59
1A
5A
1B
5B
1C
5C
1D
5D
1E
5E
1F
5F
DBB00DR0
20
#
90
AMX_IN
60
DBB00DR1
21
W
91
61
DBB00DR2
22
RW
92
62
DBB00CR0
23
#
93
ARF_CR
63
DBB01DR0
24
#
90
CMP_CR0
64
DBB01DR1
25
W
91
ASY_CR
65
DBB01DR2
26
RW
92
CMP_CR1
66
DBB01CR0
27
#
93
67
DCB02DR0
28
#
90
68
DCB02DR1
29
W
91
69
DCB02DR2
2A
RW
92
6A
DCB02CR0
2B
#
93
6B
DCB03DR0
2C
#
90
6C
DCB03DR1
2D
W
91
6D
DCB03DR2
2E
RW
92
6E
DCB03CR0
2F
#
93
6F
30
70
31
71
32
72
33
73
34
ACB01CR3
74
35
ACB01CR0
75
36
ACB01CR1
76
37
ACB01CR2
77
38
78
39
79
3A
7A
3B
7B
3C
7C
3D
7D
3E
7E
3F
7F
Blank fields are Reserved and should not be accessed.
Access
Addr
(0,Hex)
Name
Page
Access
Addr
(0,Hex)
Name
PRT0DR
PRT0IE
PRT0GS
PRT0DM2
PRT1DR
PRT1IE
PRT1GS
PRT1DM2
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION C REGISTER REFERENCE
Register Map 1 Table: Configuration Space
Page
80
C0
81
C1
82
C2
83
C3
ASD11CR0
84
RW
114
C4
ASD11CR1
85
RW
115
C5
ASD11CR2
86
RW
116
C6
ASD11CR3
87
RW
117
C7
88
C8
89
C9
8A
CA
8B
CB
8C
CC
8D
CD
8E
CE
8F
CF
90
GDI_O_IN
D0
91
GDI_E_IN
D1
92
GDI_O_OU
D2
93
GDI_E_OU
D3
ASC21CR0
94
RW
110
D4
ASC21CR1
95
RW
111
D5
ASC21CR2
96
RW
112
D6
ASC21CR3
97
RW
113
D7
98
D8
99
D9
9A
DA
9B
DB
9C
DC
9D
DD
9E
OSC_CR4
DE
9F
OSC_CR3
DF
A0
OSC_CR0
E0
A1
OSC_CR1
E1
A2
OSC_CR2
E2
A3
VLT_CR
E3
A4
VLT_CMP
E4
A5
E5
A6
E6
A7
E7
A8
IMO_TR
E8
A9
ILO_TR
E9
AA
BDG_TR
EA
AB
ECO_TR
EB
AC
EC
AD
ED
AE
EE
AF
EF
RDI0RI
B0
RW
118
F0
RDI0SYN
B1
RW
119
F1
RDI0IS
B2
RW
120
F2
RDI0LT0
B3
RW
121
F3
RDIOLT1
B4
RW
122
F4
RDI0RO0
B5
RW
123
F5
RDI0RO1
B6
RW
124
F6
B7
CPU_F
F7
B8
F8
B9
F9
BA
FA
BB
FB
BC
FC
BD
FD
BE
CPU_SCR1
FE
BF
CPU_SCR0
FF
# Access is bit specific. Refer to indicated page for details.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
Access
106
107
108
109
RW
RW
RW
RW
159
160
161
162
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
R
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
W
W
RW
W
170
171
172
173
RL
142
#
#
143
144
Addr
(1,Hex)
RW
RW
RW
RW
Name
157
158
Page
RW
RW
Access
154
155
156
Addr
(1,Hex)
December 22, 2003
RW
RW
RW
Name
Page
00
RW
145
40
01
RW
146
41
02
RW
147
42
03
RW
148
43
04
RW
145
44
05
RW
146
45
06
RW
147
46
07
RW
148
47
08
48
09
49
0A
4A
0B
4B
0C
4C
0D
4D
0E
4E
0F
4F
10
50
11
51
12
52
13
53
14
54
15
55
16
56
17
57
18
58
19
59
1A
5A
1B
5B
1C
5C
1D
5D
1E
5E
1F
5F
DBB00FN
20
RW
149
CLK_CR0
60
DBB00IN
21
RW
151
CLK_CR1
61
DBB00OU
22
RW
152
ABF_CR0
62
23
63
DBB01FN
24
RW
149
64
DBB01IN
25
RW
151
65
DBB01OU
26
RW
152
AMD_CR1
66
27
ALT_CR0
67
DCB02FN
28
RW
149
68
DCB02IN
29
RW
151
69
DCB02OU
2A
RW
152
6A
2B
6B
DCB03FN
2C
RW
149
6C
DCB03IN
2D
RW
151
6D
DCB03OU
2E
RW
152
6E
2F
6F
30
70
31
71
32
72
33
73
34
ACB01CR3
74
35
ACB01CR0
75
36
ACB01CR1
76
37
ACB01CR2
77
38
78
39
79
3A
7A
3B
7B
3C
7C
3D
7D
3E
7E
3F
7F
Blank fields are Reserved and should not be accessed.
Access
Addr
(1,Hex)
Name
Page
Access
Addr
(1,Hex)
Name
PRT0DM0
PRT0DM1
PRT0IC0
PRT0IC1
PRT1DM0
PRT1DM1
PRT1IC0
PRT1IC1
83
SECTION C REGISTER REFERENCE
84
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
13. Register Details
This chapter details all the PSoC device registers in offset order for Bank 0 and Bank 1. The registers that are in both banks
are incorporated with the Bank 0 registers, designated with at least one ‘x’ in the register name and offset.
Bank 0 registers are listed first and begin on page 86. Bank 1 registers are listed second and begin on page 145. If you need
a condensed view of all the registers, reference the “Register Mapping Tables” on page 81. The conventions specific to the
registers in this chapter are listed below.
Table 13-1: Register Conventions
Convention
Example
Description
‘x’ in a register name
ACBxxCR1
Multiple instances/address ranges of the same register.
RW
RW : 00
Read and write register or bit(s)
R
R : 00
Read register or bit(s)
W
W : 00
Write register or bit(s)
L
RL : 00
Logical register or bit(s)
C
RC : 00
Clearable register or bit(s)
00
RW : 00
Reset value is 0x00 or 00h
xx
RW : xx
Register is not reset
0,
0,04h
Register is in bank 0
1,
1, 23h
Register is in bank 1
x,
x,F7h
Register exists in register bank 0 and register bank 1
Empty, grayed-out table cell
December 22, 2003
Reserved bit or group of bits
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
85
13. Register Details
13.1
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Bank 0 Registers
The following registers are all in bank 0 and are listed in offset order.
13.1.1
PRTxDR
Port Data Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
PRT0DR : 0,00h
PRT1DR : 0,04h
7
6
5
Access : POR
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 00
Bit Name
Data Input[7:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 58 in the GPIO chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Data Input[7:0]
Write value to port or read value from port. Reads return the state of the pin, not the value in the
PRTxDR register.
86
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.2
13. Register Details
PRTxIE
Port Interrupt Enable Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
PRT0IE : 0,01h
PRT1IE : 0,05h
7
6
5
Access : POR
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 00
Bit Name
Interrupt Enables[7:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 58 in the GPIO chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Interrupt Enables[7:0]
A bit set in this register will enable the corresponding port pin interrupt.
0
Port pin interrupt disabled for the corresponding pin.
1
Port pin interrupt enabled for the corresponding pin.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
87
13. Register Details
13.1.3
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
PRTxGS
Port Global Select Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
PRT0GS : 0,02h
PRT1GS : 0,06h
7
6
5
Access : POR
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 00
Bit Name
Global Select[7:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 58 in the GPIO chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Global Select[7:0]
A bit set in this register will connect the corresponding port pin to the internal global busses. This connection is used to input or output digital signals to or from the digital blocks.
0
Global function disabled, pin value determined by PRTxDR bit value and port configuration
registers.
1
Global function enabled. Direction depends on mode bits for the pin (registers PRTxDM0,
PRTxDM1, PRTxDM2).
88
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.4
13. Register Details
PRTxDM2
Port Drive Mode Bit 2 Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
PRT0DM2 : 0,03h
PRT1DM2 : 0,07h
7
6
5
Access : POR
4
3
2
1
0
RW : FF
Bit Name
Drive Mode 2[7:0]
In register PRTxDM2 there are eight possible drive modes for each port pin. Three mode bits are required to select one of
these modes, and these three bits are spread into three different registers (“PRTxDM0” on page 145, “PRTxDM1” on
page 146, and PRTxDM2). The bit position of the effected port pin (Example: Pin[2] in Port 0) is the same as the bit position
of each of the three Drive Mode register bits that control the drive mode for that pin (Example: Bit[2] in PRT0DM0, bit[2] in
PRT0DM1 and bit[2] in PRT0DM2). The three bits from the three registers are treated as a group. These are referred to as
DM2, DM1, and DM0, or together as DM[2:0].
All Drive Mode bits are shown in the sub-table below ([210] refers to the combination (in order) of bits in a given bit position);
however, this register only controls the most significant bit of the drive mode. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 58 in the GPIO chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Drive Mode 2[7:0]
Bit 2 of the drive mode, for each of an 8-port pin, for a GPIO port.
December 22, 2003
[210]
000b
001b
010b
011b
100b
101b
110b
Pin Output High
Strong
Strong
Hi-z
Resistive
Slow + strong
Slow + strong
Hi-z
Pin Output Low
Resistive
Strong
Hi-z
Strong
Hi-z
Slow + strong
Hi-z
Notes
111b
Hi-z
Slow + strong
I2C Compatible mode.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
Digital input enabled.
Digital input disabled for zero power. Reset state.
89
13. Register Details
13.1.5
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DxBxxDR0
Digital Basic/Communication Type B Block Data Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DBB00DR0 : 0,20h
DBB01DR0 : 0,24h
7
6
DCB02DR0 : 0,28h
5
4
Access : POR
3
DCB03DR0 : 0,2Ch
2
1
0
R : 00
Bit Name
Data[7:0]
The function of this register is dependant on the function its block has been configured for (selected in the FN[2:0] bits of the
DxBxxFN register on page 149). For the Timer, Counter, Dead Band, and CRCPRS functions, a read of the DxBxxDR0 register returns 00h and transfers DxBxxDR0 to DxBxxDR2.
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital Blocks chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Data[7:0]
Data for selected function.
Block Function
Timer
Counter
Dead Band
CRCPRS
SPIM
SPIS
TXUART
RXUART
90
Register Function
Count Value
Count Value
Count Value
Linear Feedback Shift Register (LFSR)
Shifter
Shifter
Shifter
Shifter
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.6
13. Register Details
DxBxxDR1
Digital Basic/Communication Type B Block Data Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DBB00DR1 : 0,21h
DBB01DR1 : 0,25h
7
6
DCB02DR1 : 0,29h
5
4
Access : POR
3
DCB03DR1 : 0,2Dh
2
1
0
W : 00
Bit Name
Data[7:0]
The function of this register is dependant on the function its block has been configured for (selected in the FN[2:0] bits of the
DxBxxFN register on page 149). For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital
Blocks chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Data[7:0]
Data for selected function.
Block Function
Timer
Counter
Dead Band
CRCPRS
SPIM
SPIS
TXUART
RXUART
December 22, 2003
Register Function
Period
Period
Period
Polynomial
TX Buffer
TX Buffer
TX Buffer
Not applicable
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
91
13. Register Details
13.1.7
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DxBxxDR2
Digital Basic/Communication Type B Block Data Register 2
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DBB00DR2 : 0,22h
DBB01DR2 : 0,26h
7
6
DCB02DR2 : 0,2Ah
5
4
3
Access : POR
RW : 00
Bit Name
Data[7:0]
DCB03DR2 : 0,2Eh
2
1
0
The function of this register is dependant on the function its block has been configured for (selected in the FN[2:0] bits of the
DxBxxFN register on page 149. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital
Blocks chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Data[7:0]
Data for selected function.
Block Function
Timer
Counter
Dead Band
CRCPRS
SPIM
SPIS
TXUART
RXUART
92
Register Function
Capture/Compare
Compare
Buffer
Seed/Residue
RX Buffer
RX Buffer
Not applicable
RX Buffer
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.8
13. Register Details
DxBxxCR0
(Timer Control)
Digital Basic/Communication Type B Block Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DBB00CR0 : 0,23h
DBB01CR0 : 0,27h
7
6
DCB02CR0 : 0,2Bh
5
4
3
Access : POR
Bit Name
DCB03CR0 : 0,2Fh
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
TC Pulse Width
Capture Int
Enable
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital Blocks chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:3]
Reserved
[2]
TC Pulse Width
Primary output
0
Terminal Count pulse width is one-half a block clock. Supports a period value of 00h.
1
Terminal Count pulse width is one full block clock.
[1]
Capture Int
0
1
Interrupt is selected with Mode bit 0 in the Function (DxBxxFN) register.
Block interrupt is caused by a hardware capture event (overrides Mode bit 0 selection).
[0]
Enable
0
1
Timer is not enabled.
Timer is enabled.
December 22, 2003
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
93
13. Register Details
13.1.9
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DxBxxCR0
(Counter Control)
Digital Basic/Communication Type B Block Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DBB00CR0: 0,23h
DBB01CR0: 0,27h
7
6
DCB02CR0: 0,2Bh
5
4
3
DCB03CR0: 0,2Fh
2
1
0
Access : POR
RW : 0
Bit Name
Enable
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital Blocks chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:1]
Reserved
[0]
Enable
94
Description
0
1
Counter is not enabled.
Counter is enabled.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.10
13. Register Details
DxBxxCR0
(Dead Band Control)
Digital Basic/Communication Type B Block Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DBB00CR0: 0,23h
DBB01CR0: 0,27h
7
6
DCB02CR0: 0,2Bh
5
4
3
Access : POR
Bit Name
DCB03CR0: 0,2Fh
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
Bit Bang Clock
Bit Bang Mode
Enable
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital Blocks chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:3]
Reserved
[2]
Bit Bang Clock
When Bit Bang mode is enabled, the output of this register bit is substituted for the PWM reference.
This register may be toggled by user firmware to generate PHI1 and PH2 output clocks with the programmed dead time.
[1]
Bit Bang Mode
0
1
Dead Band Generator uses the previous block primary output as the input reference.
Dead Band Generator uses the Bit Bang Clock register as the input reference.
[0]
Enable
0
1
Dead Band Generator is not enabled.
Dead Band Generator is enabled.
December 22, 2003
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
95
13. Register Details
13.1.11
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DxBxxCR0
(CRCPRS Control)
Digital Basic/Communication Type B Block Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DBB00CR0: 0,23h
DBB01CR0: 0,27h
7
6
DCB02CR0: 0,2Bh
5
4
3
Access : POR
Bit Name
DCB03CR0: 0,2Fh
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
Pass Mode
Enable
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital Blocks chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:2]
Reserved
[1]
Pass Mode
The DATA input selection is driven directly to the primary output and the block interrupt output. The
CLK input selection is driven directly to the auxiliary output.
0
Normal CRC/PRS outputs
1
Outputs are overridden.
[0]
Enable
0
1
96
Description
CRC/PRS is not enabled.
CRC/PRS is enabled.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.12
13. Register Details
DCBxxCR0
(SPIM Control)
Digital Communication Type B Block Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DCB02CR0: 0,2Bh
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
R:0
R:0
R:1
R:0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
LSB First
Overrun
SPI Complete
TX Reg Empty
RX Reg Full
Clock Phase
Clock Polarity
Enable
Access : POR
Bit Name
DCB03CR0: 0,2Fh
The LSB First, Clock Phase, and Clock Polarity bit are configuration bits and should never be changed once the block is
enabled. They can be set at the same time that the block is enabled. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital Blocks chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
LSB First
This bit should not be changed during an SPI transfer.
0
Data is shifted out MSB first.
1
Data is shifted out LSB first.
[6]
Overrun
0
1
No overrun has occurred.
Overrun has occurred. Indicates that a new byte has been received and loaded into the RX
Buffer before the previous one could be read. Cleared on read of this (CR0) register.
[5]
SPI Complete
0
1
Indicates that a byte may still be in the process of shifting out, or no transmission is active.
Indicates that a byte has been shifted out and all associated clocks have been generated.
Cleared on read of this (CR0) register. Optional interrupt.
[4]
TX Reg Empty
The reset state and the state when the block is disabled is ‘1’.
0
Indicates that a byte is currently buffered in the TX register.
1
Indicates that a byte can be written to the TX register. Cleared on write of the TX Buffer
(DR1) register. Default interrupt. This status will initially be asserted on block enable; however, the TX Reg Empty interrupt will occur only after the first data byte is written and transferred into the shifter.
[3]
RX Reg Full
0
1
RX register is empty.
A byte has been received and loaded into the RX register. Cleared on read of the RX Buffer
(DR2) register.
[2]
Clock Phase
0
Data is latched on the leading edge of the clock. Data changes on the trailing edge (Modes
0,1).
Data changes on the leading edge of the clock. Data is latched on the trailing edge (Modes
2,3).
1
[1]
Clock Polarity
0
1
Non-inverted, clock idles low (Modes 0,2).
Inverted, clock idles high (Modes 1,3).
[0]
Enable
0
1
SPI Master is not enabled.
SPI Master is enabled.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
97
13. Register Details
13.1.13
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DCBxxCR0
(SPIS Control)
Digital Communication Type B Block Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DCB02CR0: 0,2Bh
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
R:0
R:0
R:1
R:0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
LSB First
Overrun
SPI Complete
TX Reg Empty
RX Reg Full
Clock Phase
Clock Polarity
Enable
Access : POR
Bit Name
DCB03CR0: 0,2Fh
The LSB First, Clock Phase, and Clock Polarity bit are configuration bits and should never be changed once the block is
enabled. They can be set at the same time that the block is enabled. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital Blocks chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
LSB First
This bit should not be changed during an SPI transfer.
0
Data is shifted out MSB first.
1
Data is shifted out LSB first.
[6]
Overrun
0
1
No overrun has occurred.
Overrun has occurred. Indicates that a new byte has been received and loaded into the RX
Buffer before the previous one could be read. Cleared on read of this (CR0) register.
[5]
SPI Complete
0
1
Indicates that a byte may still be in the process of shifting out or no transmission is active.
Indicates that a byte has been shifted out and all associated clocks have been generated.
Cleared on read of this (CR0) register. Optional interrupt.
[4]
TX Reg Empty
The reset state and the state when the block is disabled is ‘1’.
0
Indicates that a byte is currently buffered in the TX register.
1
Indicates that a byte can be written to the TX register. Cleared on write of the TX Buffer
(DR1) register. Default interrupt. This status will initially be asserted on block enable; however, the TX Reg Empty interrupt will occur only after the first data byte is written and transferred into the shifter.
[3]
RX Reg Full
0
1
RX register is empty.
A byte has been received and loaded into the RX register. Cleared on read of the RX Buffer
(DR2) register.
[2]
Clock Phase
0
1
Data is latched on the leading edge of the clock. Data changes on the trailing edge.
Data changes on the leading edge of the clock. Data is latched on the trailing edge.
[1]
Clock Polarity
0
1
Non-inverted, clock idles low.
Inverted, clock idles high.
[0]
Enable
0
1
SPI Slave is not enabled.
SPI Slave is enabled.
98
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.14
13. Register Details
DCBxxCR0
(UART Transmitter Control)
Digital Communication Type B Block Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DCB02CR0: 0,2Bh
7
6
5
4
2
1
0
R:0
R:1
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
TX Complete
TX Reg Empty
Parity Type
Parity Enable
Enable
Access : POR
Bit Name
3
DCB03CR0: 0,2Fh
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital Blocks chapter. For the receive
mode definition, refer to section 13.1.15 on page 100.
Bit
Name
[7:6]
Reserved
[5]
TX Complete
0
1
[4]
TX Reg Empty
The reset state and the state when the block is disabled is ‘1’.
0
Indicates that a byte is currently buffered in the TX register.
1
Indicates that a byte can be written to the TX register. Cleared on write of the TX Buffer register. Default interrupt. TX Reg Empty interrupt will occur only after the first data byte is written and transferred into the shifter.
[3]
Reserved
[2]
Parity Type
0
1
Even parity
Odd parity
[1]
Parity Enable
0
1
Parity is not enabled.
Parity is enabled, frame includes parity bit.
[0]
Enable
0
1
Serial Transmitter is not enabled.
Serial Transmitter is enabled.
December 22, 2003
Description
Indicates that a byte may still be in the process of shifting out.
Indicates that a byte has been shifted out and all associated framing bits have been generated. Optional interrupt. Cleared on read of this (CR0) register.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
99
13. Register Details
13.1.15
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DCBxxCR0
(UART Receiver Control)
Digital Communication Type B Block Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DCB02CR0: 0,2Bh
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R:0
R:0
R:0
R:0
R:0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
Parity Error
Overrun
Framing Error
RX Active
RX Reg Full
Parity Type
Parity Enable
Enable
Access : POR
Bit Name
DCB03CR0: 0,2Fh
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital Blocks chapter. For the transmit
mode definition, refer to section 13.1.14 on page 99.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
Parity Error
0
1
Indicates that no parity error has occurred.
Valid when RX Reg Full is set, indicating that a parity error has occurred in the received
byte. Cleared on read of this (CR0) register.
[6]
Overrun
0
1
Indicates that no overrun has occurred.
Valid when RX Reg Full is set, indicating that the byte in the RX Buffer register has not been
read before the next byte is loaded. Cleared on read of this (CR0) register.
[5]
Framing Error
0
1
Indicates no framing error has occurred.
Valid when RX Reg Full is set, indicating that a framing error has occurred (a logic ‘0’ was
sampled at the STOP bit, instead of the expected logic ‘1’). Cleared on read of this (CR0)
register.
[4]
RX Active
0
1
Indicates that no reception is in progress.
Indicates that a reception is in progress. Set by the detection of a START bit and cleared at
the sampling of the STOP bit.
[3]
RX Reg Full
0
1
Indicates that the RX Buffer register is empty.
Indicates that a byte has been received and transferred to the RX Buffer (DR2) register.
This bit is cleared when the RX Buffer register (DR2) is read by the CPU. Interrupt source.
[2]
Parity Type
0
1
Even parity
Odd parity
[1]
Parity Enable
0
1
Parity is not enabled.
Parity is enabled, frame includes parity bit.
[0]
Enable
0
1
Serial Receiver is not enabled.
Serial Receiver is enabled.
100
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.16
13. Register Details
AMX_IN
Analog Input Select Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
AMX_IN: 0,60h
7
6
5
4
3
Access : POR
Bit Name
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
ACI1[1:0]
ACI0[1:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 235 in the Analog Input Configuration chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:4]
Reserved
[3:2]
ACI1[1:0]
Description
Selects the Analog Column Mux 1, even inputs.
00b
ACM1 P0[0]
01b
ACM1 P0[2]
10b
ACM1 P0[4]
11b
ACM1 P0[6]
Note ACol1Mux (ABF_CR, Address = Bank1, 62h)
0
AC1 = ACM1
1
AC1 = ACM0
[1:0]
ACI0[1:0]
December 22, 2003
Selects the Analog Column Mux 1, odd inputs.
00b
ACM0 P0[1]
01b
ACM0 P0[3]
10b
ACM0 P0[5]
11b
ACM0 P0[7]
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
101
13. Register Details
13.1.17
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
ARF_CR
Analog Reference Control Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ARF_CR: 0,63h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
HBE
REF[2:0]
PWR[2:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 238 in the Analog Reference chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
Reserved
[6]
HBE
Bias level control for opamps
0
Low bias mode for analog array
1
High bias mode for analog array
[5:3]
REF[2:0]
Analog Array Reference Control (values with respect to Vss). These three bits select the sources for
analog ground (AGND), the high reference (RefHigh), and the low reference (RefLow).
000b
Invalid Reference
001b
Invalid Reference
010b
Valid Reference: AGND = Vdd/2, RefHigh = Vdd, RefLow = Vss.
011b
Invalid Reference
100b
Invalid Reference
101b
Invalid Reference
110b
Invalid Reference
111b
Invalid Reference
[2:0]
PWR[2:0]
Analog Array Power Control
000b
001b
010b
011b
100b
101b
110b
111b
102
Reference
Off
Low
Medium
High
Off
Low
Medium
High
CT Block
Off
On
On
On
Off
On
On
On
SC Blocks
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.18
13. Register Details
CMP_CR0
Analog Comparator Bus 0 Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
CMP_CR0: 0,64h
7
6
Access : POR
Bit Name
5
4
3
2
1
R:0
RW : 0
COMP[1]
AINT[1]
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 228 in the Analog Interface chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:6]
Reserved
[5]
COMP[1]
[4:2]
Reserved
[1]
AINT[1]
[0]
Reserved
December 22, 2003
Description
Comparator bus state for column 1.
This bit is updated on the rising edge of PHI2, unless the comparator latch disable bits are set. If the comparator latch disable bits are set, then this bit is transparent to the comparator bus in the analog array.
Controls the selection of the analog comparator interrupt for column 1.
0
The comparator data bit from the column is the input to the interrupt controller.
1
The falling edge of PHI2 for the column is the input to the interrupt controller.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
103
13. Register Details
13.1.19
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
ASY_CR
Analog Synchronization Control Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ASY_CR: 0,65h
7
6
5
Access : POR
Bit Name
4
3
2
1
0
W:0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
SARCNT[2:0]
SARSIGN
SARCOL[1]
SYNCEN
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 228 in the Analog Interface chapter.
Bit
Name
[7]
Reserved
[6:4]
SARCNT[2:0]
Description
Initial SAR count. This field is initialized to the number of SAR bits to process.
Note Any write to the SARCNT bits, other than 0, will result in a modification of the read back of any
analog register in the analog array. These bits must always be zero, except for SAR processing.
[3]
SARSIGN
This bit adjusts the SAR comparator based on the type of block addressed. In a DAC configuration
with more than one analog block (more than 6-bits), this bit should be set to ‘0’ when processing the
most significant block, and ‘1’ when processing the least significant block. This is because the least
significant block is an inverting input to the most significant block.
[2]
SARCOL[1]
The selected column corresponds with the position of the SAR comparator block. Note that the comparator and DAC can be in the same block.
00b
Analog Column 0 is the source for SAR comparator
01b
Analog Column 1 is the source for SAR comparator
[1]
Reserved
[0]
SYNCEN
104
Set to ‘1’, will stall the CPU until the rising edge of PHI1, if a write to a register within an analog Switch
Cap block takes place.
0
CPU stalling disabled.
1
CPU stalling enabled.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.20
13. Register Details
CMP_CR1
Analog Comparator Bus 1 Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
CMP_CR1: 0,66h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
CLDIS[1]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 228 in the Analog Interface chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:6]
Reserved
[5]
CLDIS[1]
[4:0]
Reserved
December 22, 2003
Description
Controls the comparator output latch, column 1.
0
The comparator data bits are updated from the analog comparator bus, on the rising edge
of PHI2.
1
The comparator data bits are connected transparently to the analog comparator bus. This
mode can be used in power down operation, to wake the part out of sleep as a result of an
analog column interrupt.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
105
13. Register Details
13.1.21
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
ACBxxCR3
Analog Continuous Time Type B Block Control Register 3
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ACB01CR3 : x,74h
7
6
5
Access : POR
Bit Name
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
LPCMPEN
CMOUT
INSAMP
EXGAIN
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 247 in the Continuous Time Block chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:4]
Reserved
[3]
LPCMPEN
0
1
Low power comparator is disabled.
Low power comparator is enabled.
[2]
CMOUT
0
1
No connection to column output
Connect common mode to column output
[1]
INSAMP
0
1
Normal mode
Connect amplifiers across column to form an Instrumentation Amp
[0]
EXGAIN
0
1
Standard gain mode
High gain mode (see ACBxxCR0)
106
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.22
13. Register Details
ACBxxCR0
Analog Continuous Time Type B Block Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ACB01CR0 : x,75h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RTapMux[3:0]
Gain
RTopMux
RBotMux[1:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 247 in the Continuous Time Block chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:4]
RTapMux[3:0]
Encoding for selecting one of 18 resistor taps. The four bits of RTapMux[3:0] allow selection of 16
taps. The two additional tap selections are provided using ACBxxCR3 bit 0, EXGAIN. The EXGAIN
bit only affects the RTapMux values 0h and 1h.
RTap
0h
1h
0h
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
9h
Ah
Bh
Ch
Dh
Eh
Fh
EXGAIN
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Rf
47
46
45
42
39
36
33
30
27
24
21
18
15
12
9
6
3
0
Ri
1
2
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
39
42
45
48
Loss
0.0208
0.0417
0.0625
0.1250
0.1875
0.2500
0.3125
0.3750
0.4375
0.5000
0.5625
0.6250
0.6875
0.7500
0.8125
0.8750
0.9375
1.0000
Gain
48.000
24.000
16.000
8.000
5.333
4.000
3.200
2.667
2.286
2.000
1.778
1.600
1.455
1.333
1.231
1.143
1.067
1.000
[3]
Gain
Select gain or loss configuration for output tap.
0
Loss
1
Gain
[2]
RTopMux
Encoding for feedback resistor select.
0
Rtop to Vdd
1
Rtop to opamp’s output
[1:0]
RbotMux[1:0]
Encoding for feedback resistor select. Bits [1:0] are overridden if bit 1 of ACBxxCR3 is set. In that
case, the bottom of the resistor string is connected cross columns. Note that available mux inputs
vary by individual PSoC block.
ACB01
00b
Reserved
01b
AGND
10b
Vss
11b
ASD11
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
107
13. Register Details
13.1.23
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
ACBxxCR1
Analog Continuous Time Type B Block Control Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ACB01CR1 : x,76h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
AnalogBus
CompBus
NMux[2:0]
PMux[2:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 247 in the Continuous Time Block chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
AnalogBus
Enable output to the analog bus.
0
Disable output to analog column bus.
1
Enable output to analog column bus.
[6]
CompBus
Enable output to the comparator bus.
0
Disable output to comparator bus.
1
Enable output to comparator bus.
[5:3]
NMux[2:0]
Encoding for negative input select. Note that available mux inputs vary by individual PSoC block.
ACB01
000b
Reserved
001b
AGND
010b
Vss
011b
Vdd
100b
101b
110b
111b
FB#
ASD11
Reserved
Port Inputs
# Feedback point from tap of the feedback resistor as defined by corresponding CR0 bits [7:4]
and CR3 bit 0.
[2:0]
PMux[2:0]
Encoding for positive input select. Note that available mux inputs vary by individual PSoC block.
ACB01
000b
Vss
001b
Port Inputs
010b
Reserved
011b
AGND
100b
ASD11
101b
Reserved
110b
ABUS1
111b
FB#
# Feedback point from tap of the feedback resistor as defined by corresponding CR0 bits [7:4]
and CR3 bit 0.
108
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.24
13. Register Details
ACBxxCR2
Analog Continuous Time Type B Block Control Register 2
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ACB01CR2 : x,77h
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Access : POR
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
Bit Name
CPhase
CLatch
CompCap
TMUXEN
TestMux[1:0]
PWR[1:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 247 in the Continuous Time Block chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
CPhase
0
1
Comparator Control latch transparent on PHI1.
Comparator Control latch transparent on PHI2.
[6]
CLatch
0
1
Comparator Control latch is always transparent.
Comparator Control latch is active.
[5]
CompCap
0
1
Comparator Mode
Opamp Mode
[4]
TMUXEN
Test mux
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
[3:2]
TestMux[1:0]
Select block bypass mode. Note that available mux inputs vary by individual PSoC block and
TMUXEN must be set.
ACB01
00b
Positive Input to ABUS1
01b
AGND to
ABUS1
10b
REFLO to
ABUS1
11b
REFHI to
ABUS1
[1:0]
PWR[1:0]
Encoding for selecting one of four power levels. High Bias mode doubles the power at each of these
settings. See bit 6 in the ARF_CR register on page 102.
00b
Off
01b
Low
10b
Medium
11b
High
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
109
13. Register Details
13.1.25
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
ASCxxCR0
Analog Switch Cap Type C Block Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ASC21CR0 : x,94h
7
6
5
4
3
2
Access : POR
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 00
Bit Name
FCap
ClockPhase
ASign
ACap[4:0]
1
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 241 in the Switched Capacitor Block chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
FCap
F Capacitor value selection bit.
0
16 capacitor units
1
32 capacitor units
[6]
ClockPhase
The ClockPhase controls the clock phase of the comparator within the switched cap blocks, as well
as the clock phase of the switches.
0
Switch phasing is Internal PHI1 = External PHI1. Comparator Capture Point Event is triggered by Falling PHI2 and Comparator Output Point Event is triggered by Rising PHI1.
1
Switch phasing is Internal PHI1 = External PHI2. Comparator Capture Point Event is triggered by Falling PHI1 and Comparator Output Point Event is triggered by Rising PHI2.
[5]
ASign
0
1
[4:0]
ACap[4:0]
Binary encoding for 32 possible capacitor sizes for capacitor ACap.
110
Input sampled on Internal PHI1. Reference Input sampled on internal PHI2. Positive gain.
Input sampled on Internal PHI2. Reference Input sampled on internal PHI1. Negative gain.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.26
13. Register Details
ASCxxCR1
Analog Switch Cap Type C Block Control Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ASC21CR1 : x,95h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
RW : 0
RW : 00
ACMux[2:0]
BCap[4:0]
1
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 241 in the Switched Capacitor Block chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:5]
ACMux[2:0]
Encoding for selecting A and C inputs. (Note that available mux inputs vary by individual PSoC
block.)
ASC21
A Inputs
C Inputs
000b
ASD11
ASD11
001b
Reserved Reserved
010b
Vdd
ASD11
011b
Vtemp
ASD11
100b
Reserved Reserved
101b
Reserved Reserved
110b
ABUS1
ASD11
111b
Reserved Reserved
[4:0]
BCap[4:0]
Binary encoding for 32 possible capacitor sizes of the capacitor BCap.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
111
13. Register Details
13.1.27
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
ASCxxCR2
Analog Switch Cap Type C Block Control Register 2
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ASC21CR2 : x,96h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 00
AnalogBus
CompBus
AutoZero
CCap[4:0]
1
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 241 in the Switched Capacitor Block chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
AnalogBus
Enable output to the analog bus.
0
Disable output to analog column bus.
1
Enable output to analog column bus.
[6]
CompBus
Enable output to the comparator bus.
0
Disable output to comparator bus.
1
Enable output to comparator bus.
[5]
AutoZero
Bit for controlling gated switches.
0
Shorting switch is not active. Input cap branches shorted to opamp input.
1
Shorting switch is enabled during internal PHI1. Input cap branches shorted to analog
ground during internal PHI1 and to opamp input during internal PHI2.
[4:0]
CCap[4:0]
Binary encoding for 32 possible capacitor sizes of the capacitor CCap.
112
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.28
13. Register Details
ASCxxCR3
Analog Switch Cap Type C Block Control Register 3
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ASC21CR3 : x,97h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
ARefMux[1:0]
FSW1
FSW0
BMuxSC[1:0]
PWR[1:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 241 in the Switched Capacitor Block chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:6]
ARefMux[1:0]
Encoding for selecting reference input.
00b
Analog ground is selected.
01b
REFHI input selected. (This is usually the high reference.)
10b
REFLO input selected. (This is usually the low reference.)
11b
Reference selection is driven by the comparator. (When output comparator node is set high,
the input is set to REFHI. When set low, the input is set to REFLO.)
[5]
FSW1
Bit for controlling gated switches.
0
Switch is disabled.
1
If the FSW1 bit is set to ‘1’, the state of the switch is determined by the AutoZero bit. If the
AutoZero bit is ‘0’, the switch is enabled at all times. If the AutoZero bit is ‘1’, the switch is
enabled only when the internal PHI2 is high.
[4]
FSW0
Bits for controlling gated switches.
0
Switch is disabled.
1
Switch is enabled when PHI1 is high.
[3:2]
BMuxSC[1:0]
Encoding for selecting B inputs. Note that the available mux inputs vary by individual PSoC block.
ASC21
00b
ASD11
01b
Reserved
10b
Reserved
11b
TrefGND
[1:0]
PWR[1:0]
Encoding for selecting one of four power levels.
00b
Off
01b
Low
10b
Medium
11b
High
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
113
13. Register Details
13.1.29
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
ASDxxCR0
Analog Switch Cap Type D Block Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ASD11CR0 : x,84h
7
6
5
4
3
2
Access : POR
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 00
Bit Name
FCap
ClockPhase
ASign
ACap[4:0]
1
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 241 in the Switched Capacitor Block chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
FCap
F Capacitor value selection bit.
0
16 capacitor units
1
32 capacitor units
[6]
ClockPhase
The ClockPhase controls the clock phase of the comparator within the switched cap blocks, as well
as the clock phase of the switches.
0
Switch phasing is Internal PHI1 = External PHI1. Comparator Capture Point Event is triggered by Falling PHI2 and Comparator Output Point Event is triggered by Rising PHI1.
1
Switch phasing is Internal PHI1 = External PHI2. Comparator Capture Point Event is triggered by Falling PHI1 and Comparator Output Point Event is triggered by Rising PHI2.
[5]
ASign
0
1
[4:0]
ACap[4:0]
Binary encoding for 32 possible capacitor sizes for capacitor ACap.
114
Input sampled on Internal PHI1. Reference Input sampled on internal PHI2. Positive gain.
Input sampled on Internal PHI2. Reference Input sampled on internal PHI1. Negative gain.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.30
13. Register Details
ASDxxCR1
Analog Switch Cap Type D Block Control Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ASD11CR1 : x,85h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
RW : 0
RW : 00
AMux[2:0]
BCap[4:0]
1
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 241 in the Switched Capacitor Block chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:5]
AMux[2:0]
Encoding for selecting A and C inputs for C Type blocks and A inputs for D Type blocks. (Note that
available mux inputs vary by individual PSoC block.)
ASD11
000b
ACB01
001b
Reserved
010b
Reserved
011b
ASC21
100b
Vdd
101b
Reserved
110b
Reserved
111b
Reserved
[4:0]
BCap[4:0]
Binary encoding for 32 possible capacitor sizes for capacitor BCap.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
115
13. Register Details
13.1.31
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
ASDxxCR2
Analog Switch Cap Type D Block Control Register 2
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ASD11CR2 : x,86h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 00
AnalogBus
CompBus
AutoZero
CCap[4:0]
1
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 241 in the Switched Capacitor Block chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
AnalogBus
Enable output to the analog bus.
0
Disable output to analog column bus.
1
Enable output to analog column bus.
[6]
CompBus
Enable output to the comparator bus.
0
Disable output to comparator bus.
1
Enable output to comparator bus.
[5]
AutoZero
Bit for controlling gated switches.
0
Shorting switch is not active. Input cap branches shorted to opamp input.
1
Shorting switch is enabled during internal PHI1. Input cap branches shorted to analog
ground during internal PHI1 and to opamp input during internal PHI2.
[4:0]
CCap[4:0]
Binary encoding for 32 possible capacitor sizes for capacitor CCap.
116
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.32
13. Register Details
ASDxxCR3
Analog Switch Cap Type D Block Control Register 3
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ASD11CR3 : x,87h
7
6
5
4
3
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
ARefMux[1:0]
FSW1
FSW0
BSW
BMuxSD
PWR[1:0]
Access : POR
Bit Name
2
1
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 241 in the Switched Capacitor Block chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:6]
ARefMux[1:0]
Encoding for selecting reference input.
00b
Analog ground is selected.
01b
REFHI input selected. (This is usually the high reference.)
10b
REFLO input selected. (This is usually the low reference.)
11b
Reference selection is driven by the comparator. (When output comparator node is set high,
the input is set to REFHI. When set low, the input is set to REFLO.)
[5]
FSW1
Bit for controlling gated switches.
0
Switch is disabled.
1
If the FSW1 bit is set to ‘1’, the state of the switch is determined by the AutoZero bit. If the
AutoZero bit is ‘0’, the switch is enabled at all times. If the AutoZero bit is ‘1’, the switch is
enabled only when the internal PHI2 is high.
[4]
FSW0
Bits for controlling gated switches.
0
Switch is disabled.
1
Switch is enabled when PHI1 is high.
[3]
BSW
Enable switching in branch.
0
B branch is a continuous time path.
1
B branch is switched with internal PHI2 sampling.
[2]
BMuxSD
Encoding for selecting B inputs. (Note that the available mux inputs vary by individual PSoC block.)
ASD11
0
Reserved
1
ACB01
[1:0]
PWR[1:0]
Encoding for selecting one of four power levels.
00b
Off
01b
10 µA, typical
10b
50 µA, typical
11b
200 µA, typical
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
117
13. Register Details
13.1.33
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
RDIxRI
Row Digital Interconnect Row Input Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
RDI0RI : x,B0h
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Access : POR
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
Bit Name
RI3[2:0]
RI2[2:0]
RI1[2:0]
RI0[2:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 186 in the Row Digital Interconnect chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:6]
RI3[2:0]
Select source for row input 3.
00b
GIE[3]
01b
GIE[7]
10b
GIO[3]
11b
GIO[7]
[5:4]
RI2[2:0]
Select source for row input 2.
00b
GIE[2]
01b
GIE[6]
10b
GIO[2]
11b
GIO[6]
[3:2]
RI1[2:0]
Select source for row input 1.
00b
GIE[1]
01b
GIE[5]
10b
GIO[1]
11b
GIO[5]
[1:0]
RI0[2:0]
Select source for row input 0.
00b
GIE[0]
01b
GIE[4]
10b
GIO[0]
11b
GIO[4]
118
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.34
13. Register Details
RDIxSYN
Row Digital Interconnect Synchronization Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
RDI0SYN : x,B1h
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Access : POR
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
Bit Name
RI3SYN
RI2SYN
RI1SYN
RI0SYN
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 186 in the Row Digital Interconnect chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:4]
Reserved
[3]
RI3SYN
0
1
Row input 3 is synchronized to SYSCLK system clock.
Row input 3 is passed without synchronization.
[2]
RI2SYN
0
1
Row input 2 is synchronized to SYSCLK system clock.
Row input 2 is passed without synchronization.
[1]
RI1SYN
0
1
Row input 1 is synchronized to SYSCLK system clock.
Row input 1 is passed without synchronization.
[0]
RI0SYN
0
1
Row input 0 is synchronized to SYSCLK system clock.
Row input 0 is passed without synchronization.
December 22, 2003
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
119
13. Register Details
13.1.35
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
RDIxIS
Row Digital Interconnect Input Select Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
RDI0IS : x,B2h
7
6
5
Access : POR
Bit Name
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
BCSEL[1:0]
IS3
IS2
IS1
IS0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 186 in the Row Digital Interconnect chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:6]
Reserved
[5:4]
BCSEL[1:0]
When the BCSELL value is equal to the row number, the tri-state buffer that drives the row broadcast
net from the input select mux is disabled, so that one of the row’s blocks may drive the local row
broadcast net.
00b
Row 0 drives row broadcast net.
01b
Reserved
10b
Reserved
11b
Reserved
[3]
IS3
0
1
The ‘A’ input of LUT 3 is RO[3].
The ‘A’ input of LUT 3 is RI[3].
[2]
IS2
0
1
The ‘A’ input of LUT 2 is RO[2].
The ‘A’ input of LUT 2 is RI[2].
[1]
IS1
0
1
The ‘A’ input of LUT 1 is RO[1].
The ‘A’ input of LUT 1 is RI[1].
[0]
IS0
0
1
The ‘A’ input of LUT 0 is RO[0].
The ‘A’ input of LUT 0 is RI[0].
120
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.36
13. Register Details
RDIxLT0
Row Digital Interconnect Logic Table Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
RDI0LT0 : x,B3h
7
6
5
Access : POR
Bit Name
4
3
2
1
RW : 0
RW : 0
LUT1[3:0]
LUT0[3:0]
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 186 in the Row Digital Interconnect chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:4]
LUT1[3:0]
Select logic function for LUT 1.
0h
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
9h
Ah
Bh
Ch
Dh
Eh
Fh
[3:0]
LUT0[3:0]
Select logic function for LUT 0.
0h
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
9h
Ah
Bh
Ch
Dh
Eh
Fh
December 22, 2003
Function
FALSE
A AND B
A AND B
A
A AND B
B
A XOR B
A OR B
A NOR B
A XNOR B
B
A OR B
A
A OR B
A NAND B
TRUE
Function
FALSE
A AND B
A AND B
A
A AND B
B
A XOR B
A OR B
A NOR B
A XNOR B
B
A OR B
A
A OR B
A NAND B
TRUE
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
121
13. Register Details
13.1.37
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
RDIxLT1
Row Digital Interconnect Logic Table Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
RDI0LT1 : x,B4h
7
6
5
Access : POR
Bit Name
4
3
2
1
RW : 0
RW : 0
LUT3[3:0]
LUT2[3:0]
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 186 in the Row Digital Interconnect chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:4]
LUT3[3:0]
Select logic function for LUT 3.
0h
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
9h
Ah
Bh
Ch
Dh
Eh
Fh
[3:0]
LUT2[3:0]
Select logic function for LUT 2.
0h
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
9h
Ah
Bh
Ch
Dh
Eh
Fh
122
Function
FALSE
A AND B
A AND B
A
A AND B
B
A XOR B
A OR B
A NOR B
A XNOR B
B
A OR B
A
A OR B
A NAND B
TRUE
Function
FALSE
A AND B
A AND B
A
A AND B
B
A XOR B
A OR B
A NOR B
A XNOR B
B
A OR B
A
A OR B
A NAND B
TRUE
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.38
13. Register Details
RDIxRO0
Row Digital Interconnect Row Output Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
RDI0RO0 : x,B5h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
GOO5EN
GOO1EN
GOE5EN
GOE1EN
GOO4EN
GOO0EN
GOE4EN
GOE0EN
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 186 in the Row Digital Interconnect chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
GOO5EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOO[5].
[6]
GOO1EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOO[1].
[5]
GOE5EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOE[5].
[4]
GOE1EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOE[1].
[3]
GOO4EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOO[4].
[2]
GOO0EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOO[0].
[1]
GOE4EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOE[4].
[0]
GOE0EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOE[0].
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
123
13. Register Details
13.1.39
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
RDIxRO1
Row Digital Interconnect Row Output Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
RDI0RO1 : x,B6h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
GOO7EN
GOO3EN
GOE7EN
GOE3EN
GOO6EN
GOO2EN
GOE6EN
GOE2EN
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 186 in the Row Digital Interconnect chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
GOO7EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOO[7].
[6]
GOO3EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOO[3].
[5]
GOE7EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOE[7].
[4]
GOE3EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOE[3].
[3]
GOO6EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOO[6].
[2]
GOO2EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOO[2].
[1]
GOE6EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOE[6].
[0]
GOE2EN
0
1
Disable LUT output to global output.
Enable LUT output to GOE[2].
124
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.40
13. Register Details
I2C_CFG
I2C Configuration Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
I2C_CFG: 0,D6h
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Access : POR
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
Bit Name
PSelect
Bus Error IE
Stop IE
Clock Rate
Enable Master
Enable Slave
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 265 in the I2C chapter.
Bit
Name
[7]
Reserved
[6]
PSelect
Description
I2C Pin Select
0
P1[5] and P1[7]
1
P1[0] and P1[1]
Note Read the I2C chapter for a discussion of the side effects of choosing this pair of pins: P1[0] and
P1[1].
[5]
Bus Error IE
Bus Error Interrupt Enable
0
Disabled
1
Enabled. An interrupt is generated on the detection of a Bus Error.
[4]
Stop IE
Stop Interrupt Enable
0
Disabled
1
Enabled. An interrupt is generated on the detection of a Stop Condition.
[3:2]
Clock Rate
00b
01b
10b
11b
100K Standard Mode
400K Fast Mode
50K Standard Mode
Reserved
[1]
Enable Master
0
1
Disabled
Enabled
[0]
Enable Slave
0
1
Disabled
Enabled
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
125
13. Register Details
13.1.41
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
I2C_SCR
I2C Status and Control Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
I2C_SCR: 0,D7h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RC : 0
RC : 0
RC : 0
RW : 0
RC : 0
RW : 0
RC : 0
RC : 0
Bus Error
Lost Arb
Stop Status
ACK
Address
Transmit
LRB
Byte Complete
Bits in this register are held in reset until one of the enable bits in I2C_CFG is set. For additional information, reference the
“Register Definitions” on page 265 in the I2C chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
Bus Error
0
1
[6]
Lost Arb
0
1
[5]
Stop Status
0
1
This status bit must be cleared by firmware by writing a ‘0’ to the bit position. It is never
cleared by the hardware.
A misplaced Start or Stop condition was detected.
This bit is set immediately on lost arbitration; however, it does not cause an interrupt. This
status may be checked after the following Byte Complete interrupt. Any Start detect or a
write to the Start or Restart generate bits (I2C_MSCR register), when operating in Master
mode, will also clear the bit.
Lost Arbitration
This status bit must be cleared by firmware with write of ‘0’ to the bit position. It is never
cleared by the hardware.
A Stop condition was detected.
[4]
ACK
Acknowledge Out. This bit is automatically cleared by hardware on a Byte Complete event.
0
NACK the last received byte.
1
ACK the last received byte
[3]
Address
0
1
[2]
Transmit
This bit is set by firmware to define the direction of the byte transfer. Any Start detect or a write to the
Start or Restart generate bits, when operating in Master mode, will also clear the bit.
0
Receive mode
1
Transmit mode
[1]
LRB
Last Received Bit. The value of the 9th bit in a Transmit sequence, which is the acknowledge bit from
the receiver. Any Start detect or a write to the Start or Restart generate bits, when operating in Master
mode, will also clear the bit.
0
Last transmitted byte was ACKed by the receiver.
1
Last transmitted byte was NACKed by the receiver.
[0]
Byte Complete
Transmit/Receive Mode:
0
No completed transmit/receive since last cleared by firmware. Any Start detect or a write to
the Start or Restart generate bits, when operating in Master mode, will also clear the bit.
Transmit Mode:
1
Eight bits of data have been transmitted and an ACK or NACK has been received.
Receive Mode:
1
Eight bits of data have been received.
126
This status bit must be cleared by firmware with write of ‘0’ to the bit position.
The received byte is a Slave address.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.42
13. Register Details
I2C_DR
I2C Data Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
I2C_DR: 0,D8h
7
6
5
4
3
Access : POR
RW : 00
Bit Name
Data[7:0]
2
1
0
This register is read only for received data and write only for transmitted data. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 265 in the I2C chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Data
Read received data or write data to transmit.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
127
13. Register Details
13.1.43
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
I2C_MSCR
I2C Master Status and Control Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
I2C_MSCR: 0,D9h
7
6
5
Access : POR
Bit Name
4
3
2
1
0
R:0
R:0
RW : 0
RW : 0
Bus Busy
Master Mode
Restart Gen
Start Gen
Bits in this register are held in reset until one of the enable bits in I2C_CFG is set. For additional information, reference the
“Register Definitions” on page 265 in the I2C chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:4]
Reserved
[3]
Bus Busy
This bit is set to:
0
When a Stop condition is detected (from any bus master).
1
When a Start condition is detected (from any bus master).
[2]
Master Mode
This bit is set/cleared by hardware when the device is operating as a master.
0
Stop condition detected, generated by this device.
1
Start condition detected, generated by this device.
[1]
Restart Gen
This bit is cleared by hardware when the Restart generation is complete.
0
Restart generation complete.
1
Generate a Restart condition.
[0]
Start Gen
This bit is cleared by hardware when the Start generation is complete.
0
Start generation complete.
1
Generate a Start condition and send a byte (address) to the I2C bus, if bus is not busy.
128
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.44
13. Register Details
INT_CLR0
Interrupt Clear Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
INT_CLR0: 0,DAh
Access : POR
7
6
5
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
VC3
Sleep
GPIO
Analog 1
V Monitor
Bit Name
4
3
2
1
0
When bits in this register are read, a ‘1’ will be returned for every bit position that has a corresponding posted interrupt. When
bits in this register are written with a zero (0) and ENSWINT is not set, posted interrupts will be cleared at the corresponding
bit positions. If there was not a posted interrupt, there is no effect. When bits in this register are written with a one (1) and
ENSWINT is set, an interrupt is posted in the interrupt controller. Note that the ENSWINT bit is in the INT_MSK3 register on
page 133. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 53 in the Interrupt Controller chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
VC3
Read 0
No posted interrupt for Variable Clock 3.
Read 1
Posted interrupt present for Variable Clock 3.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 0 Clear posted interrupt if it exists.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 0 No effect.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 1 No effect.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 1 Post an interrupt for Variable Clock 3.
[6]
Sleep
Read 0
No posted interrupt for Sleep timer.
Read 1
Posted interrupt present for Sleep timer.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 0 Clear posted interrupt if it exists.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 0 No effect.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 1 No effect.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 1 Post an interrupt for Sleep timer.
[5]
GPIO
Read 0
No posted interrupt for general purpose inputs and outputs (pins).
Read 1
Posted interrupt present for GPIO (pins).
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 0 Clear posted interrupt if it exists.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 0 No effect.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 1 No effect.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 1 Post an interrupt for general purpose inputs and outputs (pins).
[4:3]
Reserved
[2]
Analog 1
[1]
Reserved
Read 0
No posted interrupt for analog columns.
Read 1
Posted interrupt present for analog columns
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 0 Clear posted interrupt if it exists.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 0 No effect.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 1 No effect.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 1 Post an interrupt for analog columns.
(continued on next page)
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
129
13. Register Details
13.1.44
[0]
130
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
INT_CLR0 (continued)
V Monitor
Read 0
No posted interrupt for supply voltage monitor.
Read 1
Posted interrupt present for supply voltage monitor.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 0 Clear posted interrupt if it exists.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 0 No effect.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 1 No effect.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 1 Post an interrupt for supply voltage monitor.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.45
13. Register Details
INT_CLR1
Interrupt Clear Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
INT_CLR1: 0,DBh
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Access : POR
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 00
RW : 0
Bit Name
DCB03
DCB02
DBB01
DBB00
When bits in this register are read, a ‘1’ will be returned for every bit position that has a corresponding posted interrupt. When
bits in this register are written with a zero (0) and ENSWINT is not set, posted interrupts will be cleared at the corresponding
bit positions. If there was not a posted interrupt, there is no effect. When bits in this register are written with a one (1) and
ENSWINT is set, an interrupt is posted in the interrupt controller. Note that the ENSWINT bit is in the INT_MSK3 register on
page 133. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 53 in the Interrupt Controller chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:4]
Reserved
[3]
DCB03
Digital Communications Block type B, row 0, position 3.
Read 0
No posted interrupt.
Read 1
Posted interrupt present.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 0 Clear posted interrupt if it exists.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 0 No effect.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 1 No effect.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 1 Post an interrupt.
[2]
DCB02
Digital Communications Block type B, row 0, position 2.
Read 0
No posted interrupt.
Read 1
Posted interrupt present.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 0 Clear posted interrupt if it exists.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 0 No effect.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 1 No effect.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 1 Post an interrupt.
[1]
DBB01
Digital Basic Block type B, row 0, position 1.
Read 0
No posted interrupt.
Read 1
Posted interrupt present.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 0 Clear posted interrupt if it exists.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 0 No effect.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 1 No effect.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 1 Post an interrupt.
[0]
DBB00
Digital Basic Block type B, row 0, position 0.
Read 0
No posted interrupt.
Read 1
Posted interrupt present.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 0 Clear posted interrupt if it exists.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 0 No effect.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 1 No effect.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 1 Post an interrupt.
December 22, 2003
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
131
13. Register Details
13.1.46
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
INT_CLR3
Interrupt Clear Register 3
Individual Register Names and Addresses
INT_CLR3: 0,DDh
7
6
5
4
3
2
Access : POR
1
0
RW : 0
Bit Name
I2C
When bits in this register are read, a ‘1’ will be returned for every bit position that has a corresponding posted interrupt. When
bits in this register are written with a zero (0) and ENSWINT is cleared, any posted interrupt will be cleared. If there was not a
posted interrupt, there is no effect. When bits in this register are written with a one (1) and ENSWINT is set, an interrupt is
posted in the interrupt controller. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 53 in the Interrupt
Controller chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:1]
Reserved
[0]
I2C
132
Description
Read 0
No posted interrupt for I2C.
Read 1
Posted interrupt present for I2C.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 0 Clear posted interrupt if it exists.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 0 No effect.
Write 0 AND ENSWINT = 1 No effect.
Write 1 AND ENSWINT = 1 Post an interrupt for I2C.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.47
13. Register Details
INT_MSK3
Interrupt Mask Register 3
Individual Register Names and Addresses
INT_MSK3: 0,DEh
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
ENSWINT
I2C
Note that when an interrupt is masked off, the mask bit is ‘0’. The interrupt will still post in the interrupt controller. Therefore,
clearing the mask bit only prevents a posted interrupt from becoming a pending interrupt. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 53 in the Interrupt Controller chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
ENSWINT
0
1
Disable software interrupts.
Enable software interrupts.
[6:1]
Reserved
[0]
I2C
0
1
Mask I2C interrupt
Unmask I2C interrupt
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
133
13. Register Details
13.1.48
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
INT_MSK0
Interrupt Mask Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
INT_MSK0: 0,E0h
Access : POR
7
6
5
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
VC3
Sleep
GPIO
Analog 1
V Monitor
Bit Name
4
3
2
1
0
Note that when an interrupt is masked off, the mask bit is ‘0’. The interrupt will still post in the interrupt controller. Therefore,
clearing the mask bit only prevents a posted interrupt from becoming a pending interrupt. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 53 in the Interrupt Controller chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
VC3
0
1
Mask VC3 interrupt.
Unmask VC3 interrupt.
[6]
Sleep
0
1
Mask sleep interrupt.
Unmask sleep interrupt.
[5]
GPIO
0
1
Mask GPIO interrupt.
Unmask GPIO interrupt.
[4:3]
Reserved
[2]
Analog 1
0
1
Mask analog interrupt, column 1.
Unmask analog interrupt.
[1]
Reserved
[0]
V Monitor
0
1
Mask voltage monitor interrupt.
Unmask voltage monitor interrupt.
134
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.49
13. Register Details
INT_MSK1
Interrupt Mask Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
INT_MSK1: 0,E1h
Access : POR
7
6
5
4
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
Bit Name
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
DCB03
DCB02
DBB01
DBB00
Note that when an interrupt is masked off, the mask bit is ‘0’. The interrupt will still post in the interrupt controller. Therefore,
clearing the mask bit only prevents a posted interrupt from becoming a pending interrupt. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 53 in the Interrupt Controller chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:4]
Reserved
[3]
DCB03
0
1
Mask Digital Communication Block, row 0, position 3 off.
Unmask Digital Communication Block, row 0, position 3.
[2]
DCB02
0
1
Mask Digital Communication Block, row 0, position 2 off.
Unmask Digital Communication Block, row 0, position 2.
[1]
DBB01
0
1
Mask Digital Basic Block, row 0, position 1 off.
Unmask Digital Basic Block, row 0, position 1.
[0]
DBB00
0
1
Mask Digital Basic Block, row 0, position 0 off.
Unmask Digital Basic Block, row 0, position 0.
December 22, 2003
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
135
13. Register Details
13.1.50
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
INT_VC
Interrupt Vector Clear Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
INT_VC: 0,E2h
7
6
5
4
Access : POR
3
2
1
0
RC : 00
Bit Name
Pending Interrupt[7:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 53 in the Interrupt Controller chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Pending Interrupt[7:0]
Read
Write
136
Returns vector for highest priority pending interrupt.
Clears all pending and posted interrupts.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.51
13. Register Details
RES_WDT
Reset Watchdog Timer Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
RES_WDT: 0,E3h
7
6
5
Access : POR
4
3
2
1
0
W : 00
Bit Name
WDSL_Clear[7:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 75 in the Sleep and Watchdog chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
WDSL_Clear[7:0]
Any write clears the Watchdog timer. A write of 38h clears both the Watchdog and Sleep timers.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
137
13. Register Details
13.1.52
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DEC_DH
Decimator Data High Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DEC_DH: 0,E4h
7
6
5
Access : POR
4
3
2
1
0
RC : XX
Bit Name
Data High Byte[7:0]
When a hardware reset occurs, the internal state of the Decimator is reset, but the output data registers (DEC_DH and
DEC_DL) are not. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 259 in the Decimator chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Data High Byte[7:0]
Read
Write
138
Returns the high byte of the decimator.
Clears the 16-bit accumulator values. Either the DEC_DH or DEC_DL register may be written to clear the accumulators (i.e., it is not necessary to write both).
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.53
13. Register Details
DEC_DL
Decimator Data Low Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DEC_DL: 0,E5h
7
6
5
Access : POR
4
3
2
1
0
RC : XX
Bit Name
Data Low Byte[7:0]
When a hardware reset occurs, the internal state of the Decimator is reset, but the output data registers (DEC_DH and
DEC_DL) are not. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 259 in the Decimator chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Data Low Byte[7:0]
Read
Write
December 22, 2003
Returns the high byte of the decimator.
Clears the 16-bit accumulator values. Either the DEC_DH or DEC_DL register may be written to clear the accumulators (i.e., it is not necessary to write both).
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
139
13. Register Details
13.1.54
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DEC_CR0
Decimator Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DEC_CR0: 0,E6h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 00
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
IGEN[3:0]
ICLKS0
DCOL[1:0]
DCLKS0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 259 in the Decimator chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:4]
IGEN[3:0]
Incremental Gate Enable. Selects on a column basis which comparator outputs will be gated with the
incremental gating function.
1h
Reserved
2h
Analog Column 1
4h
Reserved
8h
Reserved
[3]
ICLKS0
Incremental Gate Source. Along with ICLKS1 in DEC_CR1, selects one of the possible digital blocks,
depending on your chip resources, to control the incremental gating function.
ICLKS1 (see the DEC_CR1 register), ICLKS0
000b
Digital block 02
010b
Digital block 01
[2:1]
DCOL[1:0]
Decimator Column Source. Selects the analog comparator column as a data source for the decimator.
00b
Reserved
01b
Analog Column 1
10b
Reserved
11b
Reserved
[0]
DCLKS0
Decimator Latch Select. Along with DCLKS1 in DEC_CR1, selects one of the possible digital blocks,
depending on your chip resources, to control the decimator output latch.
DCLKS1 (see the DEC_CR1 register), DCLKS0
000b
Digital block 02
010b
Digital block 01
140
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.55
13. Register Details
DEC_CR1
Decimator Control Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DEC_CR1: 0,E7h
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Access : POR
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
Bit Name
ECNT
IDEC
ICLKS1
DCLKS1
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 259 in the Decimator chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
ECNT
0
1
[6]
IDEC
Invert the Digital Block Latch Control (selected by {DCLKS[1:0], DCLKS0}).
0
Non-inverted
1
Inverted
[5:4]
Reserved
[3]
ICLKS1
Disable Decimator as a counter for incremental ADC. Configure for delta sigma operation.
Enable Decimator as a counter for incremental ADC operation.
Incremental Gate Source. Along with ICLKS0 in DEC_CR0, selects one of the possible digital blocks,
depending on your chip resources, to control the incremental gating function.
ICLKS1, ICLKS0 (see the DEC_CR0 register)
000b
Digital block 02
010b
Digital block 01
[2:1]
Reserved
[0]
DCLKS1
Decimator Latch Select. Along with DCLKS0 in DEC_CR0, selects one of the possible digital blocks,
depending on your chip resources, to control the decimator output latch.
DCLKS1, DCLKS0 (see the DEC_CR0 register)
000b
Digital block 02
010b
Digital block 01
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
141
13. Register Details
13.1.56
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
CPU_F
M8C Flags Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
CPU_F: x,F7h
7
6
5
Access : POR
Bit Name
4
3
2
1
0
RL : 0
RL : 0
RL : 0
RL : 0
XOI
Carry
Zero
GIE
The AND, OR, and XOR flag instructions can be used to modify this register. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 43 in the M8C chapter and the “Register Definitions” on page 53 in the Interrupt Controller chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:5]
Reserved
[4]
XOI
[3]
Reserved
[2]
Carry
Set by the M8C CPU Core to indicate whether there has been a carry in the previous logical/arithmetic operation.
0
No carry
1
Carry
[1]
Zero
Set by the M8C CPU Core to indicate whether there has been a zero result in the previous logical/
arithmetic operation.
0
Not equal to zero
1
Equal to zero
[0]
GIE
0
1
142
Description
0
1
Normal register address space
Extended register address space. Primarily used for configuration.
M8C will not process any interrupts.
Interrupt processing enabled.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.1.57
13. Register Details
CPU_SCR1
System Status and Control Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
CPU_SCR1: x,FEh
7
6
5
4
3
2
Access : POR
1
0
RW : 0
Bit Name
IRAMDIS
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 49 in the SROM chapter or “Register Definitions” on
page 68 of the 32 kHz Crystal Oscillator chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:1]
Reserved
[0]
IRAMDIS
December 22, 2003
Description
0
1
SRAM is initialized to 00h after POR, XRES, and WDR.
Address 03h - D7h are not modified by WDR.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
143
13. Register Details
13.1.58
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
CPU_SCR0
System Status and Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
CPU_SCR0: x,FFh
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Access : POR
R:0
RC : 0
RC : 1
RW : 0
RW : 0
Bit Name
GIES
WDRS
PORS
Sleep
STOP
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 75 in the Sleep and Watchdog chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
GIES
Global interrupt enable status. It is recommended that the user read the global interrupt enable Flag
bit from the CPU_F register on page 142. This bit is Read Only for GIES. Its use is discouraged, as
the Flag register is now readable at address x,F7h (read only).
[6]
Reserved
[5]
WDRS
Watchdog Reset Status. This bit may not be set by user code; however, it may be cleared by writing it
with a zero (0).
0
No Watchdog Reset has occurred.
1
Watchdog Reset has occurred.
[4]
PORS
Power On Reset Status. This bit may not be set by user code; however, it may be cleared by writing it
with a zero (0).
0
Power On Reset has not occurred and Watchdog Timer is enabled.
1
Will be set after external reset or Power On Reset.
[3]
Sleep
Set by the user to enable the CPU sleep state. CPU will remain in Sleep mode until any interrupt is
pending.
0
Normal operation
1
Sleep
[2:1]
Reserved
[0]
STOP
144
0
1
M8C is free to execute code.
M8C is halted. Can only be cleared by POR, XRES, or WDR.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2
13. Register Details
Bank 1 Registers
The following registers are all in bank 1 and are listed in offset order.
13.2.1
PRTxDM0
Port Drive Mode Bit Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
PRT0DM0 : 1,00h
PRT1DM0 : 1,04h
7
6
5
Access : POR
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 00
Bit Name
Drive Mode 0[7:0]
In register PRTxDM0 there are eight possible drive modes for each port pin. Three mode bits are required to select one of
these modes, and these three bits are spread into three different registers (PRTxDM0, “PRTxDM1” on page 146, and
“PRTxDM2” on page 89). The bit position of the effected port pin (Example: Pin[2] in Port 0) is the same as the bit position of
each of the three Drive Mode register bits that control the drive mode for that pin (Example: Bit[2] in PRT0DM0, bit[2] in
PRT0DM1 and bit[2] in PRT0DM2). The three bits from the three registers are treated as a group. These are referred to as
DM2, DM1, and DM0, or together as DM[2:0].
All drive mode bits are shown in the sub-table below ([210] refers to the combination (in order) of bits in a given bit position);
however, this register only controls the least significant bit of the drive mode. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 58 in the GPIO chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Drive Mode 0[7:0]
Bit 0 of the drive mode, for each of 8-port pins, for a GPIO port.
[210]
000b
001b
010b
011b
100b
101b
110b
Pin Output High
Strong
Strong
Hi-z
Resistive
Slow + strong
Slow + strong
Hi-z
Pin Output Low
Resistive
Strong
Hi-z
Strong
Hi-z
Slow + strong
Hi-z
111b
Hi-z
Slow + strong
Notes
Digital input enabled.
Digital input disabled for zero power. Reset state.
I2C Compatible mode.
Note A bold digit, in the table above, signifies that the digit is used in this register.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
145
13. Register Details
13.2.2
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
PRTxDM1
Port Drive Mode Bit Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
PRT0DM1 : 1,01h
PRT1DM1 : 1,05h
7
6
5
Access : POR
4
3
2
1
0
RW : FF
Bit Name
Drive Mode 1[7:0]
In register PRTxDM1 there are eight possible drive modes for each port pin. Three mode bits are required to select one of
these modes, and these three bits are spread into three different registers (“PRTxDM0” on page 145, PRTxDM1, and
“PRTxDM2” on page 89). The bit position of the effected port pin (Example: Pin[2] in Port 0) is the same as the bit position of
each of the three Drive Mode register bits that control the drive mode for that pin (Example: Bit[2] in PRT0DM0, bit[2] in
PRT0DM1 and bit[2] in PRT0DM2). The three bits from the three registers are treated as a group. These are referred to as
DM2, DM1, and DM0, or together as DM[2:0].
All Drive Mode bits are shown in the sub-table below ([210] refers to the combination (in order) of bits in a given bit position);
however, this register only controls the middle bit of the drive mode. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 58 in the GPIO chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Drive Mode 1[7:0]
Bit 1 of the drive mode, for each of 8-port pins, for a GPIO port.
[210]
000b
001b
010b
011b
100b
101b
110b
Pin Output High
Strong
Strong
Hi-z
Resistive
Slow + strong
Slow + strong
Hi-z
Pin Output Low
Resistive
Strong
Hi-z
Strong
Hi-z
Slow + strong
Hi-z
Digital input disabled for zero power. Reset state.
111b
Hi-z
Slow + strong
I2C Compatible mode.
Notes
Digital input enabled.
Note A bold digit, in the table above, signifies that the digit is used in this register.
146
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.3
13. Register Details
PRTxIC0
Port Interrupt Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
PRT0IC0 : 1,02h
PRT1IC0 : 1,06h
7
6
5
4
Access : POR
3
2
1
0
RW : 00
Bit Name
Interrupt Control 0[7:0]
In register PRTxIC0 there are four possible interrupt modes for each port pin. Two mode bits are required to select one of
these modes and these two bits are spread into two different registers (PRTxIC0 and “PRTxIC1” on page 148). The bit position of the effected port pin (Example: Pin[2] in Port 0) is the same as the bit position of each of the Interrupt Control register
bits that control the interrupt mode for that pin (Example: Bit[2] in PRT0IC0 and bit[2] in PRT0IC1). The two bits from the two
registers are treated as a group. In the sub-table below, “[0]” refers to the combination (in order) of bits in a given position, one
bit from PRTxIC1 and one bit from PRTxIC0.
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 58 in the GPIO chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Interrupt Control 0[7:0]
[10]
00b
01b
10b
11b
‘
Interrupt Type
Disabled
Low
High
Change from last read
Note A bold digit, in the table above, signifies that the digit is used in this register.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
147
13. Register Details
13.2.4
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
PRTxIC1
Port Interrupt Control Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
PRT0IC1 : 1,03h
PRT1IC1 : 1,07h
7
6
5
4
Access : POR
3
2
1
0
RW : 00
Bit Name
Interrupt Control 1[7:0]
In register PRTxIC1 there are four possible interrupt modes for each port pin. Two mode bits are required to select one of
these modes and these two bits are spread into two different registers (“PRTxIC0” on page 147 and PRTxIC1). The bit position of the effected port pin (Example: Pin[2] in Port 0) is the same as the bit position of each of the Interrupt Control register
bits that control the interrupt mode for that pin (Example: Bit[2] in PRT0IC0 and bit[2] in PRT0IC1). The two bits from the two
registers are treated as a group. In the sub-table below, “[1]” refers to the combination (in order) of bits in a given position, one
bit from PRTxIC1 and one bit from PRTxIC0.
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 58 in the GPIO chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Interrupt Control 1[7:0]
[10]
00b
01b
10b
11b
‘
Interrupt Type
Disabled
Low
High
Change from last read
Note A bold digit, in the table above, signifies that the digit is used in this register.
148
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.5
13. Register Details
DxBxxFN
Digital Basic/Communications Type B Block Function Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DBB00FN : 1,20h
Access : POR
Bit Name
DBB01FN : 1,24h
DCB02FN : 1,28h
5
4
DCB03FN : 1,2Ch
7
6
3
2
1
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
Data Invert
BCEN
End/Single
Mode[1:0]
Function[2:0]
0
Before changing any of the configuration registers (DxBxxFN, DxBxxIN, and DxBxxOU), disable the corresponding digital
block by setting bit 0 in the CR0 or DxBxxCR0 register to ‘0’. The values in the DxBxxFN register should not be changed while
the block is enabled. After all configuration changes are made, enable the block by setting bit 0 in the DxBxxCR0 register to
‘1’.
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital Blocks chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
Data Invert
0
1
[6]
BCEN
Enable Primary Function Output to drive the broadcast net.
0
Disable
1
Enable
[5]
End/Single
0
1
[4:3]
Mode[1:0]
(Function Dependent)
Timer or Counter:
Mode[0] signifies the interrupt type.
0
Interrupt on Terminal Count
1
Interrupt on Compare True
Mode[1] signifies the compare type.
0
Compare on Less Than or Equal
1
Compare on Less Than
CRCPRS:
Mode[1:0] are encoded as the Compare Type.
00b
Compare on Equal
01b
Compare on Less Than or Equal
10b
Reserved
11b
Compare on Less Than
Dead Band:
Mode[1:0] are encoded as the Kill Type.
00b
Synchronous Restart KILL mode
01b
Disable KILL mode
10b
Asynchronous KILL mode
11b
Reserved
Data input is non-inverted.
Data input is inverted.
Block is not the end of a chained function or the function is not chainable.
Block is the end of a chained function or a standalone block in a chainable function.
(continued on next page)
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
149
13. Register Details
13.2.5
[2:0]
150
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DxBxxFN (continued)
UART:
Mode[0] signifies the Direction.
0
Receiver
1
Transmitter
Mode[1] signifies the Interrupt Type.
0
Interrupt on TX Reg Empty
1
Interrupt on TX Complete
SPI:
Mode[0] signifies the Type.
0
Master
1
Slave
Mode[1] signifies the Interrupt Type.
0
Interrupt on TX Reg Empty
1
Interrupt on SPI Complete
Function[2:0]
000b
001b
010b
011b
100b
101b
110b
111b
Timer (chainable)
Counter (chainable)
CRCPRS (chainable)
Reserved
Dead Band
UART (DCBxx blocks only)
SPI (DCBxx blocks only)
Reserved
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.6
13. Register Details
DxBxxIN
Digital Basic/Communications Type B Block Input Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DBB00IN : 1,21h
DBB01IN : 1,25h
7
6
5
Access : POR
Bit Name
DCB02IN : 1,29h
4
DCB03IN : 1,2Dh
3
2
1
RW : 0
RW : 0
Data Input[3:0]
Clock Input[3:0]
0
Before changing any of the configuration registers (DxBxxFN, DxBxxIN, and DxBxxOU), disable the corresponding digital
block by setting bit 0 in the CR0 or DxBxxCR0 register to ‘0’. The values in this register should not be changed while the block
is enabled. After all configuration changes are made, enable the block by setting bit 0 in the CR0 register to ‘1’.
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital Blocks chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:4]
Data Input[3:0]
0h
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
9h
Ah
Bh
Ch
Dh
Eh
Fh
Low (0)
High (1)
Row broadcast net
Chain function to previous block
Analog column comparator 0
Analog column comparator 1
Reserved
Reserved
Row output 0
Row output 1
Row output 2
Row output 3
Row input 0
Row input 1
Row input 2
Row input 3
[3:0]
Clock Input[3:0]
0h
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
9h
Ah
Bh
Ch
Dh
Eh
Fh
Clock disabled (low)
VC3
Row broadcast net
Previous block primary output (low for DBB00)
SYSCLKX2
VC1
VC2
CLK32K
Row output 0
Row output 1
Row output 2
Row output 3
Row input 0
Row input 1
Row input 2
Row input 3
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
151
13. Register Details
13.2.7
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DxBxxOU
Digital Basic/Communications Type B Block Output Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
DBB00OU : 1,22h
DBB01OU : 1,26h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
DCB02OU : 1,2Ah
5
4
3
DCB03OU : 1,2Eh
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
AUXCLK
AUXEN
AUX IO Select[1:0]t
OUTEN
Output Select[1:0]
Before changing any of the configuration registers (DxBxxFN, DxBxxIN, and DxBxxOU), disable the corresponding digital
block by setting bit 0 in the CR0 or DxBxxCR0 register to ‘0’. The values in this register should not be changed while the block
is enabled. After all configuration changes are made, enable the block by setting bit 0 in the DxBxxCR0 register to ‘1’.
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 198 in the Digital Blocks chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:6]
AUXCLK
00b
01b
10b
11b
[5]
AUXEN
Aux IO Enable (function dependent)
All Functions except SPI Slave: Enable Auxiliary Output Driver
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
No sync
Synchronize to SYSCLK
Synchronize to SYSCLKX2
SYSCLK
16 to 1 clock mux output
Output of 16 to 1 clock mux to SYSCLK
Output of 16 to 1 clock mux to SYSCLKX2
Directly connect SYSCLK to block clock input
SPI Slave: Slave Select Input
Aux IO Enable, Aux IO Select[1:0] (function dependent, SPIS only)
Source for SS_ input
000b
AUXDATA[0] (Row Input 0)
001b
AUXDATA[1] (Row Input 1)
010b
AUXDATA[2] (Row input 2)
011b
AUXDATA[3] (Row input 3)
100b
Force SS_ active
101b
Reserved
110b
Reserved
111b
Reserved
[4:3]
AUX IO Select[1:0]
All Functions except SPI Slave: Row Output Select for Auxiliary Function Output (function dependent)
00b
Row Output 0
01b
Row Output 1
10b
Row Output 2
11b
Row Output 3
[2]
OUTEN
Enable Primary Function Output Driver
0
Disabled.
1
Enabled.
(continued on next page)
152
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.7
[1:0]
13. Register Details
DxBxxOU (continued)
Output Select[1:0]
December 22, 2003
Row Output Select for Primary Function Output
00b
Row Output 0
01b
Row Output 1
10b
Row Output 2
11b
Row Output 3
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
153
13. Register Details
13.2.8
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
CLK_CR0
Analog Column Clock Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
CLK_CR0: 1,60h
7
6
5
4
Access : POR
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
Bit Name
Acolumn1[1:0]
Each column has two bits that select the column clock input source. The resulting column clock frequency is the selected
input clock frequency divided by four. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 228 in the Analog Interface chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:4]
Reserved
[3:2]
Acolumn1[1:0]
[1:0]
Reserved
154
Description
Clock selection for column 1.
00b
Variable Clock 1 (VC1)
01b
Variable Clock 2 (VC2)
10b
Analog Clock 0 (ACLK0)
11b
Analog Clock 1 (ACLK1)
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.9
13. Register Details
CLK_CR1
Analog Clock Source Control Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
CLK_CR1: 1,61h
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Access : POR
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
Bit Name
SHDIS
ACLK1[2:0]
ACLK0[2:0]
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 228 in the Analog Interface chapter.
Bit
Name
[7]
Reserved
[6]
SHDIS
Sample and hold disable.
0
Enabled
1
Disabled
[5:3]
ACLK1[2:0]
Select the clocking source for Analog Clock 1.
000b
Digital PSoC Block 00
001b
Digital PSoC Block 01
010b
Digital PSoC Block 02
011b
Digital PSoC Block 03
100b
Reserved
101b
Reserved
110b
Reserved
111b
Reserved
[2:0]
ACLK0[2:0]
Select the clocking source for Analog Clock 0.
000b
Digital PSoC Block 00
001b
Digital PSoC Block 01
010b
Digital PSoC Block 02
011b
Digital PSoC Block 03
100b
Reserved
101b
Reserved
110b
Reserved
111b
Reserved
December 22, 2003
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
155
13. Register Details
13.2.10
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
ABF_CR0
Analog Output Buffer Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ABF_CR0: 1,62h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
ACol1Mux
ABUF1EN0
Bypass
PWR
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 61 in the Analog Output Drivers chapter or the “Register Definitions” on page 235 in the Analog Input Configuration chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
ACol1Mux
0
1
[6]
Reserved
[5]
ABUF1EN0
[4:2]
Reserved
[1]
Bypass
Connects the positive input of the amplifier directly to its output. Amplifiers need to be disabled when
in Bypass mode.
0
Disable
1
Enable
[0]
PWR
Determines power level of all output buffers.
0
Low output power
1
High output power
156
Set column 1 input to column 1 input mux output. (Selects among P0[6,4,2,0])
Set column 1 input to column 0 input mux output. (Selects among P0[7,5,3,1])
Enables the analog output buffer for Analog Column 1 (Pin P0[5]).
0
Disable analog output buffer.
1
Enable analog output buffer.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.11
13. Register Details
AMD_CR1
Analog Modulation Control Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
AMD_CR1: 1,66h
7
6
5
4
3
Access : POR
2
1
0
RW : 0
Bit Name
AMOD1[2:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 228 in the Analog Interface chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:3]
Reserved
[2:0]
AMOD1[2:0]
December 22, 2003
Description
Analog modulation control signal selection for column 1.
000b
Zero (off)
001b
Global Output Bus, even bus bit 1 (GOE[1])
010b
Global Output Bus, even bus bit 0 (GOE[0])
011b
Row 0 Broadcast Bus
100b
Reserved
101b
Analog Column Comparator 1
110b
Reserved
111b
Reserved
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
157
13. Register Details
13.2.12
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
ALT_CR0
Analog LUT Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ALT_CR0: 1,67h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
LUT1[3:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 228 in the Analog Interface chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:4]
LUT1[3:0]
Select one of 16 logic functions for the output of comparator bus 1. Note that B=0.
0h
FALSE
1h
A AND B
2h
A AND B
3h
A
4h
A AND B
5h
B
6h
A XOR B
7h
A OR B
8h
A NOR B
9h
A XNOR B
Ah
B
Bh
A OR B
Ch
A
Dh
A OR B
Eh
A NAND B
Fh
TRUE
[3:0]
Reserved
158
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.13
13. Register Details
GDI_O_IN
Global Digital Interconnect Odd Inputs Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
GDI_O_IN: 1,D0h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
GIONOUT7
GIONOUT6
GIONOUT5
GIONOUT4
GIONOUT3
GIONOUT2
GIONOUT1
GIONOUT0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 179 in the Global Digital Interconnect chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
GIONOUT7
0
1
GIO[7] does not drive GOO[7].
GIO[7] drives its value on to GOO[7].
[6]
GIONOUT6
0
1
GIO[6] does not drive GOO[6].
GIO[6] drives its value on to GOO[6].
[5]
GIONOUT5
0
1
GIO[5] does not drive GOO[5].
GIO[5] drives its value on to GOO[5].
[4]
GIONOUT4
0
1
GIO[4] does not drive GOO[4].
GIO[4] drives its value on to GOO[4].
[3]
GIONOUT3
0
1
GIO[3] does not drive GOO[3].
GIO[3] drives its value on to GOO[3].
[2]
GIONOUT2
0
1
GIO[2] does not drive GOO[2].
GIO[2] drives its value on to GOO[2].
[1]
GIONOUT1
0
1
GIO[1] does not drive GOO[1].
GIO[1] drives its value on to GOO[1].
[0]
GIONOUT0
0
1
GIO[0] does not drive GOO[0].
GIO[0] drives its value on to GOO[0].
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
159
13. Register Details
13.2.14
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
GDI_E_IN
Global Digital Interconnect Even Inputs Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
GDI_E_IN: 1,D1h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
GIENOUT7
GIENOUT6
GIENOUT5
GIENOUT4
GIENOUT3
GIENOUT2
GIENOUT1
GIENOUT0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 179 in the Global Digital Interconnect chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
GIENOUT7
0
1
GIE[7] does not drive GOE[7].
GIE[7] drives its value on to GOE [7].
[6]
GIENOUT6
0
1
GIE[6] does not drive GOE[6].
GIE[6] drives its value on to GOE [6].
[5]
GIENOUT5
0
1
GIE[5] does not drive GOE[5].
GIE[5] drives its value on to GOE [5].
[4]
GIENOUT4
0
1
GIE[4] does not drive GOE[4].
GIE[4] drives its value on to GOE [4].
[3]
GIENOUT3
0
1
GIE[3] does not drive GOE[3].
GIE[3] drives its value on to GOE [3].
[2]
GIENOUT2
0
1
GIE[2] does not drive GOE[2].
GIE[2] drives its value on to GOE [2].
[1]
GIENOUT1
0
1
GIE[1] does not drive GOE[1].
GIE[1] drives its value on to GOE [1].
[0]
GIENOUT0
0
1
GIE[0] does not drive GOE[0].
GIE[0] drives its value on to GOE [0].
160
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.15
13. Register Details
GDI_O_OU
Global Digital Interconnect Odd Outputs Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
GDI_O_OU: 1,D2h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
GOOUTIN7
GOOUTIN6
GOOUTIN5
GOOUTIN4
GOOUTIN3
GOOUTIN2
GOOUTIN1
GOOUTIN0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 179 in the Global Digital Interconnect chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
GOOUTIN7
0
1
GOO[7] does not drive GIO[7].
GOO[7] drives its value on to GIO[7].
[6]
GOOUTIN6
0
1
GOO[6] does not drive GIO[6].
GOO[6] drives its value on to GIO[6].
[5]
GOOUTIN5
0
1
GOO[5] does not drive GIO[5].
GOO[5] drives its value on to GIO[5].
[4]
GOOUTIN4
0
1
GOO[4] does not drive GIO[4].
GOO[4] drives its value on to GIO[4].
[3]
GOOUTIN3
0
1
GOO[3] does not drive GIO[3].
GOO[3] drives its value on to GIO[3].
[2]
GOOUTIN2
0
1
GOO[2] does not drive GIO[2].
GOO[2] drives its value on to GIO[2].
[1]
GOOUTIN1
0
1
GOO[1] does not drive GIO[1].
GOO[1] drives its value on to GIO[1].
[0]
GOOUTIN0
0
1
GOO[0] does not drive GIO[0].
GOO[0] drives its value on to GIO[0].
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
161
13. Register Details
13.2.16
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
GDI_E_OU
Global Digital Interconnect Even Outputs Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
GDI_E_OU: 1,D3h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
GOEUTIN7
GOEUTIN6
GOEUTIN5
GOEUTIN4
GOEUTIN3
GOEUTIN2
GOEUTIN1
GOEUTIN0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 179 in the Global Digital Interconnect chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
GOEUTIN7
0
1
GOE[7] does not drive GIE[7].
GOE[7] drives its value on to GIE[7].
[6]
GOEUTIN6
0
1
GOE[6] does not drive GIE[6].
GOE[6] drives its value on to GIE[6].
[5]
GOEUTIN5
0
1
GOE[5] does not drive GIE[5].
GOE[5] drives its value on to GIE[5].
[4]
GOEUTIN4
0
1
GOE[4] does not drive GIE[4].
GOE[4] drives its value on to GIE[4].
[3]
GOEUTIN3
0
1
GOE[3] does not drive GIE[3].
GOE[3] drives its value on to GIE[3].
[2]
GOEUTIN2
0
1
GOE[2] does not drive GIE[2].
GOE[2] drives its value on to GIE[2].
[1]
GOEUTIN1
0
1
GOE[1] does not drive GIE[1].
GOE[1] drives its value on to GIE[1].
[0]
GOEUTIN0
0
1
GOE[0] does not drive GIE[0].
GOE[0] drives its value on to GIE[0].
162
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.17
13. Register Details
OSC_CR4
Oscillator Control Register 4
Individual Register Names and Addresses
OSC_CR4: 1,DEh
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Access : POR
0
RW : 0
Bit Name
VC3 Input Select[1:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 256 in the Digital Clocks chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:2]
Reserved
[1:0]
VC3 Input Select[1:0]
December 22, 2003
Description
Selects the clocking source for the VC3 Clock Divider.
00b
SYSCLK
01b
VC1
10b
VC2
11b
SYSCLKX2
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
163
13. Register Details
13.2.18
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
OSC_CR3
Oscillator Control Register 3
Individual Register Names and Addresses
OSC_CR3: 1,DFh
7
6
5
4
3
Access : POR
2
1
0
RW : 00
Bit Name
VC3 Divider[7:0]
The output frequency of the VC3 Clock Divider is the input frequency divided by the value in this register, plus one. For example, if this register contains 07h, the clock frequency output from the VC3 Clock Divider will be one eighth the input frequency.
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 256 in the Digital Clocks chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
VC3 Divider[7:0]
Reference the OSC_CR4 register.
00h
Input Clock
01h
Input Clock / 2
02h
Input Clock / 3
03h
Input Clock / 4
...
...
FCh
Input Clock / 253
FDh
Input Clock / 254
FEh
Input Clock / 255
FFh
Input Clock / 256
164
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.19
13. Register Details
OSC_CR0
Oscillator Control Register 0
Individual Register Names and Addresses
OSC_CR0: 1,E0h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
32k Select
PLL Mode
No Buzz
Sleep[1:0]
CPU Speed[2:0]
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 256 in the Digital Clocks chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
32k Select
0
1
Internal low precision 32 kHz oscillator
External Crystal Oscillator
[6]
PLL Mode
0
1
Disabled
Enabled. Internal main oscillator is frequency locked to External Crystal Oscillator.
[5]
No Buzz
0
1
BUZZ bandgap during power down.
Bandgap is always powered even during sleep.
[4:3]
Sleep[1:0]
00b
01b
10b
11b
Sleep Interval
1.95 ms (512 Hz)
15.6 ms (64 Hz)
125 ms (8 Hz)
1 s (1 Hz)
000b
001b
010b
011b
100b
101b
110b
111b
Internal Main Oscillator
3 MHz
6 MHz
12 MHz
24 MHz
1.5 MHz
750 kHz
187.5 kHz
93.7 kHz
[2:0]
CPU Speed[2:0]
December 22, 2003
External Clock
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 4
EXTCLK / 2
EXTCLK / 1
EXTCLK / 16
EXTCLK / 32
EXTCLK / 128
EXTCLK / 256
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
165
13. Register Details
13.2.20
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
OSC_CR1
Oscillator Control Register 1
Individual Register Names and Addresses
OSC_CR1: 1,E1h
7
6
5
Access : POR
Bit Name
4
3
2
1
RW : 0
RW : 0
VC1 Divider[3:0]
VC2 Divider[3:0]
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 256 in the Digital Clocks chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:4]
VC1 Divider[3:0]
[3:0]
166
Description
0h
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
9h
Ah
Bh
Ch
Dh
Eh
Fh
Internal Main Oscillator
24 MHz
12 MHz
8 MHz
6 MHz
4.8 MHz
4 MHz
3.43 MHz
3 MHz
2.67 MHz
2.40 MHz
2.18 MHz
2.00 MHz
1.85 MHz
1.71 MHz
1.6 MHz
1.5 MHz
External Clock
EXTCLK / 1
EXTCLK / 2
EXTCLK / 3
EXTCLK / 4
EXTCLK / 5
EXTCLK / 6
EXTCLK / 7
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 9
EXTCLK / 10
EXTCLK / 11
EXTCLK / 12
EXTCLK / 13
EXTCLK / 14
EXTCLK / 15
EXTCLK / 16
0h
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
9h
Ah
Bh
Ch
Dh
Eh
Fh
Internal Main Oscillator
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 1
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 2
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 3
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 4
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 5
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 6
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 7
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 8
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 9
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 10
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 11
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 12
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 13
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 14
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 15
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 16
External Clock
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 1
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 2
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 3
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 4
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 5
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 6
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 7
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 8
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 9
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 10
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 11
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 12
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 13
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 14
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 15
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 16
VC2 Divider[3:0]
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.21
13. Register Details
OSC_CR2
Oscillator Control Register 2
Individual Register Names and Addresses
OSC_CR2: 1,E2h
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
PLLGAIN
EXTCLKEN
IMODIS
SYSCLKX2DIS
Note that in OCD mode (OCDM=1), bits [1:0] have no effect. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions”
on page 256 in the Digital Clocks chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7]
PLLGAIN
Phase locked loop gain.
0
Recommended value, normal gain.
1
Reduced gain to make PLL more tolerant to noisy or jittery crystal input.
[6:3]
Reserved
[2]
EXTCLKEN
External clock mode enable.
0
Disabled. Operate from internal main oscillator.
1
Enabled. Operate from clock supplied at port P1[4].
[1]
IMODIS
Internal oscillator disable. Can be set to save power when using an external clock on P1[4].
0
Enabled. Internal oscillator enabled.
1
Disabled, if SYSCLKX2DIS is set (1).
[0]
SYSCLKX2DIS
48 MHz clock source disable.
0
Enabled. If enabled, the 48 MHz clock is forced on.
1
Disabled for power reduction.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
167
13. Register Details
13.2.22
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
VLT_CR
Voltage Monitor Control Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
VLT_CR: 1,E3h
7
6
5
Access : POR
Bit Name
4
3
2
1
0
RW : 0
RW : 0
RW : 0
PORLEV[1:0]
LVDTBEN
VM[2:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 277 in the POR and LVD chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:6]
Reserved
[5:4]
PORLEV[1:0]
Sets the POR level.
00b
POR level for 3V operation
01b
POR level for 4.5V operation
10b
POR level for 4.75V operation
11b
Reserved
[3]
LVDTBEN
Enables reset of CPU speed register by LVD comparator output.
0
Disables CPU speed throttle-back.
1
Enables CPU speed throttle-back.
[2:0]
VM[2:0]
Sets the LVDp levels per “DC POR and LVD Specifications” on page 294.
000b
Typical LVD setting for operation above 3.0V.
001b
010b
011b
100b
101b
Typical LVD setting for operation above 4.75V (no switch mode pump).
110b
111b
Typical pump setting for 5V operation.
168
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.23
13. Register Details
VLT_CMP
Voltage Monitor Comparators Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
VLT_CMP: 1,E4h
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Access : POR
R:0
R:0
Bit Name
LVD
PPOR
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 277 in the POR and LVD chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:2]
Reserved
[1]
LVD
Reads state of LVD comparator.
0
Vdd is above LVD trip point.
1
Vdd is below LVD trip point.
[0]
PPOR
Reads state of Precision POR comparator (only useful with PPOR reset disabled, with PORLEV[1:0]
in VLT_CR register set to 11b).
0
Vdd is above PPOR trip voltage.
1
Vdd is below PPOR trip voltage.
December 22, 2003
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
169
13. Register Details
13.2.24
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
IMO_TR
Internal Main Oscillator Trim Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
IMO_TR: 1,E8h
7
6
5
Access : POR
4
3
2
1
0
W : 00
Bit Name
Trim[7:0]
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 63 in the Internal Main Oscillator chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:0]
Trim[7:0]
The value of this register is used to trim the Internal Main Oscillator. Its value is set to the best value
for the device during boot. The value in this register should not be changed.
00h
Lowest frequency setting
01h
...
...
7Fh
80h
Design center setting
81h
...
...
FEh
FFh
Highest frequency setting
170
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.25
13. Register Details
ILO_TR
Internal Low Speed Oscillator Trim Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ILO_TR: 1,E9h
7
6
5
Access : POR
Bit Name
4
3
2
1
W:0
W : 00
Bias Trim[1:0]
Freq Trim[3:0]
0
It is strongly recommended that the user not alter this register’s value. The trim bits are set to factory specifications and
should not be changed.
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 65 in the Internal Low Speed Oscillator chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:6]
Reserved
[5:4]
Bias Trim[1:0]
The value of this register is used to trim the Internal Low Speed Oscillator. Its value is set to the
device specific, best value during boot. The value in this register should not be changed.
00b
Medium bias
01b
Maximum bias (recommended)
10b
Minimum bias
11b
Reserved
[3:0]
Freq Trim[3:0]
The value of this register is used to trim the Internal Low Speed Oscillator. Its value is set to the
device specific, best value during boot. The value in this register should not be changed.
December 22, 2003
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
171
13. Register Details
13.2.26
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
BDG_TR
Bandgap Trim Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
BDG_TR: 1,EAh
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Access : POR
RW : 1
RW : 8
Bit Name
TC[1:0]
V[3:0]
0
For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on page 279 in the Internal Voltage Reference chapter.
Bit
Name
[7:6]
Reserved
[5:4]
TC[1:0]
The value of these bits is used to trim the temperature coefficient. Their value is set to the best value
for the device during boot. The value of these bits should not be changed.
[3:0]
V[3:0]
The value of these bits is used to trim the bandgap reference. Their value is set to the best value for
the device during boot. The value of these its should not be changed.
172
Description
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
13.2.27
13. Register Details
ECO_TR
External Crystal Oscillator Trim Register
Individual Register Names and Addresses
ECO_TR: 1,EBh
7
Access : POR
Bit Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
W:0
PSSDC[1:0]
The value of this register is used to trim the External Crystal Oscillator. Its value is set to the device specific, best value during
boot. The value in this register should not be changed. For additional information, reference the “Register Definitions” on
page 68 in the 32 kHz Crystal Oscillator chapter.
Bit
Name
Description
[7:6]
PSSDC[1:0]
Sleep duty cycle. Controls the ratios (in numbers of 32 kHz clock periods) of “on” time versus “off”
time for PORLVD, Bandgap reference, and pspump.
00b
1 / 128
01b
1 / 512
10b
1 / 32
11b
1/8
[5:0]
Reserved
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
173
13. Register Details
174
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
SECTION D
DIGITAL SYSTEM
The Digital System section discusses the digital components of the PSoC device and the registers associated with those
components. This section encompasses the following chapters:
■
Global Digital Interconnect (GDI) on page 177
■
Row Digital Interconnect (RDI) on page 183
■
Array Digital Interconnect (ADI) on page 181
■
Digital Blocks on page 189
Top-Level Digital Architecture
The figure below displays the top-level architecture of the PSoC’s digital system. Each component of the figure is discussed
at length in this section.
SYSTEM BUS
Port 1
Port 0
Global Digital Interconnect
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Digital PSoC
Block Array
Digital
Clocks
from Core
DB
DB
DC
DC
To Analog
System
Digital
DigitalRows
Row
PSoC Digital System Block Diagram
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
175
SECTION D DIGITAL SYSTEM
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Digital Register Summary
The table below lists all the PSoC registers in the digital system.
Summary Table of the Digital Registers
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
GLOBAL DIGITAL INTERCONNECT (GDI) REGISTERS
1,D0h
GDI_O_IN
GIONOUT7
GIONOUT6
GIONOUT5
GIONOUT4
GIONOUT3
GIONOUT2
GIONOUT1
GIONOUT0
RW : 00
1,D1h
GDI_E_IN
GIENOUT7
GIENOUT6
GIENOUT5
GIENOUT4
GIENOUT3
GIENOUT2
GIENOUT1
GIENOUT0
RW : 00
1,D2h
GDI_O_OU
GOOUTIN7
GOOUTIN6
GOOUTIN5
GOOUTIN4
GOOUTIN3
GOOUTIN2
GOOUTIN1
GOOUTIN0
RW : 00
1,D3h
GDI_E_OU
GOEUTIN7
GOEUTIN6
GOEUTIN5
GOEUTIN4
GOEUTIN3
GOEUTIN2
GOEUTIN1
GOEUTIN0
RW : 00
x,B0h
RDI0RI
x,B1h
RDI0SYN
x,B2h
RDI0IS
x,B3h
RDI0LT0
x,B4h
RDI0LT1
x,B5h
RDI0RO0
GOO5EN
GOO1EN
GOE5EN
GOE1EN
GOO4EN
GOO0EN
GOE4EN
GOE0EN
RW : 00
x,B6h
RDI0RO1
GOO7EN
GOO3EN
GOE7EN
GOE3EN
GOO6EN
GOO2EN
GOE6EN
GOE2EN
RW : 00
DIGITAL ROW REGISTERS
RI3[1:0]
RI2[1:0]
RI1[1:0]
RI0[1:0]
RW : 00
RI3SYN
RI2SYN
RI1SYN
RI0SYN
IS3
IS2
IS1
IS0
BCSEL[1:0]
LUT1[3:0]
LUT0[3:0]
LUT3[3:0]
RW : 00
RW : 00
RW : 00
LUT2[3:0]
RW : 00
DIGITAL BLOCK REGISTERS
Data and Control Registers
0,20h
DBB00DR0
Data[7:0]
# : 00
0,21h
DBB00DR1
Data[7:0]
W : 00
0,22h
DBB00DR2
0,23h
DBB00CR0
1,20h
DBB00FN
1,21h
DBB00IN
1,22h
DBB00OU
0,24h
DBB01DR0
Data[7:0]
# : 00
0,25h
DBB01DR1
Data[7:0]
W : 00
Data[7:0]
# : 00
Function control/status bits for selected function[6:0]
Data Invert
BCEN
End/Single
Mode[1:0]
Function[2:0]
Data Input[3:0]
AUXCLK
AUXEN
Enable
Clock Input[3:0]
AUX IO Select[1:0]
OUTEN
# : 00
RW : 00
RW : 00
Output Select[1:0]
Data[7:0]
RW : 00
0,26h
DBB01DR2
0,27h
DBB01CR0
# : 00
1,24h
DBB01FN
1,25h
DBB01IN
1,26h
DBB01OU
0,28h
DCB02DR0
Data[7:0]
# : 00
0,29h
DCB02DR1
Data[7:0]
W : 00
Function control/status bits for selected function[6:0]
Data Invert
BCEN
End/Single
Mode[1:0]
Function[2:0]
Data Input[3:0]
AUXCLK
AUXEN
Enable
Clock Input[3:0]
AUX IO Select[1:0]
OUTEN
# : 00
RW : 00
RW : 00
Output Select[1:0]
0,2Ah
DCB02DR2
0,2Bh
DCB02CR0
1,28h
DCB02FN
1,29h
DCB02IN
1,2Ah
DCB02OU
0,2Ch
DCB03DR0
Data[7:0]
# : 00
0,2Dh
DCB03DR1
Data[7:0]
W : 00
0,2Eh
DCB03DR2
0,2Fh
DCB03CR0
1,2Ch
DCB03FN
1,2Dh
DCB03IN
1,2Eh
DCB03OU
Data[7:0]
RW : 00
# : 00
Function control/status bits for selected function[6:0]
Data Invert
BCEN
End/Single
Mode[1:0]
Function[2:0]
Data Input[3:0]
AUXCLK
AUXEN
Enable
Clock Input[3:0]
AUX IO Select[1:0]
OUTEN
RW : 00
Output Select[1:0]
Data[7:0]
BCEN
End/Single
AUXEN
Enable
Mode[1:0]
Data Input[3:0]
AUXCLK
Function[2:0]
OUTEN
# : 00
RW : 00
Clock Input[3:0]
AUX IO Select[1:0]
RW : 00
# : 00
Function control/status bits for selected function[6:0]
Data Invert
# : 00
RW : 00
RW : 00
Output Select[1:0]
RW : 00
LEGEND
#: Access is bit specific. Refer to register detail for additional information.
x: An “x” before the comma in the address field indicates that this register can be accessed or written to no matter what bank is used.
176
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
14. Global Digital Interconnect (GDI)
This chapter discusses the Global Digital Interconnect (GDI) and its associated registers. GDI is the most general level of
interconnect configuration available in the PSoC Mixed Signal Arrays.
Table 14-1. Global Digital Interconnect (GDI) Registers
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
GIONOUT7
GIONOUT6
GIONOUT5
GIONOUT4
GIONOUT3
GIONOUT2
GIONOUT1
GIONOUT0
RW : 00
GIENOUT1
GIENOUT0
RW : 00
GOOUTIN1
GOOUTIN0
RW : 00
GOEUTIN0
RW : 00
1,D0h
GDI_O_IN
1,D1h
GDI_E_IN
GIENOUT7
GIENOUT6
GIENOUT5
GIENOUT4
GIENOUT3
GIENOUT2
1,D2h
GDI_O_OU
GOOUTIN7
GOOUTIN6
GOOUTIN5
GOOUTIN4
GOOUTIN3
GOOUTIN2
1,D3h
GDI_E_OU
GOEUTIN7
GOEUTIN6
GOEUTIN5
GOEUTIN4
GOEUTIN3
GOEUTIN2
GOEUTIN1
Global Digital Interconnect (GDI) consists of four 8-bit busses. Two of the busses are input busses, which allow signals to pass from the device pins to the core of the chip.
These busses are called Global Input Odd (GIO[7:0]) and
Global Input Even (GIE[7:0]). The other two busses are output busses and allow signals to pass from the core of the
chip to the device pins. They are called Global Output Odd
(GOO[7:0]) and Global Output Even (GOE[7:0]). The word
“odd” or “even” in the bus name indicates which device ports
the bus connects to. Busses with odd in their name connect
to all odd numbered ports and busses with even in their
name connect to all even numbered ports. Note that the
word odd or even in the bus name refers to ports and not
pins.
14.1
Architectural Description
The primary goal, of the architectural block diagram that follows, is to communicate the relationship between global
busses (GOE, GOO, GIE, GIO) and pins. Note that any global input may be connected to its corresponding global output, using the tri-state buffers located in the corners of the
figure. Also, global outputs may be shorted to global inputs
using these tri-state buffers. The rectangle in the center of
the figure represents the array of digital PSoC blocks.
There are two ends to the global digital interconnect core
signals and port pins. An end may be configured as a
source or a destination. For example, a GPIO pin may be
configured to drive a global input or receive its output from a
global output. Currently there are two types of core signals
connected to the global busses. The digital blocks, which
may be a source or a destination for a global net, and system clocks, which may only drive global nets.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
177
14. Global Digital Interconnect (GDI)
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Even Numbered Pins
GIE[0]
GIE[2]
GIE[4]
GIE[6]
GOE[0]
GOE[2]
GOE[4]
GOE[6]
GOE[7]
GOE[5]
GOE[3]
GOE[1]
GIE[7]
GIE[5]
GIE[3]
GIE[1]
Odd Numbered Pins
P0[7] GO
GI
GO
GI
GO
GI
GO
GI
GO
GI
P0[6]
P0[4]
P0[2]
P0[0]
CLK32K
VC3
VC2
VC1
SYSCLKX2
ACMP[3:0]
DB[7:0]
DBI
INT[23:8]
P0[5] GO
GI
P0[3] GO
GI
P0[1] GO
GI
GIE[7,5,3,1]
GOE[7,5,3,1]
GIE[6,4,2,0]
GOE[6,4,2,0]
Digital PSoC Array
Odd Numbered Ports
DBB00 DBB01 DCB02 DCB03
GIO[7,5,3,1]
GOO[7,5,3,1]
Even Numbered Ports
GIO[6,4,2,0]
GOO[6,4,2,0]
P1[7] GO
GI
P1[6]
P1[4]
P1[2]
P1[0]
GIO[0]
GIO[2]
GIO[4]
GIO[6]
GOO[0]
GOO[2]
GOO[4]
GOO[6]
GOO[7]
GOO[5]
GOO[3]
GIO[7]
GIO[5]
GIO[3]
GIO[1]
GOO[1]
P1[5] GO
GI
P1[3] GO
GI
P1[1] GO
GI
GO
GI
GO
GI
GO
GI
GO
GI
Even Numbered Pins
Odd Numbered Pins
Figure 14-1. Global Interconnect Block Diagram
178
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
14.2
14.2.1
14. Global Digital Interconnect (GDI)
Register Definitions
14.2.2
GDI_O_IN and GDI_E_IN
Registers
The PSoC device has a configurable Global Digital Interconnect (GDI). Using the configuration bits in the GDI_x_IN registers, a global input net may be configured to drive its
corresponding global output net. For example,
GIE [ 7 ] → GOE [ 7 ]
There are a total of 16-bits that control the ability of global
inputs to drive global outputs. These bits are in the
GDI_O_IN and GDI_E_IN registers. Table 14-2 enumerates
the meaning of each bit position in either of the GDI_O_IN
or GDI_E_IN registers.
Table 14-2. GDI_x_IN Register
GDI_O_OU and GDI_E_OU
Registers
Additional configuration bits are offered in the GDI_x_OU
registers that allow a global output to drive its corresponding
global input. For example,
GOE [ 7 ] → GIE [ 7 ]
There are a total of 16 bits that control the ability of global
outputs to drive global inputs. These bits are in the
GDI_O_OU and GDI_E_OU registers. Table 14-3 enumerates the meaning of each bit position in either of the
GDI_O_OU or GDI_E_OU registers.
Table 14-3. GDI_x_OU Register
GDI_x_OU[0]
0: No connection between GIx[0] to GOx[0]
1: Allow GOx[0] to drive GIx[0]
GDI_x_OU[1]
0: No connection between GIx[1] to GOx[1]
1: Allow GOx[1] to drive GIx[1]
GDI_x_OU[2]
0: No connection between GIx[2] to GOx[2]
1: Allow GOx[2] to drive GIx[2]
GDI_x_IN[0]
0: No connection between GIx[0] to GOx[0]
1: Allow GIx[0] to drive GOx[0]
GDI_x_OU[3]
0: No connection between GIx[3] to GOx[3]
1: Allow GOx[3] to drive GIx[3]
GDI_x_IN[1]
0: No connection between GIx[1] to GOx[1]
1: Allow GIx[1] to drive GOx[1]
GDI_x_OU[4]
0: No connection between GIx[4] to GOx[4]
1: Allow GOx[4] to drive GIx[4]
GDI_x_IN[2]
0: No connection between GIx[2] to GOx[2]
1: Allow GIx[2] to drive GOx[2]
GDI_x_OU[5]
0: No connection between GIx[0] to GOx[5]
1: Allow GOx[5] to drive GIx[5]
GDI_x_IN[3]
0: No connection between GIx[3] to GOx[3]
1: Allow GIx[3] to drive GOx[3]
GDI_x_OU[6]
0: No connection between GIx[6] to GOx[6]
1: Allow GOx[6] to drive GIx[6]
GDI_x_IN[4]
0: No connection between GIx[4] to GOx[4]
1: Allow GIx[4] to drive GOx[4]
GDI_x_OU[7]
0: No connection between GIx[7] to GOx[7]
1: Allow GOx[7] to drive GIx[7]
GDI_x_IN[5]
0: No connection between GIx[5] to GOx[5]
1: Allow GIx[5] to drive GOx[5]
GDI_x_IN[6]
0: No connection between GIx[6] to GOx[6]
1: Allow GIx[6] to drive GOx[6]
GDI_x_IN[7]
0: No connection between GIx[7] to GOx[7]
1: Allow GIx[7] to drive GOx[7]
The configurability of the GDI does not allow odd and even
nets or nets with different indexes to be connected. The following are examples of connections that are not possible in
the PSoC devices.
GOE [ 7 ] → GIO [ 7 ]
For additional information, reference the GDI_O_IN register
on page 159 and the GDI_E_IN register on page 160.
GOE [ 0 ] → GIE [ 7 ]
For additional information, reference the GDI_O_OU register on page 161 and the GDI_E_OU register on page 162.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
179
14. Global Digital Interconnect (GDI)
180
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
15. Array Digital Interconnect (ADI)
This chapter presents the Array Digital Interconnect (ADI). The digital PSoC array uses a scalable architecture that is
designed to support from one to four digital PSoC rows, as defined in the Row Digital Interconnect (RDI) chapter on page
183. The digital PSoC array does not have any configurable interconnect; therefore, there are no associated registers.
15.1
Architectural Description
The Array Digital Interconnect (ADI) is shown in Figure 15-1.
The ADI is not configurable; therefore, the information in this
DB[7:0]
DBI
GIE[7:0]
GIO[7:0]
chapter is provided to improve the reader’s understanding of
the structure.
VC2
SYSCLKX2
ACMP[3:0]
CLK32K
INT[23:8]
ACMP[3:0]
SYSCLKX2
VC1
VC2
Digital PSoC Block Row 0
DBB00 DBB01 DCB02 DCB03
BCw
GOO[7:0]
GOE[7:0]
INT[3:0]
TNB
FNB
BCrow0
INT[11:8]
Low
VC3
Low
Low
BCrow0
BCrow1
BCrow2
BCrow3
Previous block data
Previous block clk
GIO[7:0]
GlE[7:0]
FPB
TPB
DB[7:0]
DBI
CLK32K
BCrow0
Hi
Hi
Hi
GOE[7:0]
GOO[7:0]
VC1
VC3
Low
Figure 15-1. Digital PSoC Block Array Structure
The different members of the PSoC family have varying
numbers of digital PSoC blocks in the digital array. These
blocks are arranged into rows and the ADI provides a regular interconnect architecture between the Global Digital
Interconnect (GDI) and the Row Digital Interconnect (RDI),
regardless of the number of rows available in a particular
device. The most important aspect of the ADI and the digital
PSoC rows is that all digital PSoC rows have the same connections to global inputs and outputs. The connections that
make a row’s position unique are explained in the following
bulleted list.
■
■
Register Address: Clearly rows and the blocks within
them need to have unique register addresses.
Interrupt Priority: Each digital PSoC block has its own
interrupt priority and vector. A row’s position in the array
determines the relative priority of the digital PSoC blocks
within the row. The lower the row number the higher the
December 22, 2003
■
■
interrupt priority and the lower the interrupt vector
address.
Broadcast: Each digital PSoC row has an internal broadcast net that may be either driven internally, by one of
the four digital PSoC blocks, or driven externally. In the
case where the broadcast net is driven externally, the
source may be any one of the other rows in the array.
Therefore, depending on the row’s position in the array,
it will have different options for driving its broadcast net.
Chaining Position: Rows in the array form a string of digital blocks equal in length to the number of rows multiplied by four. The first block in the first row and the last
block in the last row are not connected; therefore, the
array does not form a circle. The first row in the array will
have its previous chaining inputs tied low. If there is a
second row in the array, the next chaining outputs will be
connected to the next row. For the last row in the array,
the next inputs are tied low.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
181
15. Array Digital Interconnect (ADI)
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
In Figure 15-1, the detailed view of a Digital PSoC block row
has been replaced by a box labeled “Digital PSoC Block
Row.” The rest of this figure illustrates how all rows are connected to the same globals, clocks, and so on. The figure
also illustrates how the broadcast clock nets (BCxxxx) are
connected between rows.
182
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
16. Row Digital Interconnect (RDI)
This chapter explains the Row Digital Interconnect (RDI) and its associated registers. This chapter discusses a single digital
PSoC block row. It does not discuss the functions, inputs, or outputs for individual digital PSoC blocks. Information about individual digital PSoC blocks is covered in the Digital Blocks chapter on page 189.
Table 16-1. Digital PSoC Row Registers
Address
x,xxh
Name
RDIxRI
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
RI3[1:0]
Bit 4
Bit 3
RI2[1:0]
Bit 2
Bit 1
RI1[1:0]
Bit 0
RI0[1:0]
Access
RW : 00
x,xxh
RDIxSYN
x,xxh
RDIxIS
x,xxh
RDIxLT0
x,xxh
RDIxLT1
x,xxh
RDIxRO0
GOO5EN
GOO1EN
GOE5EN
GOE1EN
GOO4EN
GOO0EN
GOE4EN
GOE0EN
RW : 00
x,xxh
RDIxRO1
GOO7EN
GOO3EN
GOE7EN
GOE3EN
GOO6EN
GOO2EN
GOE6EN
GOE2EN
RW : 00
RI3SYN
RI2SYN
RI1SYN
RI0SYN
IS3
IS2
IS1
IS0
BCSEL[1:0]
LUT0[3:0]
LUT1[3:0]
RW : 00
RW : 00
LUT2[3:0]
LUT3[3:0]
RW : 00
RW : 00
LEGEND
x: An “x” before the comma in the address field indicates that the register exists in both register banks.
xx: An “x” after the comma in the address field indicates that there are multiple instances of the register. For a detailed address listing of these registers, refer
to the “Digital Register Summary” on page 176.
Many signals pass through the Digital PSoC Block Row on
their way to or from individual digital blocks. However, only a
small number of signals pass though configurable circuits on
their way to and from digital blocks. The configurable circuits
allow for greater flexibility in the connections between digital
blocks and global busses. What follows is a discussion of
the signals that are configurable by way of the registers
listed in Table 16-1.
December 22, 2003
16.1
Architectural Description
In Figure 16-1, within a Digital PSoC Block row, there are
four digital PSoC Blocks. The first two blocks are of the type
basic (DBB). The second two are of the type communication
(DCB). This figure shows the connections between digital
blocks within a row. Only the signals that pass through the
bold line in Figure 16-1 are shown at the next level of hierarchy (Figure 16-2 on page 185).
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
183
16. Row Digital Interconnect (RDI)
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
In Figure 16-2, the detailed view of the four PSoC block
grouping, as seen in Figure 16-1, has been replaced by the
box in the center of the figure labeled “4 PSoC Block Group-
CLK[15:0]
DATA[15:0]
AUX[3:0]
FPB
TPB
DB[7:0]
DBI
ing.” The rest of the configurable nature of the Row Inputs
(RI), Row Outputs (RO), and Broadcast clock net (BC) is
shown. The next level of hierarchy is shown in Figure 16-1.
Digital PSoC Block 0
Basic
Input Signals
Digital PSoC Block 1
Basic
Input Signals
Digital PSoC Block 2
Communications
Input Signals
Digital PSoC Block 3
Communications
Input Signals
CLKS[15:0]
DATAS[15:0]
AUXDATA[3:0]
CLKS[15:0]
DATAS[15:0]
AUXDATA[3:0]
CLKS[15:0]
DATAS[15:0]
AUXDATA[3:0]
CLKS[15:0]
DATAS[15:0]
AUXDATA[3:0]
Chaining Signals
Chaining Signals
Chaining Signals
Chaining Signals
To next block
From next block
From previous block
To previous block
To next block
From next block
From previous block
To previous block
To next block
From next block
From previous block
To previous block
To next block
From next block
From previous block
To previous block
Bus Interface
Bus Interface
Bus Interface
Bus Interface
DB[7:0]
Inputs
DB[7:0]
Inputs
Output Signals
INT
RO[3:0]
Broadcast
DB[7:0]
Inputs
Output Signals
DB[7:0]
Inputs
Output Signals
INT
RO[3:0]
Broadcast
TNB
FNB
INT
RO[3:0]
Broadcast
Output Signals
INT
RO[3:0]
Broadcast
INT[3:0]
RO[3:0]
BC
Figure 16-1. Detailed View of Four PSoC Block Groupings
184
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Low
High
Digital PSoC Block Row
4x1
MUX
VC3
BCROW 0
BCROW 1
BCROW 2
BCROW 3
Previous block data*
Previous block clk*
ACMP[3:0]
SYSCLKX2
VC1
VC2
CLK32K
16. Row Digital Interconnect (RDI)
Broadcast
ROW
BCROW
KEEPER
Resets to 1
L0
GOE[0]
GOE[4]
GOO[0]
GOO[4]
L1
GOE[1]
GOE[5]
GOO[1]
GOO[5]
RI[0] | RO[0]
RO[1]
RI[1] | RO[1]
RO[3:0]
RI[3:0]
RO[2]
GIE[0]
GlE[4]
GlO[0]
GlO[4]
RI[0]
S0
DATA[15:0]
CLK[15:0]
4 PSoC Block Grouping
BCROW
RO[3:0]
AUX[3:0]
GIE[1]
GlE[5]
GlO[1]
GlO[5]
RI[2] | RO[2]
L2
RO[3]
GOE[2]
GOE[6]
GOO[2]
GOO[6]
RI[1]
S1
DBBx0 DBBx1 DCBx2 DCBx3
RI[3] | RO[3]
L3
GIE[2]
GlE[6]
GlO[2]
GlO[6]
RI[2]
S2
GIE[3]
GlE[7]
GlO[3]
GlO[7]
FPB
TPB
DB[7:0]
DBI
FPB
TPB
DB[7:0]
DBI
RO[0]
TNB
FNB
INT[3:0]
GOE[3]
GOE[7]
GOO[3]
GOO[7]
KEEPER[3:0]
Resets to 1
RI[3]
TNB
FNB
INT[3:0]
S3
* "Previous" inputs always come from the previous block. Therefore, block 0's inputs come from the previous row, while block
1's inputs come from block 0, etc. If there is no previous block (i.e., there is no row above the current row), previous inputs are
tied low. The chaining inputs FPB and FNB are also tied low when there is no previous block or next block.
Figure 16-2. Digital PSoC Block Row Structure
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
185
16. Row Digital Interconnect (RDI)
16.2
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Register Definitions
16.2.2
The only configurable inputs to a Digital PSoC Block Row
are the Global Input Even and Global Input Odd 8-bit busses. The only configurable outputs from the Digital PSoC
Block Row are the Global Output Even and Global Output
Odd 8-bit busses. Figure 16-2 on page 185 illustrates the
relationships between global signals and row signals.
Notice on the left side of Figure 16-2 that global inputs
(GIE[n] and GIO[n]) are inputs to 4-to-1 multiplexers. The
output of these multiplexers are Row Inputs (RI[x]). Because
there are four 4-to-1 multiplexers, each with a unique set of
inputs, a row has access to every global input line in a PSoC
device.
For a complete list of the Digital Row registers showing their
addresses and bit names, reference the “Digital Register
Summary” on page 176.
16.2.1
RDIxRI Register
The select bits used to control the four multiplexers are
located in the RDIxRI register, where “x” denotes a place
holder for the row index. Table 16-2 lists the meaning for
each multiplexer’s four possible settings.
Table 16-2. RDIxRI Register
RI0[1:0]
0h: GIE[0]
1h: GIE[4]
2h: GIO[0]
3h: GIO[4]
RI1[1:0]
0h: GIE[1]
1h: GIE[5]
2h: GIO[1]
3h: GIO[5]
RI2[1:0]
0h: GIE[2]
1h: GIE[6]
2h: GIO[2]
3h: GIO[6]
RI3[1:0]
0h: GIE[3]
1h: GIE[7]
2h: GIO[3]
3h: GIO[7]
RDIxSYN Register
By default, each row input is double synchronized to the
SYSCLK (system clock). However, a user may choose to
disable this synchronization by setting the appropriate RIxSYN bit in the RDIxSYN register. Table 16-3 lists the bit
meanings for each implemented bit of the RDIxSYN register.
Table 16-3. RDIxSYN Register
RI3SYN
0: Row input 3 in synchronized to 24 MHz system clock
1: Row input 3 is passed without synchronization
RI2SYN
0: Row input 2 in synchronized to 24 MHz system clock
1: Row input 2 is passed without synchronization
RI1SYN
0: Row input 1 in synchronized to 24 MHz system clock
1: Row input 1 is passed without synchronization
RI0SYN
0: Row input 0 in synchronized to 24 MHz system clock
1: Row input 0 is passed without synchronization
The RDIxRI and RDIxSYN registers are the only two registers that affect Digital PSoC Row input signals. All other registers are related to output signal configuration. The options,
with respect to output signals, are discussed below.
For additional information, reference the RDIxSYN register
on page 119.
16.2.3
RDIxIS Register
As mentioned previously, each LUT has two inputs, where
one of the inputs is configurable (Input A) and the other input
(Input B) is fixed to a row output. The configurable LUT input
(Input A) chooses between a single row output and a single
row input. Table 16-4 lists the options for each LUT in a row.
The bits are labeled IS, meaning Input Select. The LUT’s
fixed input is always the RO[LUT number + 1], i.e., LUT0’s
fixed input is RO[1], LUT1’s fixed input is RO[2],..., and
LUT3’s fixed input is RO[0].
Table 16-4. RDIxIS Register Bits
The RDIxRI and RDIxSYN registers are the only two registers that affect Digital PSoC Row input signals. All other registers are related to output signal configuration. The options,
with respect to output signals, are discussed below.
For additional information, reference the RDIxRI register on
page 118.
BCSEL[1:0]
0: Row 0 driver local row broadcast net*
1: Row 1 driver local row broadcast net*
2: Row 2 driver local row broadcast net*
3: Row 3 driver local row broadcast net*
IS3
0: The ‘A’ input of LUT 3 is RO[3]
1: The ‘A’ input of LUT 3 is RI[3]
IS2
0: The ‘A’ input of LUT 2 is RO[2]
1: The ‘A’ input of LUT 2 is RI[2]
IS1
0:The ‘A’ input of LUT 1 is RO[1]
1: The ‘A’ input of LUT 1 is RI[1]
IS0
0: The ‘A’ input of LUT 0 is RO[0]
1: The ‘A’ input of LUT 0 is RI[0]
* When the BCSELL value is equal to the row number, the tri-state buffer
that drives the row broadcast net from the input select mux, is disabled, so
that one of the row’s blocks may drive the local row broadcast net.
* If the row is not present in the part, the selection provides a Logic 1 value.
For additional information, reference the RDIxIS register on
page 120.
186
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
16.2.4
16. Row Digital Interconnect (RDI)
RDIxLTx Registers
16.2.5
The outputs from a Digital PSoC Row are a bit more complicated than the inputs. Figure 16-2 on page 185 illustrates
the output circuitry in a Digital PSoC Row. Notice in the figure a block labeled “Lx.” This block represents a 2-input
lookup table (LUT). The LUT allows the user to specify any
one of 16 logic functions that should be applied to the two
inputs. The output of the logic function will determine the
value that may be driven on to the Global Output Even and
Global Output Odd busses. Table 16-5 lists the relationship
between a lookup table’s four configuration bits and the
resulting logic function. Some users may find it easier to
determine the proper configuration bits setting by remembering that the configuration’s bits represent the output column of a two input logic truth table. Table 16-5 lists seven
examples of the relationship between the LUT’s output column for a truth table and the LUTx[3:0] configuration bits.
A
B
AND
OR
A+B
A&B
A
B
For additional information, reference the RDIxRO0 register
on page 123 and the RDIxRO1 register on page 124.
Timing Diagram
True
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1h
7h
Bh
2h
3h
5h
Fh
LUTx[3:0]
The final configuration bits for outputs from Digital PSoC
Rows are in the two RDIxROx registers. These registers
hold the 16 bits and can individually enable the tri-state buffers that connect to all eight of the Global Output Even lines
and all eight of the Global Output Odd lines. This means that
any row can drive any global output. Keep in mind that tristate drivers are being used to drive the global output lines;
therefore, it is possible for a part, with more than one Digital
PSoC Row, to have multiple drivers on a single global output
line. It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that the part is
not configured with multiple drivers on any of the global output lines.
16.3
Table 16-5. Example LUT Truth Tables
RDIxROx Registers
Set up to positive edge.
SYSCLK
GLOBAL INPUT
ROW INPUT
Output of the synchronizer changes on the second
positive edge that follows the input transition.
Table 16-6. RDIxLTx Register
LUTx[3:0]
Figure 16-3. Optional Row Input Synchronization to
SYSCLK
0h: 0000: FALSE
1h: 0001: A .AND. B
2h: 0010: A .AND. B
3h: 0011: A
4h: 0100: A .AND. B
5h: 0101: B
6h: 0110: A .XOR. B
7h: 0111: A .OR. B
8h: 1000: A .NOR. B
9h: 1001: A .XNOR. B
Ah: 1010: B
Bh: 1011: A .OR. B
Ch: 1100: A
Dh: 1101: A .OR. B
Eh: 1110: A. NAND. B
Fh: 1111: TRUE
For additional information, reference the RDIxLT0 register
on page 121 and the RDIxLT1 register on page 122.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
187
16. Row Digital Interconnect (RDI)
188
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
17. Digital Blocks
This chapter presents the Digital Blocks and their associated registers. It covers the configuration and use of the Digital PSoC
blocks.
Table 17-1. Digital PSoC Block Registers
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
Data and Control Registers
0,xxh
0,xxh
0,xxh
0,xxh
0,E1h
DxBxxDR0
DxBxxDR1
DxBxxDR2
DxBxxCR0
INT_MSK1
Data[7:0]
Data[7:0]
Data[7:0]
Function control/status bits for selected function[6:0]
DCB03
DCB02
Enable
DBB01
DBB00
# : 00
W : 00
# : 00
# : 00
RW : 00
Configuration Registers
1,xxh
1,xxh
1,xxh
DxBxxFN
DxBxxIN
DxBxxOU
Data Invert
BCEN
End/Single
Mode[1:0]
Function[2:0]
Data Input[3:0]
AUXCLK
AUXEN
Clock Input[3:0]
AUX IO Select[1:0]
OUTEN
Output Select[1:0]
RW : 00
RW : 00
RW : 00
LEGEND
#: Access is bit specific. Refer to the register detail for additional information.
xx: An “x” after the comma in the address field indicates that there are multiple instances of the register. For an expanded address listing of these registers, refer
to the “Digital Register Summary” on page 176.
All digital PSoC blocks may be configured to perform any
one of five basic functions: timer, counter, pulse width modulator (PWM), pseudo random sequence (PRS), or cyclic
redundancy check (CRC). These functions may be used by
configuring an individual PSoC block or chaining several
PSoC blocks together to form functions that are greater than
8 bits. Digital communications PSoC block have two additional functions: master or slave SPI and a full duplex UART.
In addition to seven registers that control the digital PSoC
block’s function and state a separate interrupt mask bit is
available for each digital PSoC block. Each digital PSoC
block has a unique interrupt vector and therefore can have
its own interrupt service routine.
Each digital PSoC block’s function is independent of all
other PSoC blocks. Up to seven registers are used to determine the function and state of a digital PSoC block. These
registers are summarized in Table 17-1. Digital PSoC block
function registers end with FN. The individual bit settings for
a blocks function register are listed in Table 17-15 on
page 203. The input register’s name ends with IN and its bit
meanings are listed in Table 17-15 on page 203. Finally the
blocks outputs are controlled by the output register which
always ends with OU.
At the top level, the main components of the digital block are
the data path, input multiplexers, output de-multiplexers,
CRCPRS tri-state buses, system bus interface, configuration registers, and chaining signals (see Figure 17-2).
Each digital PSoC block also has three data registers (DR0,
DR1, and DR2) and one control register (CR0). The bit
meanings for these registers are heavily function dependant
and are discussed with each functions description.
In addition, there is a 4-1 multiplexer that provides an auxiliary input for the SPI Slave function that requires three
inputs: Clock, Data, and SS_ (unless the SS_ is forced
active with the Aux IO Enable bit). The inputs to this multiplexer are intended to be a selection of GPIO inputs (row
inputs).
December 22, 2003
17.1
17.1.1
Architectural Description
Input Multiplexers
Typically, each function has a Clock and a Data input that
may be selected from a variety of sources. Each of these
inputs is selected with a 16-1 input multiplexer.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
189
17. Digital Blocks
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Note 1 If the input data source for a given block comes from
another block, the destination block must be enabled prior to
the source block being enabled.
17.1.2
Input Clock Resynchronization
Digital blocks allow a clock selection from one of 16
sources. Possible sources are the system clocks (VC1,
VC2, VC3, SYSCLK, and SYSCLKX2), pin inputs, and other
digital block outputs. To manage clock skew and ensure that
the interfaces between blocks meet timing in all cases, all
digital block input clocks must be resynchronized to either
SYSCLK or SYSCLKX2, which are the source clocks for all
chip clocking. Also, SYSCLK or SYSCLKX2 may be used
directly. The AUXCLK bits in the DxBxxOU register are used
to specify the input synchronization. The following rules
apply to the use of input clock resynchronization.
1. If the clock input is derived (e.g., divided down) from
SYSCLK, re-synchronize to SYSCLK at the digital block.
Most chip clocks are in this category. For example, VC1
and VC2, and the output of other blocks clocked by VC1
and VC2 or SYSCLK (setting 01 in AUXCLK).
2. If the clock input is derived from SYSCLKX2, re-synchronize to SYSCLKX2. For example, VC3 clocked by
SYSCLKX2, or other digital blocks clocked by
SYSCLKX2 (setting 10 in AUXCLK).
3. Choose direct SYSCLK (setting 11 in AUXCLK).
4. Choose direct SYSCLKX2 (select SYSCLKX2 in the
Clock Input field of the DxBxxIN register).
5. Bypass synchronization. This should be a very rare
selection. Because if clocks are not synchronized, they
may fail setup to CPU read and write commands. However, it is possible for an external pin to asynchronously
clock a digital block. For example, if the user is willing to
synchronize CPU interaction through interrupts or other
techniques (setting 00 in AUXCLK).
The following notes enumerate configurations that are not
allowed, although the hardware does not prevent them. The
summary of these notes is that the clock dividers (VC1,
VC2, and VC3) may not be configured in such a way as to
create an output clock that is equal to SYSCLK or
SYSCLKX2.
Note 1 When VC1 is configured to divide by one, choosing
an input clock of VC1 is not allowed. This configuration produces a clock frequency that is equal to SYSCLK; therefore,
SYSCLK direct should be used by setting the AUXCLK bits
in DxBxOU to 11b.
Note 2 When both VC2 and VC1 are configured to divide
by one, choosing an input clock of VC2 is not allowed. This
configuration produces a clock frequency that is equal to
SYSCLK; therefore, SYSCLK direct should be used by setting the AUXCLK bits in DxBxOU to 11b.
Note 3 When VC3 is configured to divide by one with a
source clock of SYSCLK, choosing an input clock of VC3 is
not allowed. This configuration produces a clock frequency
that is equal to SYSCLK. There are two other VC3 configurations to avoid that will result in an output frequency equal
to SYSCLK. The first is when VC3 is configured to divide by
one with a source clock of VC1 divide by one. The second is
when VC3 is configured to divide by one with a source clock
of VC2 divide by one and VC1 is also configured to divide by
one. All of these configurations result in a VC3 frequency
equal to SYSCLK and this is not allowed. When a frequency
equal to SYSCLK is desired, SYSCLK direct should be used
by setting the AUXCLK bits in DxBxOU to 11b.
Note 4 When VC3 is configured to divide by one with a
source clock of SYSCLKX2, choosing an input clock of VC3
is not allowed. This configuration produces a clock frequency that is equal to SYSCLKX2. When a frequency
equal to SYSCLKX2 is desired, SYSCLKX2 should be
selected by setting the Clock Input bits of the DxBxxIN register to 4h and the AUXCLK bits of DxBxOU to 00b.
All of these issues have been addressed in the actual clock
resynchronizer, illustrated in Figure 17-1.
Current Decoding
0
SYSCLK2
1
2-1
SEL_SYSCLK2
SYSCLK
00 = BYPASS
01 = SYSCLK
10 = SYSCLK2
11 = SYSCLK DIRECT
4-1
BLK CLK
16-1
SYSCLK2
CLK MUX
AUXCLK
MUX
SYSCLK
Figure 17-1. Input Clock Resynchronization
Table 17-2: AUXCLK Bit Selections
Code
Description
Usage
00
Bypass
Use this setting only for asynchronous inputs. Also used when SYSCLK2 (48 MHz) is selected.
01
Resync to
SYSCLK
(24 MHz)
Use this setting for any SYSCLK based clock. VC1, VC2, VC3 driven by SYSCLK, digital blocks with SYSCLK based source
clocks, broadcast bus with source based on SYSCLK, row input and row outputs with source based on SYSCLK.
10
Resync to
SYSCLK2
Use this setting for any SYSCLK2 based clock. VC3 driven by SYSCLK2, digital blocks with SYSCLK2 based source clocks,
broadcast bus with source based on SYSCLK2, row input and row outputs with source based on SYSCLK2.
(48 MHz)
11
190
SYSCLK Direct Use this setting to clock the block directly using SYSCLK. Note that this setting is not strictly related to clock resynchronization,
but since SYSCLK cannot resync itself, it allows a direct skew controlled SYSCLK source.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17.1.3
17. Digital Blocks
Output De-Multiplexers
Most functions have two outputs: a primary and an auxiliary
output. Each of these outputs may be driven onto the row
output bus. Each de-multiplexer is implemented with four tri-
Clock
Select
16-1
MUX
Data
Select
Aux
Data
Select
CLK
ReSync
16-1
MUX
4-1
MUX
state drivers. There are two bits to select one of the four and
an additional bit to enable the selected driver.
CLK
Digital
PSoC
Block
F1
Primary Function Output,
clock chaining to next
block.
1-4
RO[3:0]
DMUX
F2
1-4
DMUX
DATA
RO[3:0]
AUX_DATA
INT
BC
Block Interrupt
Broadcast Output
CONFIGURATION
REGISTERS
Internal Signals for
Carry, Compare,
Enable, Capture,
and Gate chaining
from previous block.
DO
CI
CMPI
FUNCTION[7:0]
ENI
INPUT[7:0]
CGI
OUTPUT[7:0]
CO
CMPO
ENO
Internal Signals for
Data, Carry,
Compare, Enable,
Capture, and Gate
chaining to next
block.
Figure 17-2. Digital Blocks Top-Level Block Diagram
17.1.4
Block Chaining Signals
Each digital block has the capability to be chained and to
create functions with bit widths greater than eight. There are
signals to propagate information, such as Compare, Carry,
Enable, Capture and Gate, from one block to the next to
implement higher precision functions. The selection made in
the Function register determines which signals are appropriate for the desired function. User Modules that have been
designed to implement digital functions, with greater than 8bit width, will automatically make the proper selections of the
chaining signals, to ensure the correct information flow
between blocks.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
191
17. Digital Blocks
17.1.5
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Timer Function
17.1.6
Counter Function
A timer consists of a period register, a synchronous down
counter, and a capture/compare register, all of which are
byte wide. When the timer is disabled and a period value is
written into DR1, the period value is also loaded into DR0.
When the timer is enabled, the counter counts down until
positive terminal count (a count of 00h) is reached. On the
next clock edge, the period is reloaded and on subsequent
clocks counting continues. The terminal count signal is the
primary function output.
A Counter consists of a period register, a synchronous down
counter, and a compare register. The Counter function is
identical to the Timer function except for the following points:
Hardware capture occurs on the positive edge of the data
input. This event transfers the current count from DR0 to
DR2. The captured value may then be read directly from
DR2. A software capture function is equivalent to a hardware capture. A CPU read of DR0, with the timer enabled,
triggers the same capture mechanism. The hardware and
software capture mechanisms are OR’ed in the capture circuitry. Since the capture circuitry is positive edge sensitive,
during an interval where the hardware capture input is high,
a software capture is masked and will not occur.
■
The Timer also implements a compare function between
DR0 and DR2. The compare signal is the auxiliary function
output. A limitation, in regards to the compare function, is
that the capture and compare function both use the same
register (DR2). Therefore, if a capture event occurs, it will
overwrite the compare value.
Mode bit 1 in the Function register sets the compare type
(DR0 <= DR2 or DR0 < DR2) and Mode bit 0 sets the interrupt type (Terminal Count or Compare).
Timers may be chained in 8-bit lengths up to 32 bits.
17.1.5.1
Usability Exceptions
The following are usability exceptions for the Timer function.
1. Capture operation is not supported at 48 MHz.
2. DR2 is not writeable when the Timer is enabled.
17.1.5.2
Block Interrupt
The Timer block has a selection of three interrupt sources.
Interrupt on Terminal Count (TC) and Compare may be
selected in Mode bit 0 of the Function register. The interrupt
on Capture may be selected with the Capture Interrupt bit in
the Control register.
■
■
■
Interrupt on Terminal Count: The positive edge of Terminal Count (primary output) generates an interrupt for this
block. The timing of the interrupt follows the TC Pulse
Width setting in the Control register.
Interrupt on Compare: The positive edge of Compare
(auxiliary output) generates an interrupt for this block.
Interrupt on Capture: Hardware or software capture generates an interrupt for this block. The interrupt occurs at
closing of the DR2 latch on capture.
192
■
■
The Data input is a counter gate (enable), rather than a
capture input. Counters do not implement synchronous
capture. The DR0 register in a counter should not be
read when it is enabled.
The Compare output is the primary output and the Terminal Count is the auxiliary output (opposite of the Timer).
Terminal Count output is full cycle only.
When the Counter is disabled and a period value is written
into DR1, the period value is also loaded into DR0. When
the Counter is enabled, the counter counts down until terminal count (a count of 00h) is reached. On the next clock
edge, the period is reloaded and, on subsequent clocks,
counting continues.
The Counter implements a compare function between DR0
and DR2. The Compare signal is the primary function output. Mode bit 1 sets the compare type (DR0 <= DR2 or DR0
< DR2) and Mode bit 0 sets the interrupt type (Terminal
Count or Compare).
The data input functions as a gate to counter operation. The
counter will only count and reload when the data input is
asserted (logic '1'). When the data input is negated (logic
'0'), counting (including the period reload) is halted.
Counters may be chained in 8-bit blocks up to 32 bits.
17.1.6.1
Usability Exceptions
The following are usability exceptions for the Counter function.
1. DR0 may only be read (to transfer DR0 data to DR2)
when the block is disabled.
17.1.6.2
Block Interrupt
The Counter block has a selection of three interrupt
sources. Interrupt on Terminal Count and Compare may be
selected in Mode bit 0 of the Function register.
■
■
Interrupt on Terminal Count: The positive edge of Terminal Count (auxiliary output) generates an interrupt for
this block. The timing of the interrupt follows the TC
Pulse Width setting in the Control register.
Interrupt on Compare: The positive edge of Compare
(primary output) generates an interrupt for this block.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17.1.7
17. Digital Blocks
Dead Band Function
active signal on the “Kill” input will disable both outputs
immediately.
The Dead Band function generates output signals on both
the primary and auxiliary outputs of the block, see
Figure 17-3. Each of these outputs is one phase of a twophase, non-overlapping clock generated by this function.
The two clock phases are never high at the same time and
the period between the clock phases is known as the dead
band. The width of the dead band time is determined by the
value in the period register. This dead band function can be
driven with a PWM as an input clock or it can be clocked
directly by toggling a bit in software using the Bit-Bang interface. If the clock source is a PWM, this will make a two output PWM with guaranteed non-overlapping outputs. An
The PWM with the Dead Band User Module configures one
or two blocks to create an 8- or 16-bit PWM and configures
an additional block as the Dead Band function.
A dead band consists of a period register, a synchronous
down counter, and a special dead band circuit. The DR2
register is only used to read the contents of DR0. As with the
Timer, when the Dead Band is disabled and a period value
is written into DR1, the period value is also loaded into DR0.
Primary Output
D
e
a
d
b
a
n
d
Dead
Band
Function
D
e
a
d
b
a
n
d
D
e
a
d
b
a
n
d
D
e
a
d
b
a
n
d
D
e
a
d
b
a
n
d
Auxiliary Output
Figure 17-3. Dead Band Functional Overview
The Dead Band has two inputs: a PWM reference signal
and a KILL signal. The PWM reference signal may be
derived from one of two sources. By default, it is hardwired
to be the primary output of the previous block. This previous
block output is wired as an input to the 16-1 clock input multiplexer. In the Dead Band case, this signal (PREVF1) is
wired directly to the Dead Band reference input. If this mode
is used, a PWM or some other waveform generator, must be
instantiated in the previous digital block. There is also an
optional Bit Bang mode. In this mode, firmware toggles a
register bit to generate a PWM reference and therefore, the
Dead Band may be used as a stand-alone block.
When the block is initially enabled, both outputs are low.
After enabling, a positive or negative edge of the incoming
PWM reference enables the counter. The counter counts
down from the period value to terminal count. At terminal
count, the counter is disabled and the selected phase is
asserted high. On the opposite edge of the PWM input, the
output that was high is negated low and the process is
repeated with the opposite phase. This results in the generation of a two phase non-overlapping clock matching the frequency and pulse width of the incoming PWM reference, but
separated by a dead time derived from the period and the
input clock.
The KILL signal is derived from the data input signal to the
block. Mode [1:0] is encoded as the Kill Type. In all cases,
the output is forced low immediately. Mode bits are encoded
for Kill options and are detailed in the following table.
There is a deterministic relationship between the incoming
PWM reference and the output phases. The positive edge of
the reference causes the primary output to be asserted to '1'
and the negative edge of the reference causes the auxiliary
output to be asserted to '1'.
Table 17-3. Dead Band Kill Options
Mode [1:0]
Description
00b
Synchronous Restart KILL mode. Internal state is reset and
reference edges are ignored until the KILL signal is negated.
01b
Disable KILL mode. Block is disabled. KILL signal must be
negated and user must re-enable the block in firmware to
resume operation.
10b
Asynchronous KILL mode. Outputs are low only for the duration that the KILL signal is asserted, subject to a minimum
disable time between one-half to one and one-half clock
cycles. Internal state is unaffected.
11b
Reserved
December 22, 2003
When asserted, the KILL signal functions as an immediate
disable of the outputs (forced to logic '0'). There are three
optional modes for resuming operation after the KILL. These
are described in detail in the following section.
Note that the Dead Band function may not be chained.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
193
17. Digital Blocks
written into DR2, the Seed value is also loaded into DR0.
When the CRCPRS is enabled, and synchronous clock and
data are applied to the inputs, a CRC is computed on the
serial data input stream. When the data input is forced to '0',
then the block functions as a PRS generator with the output
data generated at the clock rate. The most significant bit
(MSB) of the CRCPRS function is the primary output.
Usability Exceptions
The following are usability exceptions for the Dead Band
function.
1. Programming a dead band period value of 00h is not
supported. The block output is undefined under this condition.
2. If the period, of either the high time or the low time of the
reference input, is less than the programmed dead time
that associated output phase will be held low.
3. DR0 may only be read (to transfer DR0 data to DR2)
when the block is disabled.
Block Interrupt
The Dead Band has one fixed interrupt source, which is the
Phase 1 primary output clock. When the KILL signal is
asserted, the interrupt follows the same behavior of the
Phase 1 output with respect to the various KILL modes.
17.1.8
CRCPRS mode offers an optional Pass function. By setting
the Pass Mode bit in the CR0 register (bit 1), the CRCPRS
function is overridden. In this mode, the Data input is passed
transparently to the primary output and interrupt output.
Similarly, the CLK input is passed transparently to the auxiliary output.
CRCPRS Function
POLY[1]
POLY[0]
A Cyclic Redundancy Check/Pseudo Random Sequence
(CRCPRS) function consists of a polynomial register, a Linear Feedback Shift register (LFSR), and a seed register.
When the CRCPRS block is disabled and a Seed value is
POLY[7]
17.1.7.2
The CRCPRS has a selection of compare modes between
DR0 and DR2. The default behavior of the compare is
DR0==DR2. When the PRS function cycles through the
Seed value as one of the valid counts, the compare output is
asserted high for one clock cycle. This is regarded as the
Epoch of the pseudo random sequence. The mode bits can
be used to set other compare types. Setting Mode bit 0 to '1'
causes the compare behavior to revert to DR0 <= DR2 or
DR0 < DR2, depending upon Mode bit 1. The compare
value is the auxiliary output and the interrupt.
POLY[6]
17.1.7.1
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
FB Tri-state Bus
(Data input for CRC, if
PRS, force to logic ‘0’.)
DATA
2:1
0
1
2
6
7
DIN
(From previous block
DO, if chained.)
DO
(To next block,
if chained.)
MSB
SEL
MSB Tri-state Bus
MSB SEL is determined by a
priority decode of the MSB, of
the polynomial across all blocks
of a CRCPRS function.
Figure 17-4. CRCPRS LFSR Structure
LSFR Structure
Determining the CRC Polynomial
The LSFR (Linear Feedback Shift register) structure, as
shown in Figure 17-4, is implemented as a modular shift
register generator. The least significant block in the chain
inputs the MSB and XORs it with the DATA input, in the case
of CRC computation. For PRS computation, the DATA input
is forced to logic '0' (by input selection) and therefore, the
MSB bus is directly connected to the FB bus. In the case of
a chained block, the data input (DIN) comes directly from
the data output (DO) of the LFSR in the previous block. The
MSB selection, derived from the priority decode of the polynomial, enables one of the tri-state drivers to drive the MSB
bus.
Computation of an n-bit result is generally specified by a
polynomial with n+1 terms, the last of which is X16, where
194
X0 = 1
Equation 1
As an example, the CRC-CCIT 16-bit polynomial is:
CRC – CCIT = X 16 + X 12 + X 5 + 1
Equation 2
The CRCPRS hardware assumes the presence of the X0
term and therefore, this polynomial can be expressed in 16bits as 1000100000010000 or 8810h. Two consecutive digital blocks may be allocated to perform this function, with 88h
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17. Digital Blocks
as the MS block polynomial (DR1) and 10h as the LS block
polynomial value.
Determining the PRS Polynomial
Generally, PRS (pseudo random sequence) polynomials are
selected from pre-computed reference tables. It is important
to note that there are two common ways to specify a PRS
polynomial: simple register configuration and modular configuration. In the simple method, a shift register is implemented with a reduction XOR of the MSB and feedback taps
as input into the least significant bit. In the modular method,
there is an XOR operation implemented between each register bit and each tap point enables the XOR with the MSB
for that given bit. The CRCPRS function implements the
modular approach.
Converting a Polynomial Spec to a Modular Spec
These are equivalent methods. However, there is a conversion that should be understood. If tables are specified in
simple register format, then a conversion can be made to
the modular format by subtracting each tap from the MS tap
as shown in the following example.
To implement a 7-bit PRS of length 127, one possible code
is [7,6,4,2]s, which is in simple format. The modular format
would be [7,7-2,7-4,7-6]m or [7,5,3,2]m. Determining the
polynomial to program is similar to the CRC example above.
Set a binary bit for each tap (with bit 0 of the register corresponding to tap 1). Therefore, the code [7,5,3,2] would correspond to 01010110 or 56h.
In both the CRC and PRS cases, an appropriate Seed value
should be selected that is greater than or equal in bit length.
17.1.8.1
Usability Exceptions
The following are usability exceptions for the CRCPRS function.
1. The polynomial register must only be written when the
block is disabled.
17.1.8.2
Block Interrupt
The CRCPRS has one fixed interrupt source, which is the
compare auxiliary output.
17.1.9
SPI Protocol Function
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) is a Motorola specification for implementing full-duplex synchronous serial communication between devices. The 3-wire protocol uses both
edges of the clock to enable synchronous communication,
without the need for stringent setup and hold requirements.
Data is output by both
the Master and Slave, on
one edge of the clock.
MISO MOSI
SCLK
Data is registered at the input
of both devices, on the
opposite edge of the clock.
MOSI MISO
SCLK
SCLK
SS_
SS_
MOSI
MISO
SPI Master
SPI Slave
Figure 17-5. Basic SPI Configuration
A device can be a Master or Slave. A Master outputs clock
and data to the Slave device and inputs Slave data. A Slave
device inputs clock and data from the Master device and
outputs data for input to the Master. The Master and Slave
together are essentially a circular shift register, where the
Master is generating the clocking and initiating data transfers.
A basic data transfer occurs when the Master sends 8 bits of
data, along with eight clocks. In any transfer, both Master
and Slave are transmitting and receiving simultaneously. If
the Master is only sending data, the received data from the
Slave is ignored. If the Master wishes to receive data from
the Slave, the Master must send dummy bytes to generate
the clocking for the Slave to send data back.
December 22, 2003
17.1.9.1
SPI Protocol Register Definitions
The SPI Protocol register definitions are located in Table 174. The use of the SS_ signal varies according to the capability of the Slave device.
Table 17-4. SPI Protocol Register Descriptions
Name
Function
Description
MOSI
Master Out
Slave In
Master data output.
MISO
Master In
Slave Out
Slave data output.
SCLK
Serial Clock
Clock generated by the Master.
SS_
Slave Select This signal is provided to enable multi-slave
(active low) connections to the MISO pin. The MOSI and
SCLK pins can be connected to multiple
slaves, and the SS_ input selects which slave
will receive the input data and drive the MISO
line.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
195
17. Digital Blocks
17.1.10
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SPI Master Function
The SPI Master (SPIM) offers SPI operating modes 0-3. By
default, the MSB of the data byte is shifted out first. An additional option can be set to reverse the direction and shift the
data byte out LSB first.
The SPI protocol requires data to be registered at the device
input, on the opposite edge of the clock that operates the
output shifter. An additional register (RXD), at the input to
the DR0 shift register, has been implemented for this purpose. This register stores received data for one-half cycle
before it is clocked into the shift register.
When configured for SPIM, DR0 functions as a shift register,
with input from the DATA input (MISO) and output to the primary output F1 (MOSI). DR1 is the TX Buffer register and
DR2 is the RX Buffer register.
The SPIS function derives all clocking from the SCLK input
(typically an external SPI Master). This means that the master must initiate all transmissions. For example, to read a
byte from the SPIS, the master must send a byte.
The SPI protocol requires data to be registered at the device
input, on the opposite edge of the clock that operates the
output shifter. An additional register (RXD), at the input to
the DR0 shift register, has been implemented for this purpose. This register stores received data for one-half cycle,
before it is clocked into the shift register.
Since there are no internal clocks used in the SPIS, it may
be clocked asynchronously (if input synchronization is
turned off). In this case, synchronization between the CPU
and the SPIS block can be accomplished with polling and/or
interrupts.
The SPIM controls data transmission between master and
slave because it generates the bit clock for internal clocking
and for clocking the SPIS. The bit clock is derived from the
CLK input selection. Since the PSoC system clock generators produce clocks with varying duty cycles, the SPIM
divides the input CLK by two to produce a bit clock with a
fifty percent duty cycle. This clock is gated, to provide the
SCLK output on the auxiliary output, during byte transmissions.
There are four control bits and four status bits in the Control
register that provide for host interfacing and synchronization.
There are four control bits and four status bits in the Control
register that provide for host interfacing and synchronization.
In the SPIS, there is an additional data input, Slave Select
(SS_), which is an active low signal. SS_ must be asserted
to enable the SPIS to receive and transmit. SS_ has two
high-level functions: 1) To allow for the selection of a given
slave in multi-slave environment, and 2) To provide additional clocking for TX data queuing in SPI modes 0 and 1.
SS_ may be controlled from an external pin, through a Row
Input.
This SPIM function may not be chained.
When SS_ is negated, the SPIS ignores any MOSI/SCLK
input from the master. In addition, the SPIS state machine is
reset, and the MISO output is forced to idle at logic '1'. This
allows for a wired-AND connection in a multi-slave environment. Note that if Hi-Z output is required when the slave is
not selected, this behavior must be implemented in firmware
with IO writes to the port drive register.
17.1.10.1
17.1.11.1
The SPIM hardware has no support for driving the Slave
Select (SS_) signal. The behavior and use of this signal is
application and chip dependent and, if required, must be
implemented in firmware.
Block Interrupt
The SPIM block has a selection of two interrupt sources:
Interrupt on TX Reg Empty (default), or interrupt on SPI
Complete. Mode bit 1 in the Function register controls the
selection.
If SPI Complete is selected as the block interrupt, the Control register must be read in the interrupt routine so that this
status bit is cleared; otherwise, no subsequent interrupts are
generated.
17.1.11
SPI Slave Function
The SPI Slave (SPIS) offers SPI operating modes 0-3. By
default, the MSB of the data byte is shifted out first. An additional option can be set to reverse the direction and shift the
data byte out LSB first.
When configured for SPI, DR0 functions as a shift register,
with input from the DATA input (MOSI) and output to the primary output F1 (MISO). DR1 is the TX Buffer register and
DR2 is the RX Buffer register.
196
Usability Exceptions
The following are usability exceptions for the SPI Slave
function.
1. The SS_ input must be synchronized, but the MOSI and
SCLK inputs may be synchronized or not. Unsynchronized data and clock inputs reduce the latency through
the block and thus allow an SPI system to run at a
slightly higher clock rate.
17.1.11.2
Block Interrupt
The SPIS block has a selection of two interrupt sources:
Interrupt on TX Reg Empty (default) or interrupt on SPI
Complete (same selection as the SPIM). Mode bit 1 in the
Function register controls the selection.
If SPI Complete is selected as the block interrupt, the Control register must still be read in the interrupt routine so that
this status bit is cleared; otherwise, no subsequent interrupts are generated.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17.1.12
17. Digital Blocks
Asynchronous Transmitter
Function
In the Transmitter function, DR0 functions as a shift register,
with no input and with the TXD serial data stream output to
the primary output F1. DR1 is a TX buffer register and DR2
is unused in this configuration.
17.1.13
Asynchronous Receiver Function
In the Receiver function, DR0 functions as the serial data
shift register with RXD input from the DATA input selection.
DR2 is an RX buffer register and DR1 is unused in this configuration.
Unlike SPI, which has no output latency, the TXD output has
one cycle of latency. This is because a multiplexer at the
output must select which bits to shift out: the shift register
data, framing bits, parity, or mark bits. The output of this multiplexer is registered to unglitch it. When the block is first
enabled or when it is idle, a mark bit (logic '1') is output.
The clock generator and START detection are integrated.
The clock generator is a divide by eight which, when the
system is idle, is held in reset. When a START bit (logic '0')
is detected on the RXD input, the reset is negated and a bit
rate clock is generated, subsequently sampling the RXD
input at the center of the bit time. Every succeeding START
bit resynchronizes the clock generator to the incoming bit
rate.
The clock generator is a free running divide by eight circuit.
Although dividing the clock is not necessary for the Transmitter function, the Receiver function does require a divide
by eight for input sampling. It is also done in the Transmitter
function, to allow the TX and RX functions to run off the
same baud rate generator.
There are two formats supported: A 10-bit frame size including one start bit, eight data bits, and one stop bit. or an 11-bit
frame size including one start bit, eight data bits, one parity
bit, and one stop bit.
There are two formats supported: A 10-bit frame size including one start bit, eight data bits, and one stop bit or an 11-bit
frame size including one start bit, eight data bits, one parity
bit, and one stop bit.
The parity generator can be configured to output either even
or odd parity on the eight data bits.
A write to the TX Buffer register (DR1) initiates a transmission and an additional byte can be buffered in this register,
while transmission is in progress.
The received data is an input to the parity generator. It is to
be compared with a received parity bit, if this feature is
enabled. The parity generator can be configured to output
either even or odd parity on the eight data bits.
After eight bits of data are received, the byte is transferred
from the DR0 shifter to the DR2 RX Buffer register.
An additional feature of the Receiver function is that input
data (RXD) and the synchronized clock are passed to the
primary output and auxiliary output, respectively. This allows
connection to a CRC generator or other digital block.
An additional feature of the Transmitter function is that a
clock, generated with setup and hold time for the data bits
only, is output to the auxiliary output. This allows connection
to a CRC generator or other digital blocks.
17.1.13.1
The Transmitter function may not be chained.
The RX Buffer register must always be read in the RX interrupt routine, regardless of error status, etc., so that RX Reg
Full status bit is cleared; otherwise, no subsequent interrupts are generated.
17.1.12.1
Block Interrupt
Block Interrupt
The Receiver has one fixed interrupt source, which is the
RX Reg Full status.
The Transmit block has a selection of two interrupt sources.
Interrupt on TX Reg Empty (default) or interrupt on TX Complete. Mode bit 1 in the Function register controls the selection.
If TX Complete is selected as the block interrupt, the Control
register must still be read in the interrupt routine so that this
status bit is cleared; otherwise, no subsequent interrupts are
generated.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
197
17. Digital Blocks
17.2
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Register Definitions
The Digital Block registers in this chapter are organized by
function, as presented in Table 17-5. To reference timing
diagrams associated with the digital block registers, see
“Timing Diagrams” on page 204. For a complete list of the
Digital Block registers showing their addresses and bit
names, reference the “Digital Register Summary” on
page 176.
Table 17-5. Digital Block Register Definitions
DR0
DR1
DR2
CR0
Function
Access
Function
Access
Function
Access
Function
Access
Timer
Down Counter
R*
Period
W
Capture/Compare
RW
Control
RW
Counter
Down Counter
R*
Period
W
Compare
RW
Control
RW
Dead Band
Down Counter
R*
Period
W
N/A
N/A
Control
RW
CRCPRS
LFSR
R*
Polynomial
W
Seed
RW
Control
RW
SPIM
Shifter
N/A
TX Buffer
W
RX Buffer
R
Control/Status
RW**
SPIS
Shifter
N/A
TX Buffer
W
RX Buffer
R
Control/Status
RW**
TXUART
Shifter
N/A
TX Buffer
W
N/A
N/A
Control/Status
RW**
RXUART
Shifter
N/A
N/A
N/A
RX Buffer
R
Control/Status
RW**
LEGEND
* In Timer, Counter, Dead Band, and CRCPRS functions, a read of the DR0 register returns 00h and transfers DR0 to DR2.
** In the Communications functions, control bits are Read-Write access and status bits are Read-Only access.
Data and Control Registers
17.2.1
DxBxxDRx Registers
The Data and Control registers presented in this section
encompass the DxBxxDR0, DxBxxDR1, and DxBxxDR2
registers. They are discussed according to which bank they
are located in and then detailed in tables by function type.
There are two banks of registers associated with the PSoC
device. Bank 0 encompasses the user registers for the
device and Bank 1 encompasses the configuration registers
17.2.1.1
for the device. Both are defined below. Reference the “Bank
0 Registers” on page 86 and the “Bank 1 Registers” on
page 145 for more information.
For additional information, reference the Register Details
chapter for the following registers:
■
■
■
DxBxxDR0 register on page 90.
DxBxxDR1 register on page 91.
DxBxxDR2 register on page 92.
Timer Register Definitions
Bank 0:
There are three 8-bit data registers and a 3-bit control register. Table 17-6 explains the meaning of these registers in the context of timer operation.
Bank 1:
The mode bits in the Function register are block type specific. Other bit fields in this register, as well as the definitions of the Input and Output registers, are common to all functions and are described in the “DxBxxIN Registers” on page 204 and the “DxBxxOU Registers” on page 204.
These mode bits are independent in the Timer block and control the Interrupt Type and the Compare Type. Timers have a special divide by one
mode, when the period of the DR0 register is set to 00h. In this configuration, the primary output Terminal Count (TC) is the inverted input clock.
The interrupt output is also the input clock inverted.
Table 17-6. Timer Data Register Descriptions
Name
DR0
Function
Count Value
Description
Not Directly Readable or Writeable.
During normal operation, DR0 stores the current count of a synchronous down counter.
When disabled, a write to the DR1 Period register is also simultaneously loaded into DR0 from the data bus.
When disabled, a read of DR0 returns 00h to the data bus and transfers the contents of DR0 to DR2. This transfer only
occurs in the addressed block.
When enabled, a read of DR0 returns 00h to the data bus and synchronously transfers the contents of DR0 to DR2. Operates simultaneously on the byte addressed and all higher bytes in a multi-block timer.
Note that when the hardware capture input is high, the read of DR0 (software capture) will be masked and will not occur. The
hardware capture input must be low for a software capture to occur.
198
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17. Digital Blocks
Table 17-6. Timer Data Register Descriptions (continued)
Name
DR1
Function
Period
Description
Write Only Register.
Data in this register sets the period of the count. The actual number of clocks counted is Period + 1.
In the default one-half cycle terminal count mode, a period value of 00h results in the primary output to be the inversion of
the input clock. In the optional full cycle terminal count mode, a period of 00h gives a constant logic high on the primary output.
When disabled, a write to this register also transfers the period value directly into DR0.
When enabled, if the block frequency is 24 MHz or below, this register may be written to at any time, but the period will only
be reloaded into DR0 in the clock following a terminal count. If the block frequency is 48 MHz, the terminal count or compare
interrupt should be used to synchronize the new Period register write; otherwise, the counter could be incorrectly loaded.
DR2
Capture/
Compare
Read Write Register (see Exception below).
DR2 has multiple functions in a Timer configuration. It is typically used as a Capture register, but it also functions as a Compare register.
When enabled and a capture event occurs, the current count in DR0 is synchronously transferred into DR2.
When enabled, the compare output is computed using the Compare Type (set in the Function register mode bits) between
DR0 and DR2. The result of the Compare is output to the Auxiliary output.
When disabled, a read of DR0 will transfer the contents of DR0 into DR2 for the addressed block only.
Exception: When enabled, DR2 is not writeable.
17.2.1.2
Counter Register Definitions
Bank 0:
There are three 8-bit data registers and a 2-bit control register. Table 17-7 explains the meaning of these registers in the context of the Counter
operation. Note that the descriptions of the registers are dependant on the enable/disable state of the block. This behavior is only related to the
enable bit in the Control register, not the data input that provides the counter gate (unless otherwise noted).
Bank 1:
The mode bits in the Function register are block type specific. Other bit fields in this register, as well as the definitions of the Input and Output registers are common to all functions. These mode bits are independent in the Counter block and control the Interrupt Type and the Compare Type
(same as the Timer function).
Table 17-7. Counter Data Register Descriptions
Name
DR0
Function
Count Value
Description
Not Directly Readable or Writeable.
During normal operation, DR0 stores the current count of a synchronous down counter.
When disabled, a write to the DR1 Period register is also simultaneously loaded into DR0 from the data bus.
When disabled or the data input (counter gate) is low, a read of DR0 returns 00h to the data bus and transfers the contents
of DR0 to DR2. This register should not be read when the counter is enabled and counting.
DR1
Period
Write Only Register.
Data in this register sets the period of the count. The actual number of clocks counted is Period + 1.
In the default one-half cycle terminal count mode, a period value of 00h will result in the auxiliary output to be the inversion
of the input clock. In the optional full cycle terminal count mode, a period of 00h gives a constant logic high on the auxiliary
output.
When disabled, a write to this register also transfers the period value directly into DR0.
When enabled, if the block frequency is 24 MHz or below, this register may be written to at any time, but the period will only
be reloaded into DR0 in the clock following a terminal count. If the block frequency is 48 MHz, the terminal count or compare
interrupt should be used to synchronize the new Period register write; otherwise, the counter could be incorrectly loaded.
DR2
Compare
Read Write Register.
DR2 functions as a Compare register.
When enabled, the compare output is computed using the Compare Type (set in the Function register mode bits) between
DR0 and DR2. The result of the compare is output to the primary output.
When disabled or the data input (counter gate) is low, a read of DR0 will transfer the contents of DR0 into DR2.
DR2 may be written to when the function is enabled or disabled.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
199
17. Digital Blocks
17.2.1.3
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Dead Band Register Definitions
Bank 0:
There are three 8-bit data registers and a 3-bit control register. Table 17-8 explains the meaning of these registers in the context of Dead Band
operation.
Bank 1:
The Mode bits in the Function register are block type specific. Other bit fields in this register, as well as the definitions of the Input and Output registers, are common to all functions.
Mode [1:0] is encoded as the Kill Type. In all cases, the output is forced low immediately. Mode bits are encoded for Kill options and are detailed
in the following table.
Reference “Dead Band Timing” on page 206 for additional information on the Dead Band Kill options.
Table 17-8. Dead Band Register Descriptions
Name
DR0
Function
Count Value
Description
Not Directly Readable or Writeable.
During normal operation, DR0 stores the current count of a synchronous down counter.
When disabled, a write to the DR1 Period register is also simultaneously loaded into DR0 from the data bus.
When disabled, a read of DR0 returns 00h to the data bus and transfers the contents of DR0 to DR2.
DR1
Period
Write Only Register.
Data in this register sets the period of the dead band count. The actual number of clocks counted is Period + 1. The minimum period value is 00h, which sets a dead band time of one clock.
When disabled, a write to this register also transfers the period value directly into DR0.
When enabled, if the block frequency is 24 MHz or below, this register may be written to at any time, but the period will only
be reloaded into DR0 in the clock following a terminal count. If the block frequency is 48 MHz, the terminal count or compare
interrupt should be used to synchronize the new Period register write; otherwise, the counter could be incorrectly loaded.
DR2
Buffer
17.2.1.4
When disabled, a read of DR0 will transfer the contents of DR0 into DR2.
CRCPRS Register Definitions
Bank 0:
There are three data registers and one control register. Table 17-9 explains the meaning of these registers in the context of CRCPRS operation.
Note that in the CRCPRS function, a write to the DR2 Seed register is also loaded simultaneously into DR0.
Bank 1:
The mode bits in the Function register are block type specific. Other bit fields in this register, as well as the definitions of the Input and Output registers, are common to all functions and are described in the “DxBxxIN Registers” on page 204 and the “DxBxxOU Registers” on page 204.
The mode bits are encoded to determine the Compare type.
Table 17-9. CRCPRS Register Descriptions
Name
DR0
Function
LFSR
Description
Not Directly Readable or Writeable.
During normal operation, DR0 stores the state of a synchronous Linear Feedback Shift Register.
When disabled, a write to the DR2 Seed register is also simultaneously loaded into DR0 from the data bus.
When disabled, a read of DR0 returns 00h to the data bus and transfers the contents of DR0 to DR2. This register should not
be read while the block is enabled.
DR1
Polynomial
Write Only Register.
Data in this register sets the polynomial for the CRC or PRS function.
Exception: This register must only be written when the block is disabled.
DR2
Seed/Residue
Read Write Register.
DR2 functions as a Seed and Residue register.
When disabled, a write to this register also transfers the seed value directly into DR0.
When enabled, DR2 may be written to at any time. Value written will be used in the Compare function.
When enabled, the compare output is computed using the Compare Type (set in the Function register mode bits) between
DR0 and DR2. The result of the compare is output to the auxiliary output.
When disabled, a read of DR0 will transfer the contents of DR0 into DR2. This feature can be used to read out the residue,
after a CRC operation is complete.
200
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17.2.1.5
17. Digital Blocks
SPI Master Register Definitions
Bank 0:
There are three 8-bit data registers and one 8-bit control/status register. The following tables explain the meaning of these registers in the context
of SPIM operation.
Bank 1:
Mode bit 1 in the Function register is block type specific and selects Interrupt Type. Mode bit 0 selects Master or Slave (for SPIM, it is '0'). Other
bit fields in this register, as well as the definitions of the Input and Output registers, are common to all functions.
Table 17-10. SPIM Data Register Descriptions
Name
Function
DR0
Shifter
DR1
TX Buffer
Description
Not Readable or Writeable.
During normal operation, DR0 implements a shift register for shifting serial data.
Write Only Register.
If no transmission is in progress and this register is written to, the data from this register (DR1) is loaded into the shift register
(DR0), on the following clock edge, and a transmission is initiated. If a transmission is currently in progress, this register
serves as a buffer for TX data.
This register should only be written to when TX Reg Empty status is set, and this write clears the TX Reg Empty status bit in
the Control register. When the data is transferred from this register (DR1) to the shift register (DR0), then TX Reg Empty status is set.
DR2
RX Buffer
Read Only Register.
When a byte transmission/reception is complete, the data in the shifter (DR0) is transferred into the RX Buffer register and
RX Reg Full status in the Control register is set.
A read from this register (DR2) clears the RX Reg Full status bit in the Control register.
17.2.1.6
SPI Slave Register Definitions
Bank 0:
There are three 8-bit data registers and one 8-bit control/status register. Figure 17-11 explains the meaning of these registers in the context of
SPIS operation.
Bank 1:
Mode bit 1 in the Function register is block type specific and selects Interrupt Type. Mode bit 0 selects Master or Slave (for SPIS, it is '1').
The SPIS has block-specific bits in the Output register, to select and control the Slave Select (SS_) input and behavior. Other Input and Output
register bit field definitions are common to all functions and are described in “DxBxxIN Registers” on page 204 and “DxBxxOU Registers” on
page 204.
The SPIS is unique in that it has three function inputs and one function output defined. When the Aux IO Enable bit is '0', the Aux IO Select bits
are used to select one of four inputs from the auxiliary data input multiplexer to drive the SS_ input. Alternatively, when the Aux IO Enable bit is a
'1', the SS_ signal is driven directly from the value of the Aux IO Select[0] bit. Thus, the SS_ input can be controlled in firmware, eliminating the
need to use an additional GPIO pin for this purpose.
Regardless of how the SS_ bit is configured, a SPIS block has the auxiliary row output drivers forced off and therefore, the auxiliary output is not
available in this block.
Table 17-11. SPIS Data Register Descriptions
Name
Function
DR0
Shifter
DR1
TX Buffer
Description
Not Readable or Writeable.
During normal operation, DR0 implements a shift register for shifting serial data.
Write Only Register.
This register should only be written to when TX Reg Empty status is set and the write clears the TX Reg Empty status bit in
the Control register. When the data is transferred from this register (DR1) to the shift register (DR0), then TX Reg Empty status is set.
DR2
RX Buffer
Read Only Register.
When a byte transmission/reception is complete, the data in the shifter (DR0) is transferred into the RX Buffer register and
RX Reg Full status in the Control (CR0) register is set.
A read from this register (DR2) clears the RX Reg Full status bit in the Control register.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
201
17. Digital Blocks
17.2.1.7
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Transmitter Register Definitions
Bank 0:
There are three 8-bit data registers and one 5-bit control/status register. Figure 17-12 explains the meaning of these registers in the context of
Transmitter operation.
Bank 1:
The mode bits in the Function register are block type specific. Other Input and Output registers bit field definitions are common to all functions.
In the Function register, the Mode bit 0 selects between Transmitter and Receiver (in this case Mode bit 0 is set to 1 for TX) and the Mode bit 1
selects the Interrupt Type.
Table 17-12. Transmitter Data Register Descriptions
Name
Function
DR0
Shifter
DR1
TX Buffer
Description
Not Readable or Writeable.
During normal operation, DR0 implements a shift register for shifting out serial data.
Write Only Register.
If no transmission is in progress and this register is written to, subject to the setup time requirement, the data from this register (DR1) is loaded into the shift register (DR0) on the following clock edge and a transmission is initiated. If a transmission
is currently in progress, this register serves as a buffer for TX data.
This register should only be written to when TX Reg Empty status is set and this write clears the TX Reg Empty status bit in
the Control (CR0) register. When the data is transferred from this register (DR1) to the shift register (DR0), then TX Reg
Empty status is set.
DR2
NA
17.2.1.8
Not Used in this function.
Receiver Register Definitions
Bank 0:
There are three 8-bit data registers and one 8-bit control/status register. The following table explains the meaning of these registers in the context
of Receiver operation.
Bank 1:
The mode bits in the Function register are block type specific. Other Input and Output registers bit field definitions are common to all functions.
In the Function register, the Mode bit 0 selects between Transmitter and Receiver (in this case Mode bit 0 is set to 0 for RX) and the Mode bit 1
selects the Interrupt Type.
Table 17-13. Receiver Data Register Descriptions
Name
Function
Description
DR0
Shifter
Not Readable or Writeable.
DR1
NA
Not Used in this function.
DR2
RX Buffer
Read Only Register.
During normal operation, DR0 implements a shift register for shifting in serial data from the RXD input.
After eight bits of data are received, the contents of the shifter (DR0) is transferred into the RX Buffer register and the RX
Reg Full status is set. The RX Reg Full status bit in the control register is cleared when this register is read.
202
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17.2.2
17. Digital Blocks
DxBxxCR0 Register
The DxBxxCR0 register is the digital blocks’ control register. It is described by function in Table 17-14. For additional information, reference the DxBxxCR0 register on page 93.
Table 17-14. DxBxxCR0 Register Description
Function
Description
Timer
There are three bits in the Control (CR0) register: one for enabling the block, one for setting the optional interrupt on capture, and one to select
between one-half and a full clock for terminal count output.
Counter
One bit enable only.
Dead Band
There are three bits in the Control (CR0) register: one bit for enabling the block, and two bits to enable and control Dead Band Bit Bang mode.
When Bit Bang mode is enabled, the output of this register is substituted for the PWM reference. This register may be toggled by user firmware, to generate PHI1 and PHI2 output clock with the programmed dead time. The options for Bit Bang mode are as follows:
0
Function uses the previous clock primary output as the input reference.
1
Function uses the Bit Bang Clock register as the input reference.
CRCPRS
Two bits are used to enable operation.
SPIM
The SPI Control (CR0) register contains both control and status bits. There are four control bits that are read/write: Enable, Clock Phase and
Clock Polarity to set the mode, and LSB First, which controls bit ordering. There are two read-only status bits: Overrun and SPI Complete.
There are two additional read-only status bits to indicate TX and RX Buffer status.
SPIS
The SPI Control (CR0) register contains both control and status bits. There are four control bits that are read/write: Enable, Clock Phase and
Clock Polarity to set the mode, and LSB First, which controls bit ordering. There are two read-only status bits: Overrun and SPI Complete.
There are two additional read-only status bits to indicate TX and RX Buffer status.
TXUART
The Transmitter Control (CR0) register contains three control bits and two status bits. The control bits are Enable, Parity Enable, and Parity
Type, and have read/write access. The status bits, TX Reg Empty and TX Complete, are read-only.
RXUART
The Receiver Control (CR0) register contains both control and status bits. Three control bits are read/write: Enable, Parity Enable, and Parity
Type. There are five read-only status bits: RX Reg Full, RX Active, Framing Error, Overrun, and Parity Error.
Interrupt Mask Register
17.2.3
However, if any of the blocks in a given row have the BCEN
bit set, the input that allows the broadcast net from other
rows to drive the given row’s broadcast net is disabled (see
Figure 16-2 on page 185).
INT_MSK1 Register
The INT_MSK1 register is described in the “Interrupt Controller” chapter on page 51. For additional information, reference the INT_MSK1 register on page 135.
Table 17-15. DxBxxFN Function Registers
[2:0]: Function
Configuration Registers
The Configuration block contains 3 registers: Function
(DxBxxFN), Input (DxBxxIN), and Output (DxBxxOU). The
values in these registers should not be changed while the
block is enabled.
17.2.4
DxBxxFN Registers
These registers contain the primary Function and Mode bits.
The function bits configure the block into one of the available block functions (six for the Comm block, four for the
Basic block). The mode bits select the options available for
the selected function. These bits should only be changed
when the block is disabled.
000b: Timer
001b: Counter
010b: CRCPRS
011b: Reserved
100b: Dead band for PWM
101b: UART
110b: SPI
111b: Reserved
[4:3]: Mode
Function specific
[5]: End/Single
1 == Block is not chained or is at the end of a chain
0 == Block is at the start of or in the middle of a chain
[6]: BCEN
1 == Disable
0 == Enable
[7]: Data Invert
1 == Invert block’s data input
0 == Do not invert block’s data input
For additional information, reference the DxBxxFN register
on page 149.
Three additional control bits are found in this register. The
End/Single bit is used to indicate the last or most significant
block in a chainable function. This bit must also be set if the
chainable function only consists of a single block. The Data
Invert bit optimally inverts the selected data input.
The BCEN bits enable the primary output of the block, to
drive the row broadcast block. The BCEN bits are set independently in each block and therefore, care must be taken
to ensure that only one BCEN bit in a given row is enabled.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
203
17. Digital Blocks
17.2.5
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DxBxxIN Registers
Table 17-17. Digital Block Output Definitions
The Input registers are 8 bits and consist of two 4-bit fields
to control each of the 16-1 Clock and Data input multiplexers. The meaning of these fields depends on the external
clock and data connections, which is context specific.
Table 17-16. Digital Block Input Definitions
Inputs
DATA
CLK
Auxiliary
Timer
Capture
CLK
N/A
Counter
Enable
CLK
N/A
Kill
CLK
Reference *
Dead Band
CRCPRS
Serial Data **
CLK
N/A
SPIM
MISO
CLK
N/A
SPIS
MOSI
SCLK
SS_
Transmitter
N/A
8X Baud CLK
N/A
Receiver
RXD
8X Baud CLK
N/A
* The Dead Band reference input does not use the auxiliary input multiplexer.
It is hardwired to be the primary output of the previous block.
Outputs
Primary
Auxiliary
Interrupt
Terminal Count
Compare
Terminal Count or
Compare
Counter
Compare
Terminal Count
Terminal Count or
Compare
Dead Band
Timer
Phase 1
Phase 2
Phase 1
CRCPRS
MSB
Compare
Compare
SPIM
MOSI
SCLK
TX Reg Empty or
SPI Complete
SPIS
MISO
N/A **
TX Reg Empty or
SPI Complete
Transmitter
TXD
SCLK *
TX Reg Empty or
TX Compete
Receiver
RXD
SCLK *
RX Reg Full
* The UART blocks generate an SPI mode 3 style clock that is only active during the data bits of a received or transmitted byte.
** In the SPIS, the field that is used to select the auxiliary output is used to
control the auxiliary input to select the SS_.
For additional information, reference the DxBxxOU register
on page 152.
** For CRC computation, the input data is a serial data stream synchronized
to the clock. For PRS mode, this input should be forced to logic ‘0’.
For additional information, reference the DxBxxIN register
on page 151.
17.2.6
DxBxxOU Registers
The Output registers contains two 3-bit fields: two bits to
select and one bit to enable the tri-state drivers for the primary and auxiliary outputs, to drive onto the row output bus.
In one case, that of the SPI Slave, the meaning of the Auxiliary IO Select bits is different. The SPI Slave function is
unique in that it has three function inputs and one function
output defined. In this configuration, the auxiliary row output
drivers are disabled and the bits are used to select one of
four inputs from the auxiliary data input multiplexer (normally
connected to row inputs), which is used as the SS_ (Slave
Select) signal. The Aux IO Enable bit also has a different
meaning in SPI Slave mode. If set, the SS_ signal is internally forced active and therefore, driving the SS_ from an
auxiliary data input would not be required.
17.3
Timing Diagrams
The timing diagrams in this section are presented according
to their functionality and are in the following order.
■ “Timer Timing” on page 205
■ “Counter Timing” on page 206
■ “Dead Band Timing” on page 206
■ “CRCPRS Timing” on page 208
■ “SPI Mode Timing” on page 208
■ “SPIM Timing” on page 209
■ “SPIS Timing” on page 212
■ “Transmitter Timing” on page 215
■ “Receiver Timing” on page 216
The Output register also contains the clock synchronization
bits. These two bits are used to enable the synchronization,
and select between SYSCLK and SYSCLKX2. When
enabled, the input clock is resynchronized to the selected
system clock, which occurs after the 16-1 multiplexing. This
minimizes clock skew incurred in the generation of clocks,
which can be derived from a wide variety of sources and
paths. Under normal circumstances, synchronization should
be enabled. Care should be taken to resynchronize
SYSCLKX2 clock sources to the SYSCLKX2 system clock.
The resynchronization should only be disabled in cases
where asynchronous external inputs are used, such as in
SPI Slave configurations.
204
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17.3.1
17. Digital Blocks
Timer Timing
determined by CI, TCI and the block zero detect. Example
timing for a three block Timer is shown in Figure 17-6.
Enable/Disable Operation. When the block is disabled,
the clock is immediately gated low. All outputs are gated low,
including the interrupt output. All internal state is reset to its
configuration specific reset state, except for DR0, DR1, and
DR2, which are unaffected.
The compare circuit compares registers DR0 <= DR2.
(When Mode[1] = 1, the comparison is DR0 < DR2).
Each block has an internal compare condition (DR0 compared to DR2), a chaining signal to the next block called
CMPO, and the chaining signal from the previous block
called CMPI In any given block of a Timer, the CMPO is
used to generate the auxiliary output (primary output in the
Counter) with a 1 cycle clock delay.
Terminal Count/Compare Operation. In the clock cycle
following the count of 00h, the Terminal Count (TC) output is
asserted. It is one-half cycle or a full cycle depending on the
TC Pulse Width Mode, as set in the block Control register. If
this block is standalone, or if it is the least significant block in
a chain, the Carry Out (CO) signal is also asserted. If the
period is set to 00h, and the TC Pulse Width Mode is onehalf cycle, the output is the inversion of the input clock. The
Compare (CMP) output will be asserted in the cycle following the compare true, and will be negated one cycle after
compare false.
CMPO is generated from a combination of the internal compare condition and the CMPI input by the following rules:
1. For any given block, if DR0 < DR2, the CMPO condition
is unconditionally asserted.
2. For any given block, if DR0 == DR2, CMPO is asserted
only if the CMPI input to that block is asserted.
3. If the block is a start block, the effective CMPI depends
on the compare type. If it is DR0 <= DR2, the effective
CMPI input is '1'. If it is DR0 < DR2, the effective input is
'0'.
Multi-Block Terminal Count/Compare Operation. When
Timers are chained, the CO signal of a given block becomes
the CI of the next most significant block in the chain. In a
chained Timer, the CO output indicates that block and all
lower blocks are at 00h count. The CO is setup to the next
positive edge of the clock to enable the next higher block to
count once for every terminal count of all lower blocks.
Capture Operation. In the timer implementation, a rising
edge of the Data input or a CPU read of DR0 triggers a synchronous capture event. The result of this is to generate a
latch enable to DR2 that loads the current count from DR0
into DR2. The latch enable signal is synchronized in such a
way that it is not closing near an edge on which the count is
changing.
The TCO of a given block becomes the TCI of the next least
significant block in the chain. The TCO output indicates that
that block and all higher blocks are at 00h count. The TCI/
TCO chaining signals provide a way for the lower blocks to
know when the upper blocks are at terminal count. Reload
occurs when all blocks are at terminal count, which can be
A limitation is that capture will not work with the block clock
of 48 MHz. (A fundamental limitation to Timer capture operation is the fact the GPIO inputs are currently synchronized to
the 24 MHz system clock).
Reload occurs
when all blocks
reach terminal
count.
Example of Multi-block Timer Counting
MSB Period = k, ISB Period = m, LSB Period = n
CLK
Count LSB
2
1
0
FF
FE
2
1
0
n
n-1
Zero Detect LSB
Carry Out LSB
Count ISB
0
1
0
m
Zero Detect ISB
Carry Out ISB
Count MSB
0
k
Zero Detect MSB
Carry Out MSB
Multi-Block TC
Figure 17-6. Multi-Block Timing
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
205
17. Digital Blocks
17.3.2
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Counter Timing
17.3.3
Enable/Disable Operation. See Timer
Operation (“Timer Function” on page 192).
Enable/Disable
Terminal Count/Compare Operation. See Timer Terminal
Count/Compare Operation (“Timer Function” on page 192).
Multi-Block Operation. See Timer Multi-Block Terminal
Count/Compare Operation (“Timer Function” on page 192).
Gate (Enable) Operation. The data input controls the
counter enable. The transition on this enable must have at
least one 24 MHz cycle of setup time to the block clock. This
will be ensured if internal or synchronized external inputs
are used. For external unsynchronized signals, the user is
responsible for this setup time.
As shown in Figure 17-7, when the data input is negated
(counting is disabled) and the count is 00h, the TC output
stays low until the clock following the assertion of the data
input. When the block is disabled, the clock is immediately
gated low. All internal state is reset, except for DR0, DR1,
and DR2, which are unaffected.
Dead Band Timing
Enable/Disable Operation. Initially both outputs are low.
There are no critical timing requirements for enabling the
block because dead band processing does not start until the
first incoming positive or negative reference edge. In typical
operation, it is recommended that the dead band block be
enabled first, then the PWM generator block.
When the block is disabled, the clock is immediately gated
low. All outputs are gated low, including the interrupt output.
All internal state is reset to its configuration specific reset
state, except for DR0, DR1, and DR2, which are unaffected.
Normal Operation. Figure 17-8 shows typical dead band
timing. The incoming reference edge can occur up to one 24
MHz system clock before the edge of the block clock. On
the edge of the block clock, the currently asserted output is
negated and the dead band counter is enabled. After Period
+ 1 clocks, the phase associated with the current state of the
PWM reference is asserted (Reference High = Phase 1,
Reference Low = Phase 2). The minimum dead time occurs
with a period value of 00h, and that dead time is one clock
cycle.
CLK
DATA (GATE)
COUNT
2
1
0
N
N-1
TC
Figure 17-7. Counter Terminal Count Timing with Gate
Disable
A PWM Reference edge
running on the same
clock occurs here.
A Bit Bang clock can occur
anywhere up to one 24
MHz clock before the next
block clock edge.
A high on the reference
asserts PH1, a low PHI2.
CLOCK
PWM REFERENCE
COUNT
P
P-1
P-2
1
0
P
PHI1 (Primary Output)
PHI2 (Auxiliary Output)
Dead Time
Dead time in clocks is
the Period + 1.
Figure 17-8. Basic Dead Band Timing
206
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17.3.3.1
17. Digital Blocks
Changing the PWM Duty Cycle
Under normal circumstances, the Dead Band period is less
than the minimum PWM high or low time. As an example,
consider the following diagram where the low of the PWM is
4 clocks and the dead band period is 2 clocks and the high
time of the PHI2 is 2 clocks.
CLK
PWM
4
PHI1
2
PHI2
2
2
Figure 17-9. DB High Time is PWM Width Minus DB
Period
In Figure 17-10, you reduce the width of the PWM low time
by 1 clock (to 3 clocks). The dead band period remains the
same, but the high time for PHI2 is reduced by 1 clock (to 1
clock). Of course the opposite phase, PHI1, increases in
length by 1 clock.
The differences in the modes come from how dead band
processing is restarted.
1. Synchronous Restart Mode: When KILL is asserted
high internal state is held in reset and the initial dead
band period is reloaded into the counter. While KILL is
held high, incoming PWM reference edges are ignored.
When KILL is negated, the next incoming PWM reference edge restarts dead band processing. See
Figure 17-12.
2. Asynchronous Restart Mode: When KILL is asserted
high, internal state is not affected. When KILL is
negated, outputs are restored, subject to a minimum disable time between one-half and one and one-half clock
cycle. See Figure 17-13.
3. Disable Mode: There is no specific timing associated
with Disable Mode. The block is disabled and the user
must re-enable the function in firmware to continue processing.
Short KILL, outputs off for
remainder of current cycle.
Operation resumes on
the next PWM edge.
PWM
REFERENCE
CLK
WM
3
PHI1
PHI1
1
PHI2
PHI2
2
2
KILL
Figure 17-10. DB High Time is Reduced as PWM Width
is Reduced
If the width of the PWM low time is reduced to a point where
it is equal to the dead band period, the corresponding
phase, PHI2, disappears altogether. Note that after the rising edge of the PWM the opposite phase still has the programmed dead band. Figure 17-11 shows an example
where the Dead Band period is 2 and the PWM width is 2. In
this case, the high time of PHI2 is 0 clocks. Note that the
Phase 1 dead band time is still 2 clocks.
Output is off for duration
of KILL on time.
These edges Operation resumes
on this edge.
are skipped.
PWM
REFERENCE
PHI1
PHI2
KILL
Figure 17-12. Synchronous Restart KILL Mode
CLK
PWM
2
PHI1
PHI2
2
2
Figure 17-11. PWM Width Equal to Dead Band Period
In the case where the dead band period is greater than the
high or low of the PWM reference, the output of the associated phase will not be asserted high.
17.3.3.2
Kill Operation
It is assumed that the KILL input will not be synchronized at
the row input. (This is not a requirement; however, if synchronized the KILL operation will have up to two 24 MHz
clock cycles latency, which is undesirable.) To support the
restart modes, the negation of KILL is internally (in the
block) synchronized to the 24 MHz system clock.
There are three KILL modes supported. In all cases, the
KILL signal asynchronously forces the outputs to logic '0'.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
207
17. Digital Blocks
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17.3.4
Outputs are disabled
immediately on KILL.
Minimum disable time
is between ½ and 1½
block clock cycle.
Enable/Disable Operation. Same as Timer Enable/Disable Operation (“Timer Timing” on page 205)
BLOCK CLK
When the block is disabled, the clock is immediately gated
low. All outputs are gated low, including the interrupt output.
All internal state is reset to its configuration specific reset
state, except for DR0, DR1, and DR2, which are unaffected.
PHI1 or PHI2
KILL
Example of KILL shorter
than the minimum.
CRCPRS Timing
Outputs are forced low only as
long as the KILL is asserted,
subject to the minimum disable
time. Internal operation is
unaffected.
17.3.5
SPI Mode Timing
Figure 17-14 shows the SPI modes, which are typically
defined as 0, 1, 2, or 3. These mode numbers are an encoding of two control bits, Clock Phase and Clock Polarity.
PWM REFERENCE
PHI1
PHI2
Clock phase indicates the relationship of the clock to the
data. When the clock phase is '0', it means that the data is
registered as an input on the leading edge of the clock and
the next data is output on the trailing edge of the clock.
When the clock phase is '1', it means that the next data is
output on the leading edge of the clock, and that data is registered as an input on the trailing edge of the clock.
KILL
Example of KILL longer
than the minimum.
PWM REFERENCE
PHI1
PHI2
Clock polarity controls clock inversion. When clock polarity
is set to '1`, the clock idle state is high.
KILL
Figure 17-13. Asynchronous Restart Kill Mode
MODE 0,1 (Phase=0) Input on leading edge. Output on trailing edge.
SCLK,Polarity=0 (Mode 0)
SCLK, Polarity=1 (Mode 1)
MOSI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MISO
SS_
MODE 2,3 (Phase=1) Output on leading edge. Input on trailing edge.
SCLK,Polarity=0 (Mode 2)
SCLK, Polarity=1 (Mode 3)
MOSI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MISO
SS_
Figure 17-14. SPI Mode Timing
208
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17.3.6
17. Digital Blocks
SPIM Timing
CR0 status) to its configuration specific reset state, except
for DR0, DR1, and DR2, which are unaffected.
Enable/Disable Operation. As soon as the block is configured for SPIM, the primary output is the MSB or LSB of the
shift register, depending on the LSBF configuration in bit 7 of
the Control register. The auxiliary output is '1' or '0' depending on the idle clock state of the SPI mode. This is the idle
state.
Normal Operation. Typical timing for a SPIM transfer is
shown in Figure 17-15 and Figure 17-16. The user initially
writes a byte to transmit when TX Reg Empty status is true.If
no transmission is currently in progress, the data is loaded
into the shifter and the transmission is initiated. The TX Reg
Empty status is asserted again and the user is allowed to
write the next byte to be transmitted to the TX Buffer register. After the last bit is output, if TX Buffer data is available
with one-half clock setup time to the next clock, a new byte
transmission will be initiated. A SPIM block receives a byte
at the same time that it sends one. The SPI Complete or RX
Reg Full can be used to determine when the input byte has
been received.
When the SPIM is enabled, the internal reset is released on
the divide by 2 flip-flop, and on the next positive edge of the
selected input clock. This 1 bit divider transitions to a '1' and
remains free-running thereafter.
When the block is disabled, the SCLK and MOSI outputs
revert to their idle state. All internal state is reset (including
Free running
internal bit rate
clock is CLK input
divided by two.
Setup time
for TX
Buffer write.
Shifter is loaded
with first byte.
Last bit of received
data is valid on this
edge and is latched
into RX Buffer.
Shifter is loaded
with next byte.
CLK INPUT
INTERNAL CLOCK
TX REG EMPTY
RX REG FULL
MOSI
D7
D6
D5
D2
D1
D0
D7
SCLK (MODE 0)
SCLK (MODE 1)
User writes first
byte to the TX
Buffer register.
First input bit First shift
is latched.
User writes next
byte to the TX
Buffer register.
Figure 17-15. Typical SPIM Timing in Mode 0 and 1
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
209
17. Digital Blocks
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Free running
internal bit rate
clock is CLK input
divided by two.
Setup time
for the TX
Buffer write.
Last bit of received
data is valid on this
edge and is latched
into RX Buffer.
Shifter is loaded
with the first byte.
Shifter is loaded
with the next
byte.
CLK INPUT
INTERNAL CLOCK
TX REG EMPTY
RX REG FULL
MOSI
D7
D6
D5
D2
D1
D0
D7
SCLK (MODE 2)
SCLK (MODE 3)
User writes first
byte to the TX
Buffer register.
First input bit First shift
is latched.
User writes next
byte to the TX
Buffer register.
Figure 17-16. Typical SPIM Timing in Mode 2 and 3
Status Generation and Interrupts. There are four status
bits in an SPI Block: TX Reg Empty, RX Reg Full, SPI Complete, and Overrun.
TX Reg Empty indicates that a new byte can be written to
the TX Buffer register. When the block is enabled, this status
bit is immediately asserted. This status bit is cleared when
the user writes a byte of data to the TX Buffer register. TX
Reg Empty is a control input to the state machine and if a
transmission is not already in progress, the assertion of this
control signal initiates one. This is the default SPIM block
interrupt. However, an initial interrupt is not generated when
the block is enabled. The user must write a byte to the TX
Buffer register and that byte must be loaded into the shifter
before interrupts generated from the TX Reg Empty status
bit are enabled.
SPIM to disable the block after data transmission is complete.
See Figure 17-17 and Figure 17-18 for status timing relationships.
RX Reg Full is asserted on the edge that captures that 8th
bit of receive data. This status bit is cleared when the user
reads the RX Buffer register (DR2).
Overrun status is set if RX Reg Full is still asserted from a
previous byte when a new byte is about to be loaded into the
RX Buffer register. Because the RX Buffer register is implemented as a latch, Overrun status is set one-half bit clock
before RX Reg Full status.
SPI Complete is an optional interrupt and is generated when
8 bits of data and clock have been sent. In modes 0 and 1,
this occurs one-half cycle after RX Reg Full is set because
in these modes, data is latched on the leading edge of the
clock, and there is an additional one-half cycle remaining to
complete that clock. In modes 2 and 3, this occurs at the
same edge that the receive data is latched. This signal may
be used to read the received byte or it may be used by the
210
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17. Digital Blocks
SS Forced Low
Transfer in Progress
SS
SCLK (Mode 0)
SCLK (Mode 1)
SS Toggled on a Message Basis
Transfer in Progress
Transfer in Progress
SS
SCLK (Mode 0)
SCLK (Mode 1)
SS Toggled on Each Byte
Transfer in Progress
Transfer in Progress
SS
SCLK (Mode 0)
SCLK (Mode 1)
Figure 17-17. SPI Status Timing for Modes 0 and 1
User writes
the next byte.
MODE 2,3 (Phase=1) Output on leading edge. Input on trailing edge.
SCLK,Polarity=0 (Mode 2)
SCLK, Polarity=1 (Mode 3)
MOSI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
MISO
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
SS_
TX REG EMPTY
RX REG FULL
SPI COMPLETE
Last bit of byte
is received.
All clocks and data for
this byte completed.
OVERRUN
TX Buffer is
transferred into
the shifter
Overrun occurs ½
cycle before the
last bit is received.
TX Buffer is
transferred into
the shifter.
Figure 17-18. SPI Status Timing for Modes 2 and 3
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
211
17. Digital Blocks
17.3.7
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SPIS Timing
Enable/Disable Operation. As soon as the block is configured for SPI slave, and before enabling, the MISO output is
set to idle at logic '1'. Both the enable bit must be set and the
SS_ asserted (either driven externally or forced by firmware
programming) for the block to output data. When enabled,
the primary output is the MSB or LSB of the shift register,
depending on the LSBF configuration in bit 7 of the Control
register. The auxiliary output of the SPIS is always forced
into tri-state.
Since the SPIS has no internal clock, it must be enabled
with setup time to any external master supplying the clock.
Setup time is also required for a TX Buffer register write,
before the first edge of the clock or the first falling edge of
SS_, depending on the mode. This setup time must be
assured through the protocol and an understanding of the
timing between the master and slave in a system.
At the falling edge of SS_ MISO
transitions from an IDLE (high)
to output the first bit of data.
First
input bit
latched.
First
Shift
If SS_ is forced active (low) by configuration, before the
block is enabled, no initial load from the TX Buffer register to
the shifter will occur. TX loading only occurs on the falling
edge of SS_ (modes 0 and 1 only).
When the block is disabled, the MISO output reverts to its
idle '1' state. All internal state is reset (including CR0 status)
to its configuration specific reset state, except for DR0, DR1,
and DR2, which are unaffected.
Normal Operation. Typical timing for a SPIS transfer is
shown in Figure 17-19 and Figure 17-20. If the SPIS is primarily being used as a receiver, the RX Reg Full (polling
only) or SPI Complete (polling or interrupt) status may be
used to determine when a byte has been received. In this
way, the SPIS operates identically with the SPIM. However,
there are two main areas in which the SPIS operates differently: 1) SPIS behavior related to the SS_ signal, and 2) TX
data queuing (loading the TX Buffer register).
Last bit of received data is
valid on this edge and is
latched into RX Buffer.
SCLK (internal)
TX REG EMPTY
RX REG FULL
SS_
MISO
D7
D6
D5
D2
D1
D0
D7
D7
D6
SCLK (MODE 0)
SCLK (MODE 1)
User writes first byte to the
TX Buffer register in
advance of transfer.
User writes the next byte
to the TX Buffer register.
Figure 17-19. Typical SPIS Timing in Modes 0 and 1
212
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17. Digital Blocks
Shifter is loaded w ith
first byte (by leading
edge of the SC LK).
First
input bit
latched.
First
Shift
D7
D6
Last bit of received
data is valid on this
edge and is latched
into R X Buffer.
Shifter is
loaded w ith
the next byte.
SC LK (Internal)
TX R EG EM PTY
R X R EG FU LL
M ISO
D5
D2
D1
D0
D7
SC LK (M O D E 2)
SC LK (M O D E 3)
U ser w rites the first
byte to the TX Buffer
register.
U ser w rites the next
byte to the TX Buffer
register.
Figure 17-20. Typical SPIS Timing in Modes 2 and 3
Slave Select (SS_, active low). Slave Select must be
asserted to enable the SPIS for receive and transmit. There
are two ways to do this:
1. Drive the auxiliary input from a pin (selected by the Aux
IO Select bits in the Output register). This gives the SPI
master control of the slave selection in a multi-slave
environment.
2. SS_ may be controlled in firmware with register writes to
the Output register. When Aux IO Enable = 1, Aux IO
Select bit 0 becomes the SS_ input. This allows the user
to save an input pin in single slave environments.
When SS_ is negated (whether from an external or internal
source), the SPIS state machine is reset, and the MISO output is forced to idle at logic '1'. In addition, the SPIS will
ignore any incoming MOSI/SCLK input from the master.
Status Generation and Interrupts. There are four status
bits in the SPIS Block: TX Reg Empty, RX Reg Full, SPI
Complete, and Overrun. The timing of these status bits are
identical to the SPIM, with the exception of TX Reg Empty
which is covered in the section on TX data queuing.
The only difference between the modes is that the definition
of “transfer in progress” is slightly different between modes 0
and 1 and modes 2 and 3.
Figure 17-21 illustrates TX data loading in modes 0 and 1. A
transfer in progress is defined to be from the falling edge of
SS_ to the point at which the RX Buffer register is loaded
with the received byte. This means that in order to send a
byte in the next transfer, it must be loaded into the TX Buffer
register before the falling edge of SS_. This ensures a minimum setup time for the first bit since the leading edge of the
first SCLK must latch in the received data. If SS_ is not toggled between each byte or is forced low through the configuration register, the leading edge of SCLK is used to define
the start of transfer. However, in this case, the user must
provide the required setup time (one-half clock minimum
before the leading edge), with a knowledge of system latencies and response times.
Status Clear On Read. Refer to the same subsection in
“SPIM Timing” on page 209.
TX Data Queuing. Most SPI applications call for data to be
sent back from the slave to the master. Writing firmware to
accomplish this requires an understanding of how the shift
register is loaded from the TX Buffer register.
All modes use the following mechanism: 1) If there is no
transfer in progress, 2) if the shifter is empty, and 3) if data is
available in the TX Buffer register, the byte is loaded into the
shifter.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
213
17. Digital Blocks
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SS Forced Low
Transfer in Progress
SS
SCLK (Mode 0)
SCLK (Mode 1)
SS Toggled on a Message Basis
Transfer in Progress
Transfer in Progress
SS
SCLK (Mode 0)
SCLK (Mode 1)
SS Toggled on Each Byte
Transfer in Progress
Transfer in Progress
SS
SCLK (Mode 0)
SCLK (Mode 1)
Figure 17-21. Mode 0 and 1 Transfer in Progress
Figure 17-22 illustrates TX data loading in modes 2 and 3. In
this case, a transfer in progress is defined to be from the
leading edge of the 1st SCLK, to the point at which the RX
Buffer register is loaded with the received byte. Loading the
shifter by the leading edge of the clock has the effect of providing the required one-half clock setup time, as the data is
latched into the receiver on the trailing edge of the SCLK in
these modes.
Transfer in Progress
SCLK (Mode 2)
SCLK (Mode 3)
(No Dependance on SS)
Figure 17-22. Mode 2 and 3 Transfer in Progress
214
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17.3.8
17. Digital Blocks
Transmitter Timing
Enable/Disable Operation. As soon as the block is configured for Transmitter, and before enabling, the primary output
is set to idle at logic '1' the mark state. The output will remain
'1' until the block is enabled and a transmission is initiated.
The auxiliary output will also idle to '1', which is the idle state
of the associated SPI mode 3 clock.
When the Transmitter is enabled, the internal reset is
released on the divide by 8 clock generator circuit. On the
next positive edge of the selected input clock, this 3-bit upcounter circuit, which generates the bit clock with the MSB,
starts counting up from 00h and is free-running thereafter.
User w rites
first byte to the
TX Buffer
register.
F ree Running
clock is C LK
input divided
by 8.
When the block is disabled, the clock is immediately gated
low. All internal state is reset (including CR0 status) to its
configuration specific reset state, except for DR0, DR1, and
DR2, which are unaffected.
Transmit Operation. Transmission is initiated with a write
to the TX Buffer register (DR1). The CPU write to this register is required to have one-half bit clock setup time for the
data to be recognized at the next positive internal bit clock
edge. As shown in Figure 17-23, once the setup time is
met, there is one clock of latency until the data is loaded into
the shifter and the START bit is generated to the TXD (primary) output.
U ser w rites next
byte to the TX
Buffer register.
Shifter is loaded w ith
the next byte.
Shifter is loaded
w ith the first byte.
IN T ER N AL C LO C K
TX R EG EM PTY
STAR T
T XD (F1)
D0
D4
D5
D6
D7
PAR
STO P STAR T
SC LK (F2)
TX Buffer w rite needs ½ cycle
setup tim e to the internal clock.
1 cycle of latency before
STAR T bit at the TXD output.
Figure 17-23. Typical Transmitter Timing
Figure 17-24 shows a detail of the Tx Buffer load timing. The
data bits are shifted out on each of the subsequent clocks.
Following the 8th bit, if parity is enabled, the parity bit is sent
to the output. Finally, the STOP bit is multiplexed into the
data stream. With one-half cycle setup to the next clock, if
new data is available from the TX Buffer register, the next
byte is loaded on the following clock edge and the process
is repeated. If no data is available, a mark (logic '1') is output.
INTERNAL CLOCK
IOW
TXREGEMPTY
TXD
Write is valid on
rising edge of low.
START
A Tx Buffer write valid in this range will
result in a START bit 1 cycle, after the
subsequent rising edge of the clock.
Figure 17-24. Tx Buffer Load Timing
The SCLK (auxiliary) output has an SPI mode 3 clock associated with the data bits (for the mode 3 timing see
December 22, 2003
Figure 17-14). During the mark (idle) and framing bits the
SCLK output is high.
Status Generation. There are two status bits in the Transmitter CR0 register: TX Reg Empty and TX Complete.
TX Reg Empty indicates that a new byte can be written to
the TX Buffer register. When the block is enabled, this status
bit is immediately asserted. This status bit is cleared when
the user writes a byte of data to the TX Buffer Register and
set when the data byte in the TX Buffer register is transferred into the shifter. If a transmission is not already in
progress, the assertion of this signal initiates one subject to
the timing.
The default interrupt in the Transmitter is tied to TX Reg
Empty. However, an initial interrupt is not generated when
the block is enabled. The user must write an initial byte to
the TX Buffer register. That byte must be transferred into the
shifter, before interrupts generated from the TX Reg Empty
status bit are enabled. This prevents an interrupt from occurring immediately on block enable.
TX Complete is an optional interrupt and is generated when
all bits of data and framing bits have been sent. It is cleared
on a read of the CR0 register. This signal may be used to
determine when it is safe to disable the block after data
transmission is complete. In an interrupt driven Transmitter
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
215
17. Digital Blocks
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
application, if interrupt on TX Complete is selected, the status must be cleared on every interrupt, otherwise the status
will remain high and no subsequent interrupts will be logged.
See Figure 17-25 for timing relationships.
Status Clear On Read. Refer to the SPIM subsection in
“SPIM Timing” on page 209.
CCLK
TXD (F1)
START
D0
D5
D6
D7
STOP
SCLK (F2)
TX REG EMPTY
TX COMPLETE
Full STOP bit is sent.
A write to the TX Buffer
register clears this status.
The Shifter is loaded from the TX
Buffer register on this clock edge.
Figure 17-25. Status Timing for the Transmitter
17.3.9
Receiver Timing
Enable/Disable Operation. As soon as the block is configured for Receiver, and before enabling, the primary output is
connected to the data input (RXD). This output will continue
to follow the input, regardless of enable state. The auxiliary
output will idle to '1', which is the idle state of the associated
SPI mode 3 clock.
When the Receiver is enabled, the internal clock generator
is held in reset until a START bit is detected on the input.
The block must be enabled with a setup time to the first
START bit input.
every new data byte reception. The RX Reg Full status bit,
as well as error status, is also set at the STOP sample point.
To facilitate connection to other digital blocks, the RXD input
is passed directly to the RXDOUT (primary) output. The
SCLK (auxiliary) output has an SPI mode 3 clock associated
with the data bits (for mode 3 timing see Figure 17-26). During the mark (idle) and framing bits the SCLK output is high.
When the block is disabled, the clock is immediately gated
low. All internal state is reset (including CR0 status) to its
configuration specific reset state, except for DR0, DR1, and
DR2, which are unaffected.
Receive Operation. A clock, which must be 8X the desired
baud rate, is selected as the CLK input. This clock is an
input to the RX block clock divider. When the receiver is idle,
the clock divider is held in reset. As shown in Figure 17-26,
reception is initiated when a START bit (logic '0') is detected
on the RXD input. When this occurs, the reset is negated to
the clock divider and the 3-bit counter starts an up-count.
The block clock is derived from the MSB of this counter (corresponding to a count of 4), which serves to sample each
incoming bit at the nominal center point. This clock also
sequences the state machine at the specified bit rate.
The sampled data is registered into an input flip-flop. This
flip-flop feeds the DR0 shift register. Only data bits are
shifted into the shift register.
At the STOP sample point, the block is immediately (within 1
cycle of the 24 MHz system clock) set back into an idle
state. In this way, the clock generation circuit can immediately enable the search for the next START bit, thereby resynchronizing the bit clock with the incoming bit rate on
216
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
17. Digital Blocks
At STOP edge, FSM is
reset to IDLE, to search
for next START after one
24 MHz clock (42 ns).
Input is sampled at the
center of the bit time.
CCLK
Start bit is
detected;
clock divider
is enabled.
D0
RXD
STATE
IDLE
START
D1
D6
BIT0
D7
BIT6
Clock divider is resynchronized from
IDLE on detect of
the next START bit.
PAR
BIT7
D0
PAR
IDLE
RX REG FULL
START
BIT0
STOP
RXDOUT (F1)
D0
D1
D6
D7
PAR
D0
SCLK (F2)
Serial data is
passed through to
the primary output.
RX buffer is loaded with the
received byte and status is set
on STOP bit detection edge.
Mode 3 type clock on
auxiliary output for data only
Figure 17-26. Receiver Operation
Clock Generation and Start Detection. The input clock
selection is a free running 8X over-sampling clock. This
clock is used by the clock divider circuit to generate the
block clock at the bit rate. As shown in Figure 17-27, the
clock block is derived from the MSB of a 3 bit counter, giving
a sample point as near to the center of the bit time as possible. This block clock is used to clock all internal circuits.
count at the 8X rate. If the RXD input is still logic '0' after 3
samples of the input clock, the status RXACTIVE is
asserted, which initiates a reception. If this sample of the
RXD line is a logic '1', the input '0' transition was assumed to
be spurious, and the Receiver remains in the idle state.
As shown in Figure 17-27, the internal bit clock (CCLK) is
running slower than the external TX bit clock and the STOP
bit is sampled later than the actual center point. After the
STOP bit is sampled, the 24 MHz reset pulse forces the
Receiver back to an idle state. In this state, the next START
bit search is initiated, resynchronizing the RX bit clock to the
TX bit clock.
Since the RXD bit rate is asynchronous to the block bit clock
these clocks must be continually re-aligned. This is accomplished with the START bit detection.
When in IDLE state, the clock divider is held in reset. On
START (when the input RXD transitions are detected as a
logic '0'), the reset is negated and the divider is enabled to
Actual
center of
STOP bit.
Input is sampled at the
center of the bit time.
Start detection enables
the clock divider.
Reset to IDLE
and initiate
search for a new
START bit.
STOP bit
sample
point.
CLKIN
RXD
START BIT
(ASYNCH)
RESET
STOP
BIT0
(CLK GEN)
RXACTIVE
COUNT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
7
0
1
2
3
0
1
CCLK
STATE
IDLE
START
IDLE
BIT0
START is confirmed with
another sample at the
3rd sample clock.
Width of reset is
one 24 MHz
clock pulse.
STOP
Next
START
bit
Figure 17-27. Clock Generation and Start Detection
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
217
17. Digital Blocks
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
This resynchronization process (forcing the state back to
idle) occurs regardless of the value of the STOP bit sample.
It is important to reset as soon as possible, so that maximum
performance can be achieved. Figure 17-28 shows an
example where the RX block clock bit rate is slower than the
external TX bit rate. The sample point shifts to successively
later times. In the extreme case shown, the RX samples the
STOP bit at the trailing edge. In this case, the receiver has
counted 9.5 bit times, while the transmitter has counted 10
bit times. Therefore, for a 10-bit message, the maximum
theoretical clock offset for the message to be received correctly is represented by one-half bit time, or 5%. If the RX
and TX clocks exceed this offset, a logic '0' may be sampled
for the STOP bit. In this case, the Framing Error status is
set.
RX clock is slower than TX clock.
RXD
Start
1
1
0
Sample points are
successively later
in the bit times.
1
0
0
1
0
Stop Bit is just
recognized.
Need to re-sync
as soon as
possible.
Stop
Start
1
Any delay in
re-sync will cut
into the optimal
sync of the next
byte.
Figure 17-28. Example RX Re-Synchronization
This theoretical maximum will be degraded by the resynchronization time, which is fixed at approximately 42 ns. In
a typical 115.2 Kbaud example, the bit time is 8.70 us. In this
case the new maximum offset is:
((4.35 us - 42 ns)/4.35 us) x 5% or 4.95%
At slower baud rates, this value gets closer to the theoretical
maximum of 5%.
Status Generation. There are five status bits in a Receiver
block: RX Reg Full, RX Active, Framing Error, Overrun, and
Parity Error. All status bits, except RX Active and Overrun,
are set synchronously on the STOP bit sample point.
RX Reg Full indicates a byte has been received and transferred into the RX Buffer Register. This status bit is cleared
when the user reads the RX Buffer Register (DR2). The setting of this bit is synchronized to the STOP sample point.
This is the earliest point at which the framing error status
can be set and therefore error status is defined to be valid
when RX Reg Full is set.
RX Active can be polled to determine if a reception is in
progress. This bit is set on START detection and cleared on
STOP detection. This bit is not sticky and there is no way for
the user to clear it.
Framing Error status indicates that the STOP bit associated with a given byte was not received correctly (expecting
a '1', but got a '0'). This will typically occur when the difference between the baud rates of the transmitter and receiver
is greater than the maximum allowed.
Overrun occurs when there is a received data byte in the
RX Buffer register and a new byte is loaded into the RX
Buffer register before the user has had a chance to read the
previous one. Because the RX Buffer register is actually a
latch, Overrun status is set one-half cycle before RX Reg
Full. This means that although the new data is not available,
the previous data has been overwritten because the latch
was opened.
Parity Error status indicates that resulting parity calculation
on the received byte does not match the value of the parity
bit that was transmitted. This status is set on the sample
point of the STOP signal.
Status Clear On Read. Refer to the SPIM subsection in
“SPIM Timing” on page 209.
All status except Overrun is
set synchronously with the
STOP bit sample point.
STOP
CCLK
STATE
IDLE
START BIT0
RXD
D0
BIT1
D1
BIT5
BIT6
D6
BIT7
IDLE
D7
RX_REG_FULL
OVERRUN
PARITY_ERROR, FRAMING_ERROR
RX_ACTIVE
Overrun is set ½ cycle
before RX REG Full.
Figure 17-29. Status Timing for Receiver
218
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
SECTION E
ANALOG SYSTEM
The Analog System section discusses the analog components of the PSoC device and the registers associated with those
components. This section encompasses the following chapters:
■
Analog Interface on page 223
■
Analog Reference on page 237
■
Analog Array on page 231
■
Switched Capacitor Block on page 239
■
Analog Input Configuration on page 235
■
Continuous Time Block on page 245
Top-Level Analog Architecture
The figure below displays the top-level architecture of the PSoC’s analog system. With the exception of Analog Drivers, each
component of the figure is discussed at length in this section. Analog drivers are discussed in detail in the Analog Output
Drivers chapter on page 61.
SYSTEM BUS
Analog
Drivers
Port 0
Global Analog Interconnect
ANALOG SYSTEM
Digital
Clocks
from Core
Analog PSoC
Block Array
Analog
Refs
CT
To Digital
System
SC
Analog
Input
Muxing
SC
Analog Column
PSoC Analog System Block Diagram
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
219
SECTION E ANALOG SYSTEM
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
PSoC blocks are user configurable system resources. Onchip analog PSoC blocks reduce the need for many MCU
part types and external peripheral components. Analog
PSoC blocks are configured to provide a wide variety of
peripheral functions. PSoC Designer Software Integrated
Development Environment provides automated configuration of PSoC blocks by selecting the desired functions.
PSoC Designer then generates the proper configuration
information and prints a device data sheet unique to that
configuration.
Each of the analog blocks has many potential inputs and
several outputs. The inputs to these blocks include analog
signals from external sources, intrinsic analog signals driven
from neighboring analog blocks, or various voltage reference sources.
The analog functionality provided is as follows.
■
■
■
■
■
■
There are three analog PSoC block types: Continuous Time
(CT) blocks, and Type C and Type D Switch Capacitor (SC)
blocks. CT blocks provide continuous time analog functions.
SC blocks provide switched capacitor analog functions.
Some available supported analog functions are 12-bit Incremental and 11-bit Delta-Sigma ADC, successive approximation ADCs up to 6 bits, DACs up to 8 bits, programmable
gain stages, sample and hold circuits, programmable filters,
comparators, and a temperature sensor.
The analog blocks are organized into columns. There is one
analog column in the CY8C22xxx, which contains one Continuous Time Block, one Switch Capacitor (SC) Type C, and
one Type D Switch Capacitor (SC). The blocks in a particular column all run off the same clocking source. The blocks
in a column also share some output bus resources. Refer to
the Analog Interface, on page 223 for additional information.
■
A/D and D/A converters, programmable gain blocks,
comparators, and switched capacitor filters.
Single ended configuration is cost effective for reasonable speed and accuracy, and provides a simple interface to most real-world analog inputs and outputs.
Support is provided for sensor interfaces, audio codes,
embedded modems, and general-purpose opamp circuits.
Flexible, System on-a-Chip programmability, providing
variations in functions.
For a given function, easily selected trade-offs of accuracy and resolution with speed, resources (number of
analog blocks ), and power dissipated for that application.
The analog section is an “Analog Computation Unit,”
providing programmed steering of signal flow and selecting functionality through register-based control of analog
switches. It also sets coefficients in Switched Capacitor
Filters and noise shaping (Delta-Sigma) modulators, as
well as program gains or attenuation settings in amplifier
configurations.
The architecture provides continuous time blocks and
discrete time (Switched Capacitor) blocks. The continuous time blocks allow selection of precision amplifier or
comparator circuitry, using programmable resistors as
passive configuration and parameter setting elements.
The Switched Capacitor (SC) blocks allow configuration
of DACs, Delta Sigma, Incremental or Successive
Approximation ADCs, or Switched Capacitor filters with
programmable coefficients.
There are three outputs from each analog block. (There are
an additional two discrete outputs in the Continuous Time
blocks.)
1. The analog output bus (ABUS) is an analog bus
resource that is shared by all of the analog blocks in a
column. Only one block in a column can actively drive
this bus at any one time and the user has control of this
output through register settings. This is the only analog
output that can be driven directly to a pin.
2. The comparator bus (CBUS) is a digital bus resource
that is shared by all of the analog blocks in a column.
Only one block in a column can be actively driving this
bus at any one time and the user has control of this output through register settings.
3. The local outputs (OUT, plus GOUT, and LOUT in the
Continuous Time blocks) are routed to neighbor blocks.
The various input multiplexer connections (NMux, PMux,
RBotMux, AMux, BMux, and CMux) all use the output
bus from one block as their input.
Three analog PSoC blocks are available separately or combined with the digital PSoC blocks. A precision internal voltage reference provides accurate analog comparisons. A
temperature sensor input is provided to the analog PSoC
block array, supporting applications such as battery chargers and data acquisition, without requiring external components.
220
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION E ANALOG SYSTEM
Analog Register Summary
The table below lists all the PSoC registers in the analog system.
Summary Table of the Analog Registers
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
AINT[1]
AINT[0]
RW : 00
SYNCEN
RW : 00
ANALOG INTERFACE REGISTERS
0,64h
CMP_CR0
COMP[1]
0,66h
CMP_CR1
CLDIS[1]
0,65h
ASY_CR
0,E6h
DEC_CR0
0,E7h
DEC_CR1
1,60h
CLK_CR0
1,61h
CLK_CR1
1,66h
AMD_CR1
1,67h
ALT_CR0
RW : 00
SARCNT[2:0]
SARSIGN
IGEN[3:0]
ECNT
SARCOL[1]
ICLKS0
IDEC
DCOL[1:0]
ICLKS1
DCLKS0
RW : 00
DCLKS1
RW : 00
Acolumn1[1:0]
SHDIS
ACLK1[2:0]
RW : 00
ACLK0[2:0]
RW : 00
AMOD1[2:0]
RW : 00
LUT1[3:0]
RW : 00
ANALOG INPUT CONFIGURATION REGISTERS
0,60h
AMX_IN
1,62h
ABF_CR0
0,63h
ARF_CR
ACI1[1:0]
ACol1Mux
ABUF1EN0
ACI0[1:0]
Bypass
PWR
RW : 00
RW : 00
ANALOG REFERENCE REGISTER
HBE
REF[2:0]
PWR[2:0]
RW : 00
SWITCHED CAPACITOR BLOCK REGISTERS
Switched Capacitor Block Registers, Type C
x,94h
ASC21CR0
x,95h
ASC21CR1
x,96h
ASC21CR2
x,97h
ASC21CR3
FCap
ClockPhase
ASign
ACap[4:0]
ACMux[2:0]
AnalogBus
CompBus
ARefMux[1:0]
AutoZero
FSW1
FSW0
RW : 00
BCap[4:0]
RW : 00
CCap[4:0]
RW : 00
BMuxSC[1:0]
PWR[1:0]
RW : 00
Switched Capacitor Block Registers, Type D
x,84h
ASD11CR0
x,85h
ASD11CR1
FCap
ClockPhase
ASign
AMux[2:0]
x,86h
ASD11CR2
x,87h
ASD11CR3
AnalogBus
CompBus
x,74h
ACB01CR3
x,75h
ACB01CR0
x,76h
ACB01CR1
AnalogBus
CompBus
x,77h
ACB01CR2
CPhase
CLatch
ARefMux[1:0]
AutoZero
FSW1
ACap[4:0]
RW : 00
BCap[4:0]
RW : 00
CCap[4:0]
FSW0
BSW
BMuxSD
RW : 00
PWR[1:0]
RW : 00
CONTINUOUS TIME BLOCK REGISTERS
RTapMux[3:0]
LPCMPEN
CMOUT
Gain
RTopMux
NMux[2:0]
CompCap
TMUXEN
INSAMP
EXGAIN
RBotMux[1:0]
PMux[2:0]
TestMux[1:0]
PWR[1:0]
RW : 00
RW : 00
RW : 00
RW : 00
LEGEND
x: An “x” before the comma in the address field indicates that this register can be accessed or written to no matter what bank is used.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
221
SECTION E ANALOG SYSTEM
222
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
18. Analog Interface
This chapter explains the Analog System Interface and its associated registers. The analog system interface is a collection of
system level interfaces to the analog array and analog reference block.
Table 18-1. Analog Interface Registers
Address
Name
0,64h
CMP_CR0
0,66h
CMP_CR1
0,65h
ASY_CR
0,E6h
DEC_CR0
0,E7h
DEC_CR1
1,60h
CLK_CR0
1,61h
CLK_CR1
1,66h
AMD_CR1
1,67h
ALT_CR0
18.1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 1
Bit 0
RW : 00
SARSIGN
IGEN[3:0]
ECNT
SARCOL[1]
ICLKS0
IDEC
SYNCEN
DCOL[1:0]
ICLKS1
Acolumn1[1:0]
SHDIS
Access
RW : 00
CLDIS[1]
SARCNT[2:0]
ACLK1[2:0]
Architectural Description
Analog Data Bus Interface
Analog Comparator Bus Interface
RW : 00
DCLKS0
RW : 00
DCLKS1
RW : 00
RW : 00
ACLK0[2:0]
AMOD1[2:0]
LUT1[3:0]
The Analog Bus Interface isolates the analog array and analog system interface registers from the CPU system data
bus to reduce bus loading. Transceivers are implemented
on the system data bus to isolate the analog data bus from
the system data bus. This creates a local analog data bus.
18.1.2
Bit 2
AINT[1]
Figure 18-1 displays the top-level diagram of the PSoC
device’s analog system.
18.1.1
Bit 3
COMP[1]
RW : 00
RW : 00
RW : 00
on. In the Switched Capacitor (SC) analog blocks, the output
on the comparator bus is always latched. The ClockPhase
bit in SC Block Control Register 0 determines the phase on
which this data is latched and available.
The comparator bus is latched before it is available, to either
drive the digital blocks, interrupt, decimator, or be read in the
CMP_CR0 register. The latch for each comparator bus is
transparent (the output tracks the input) during the high
period of PHI2. During the low period of PHI2, the latch
retains the value on the comparator bus during the high-tolow transition of PHI2. The CMP_CR0 register is shown in
Table 18-1. There is also an option to force the latch in each
column into a transparent mode by setting bits in the
CMP_CR1 register.
Each analog column has a dedicated comparator bus associated with it. Every analog PSoC block has a comparator
output that can drive this bus. However, only one analog
block in a column can actively drive the comparator bus for a
column at any one time. The output on the comparator bus
can drive into the digital blocks as a data input. It also
serves as an input to the decimator, as an interrupt input,
and is available as read-only data in the Analog Comparator
Control Register (CMP_CR0, Address = Bank 0,64H).
Figure 18-1 illustrates one column of the comparator bus. In
the Continuous Time (CT) analog blocks, the CPhase and
CLatch bits of CT Block Control Register 2 determine
whether the output signal on the comparator bus is latched
inside the block, and if it is, which clock phase it is latched
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
223
18. Analog Interface
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Data Output
from
DBBxx
Data Output
from
DCBxx
Incremental Gate Input
Multiplexer, One per Device
(From Digital Blocks)
One Analog Column
Analog Comparator Bus Slice
Continuous Time Block
Incremental Gate, One per Column
(From Digital Blocks)
CMP
Latch
INC SEL
From Col (i+1)
CBUS
Driver
Transparent, PHI1 or PHI2
Destinations
1) Comparator
Register
Switched Capacitor Block
LUT
Latch
CMP
Latch
2) Data Inputs
for Digital Blocks
3) Input to
Decimator
CBUS
Driver
PHI2
BYPASS
To Col (i-1)
(CLDIS, CMP_CR1[7:4])
PHI1 or PHI2
Column Interrupt
PHI2
Switched Capacitor Block
CMP
Latch
Output to SAR
Accelerator Input Mux
CBUS
Driver
PHI1 or PHI2
Figure 18-1. An Analog Comparator Bus Slice
As shown in Figure 18-1, the Comparator bus output is
gated by a signal from the digital blocks. This feature is used
to precisely control the integration period of an incremental
ADC. There are two direct connect digital block output
options per row for driving the gate signal: DBBx1 and
DCBx2. This selection may be made with the ICCKSEL bits
in registers DEC_CR0 and DEC_CR1. This function may be
enabled on a column-by-column basis by setting the IGEN
bits in the DEC_CR0 register.
The analog comparator bus output values can be modified
or combined with another analog comparator bus through
the Analog Look-Up-Table function. The LUT takes two
inputs, A and B, and provides a selection of 16 possible
logic functions of those inputs. The LUT A and B inputs for
each column comparator output is shown in the following
table.
224
Table 18-2. A and B Inputs for Each Column Comparator
Output
Comparator
Output
A
B
Column 0
ACMP0
0
Column 1
0
0
Column 2
0
0
Column 3
0
ACMP0
The LUT configuration is set in two control registers,
ALT_CR0 and ALT_CR1. Each selection for each column is
encoded in four bits. The function value corresponding to
the bit encoding is shown in the following table.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
18. Analog Interface
Table 18-3. RDIxLTx Register
LUTx[3:0]
18.1.3
18.1.3.1
0h: 0000: FALSE
1h: 0001: A .AND. B
2h: 0010: A .AND. B
3h: 0011: A
4h: 0100: A .AND. B
5h: 0101: B
6h: 0110: A .XOR. B
7h: 0111: A .OR. B
8h: 1000: A .NOR. B
9h: 1001: A .XNOR. B
Ah: 1010: B
Bh: 1011: A .OR. B
Ch: 1100: A
Dh: 1101: A .OR. B
Eh: 1110: A. NAND. B
Fh: 1111: TRUE
Analog Column Clock Generation
The analog array switched capacitor blocks require a twophase non-overlapping clock. The switched cap blocks are
arranged in four columns, two to a column (a third block in
the column is a continuous time block).
An analog column clock generator is provided for each column and this clock is shared among the blocks in that column. The input clock source for each column clock
generator is selectable according to the CLK_CR0 register.
It is important to note that regardless of the clock source
selected, the output frequency of the column clock generator is the input frequency divided by four. There are four
selections for each column, 24V1, 24V2, ACLK0, and
ACLK1. The 24V1 and 24V2 clock signals are global system
clocks. Programming options for these system clocks can
be accessed in the OSC_CR1 register. Each of the ACLK0
and ACLK1 clock selections are driven by a selection of digital block outputs. The settings for the digital block selection
are located in register CLK_CR1.
The timing for analog column clock generation is shown in
Figure 18-2. The dead band time between two phases of the
clock is designed to be a minimum of 21 ns.
Column Clock Synchronization
When analog signals are routed between blocks in adjacent
columns, it is important that the clocks in these columns are
synchronized in phase and frequency. Frequency synchronization may be achieved by selecting the same input source
to two or more columns. However, there is a special feature
of the column clock interface logic that provides a resynchronization of clock phase. This function is activated on
any IO write to either the column clock selection register
(CLK_CR0) or the reference calibration clock register
(RCL_CR). A write to either of these registers initiates a synchronous reset of the column clock generators, restarting all
clocks to a known state. This action will cause all columns
with the same selected input frequency to be in phase.
Writing these registers should be avoided during critical
analog processing, as column clocks are all reinitialized and
thus a discontinuity in PHI1/PHI2 clocking will occur.
Write new clock
selection
All clocks are
restarted in phase
CPUCLK
IOW
CLK24
COL CLK RESET
PHI1
Setup time to next
same input clock
PHI2
SOURCE CLOCK
CLOCK COLUMN
REGISTER
Figure 18-3. Column Clock Resynchronize on an IO
Write
INPUT CLK
COL CLK
PHI1
PHI2
Underlap is
21 ns to 42 ns.
COL CLK Transitions on the
Falling Edge of Each Phase.
Figure 18-2. Two Phase Non-Overlapping Clock
Generation
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
225
18. Analog Interface
18.1.4
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Decimator and Incremental ADC
Interface
The Decimator and Incremental interface provides hardware
support and signal routing for analog-to-digital conversion
functions, specifically the Delta-Signal ADC and the Incremental ADC. The control signals for this interface is split
between two registers: DEC_CR0 and DEC_CR1.
18.1.4.1
Decimator
The decimator is a hardware block that is used to perform
digital processing on the analog block outputs. The DCLKS0
and DCLKS1 bits, which are split between the DEC_CR0
and DEC_CR1 registers, are used to select a source for the
Decimator output latch enable. The Decimator is typically
run autonomously over a given period. The length of this
period is set in a Timer block that is running in conjunction
with the analog processing. At the terminal count of this
Timer, the primary output goes high for a one-half clock
cycle. For purposes of Decimator operation, this signal is
inverted and connected to the BW input. This becomes the
output latch enable signal, which transfers data from the
internal accumulators to an output buffer. The terminal count
also causes an interrupt and the CPU may read this output
buffer at any time between one latch event and the next.
18.1.4.2
18.1.6
Analog Synchronization Interface
(Stalling)
For high precision analog operation, it is necessary to precisely time when updated register values are available to the
analog PSOC blocks. The optimum time to update values in
Switch Cap registers is at the beginning of the PHI1 active
period. Depending on the relationship between the CPU
CLK and the analog column clock, the CPU IO write cycle
can occur at any 24 MHz master clock boundary in the PHI1
or PHI2 cycle. Register values may be written at arbitrary
times; however, glitches may be apparent at analog outputs.
This is because the capacitor value is changing when the
circuit is designed to be settling.
The SYNCEN bit in the Analog Synchronization Control
Register (ASY_CR) is designed to address this problem.
When the SYNCEN bit is set, an IO write instruction to any
Switch Cap registers is blocked at the interface and the CPU
will stall. On the subsequent rising edge of PHI1, the CPU
stall is released, allowing the IO write to be performed at the
destination analog register. This mode synchronizes the IO
write action to be performed at the optimum point in the analog cycle, at the expense of CPU bandwidth. Figure 18-4
shows the timing for this operation.
Stall is released here.
CPUCLK
(Generated)
Incremental ADC
The analog interface has support for the incremental ADC
operation through the ability to gate the analog comparator
outputs. This gating function is required in order to precisely
control the digital integration period that is performed in a
digital block, as part of the function. A digital block PWM is
used as a source to provide the gate signal. Only one
source for the gating signal can be selected. However, the
gating can be applied independently to any of the column
comparator outputs.
CPUCLK
(To CPU)
IOW
STALL
PHI
CLK24
AIOW
The ICLKS0 and ICLKS1 bits, which are split between the
DEC_CR0 and DEC_CR1 registers, are used to select a
source for the incremental gating signal. The four IGEN bits
are used to independently enable the gating function on a
column-by-column basis.
18.1.5
Analog Modulator Interface (Mod
Bits)
The Analog Modulator Interface provides a selection of signals that are routed to any of the four analog array modulation control signals. There is one modulation control signal
for each Type C Analog Switched Capacitor block in every
analog column. There are eight selections, which include
the analog comparator bus outputs, two global outputs, and
a digital block broadcast bus. The selections for all columns
are identical and are contained in the AMD_CR0 and
AMD_CR1 registers. The Mod bit is XOR’ed with the
Switched Capacitor block Sign bit (ASign in ASCxxCR0) to
provide dynamic control of that bit.
226
AIOW
completes here.
Figure 18-4. Synchronized Write to a DAC Register
As an alternative to stalling, the source for the analog column interrupts is set as the falling edge of the PHI2 clock.
This configuration synchronizes the CPU to perform the IO
write after the PHI2 phase is completed, which is equivalent
to the start of PHI1.
18.1.7
SAR Hardware Acceleration
The SAR algorithm is a binary search on the DAC code that
best matches the input voltage that is being measured. The
first step is to take an initial guess at mid-scale, which effectively splits the range by half. The DAC output value is then
compared to the input voltage. If the guess is too low, a
result bit is set for that binary position and the next guess is
set at mid-scale of the remaining upper range. If the guess
is too high, a result bit is cleared and the next guess is set at
mid-scale of the remaining lower range. This process is
repeated until all bits are tested. The resulting DAC code is
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
18. Analog Interface
the value that produces an output voltage closest to the
input voltage. This code should be within 1 lsb of the input
voltage.
The successive approximation A/D algorithm requires the
following building blocks: A DAC, a comparator, and a
18.1.7.1
method or apparatus to sequence successive writes to the
DAC based on the comparator output. The SAR hardware
accelerator represents a trade off between a fully automatic
hardware sequencing approach and a pure firmware
approach.
Architectural Description
System
Data Bus
Analog Data Bus
DB
Read
M8C
Micro
Switched Capacitor Block
SAR Accelerator
Input Mux
DAC Register
DAC
Analog
Input
CMP
SAR
Accelerator
Latch
CBUS
Driver
PHI1 or PHI2
Comparator
Bus Outputs
from Other
Columns
Figure 18-5. SAR Hardware Accelerator
As shown in Figure 18-5, the SAR accelerator hardware is
interfaced to the analog array through the comparator output
and the analog array data bus. To create DAC output, values are written directly to the ACAP field in the DAC register. To facilitate the sequencing of the DAC writes in the SAR
algorithm, the M8C is programmed to do a sequence of
READ, MODIFY, and WRITE instructions. This is an atomic
operation that consists of an IO read (IOR) followed closely
by an IO write (IOW). One example of an assembly level
instruction is as follows.
OR reg[DAC_REG],0
The effect of this instruction is to read the DAC register, and
follow it closely in time by a write back. The OR instruction
does not modify the read data (it is OR’ed with ‘0’). The CPU
does not need to do any additional computation in conjunction with this procedure. The SAR hardware transparently
does the data modification during the read portion of the
cycle. The only purpose for executing this instruction is to
initiate a read that is modified by the SAR hardware, then to
follow up with a write that transfers the data back to the DAC
register.
During each IO read operation, the SAR hardware overrides
two bits of the data:
■
■
To correct the previous bit guess based on the current
comparator value.
To set the next guess (next least significant bit).
The CPU latches this SAR modified data, OR’s it with 0 (no
CPU modification), and writes it back to the DAC register. A
counter in the SAR hardware is used to decode which bits
are being operated on in each cycle. In this way, the capability of the CPU and the IOR/IOW control lines are used to
December 22, 2003
implement the read and write. However, use the SAR accelerator hardware to make the decisions and to control the
values written, achieving the optimal level of performance
for the current system.
The SAR hardware is designed to process 6 bits of a result
in a given sequence. A higher resolution SAR is implemented with multiple passes.
18.1.7.2
SAR Timing
Another important function of the SAR hardware is to synchronize the IO Read (the point at which the comparator
value is used to make the SAR decision) to when the analog
comparator bus is valid. Under normal conditions, this point
is at the rising edge of PHI1 for the previous compute cycle.
When the OR instruction is executed in the CPU, a few CPU
clock cycles into the instruction, an IOR signal is asserted to
initiate a read of the DAC register. The SAR hardware then
stalls the CPU clock, for one 24 MHz clock cycle after the
rising edge of PHI1. When the stall is released, the IO Read
completes and is immediately followed by an IO Write. In
this sequence of events, the DAC register is written with the
new value within a few CPU clocks after PHI1.
The rising edge of PHI1 is also the optimal time to write the
DAC register for maximum settling time. The timing from the
positive edge of PHI1 to the start of the IO Write is 4.5
clocks, which at 24 MHz, is 189 ns. If the analog clock is
running at one MHz, this allows over 300 ns for the DAC
output and comparator to settle.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
227
18. Analog Interface
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Comparator is valid on PHI1
rising. SAR computation is
done and IOR finishes.
DAC output is valid
at end of PHI2.
Comparator is now
valid for previous IOW,
repeat process.
PHI1
PHI2
ACMP
IOR
IOW
STALL
IOR causes STALL
to assert, to wait for
PHI1 rising.
New value is written
to DAC register.
Figure 18-6. General SAR Timing
18.2
18.2.1
Register Definitions
CMP_CR0 Register
18.2.3
This register contains one field. Bit 5, COMP[1], is the readonly bit corresponding to the comparator bit in the analog
column. This bit is synchronized to the column clock, and
thus may be reliably polled by the CPU. Bit 1, AINT[1],
selects the interrupt source for the column as the input to the
interrupt controller:
By default, the interrupt is the comparator bit. However, if a
bit in this field is set, the interrupt for that column will be
derived from the falling edge of PHI2 clock for that column.
Firmware can use this capability to synchronize to the current column clock.
For additional information, reference the CMP_CR0 register
on page 103.
18.2.2
CMP_CR1 Register
The CLDIS bits in this register are used to override the analog column comparator synchronization. When these bits
are set, the given column is not synchronized to PHI2 in the
analog interface. This capability is typically used to allow a
continuous time comparator result to propagate directly to
the interrupt controller during Sleep. Since the master clocks
(except the 32K clock) are turned off during Sleep, the synchronizer must be bypassed.
For additional information, reference the CMP_CR1 register
on page 105.
228
ASY_CR Register
The SAR hardware control bits are located in the ASY_CR
register. All bits are relevant to SAR operation except for bit
0, SYNCEN. SYNCEN is associated with analog register
write stalling and is described in the Analog Interface Synchronization section.
The SAR hardware accelerator is a block of specialized
hardware designed to sequence the SAR algorithm for efficient A/D conversion. A SAR ADC is implemented conceptually with a DAC of the desired precision and a comparator.
This functionality is configured from one or more PSoC
blocks. For each conversion, the firmware should initialize
the ASY_CR register and set the sign bit of the DAC as the
first guess in the algorithm. A sequence of OR instructions
(Read, Modify, Write) to the DAC (CR0) register is then executed. Each of these OR instructions causes the SAR hardware to read the current state of the comparator, checking
the validity of the previous guess. It either clears it or leaves
it set, accordingly. The next LSB in the DAC register is also
set as the next guess. Six OR instructions will complete the
conversion of a 6-bit DAC. The resulting DAC code, which
matches the input voltage to within 1 LSB, is then read back
from the DAC CR0 register.
Bits 7 and 1: Reserved.
Bits 6, 5, and 4: SARCNT[2:0]. SAR count value. These
three bits are used to initialize a 3-bit counter to sequence
the 6 bits of the SAR algorithm. Typically, the user would initialize this register to ‘6’. When these bits are any value
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
18. Analog Interface
other than ‘0’, an IOR command to an SC block is assumed
to be part of a SAR sequence.
Assuming the comparator bus output is programmed for column 0, a typical firmware sequence would be as follows.
mov reg[ASY_CR],
Sign=0, Col=0
or reg[ASC10CR0],
or reg[ASC10CR0],
or reg[ASC10CR0],
or reg[ASC10CR0],
or reg[ASC10CR0],
or reg[ASC10CR0],
60h
0
0
0
0
0
0
// SAR count value=6,
//
//
//
//
//
//
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
sign, set bit 4
bit 4, set bit 3
bit 3, set bit 2
bit 2, set bit 1
bit 1, set bit 0
bit 0
Bit 3: SARSIGN. SAR sign selection. This bit optionally
inverts the comparator input to the SAR accelerator and
must be set based on the type of PSOC block configuration
selected. Table 18-4 lists some typical examples.
Table 18-4. Typical PSOC Block Configurations
Configuration
Description
Sign
SAR6 – 2 blocks
1 DAC6, 1 COMP (could be
CT)
0
SAR6 – 1 block
1 for both DAC6 and COMP
1
MS SAR10 –3 blocks
1 DAC10, 1 COMP (could be
CT)
0
(When processing MS DAC
block)
Bits 2 and 1: SARCOL[1:0]. Column select for the SAR
comparator input. The DAC portion of the SAR can reside in
any of the appropriate positions in the Analog PSOC block
array. However, once the COMPARATOR block is positioned (and it is possible to have the DAC and COMPARATOR in the same block), this position should be the column
selected.
Bit 0: SYNCEN. The purpose of this bit is to synchronize
CPU data writes to Switched Capacitor (SC) block operation
in the analog array. The SC block clock is selected in the
CLK_CR0 register. The selected clock source is divided by
four and the output is a pair of two-phase, non-overlapping
clocks: PHI1 and PHI2. There is an optimal time, with
respect to the PHI1 and PHI2 clocks, to change the capacitor configuration in the SC block which is typically the rising
edge of PHI1. This is normally the time when the input
branch capacitor is charging.
When this bit is set, any write to an SC block register is
stalled until the rising edge of the next PHI1 clock phase, for
the column associated with the SC block address. The stalling operation is implemented by suspending the CPU clock.
No CPU activity will occur during the stall, including interrupt
processing. Therefore, the effect of stalling on CPU throughput must be considered.
18.2.4
DEC_CR0 Register
This register contains control bits to access hardware support for both the Incremental ADC and the DELISG ADC.
For Incremental support, the upper four bits, IGEN[3:0],
select which column comparator bit will be gated by the output of a digital block. The output of that digital block is typically a PWM signal; the high time of which corresponds to
the ADC conversion period. This ensures that the comparator output is only processed for the precise conversion time.
The digital block selected for the gating function is controlled
by ICLKS0 in this register, and ICLKS2 and ICLKS1 bits in
DEC_CR1. Up to one of eight digital blocks may be
selected, depending on the chip resources.
The DELSIG ADC uses the hardware decimator to do a portion of the post processing computation on the comparator
signal. DCOL[1:0] selects the column source for the decimator data (comparator bit) and clock input (PHI clocks).
In addition, the decimator requires a timer signal to sample
the current decimator value to an output register that may
subsequently be read by the CPU. This timer period is set to
be a function of the DELSIG conversion time and may be
selected from up to one of eight digital blocks (depending on
the chip resources) with bit DCLKS0 and DCLKS2, DCLKS1
in DEC_CR1.
For additional information, reference the DEC_CR0 register
on page 140.
18.2.5
DEC_CR1 Register
Bit 7: ECNT. The ECNT bit is a mode bit that controls the
operation of the decimator hardware block. By default, the
decimator is set to a double integrate function, for use in
hardware DELSIG processing. When the ECNT bit is set,
the decimator block converts to a single integrate function.
This gives the equivalent of a 16-bit counter suitable for use
in hardware support for an Incremental ADC function.
Bit 6: IDEC. Any function using the decimator requires a
digital block timer to sample the current decimator value.
Normally, the positive edge of this signal will cause the decimator output to be sampled. However, when the IDEC bit is
set, the negative edge of the selected digital block input will
cause the decimator value to be sampled.
Bits 5 to 0: ICLKSx and DCLKSx. The
ICLKS1
and
DCLKS1 bits in this register select the digital block sources
for Incremental and DELSIGN ADC hardware support (see
the DEC_CR0 register).
For additional information, reference the DEC_CR1 register
on page 141.
For additional information, reference the ASY_CR register
on page 104.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
229
18. Analog Interface
18.2.6
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
CLK_CR0 Register
18.2.9
An analog column clock generator is provided for each column. The bits in this register select the source for each column clock generator. Regardless of the source selected, the
input clock is divided by four to generate the PHI1/PHI2 nonoverlapping clocks for the column. There are four selections
for each clock: VC1, VC2, ACLK0, and ACLK1. VC1 and
VC2 are the programmable global system clocks. ACLK0
and ACLK1 sources are each selected from up to one of
four digital block outputs (functioning as clock generators)
as selected by CLK_CR1.
For additional information, reference the CLK_CR0 register
on page 154.
18.2.7
ALT_CR0 Register
This register controls the selection of logic functions that
may be selected for the analog comparator bits in column 1.
A one of 16 look-up table (LUT) is applied to the outputs of
each column comparator bit and optionally a neighbor bit to
implement two input logic functions. Table 18-2 shows the
available functions, where the A input applies to the
selected column, and the B input applies to the next most
significant neighbor column. For CY8C22xxx parts, there is
only one column and B=0.
For additional information, reference the ALT_CR0 register
on page 158.
CLK_CR1 Register
Bit 7: Reserved.
Bit 6: SHDIS. The SHDIS bit in the CLK_CR1 register is
described as follows.
During normal operation of an SC block for the amplifier of a
column enabled to drive the output bus, the connection is
only made for the last half of PHI2 (during PHI1 and for the
first half of PHI2, the output bus floats at the last voltage to
which it was driven). This forms a sample and hold operation using the output bus and its associated capacitance.
This design prevents the output bus from being perturbed by
the intermediate states of the SC operation (often a reset
state for PHI1 and settling to the valid state during PHI2).
Following are the exceptions: 1) If the ClockPhase bit in
CR0 (for the SC block in question) is set to 1, then the output is enabled for the whole of PHI2. 2) If the SHDIS signal
is set in bit 6 of the Analog Clock Source Control Register,
then sample and hold operation is disabled for all columns
and all enabled outputs of SC blocks are connected to their
respective output busses for the entire period of their
respective PHI2s.
Bits 5 to 0: ACLKx. There are two 3-bit fields in this register that can select up to one of eight digital blocks (depending on chip resources), to function as the clock source for
ACLK0 and ACLK1. ACLK0 and ACLK1 are alternative
clock inputs to the analog column clock generators (see the
CLK_CR0 register).
For additional information, reference the CLK_CR1 register
on page 155.
18.2.8
AMD_CR1 Register
This register controls the selection of the MODBIT for analog column 1. See the AMD_CR0 register. For additional
information, reference the AMD_CR1 register on page 157.
230
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
19. Analog Array
This chapter presents the Analog Array. It has no registers associated with it. The analog blocks can be used to implement a
wide range of functions, limited only by the designer’s imagination.
The following functions operate within the capability of the
analog PSoC blocks using one analog PSoC block, multiple
analog blocks, a combination of more than one type of analog block, or a combination of analog and digital PSoC
blocks. Most of these functions are currently available as
User Modules in PSoC Designer. Others will be added in the
future. Reference the PSoC Designer User Modules Data
Book for additional information.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Delta-Sigma A/D Converters
Successive Approximation A/D Converters
Incremental A/D Converters
Programmable Gain/Loss Stage
Analog Comparators
Zero-Crossing Detectors
Low-Pass Filter
Band-Pass Filter
Notch Filter
Amplitude Modulators
Amplitude Demodulators
Sine-Wave Generators
Sine-Wave Detectors
Sideband Detection
Sideband Stripping
Audio Output Drive
DTMF Generator
FSK Modulator
Architectural Description
The analog array is designed to allow moving between families without modifying projects, except for resource limitations.
The PSoC device has only one column (Column 1). Generally, nets that were inputs to the missing columns are left
floating. The nets that were outputs from the missing columns are connected to Vss. See the following figures for
specific details.
Analog
Column 1
ACB01
ASD11
ASC21
By modifying registers, as described in this data sheet,
users can configure PSoC blocks to perform these functions
and more.
December 22, 2003
19.1
Figure 19-1. Array of Analog PSoC Blocks
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
231
19. Analog Array
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
The figures that follow illustrate the analog mux connections
for the PSoC device.
VSS
NC
NC
Port Inputs
AVDD
(Vdd)
(0)
NC
(4)
(3)
(3) (7)
(2)
REFLO
(Vss)
(5)
ACB
01
AGND
ACB
01
(6)
INSAMP (RB=2)
INSAMP (RB=3)
INSAMP (RB=1)
(1)
NC
ASD
11
AGND
ASD
11
ASC
21
ASC
21
Figure 19-4. RBotMux Connections
Figure 19-2. NMux Connections
Port
Inputs
The ACMux, as shown in the Analog Switch Cap Type C
Block xx Control 1 register, controls the input muxing for
both the A and C capacitor branches. The high order bit,
ACMux[2], selects one of two inputs for the C branch. See
the individual AMux and CMux diagrams.
ABUS 1
(1)
ACB
01
(6)
(0)
(5)
NC
(0)
(3)
(4)
AGND
NC
(2)
NC (5)
(1) REFHI (Vcc)
NC
(2
)
)
(4
NC
NC
)
(4
ASD
11
(1)
ASD
11
(3)
(7)
(3)
ACB
01
(0)
(2)
NC
NC
(5)
(7)
ASC
21
NC
ASC
21
(6)
Figure 19-3. PMux Connections
ABUS(1)
(3)
VTemp
Figure 19-5. AMux Connections
232
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
19. Analog Array
In the Continuous Time (CT) analog blocks, the CPhase and
CLatch bits inside the Analog Continuous Time Type B
Block xx Control Register 2 determine whether the output
signal on the comparator bus is latched inside the block, and
if it is, which clock phase it is latched on.
ACB
01
In the SC analog blocks, the output on the comparator bus is
always latched. The ClockPhase bit in the Analog SwitchCap Type B Block xx Control Register 0 or the Analog
SwitchCap Type B Block xx Control Register 0 determines
the phase on which this data is latched and available.
(0-7)
ASD
011
19.2
ASC
21
Temperature Sensing
Capability
Figure 19-6. CMux Connections
A temperature-sensitive voltage, derived from the bandgap
sensing on the die, is buffered and available as an analog
input into the Analog Switch Cap Type C Block ASC21.
Temperature sensing allows protection of device operating
ranges for fail-safe applications. Temperature sensing, combined with a long sleep timer interval (to allow the die to
approximate ambient temperature), can give an approximate ambient temperature for data acquisition and battery
charging applications. The user may also calibrate the internal temperature rise based on a known current consumption.
(1)
ACB
01
(0)
ASD
11
The temperature sensor input to the ASC21 block is labeled
VTemp and its associated ground reference is labeled TRefGND.
(0)
NC
( )
1
ASC
21
(2)
NC
(3)
NC
TRefGND
Figure 19-7. BMuxSC/SD Connections
19.1.1
Analog Comparator Bus
Each analog column has a dedicated comparator bus associated with it. Every analog PSoC block has a comparator
output that can drive out on this bus. However, the comparator output from only one analog block in a column can be
actively driving the comparator bus for that column at any
one time. The output on the comparator bus can drive into
the digital blocks and is also available to be read in the
CMP_CR register.
The comparator bus is latched before it is available to either
drive the digital blocks or be read in the Analog Comparator
Control Register. The latch for each comparator bus is transparent (the output tracks the input), during the high period of
PHI2. During the low period of PHI2, the latch retains the
value on the comparator bus during the high to low transition
of PHI2.
The output from the analog block that is actively driving the
bus may also be latched internally to the analog block itself.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
233
19. Analog Array
234
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
20. Analog Input Configuration
This chapter briefly discusses the Analog Input Configuration and its associated registers.
Table 20-1. Analog Input Configuration Registers
Address
Name
0,60h
AMX_IN
1,62h
ABF_CR0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 3
Bit 2
ACI1[1:0]
ACol1Mux
ABUF1EN0
The input multiplexor maps device inputs to analog array
columns, based on bit values in the AMX_IN and ABF_CR0
registers. Edge columns are fed by one 4:1 mux; inner columns are fed by 1 of 2 4:1 muxes. The muxes are CMOS
switches with typical resistances in the range of 2K ohms.
Reference the analog block diagrams, on the following
pages, to view the various analog input configurations.
The CY8C22xxx device uses only one “internal” column
(column 1) and has unique analog mux connectivity from
Port 0 (8:1 into CT block). This device contains a more limited reference block than larger family members.
20.1
Bit 4
Bit 1
Bit 0
ACI0[1:0]
Bypass
20.1.2
PWR
Access
RW : 00
RW : 00
ABF_CR0 Register
This register controls analog input muxes from Port 0, and
the output buffer amplifiers that drive column outputs to
device pins.
Bit 7: ACol1MUX. A mux selects the output of column 0
input mux or column 1 input mux. When set, this bit sets the
column 1 input to column 0 input mux output.
Bit 6: Reserved.
Bit 5: ABUF1EN0. This bit enables or disables the column
output amplifiers.
Register Definitions
Bits 4, 3, and 2: Reserved.
20.1.1
AMX_IN Register
Bit 1: Bypass. Bypass mode connects the amplifier input
directly to the output. When this bit is set, all amplifiers controlled by the register will be in bypass mode.
Bits 7 to 4: Reserved.
Bits 3 to 0: ACI1[1:0] and ACI0[1:0]. These bits control
the analog muxes that feed signals in from port pins into the
Analog Column. The analog column can have up to eight
port bits connected to its muxed input. ACI1 and ACI0 are
used to select among even and odd pins. The AC1Mux bit
field controls the bits for those muxes and is located in the
Analog Output Buffer Control Register (ABF_CR).
Bit 0: PWR. This bit is used to set the power level of the
amplifiers. When this bit is set, all amplifiers controlled by
the register will be in a high power state.
For additional information, reference the ABF_CR0 register
on page 156.
For additional information, reference the AMX_IN register
on page 101.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
235
20. Analog Input Configuration
20.2
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Architectural Description
P0[7]
P0[6]
8 Pin Part
P0[5]
P0[4]
P0[3]
P0[2]
P0[1]
P0[0]
20 or 32 Pin Part
Array Input Configuration
ACI0[1:0]
ACI1[1:0]
ACOL1MUX
Array
ACB01
ASD11
ASC21
Interface to Digital
System
RefHi
RefLo
AGND
Reference Generators
Microcontroller Interface (Address Bus, Data Bus, Etc.)
Figure 20-1. Analog Pin Block Diagram
236
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
21. Analog Reference
This chapter discusses the Analog Reference generator and its associated register. This device uses a fixed analog ground of
Vdd/2.
Table 21-1. Analog Reference Register
Address
0,63h
21.1
Name
Bit 7
ARF_CR
Bit 6
Bit 5
HBE
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
REF[2:0]
Architectural Description
Bit 1
PWR[2:0]
Bit 0
Access
RW : 00
Vdd
The PSoC device is a single supply part, with no negative
voltage available or applicable. Analog ground (AGND) is
constructed near mid-supply. This ground is routed to all
analog blocks and separately buffered within each block.
Note that there may be a small offset voltage between buffered analog grounds. RefHi and RefLo signals are generated, buffered, and routed to the analog blocks. RefHi and
RefLo are used to set the conversion range (i.e., span) of
analog to digital (ADC) and digital to analog (DAC) converters.
The reference array supplies voltage to all blocks and current to the Switched Capacitor blocks. At higher block clock
rates, there is increased reference current demand; the reference power should be set equal to the highest power level
of the analog blocks used.
RefHi
RefHi to Analog Blocks
x1
AGND
(Vdd/2)
RefLo to Analog Blocks
Vss
Figure 21-2. Analog Reference Control Schematic
V refhi
AGND
VAGND
V reflow
RefLo
Vss
Figure 21-1. Reference Structure
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
237
21. Analog Reference
21.2
21.2.1
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Register Definitions
ARF_CR Register
Bit 7: Reserved.
Bit 6: HBE. Bias level (HBE) controls the bias level for all
analog functions. It operates with the power setting in each
block, to set the parameters of that block. Most applications
will benefit most from the low bias level. At high bias, the
analog block opamps have faster slew rate but slightly less
voltage swing and higher power. Bits 5 to 3: REF[2:0].
Only the 010b setting is valid in the CY8C22xxx device. This
sets AGND to Vdd/2, RefHi=Vdd, and RefLo=Vss.
Bits 2, 1, and 0: PWR[2:0]. PWR controls the bias current
and bandwidth for all of the opamps in the analog reference
block. PWR also provides on/off control in various rows of
the analog array. See Table 21-2.
Table 21-2: Analog Array Power Control Bits
PWR[2:0]
000b
CT Row
Off
Both SC Rows
Off
REF Bias
Off
001b
On
Off
Low Bias
010b
On
Off
Medium Bias
011b
On
Off
High Bias
100b
Off
Off
Off
101b
On
On
Low Bias
110b
On
On
Medium Bias
111b
On
On
High Bias
For additional information, reference the ARF_CR register
on page 102.
238
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
22. Switched Capacitor Block
This chapter presents the Analog Switched Capacitor Block and its associated registers. The analog Switched Capacitor (SC)
blocks are built around a low offset, low noise operational amplifier.
Table 22-1. Analog Switched Capacitor Block Registers
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
Analog Switch Cap Type C PSoC Block Control Registers
x,xxh
ASCxxCR0
x,xxh
ASCxxCR1
x,xxh
ASCxxCR2
x,xxh
ASCxxCR3
FCap
ClockPhase
ASign
ACap[4:0]
ACMux[2:0]
AnalogBus
CompBus
ARefMux[1:0]
AutoZero
FSW1
FSW0
RW : 00
BCap[4:0]
RW : 00
CCap[4:0]
RW : 00
BMuxSC[1:0]
PWR[1:0]
RW : 00
Analog Switch Cap Type D PSoC Block Control Registers
x,xxh
ASDxxCR0
x,xxh
ASDxxCR1
x,xxh
ASDxxCR2
x,xxh
ASDxxCR3
FCap
ClockPhase
ASign
AMux[2:0]
AnalogBus
CompBus
ARefMux[1:0]
AutoZero
FSW1
ACap[4:0]
RW : 00
BCap[4:0]
RW : 00
CCap[4:0]
FSW0
BSW
BMuxSD
RW : 00
PWR[1:0]
RW : 00
LEGEND
x: An “x” before the comma in the address field indicates that the register exists in both register banks.
xx: An “x” after the comma in the address field indicates that there are multiple instances of the register. For an expanded address listing of these registers,
refer to the “Analog Register Summary” on page 221.
The Analog Switched Capacitor blocks are built around a
rail-to-rail, input and output, low offset and low noise opamp.
There are several analog muxes controlled by register-bit
settings in the control registers that determine the signal
topology inside the block. There are four user selectable
capacitor arrays inside this block connected to the opamp.
The block also contains a low power comparator, connected
to the same inputs and outputs as the main amplifier. This
comparator is useful for providing a digital compare output in
low power sleep modes, when the main amplifier is powered
off.
The four arrays are labeled A Cap Array, B Cap Array, C
Cap Array, and F Cap Array, and have user selectable unit
values: one array is in the feedback path of the opamp and
three arrays are in the input path of the opamp. Analog
muxes, controlled by bit settings in control registers, set the
capacitor topology inside the block. A group of muxes are
used for the signal processing switch synchronously to
clocks PHI1 and PHI2, with behavior that is modified by control register settings. There is also an analog comparator
that converts the opamp output (relative the local analog
ground) into a digital signal.
December 22, 2003
There are two types of Analog Switched Capacitor blocks
called Type C and Type D. Their primary differences relate
to connections of the C Cap Array and the block’s position in
a two pole filter section. The Type D block also has greater
flexibility in switching the B Cap Array.
There are three discrete outputs from this block. These outputs connect to the following buses:
1. The analog output bus (ABUS), which is an analog bus
resource shared by all of the analog blocks in the column. This signal may also be routed externally through
the output buffer.
2. The comparator bus (CBUS), which is a digital bus
resource shared by all of the analog blocks in the column.
3. The local output bus (OUT), which is an analog node
which is routed to neighboring block inputs.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
239
22. Switched Capacitor Block
22.1
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Architectural Description
φ1*AutoZero
BQTAP
FCap
16,32 C
CCap
0,1,…,30,31 C
(φ2+!AutoZero)
* FSW1
C Inputs
φ1* FSW0
ACMux
φ1
A Inputs
RefHi
RefLo
AGND
ARefMux
ACap
0,1,…,30,31 C
φ2+AutoZero
φ1 *
!AutoZero
φ2
OUT
AnalogBus*φ2B
ASign
Modulation
Inputs
Mod Bit Control
ABUS
Power
BCap
0,1,…,30,31 C
B Inputs
(Comparator)
CBUS
φ2
φ2
φ1
CBUS
Driver
φ1
BMuxSC
Figure 22-1. Analog Switch Cap Type C PSoC Blocks
240
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
22. Switched Capacitor Block
φ1*AutoZero
FCap
16,32 C
CCap
0,1,…,30,31 C
(φ 2+!AutoZero)
* FSW1
BQTAP
φ1* FSW0
A Mux
A Inputs
RefHi
RefLo
AGND
ARefMux
ASign
φ1
ACap
0,1,…,30,31 C
φ2+AutoZero
φ1 *
!AutoZero
φ2
OUT
AnalogBus*φ 2B
BCap
0,1,…,30,31 C
φ2 +!BSW
B Inputs
ABUS
φ 2 +!BSW+AutoZero
Power
(Comparator)
CBUS
BMuxSCD
φ1 *BSW*!AutoZero
φ1*BSW
φ2
φ1
CBUS
Driver
Figure 22-2. Analog Switch Cap Type D PSoC Blocks
22.2
Application Description
The Analog Switched Capacitor blocks support DeltaSigma, Successive Approximation, and Incremental A/D
Conversion, Capacitor DACs, and SC filters. They have
three input arrays of binary-weighted switched capacitors,
allowing user programmability of the capacitor weights. This
provides summing capability of two (CDAC) scaled inputs
and a non-switched capacitor input.
22.3
Register Definitions
The XCap field is used to store the binary encoded value for
capacitor X, where X can be A (ACap), B (BCap), or C
(CCap), in both the ASCxxCRx and ASDxxCRx registers.
Figure 22-3 illustrates the switch settings for the example
ACap[4:0]=14h=10100b=20d.
1
BOTTOM
16C
AGND
The non-switched capacitor node is labeled “BQTAP” in the
figure above. The local connection of BQTAP is vertical
between the SC blocks for the CY8C22xxx. Since the input
of SC Block C has this additional switched capacitor, it is
configured for the input stage of such a switched capacitor
biquad filter. When followed by an SC Block D Integrator,
this combination of blocks can be used to provide a full
Switched Capacitor biquad.
8C
AGND
0
1
TOP
4C
AGND
2C
AGND
0
1C
AGND
0
Figure 22-3. Example Switch Capacitor Settings
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
241
22. Switched Capacitor Block
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Analog Switch Cap Type C PSoC Block
Control Registers
22.3.1
ASCxxCR0 Register
Bit 7: FCap. This bit controls the size of the switched feedback capacitor in the integrator.
Bit 6: ClockPhase. This bit controls the internal clock
phasing relative to the input clock phasing. ClockPhase
affects the output of the analog column bus, which is controlled by the AnalogBus bit in Control 2 Register
(ASC21CR2).
Bit[6] is the ClockPhase select that inverts the clock internal
to the blocks. During normal operation of an SC block for the
amplifier of a column enabled to drive the output bus, the
connection is only made for the last half of PHI2 (during
PHI1 and for the first half of PHI2, the output bus floats at
the last voltage to which it was driven). This forms a sample
and hold operation using the output bus and its associated
capacitance. This design prevents the output bus from being
perturbed by the intermediate states of the SC operation
(often a reset state for PHI1 and settling to the valid state
during PHI2).
Following are the exceptions: 1) If the ClockPhase bit in
CR0 (for the SC block in question) is set to 1, then the output is enabled for the whole of PHI2. 2) If the SHDIS signal
is set in bit 6 of the Analog Clock Source Control Register,
then sample and hold operation is disabled for all columns
and all enabled outputs of SC blocks are connected to their
respective output busses for the entire period of their
respective PHI2s.
This bit also affects the latching of the comparator output
(CBUS). Both clock phases, PHI1 and PHI2, are involved in
the output latching mechanism. The capture of the next
value to be output from the latch (capture point event) happens during the falling edge of one clock phase, and the rising edge of the other clock phase will cause the value to
come out (output point event). This bit determines which
clock phase triggers the capture point event, and the other
clock will trigger the output point event. The value output to
the comparator bus will remain stable between output point
events.
Bit 5: ASign. This bit controls the switch phasing of the
switches on the bottom plate of the ACap capacitor. The bottom plate samples the input or the reference.
22.3.2
ASCxxCR1 Register
Bits 7, 6, and 5: ACMUX[2:0]. ACMux controls the input
muxing for both the A and C capacitor branches. The high
order bit, ACMux[2], selects one of two inputs for the C
branch.
Bits 4 to 0: BCap[4:0]. The BCap bits set the value of the
capacitor in the B path.
For additional information, reference the ASCxxCR1 register
on page 111.
22.3.3
ASCxxCR2 Register
Bit 7: AnalogBus. This bit gates the output to the analog
column bus. The output on the analog column bus is
affected by the state of the ClockPhase bit in Control 0 Register ( ASC21CR0). If AnalogBus is set to 0, the output to the
analog column bus is tri-stated. If AnalogBus is set to 1, the
signal that is output to the analog column bus is selected by
the ClockPhase bit. If the ClockPhase bit is 0, the block output is gated by sampling clock on last part of PHI2. If the
ClockPhase bit is 1, the block output continuously drives the
analog column bus (ABUS).
Bit 6: CompBus. This bit controls the output to the column
comparator bus (CBUS). Note that if the comparator bus is
not driven by anything in the column, it is pulled low. The
comparator output is evaluated on the rising edge of internal
PHI1 and is latched so it is available during internal PHI2.
Bit 5: AutoZero. This bit controls the shorting of the output
to the inverting input of the opamp. When shorted, the
opamp is basically a follower. The output is the opamp offset. By using the feedback capacitor of the integrator, the
block can memorize the offset and create an offset cancellation scheme. AutoZero also controls a pair of switches
between the A and B branches and the summing node of
the opamp. If AutoZero is enabled, then the pair of switches
is active. AutoZero also affects the function of the FSW1 bit
in Control 3 Register.
Bits 4 to 0: CCap[4:0]. The CCap bits set the value of the
capacitor in the C path.
For additional information, reference the ASCxxCR2 register
on page 112.
Bits 4 to 0: ACap[4:0]. The ACap bits set the value of the
capacitor in the A path.
For additional information, reference the ASCxxCR0 register
on page 110.
242
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
22.3.4
22. Switched Capacitor Block
ASCxxCR3 Register
Bits 7 and 6: ARefMux[1:0]. These bits select the reference input of the A capacitor branch.
enabled outputs of SC blocks are connected to their respective output busses for the entire period of their respective
PHI2s.
Bit 5: FSW1. This bit is used to control a switch in the integrator capacitor path. It connects the output of the opamp to
the integrating cap. The state of the feedback switch is
affected by the state of the AutoZero bit in Control 2 Register (ASC21CR2). If the FSW1 bit is set to 0, the switch is
always disabled. If the FSW1 bit is set to 1, the AutoZero bit
determines the state of the switch. If the AutoZero bit is 0,
the switch is enabled at all times. If the AutoZero bit is 1, the
switch is enabled only when the internal PHI2 is high.
This bit also affects the latching of the comparator output
(CBUS). Both clock phases, PHI1 and PHI2, are involved in
the output latching mechanism. The capture of the next
value to be output from the latch (capture point event) happens during the falling edge of one clock phase, and the rising edge of the other clock phase will cause the value to
come out (output point event). This bit determines which
clock phase triggers the capture point event, and the other
clock will trigger the output point event. The value output to
the comparator bus will remain stable between output point
events.
Bit 4: FSW0. This bit is used to control a switch in the integrator capacitor path. It connects the output of the opamp to
analog ground.
Bit 5: ASign. This bit controls the switch phasing of the
switches on the bottom plate of the A capacitor. The bottom
plate samples the input or the reference.
Bits 3 and 2: BMuxSC[1:0]. These bit control the muxing
to the input of the B capacitor branch.
Bits 4 to 0: ACap[4:0]. The ACap bits set the value of the
capacitor in the A path.
Bits 1 and 0: PWR[1:0]: The power bits serve as encoding
for selecting one of four power levels. The block always
powers up in the off state.
For additional information, reference the ASDxxCR0 register
on page 114.
For additional information, reference the ASCxxCR3 register
on page 113.
Analog Switch Cap Type D PSoC Block
Control Registers
22.3.5
ASDxxCR0 Register
ASDxxCR1 Register
Bits 7, 6, and 5: AMux[2:0]. These bits control the input
muxing for the A capacitor branch.
Bits 4 to 0: BCap[4:0]. The BCap bits set the value of the
capacitor in the B path.
For additional information, reference the ASDxxCR1 register
on page 115.
Bit 7: FCap. This bit controls the size of the switched feedback capacitor in the integrator.
Bit 6: ClockPhase. This bit controls the internal clock
phasing relative to the input clock phasing. ClockPhase
affects the output of the analog column bus which is controlled by the AnalogBus bit in Control 2 Register
(ASD11CR2).
Bit[6] is the ClockPhase select that inverts the clock internal
to the blocks. During normal operation of an SC block for the
amplifier of a column enabled to drive the output bus, the
connection is only made for the last half of PHI2 (during
PHI1 and for the first half of PHI2, the output bus floats at
the last voltage to which it was driven). This forms a sample
and hold operation using the output bus and its associated
capacitance. This design prevents the output bus from being
perturbed by the intermediate states of the SC operation
(often a reset state for PHI1 and settling to the valid state
during PHI2).
Following are the exceptions: 1) If the ClockPhase bit in
CR0 (for the SC block in question) is set to 1, then the output is enabled for the whole of PHI2. 2) If the SHDIS signal
is set in bit 6 of the Analog Clock Select Register, then sample and hold operation is disabled for all columns and all
December 22, 2003
22.3.6
22.3.7
ASDxxCR2 Register
Bit 7: AnalogBus. This bit gates the output to the analog
column bus. The output on the analog column bus is
affected by the state of the ClockPhase bit in Control 0 Register (ASD11CR0,). If AnalogBus is set to 0, the output to the
analog column bus is tri-stated. If AnalogBus is set to 1, the
ClockPhase bit selects the signal that is output to the analog-column bus. If the ClockPhase bit is 0, the block output
is gated by sampling clock on last part of PHI2. If the ClockPhase bit is 1, the block ClockPhase continuously drives the
analog column bus (ABUS).
Bit 6: CompBus. This bit controls the output to the column
comparator bus (CBUS). Note that if the comparator bus is
not driven by anything in the column, it is pulled low. The
comparator output is evaluated on the rising edge of internal
PHI1 and is latched so it is available during internal PHI2.
Bit 5: AutoZero. This bit controls the shorting of the output
to the inverting input of the opamp. When shorted, the
opamp is basically a follower. The output is the opamp offset. By using the feedback capacitor of the integrator, the
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
243
22. Switched Capacitor Block
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
block can memorize the offset and create an offset cancellation scheme. AutoZero also controls a pair of switches
between the A and B branches and the summing node of
the opamp. If AutoZero is enabled, then the pair of switches
is active. AutoZero also affects the function of the FSW1 bit
in Control 3 Register.
Bits 4 to 0: CCap[4:0]. The CCap bits set the value of the
capacitor in the C path.
For additional information, reference the ASDxxCR2 register
on page 116.
22.3.8
ASDxxCR3 Register
Bits 7 and 6: ARefMux[1:0]. These bits select the reference input of the A capacitor branch.
Bit 5: FSW1. This bit is used to control a switch in the integrator capacitor path. It connects the output of the opamp to
the integrating cap. The state of the switch is affected by the
state of the AutoZero bit in Control 2 Register (ASD11CR2,
). If the FSW1 bit is set to 0, the switch is always disabled. If
the FSW1 bit is set to 1, the AutoZero bit determines the
state of the switch. If the AutoZero bit is 0, the switch is
enabled at all times. If the AutoZero bit is 1, the switch is
enabled only when the internal PHI2 is high.
Bit 4: FSW0. This bit is used to control a switch in the integrator capacitor path. It connects the output of the opamp to
analog ground.
Bit 3: BSW. This bit is used to control switching in the B
branch. If disabled, the B capacitor branch is a continuous
time branch like the C branch of the SC A Block. If enabled,
then on internal PHI1, both ends of the cap are switched to
analog ground. On internal PHI2, one end is switched to the
B input and the other end is switched to the summing node.
Bit 2: BMuxSD. This bit controls muxing to the input of the
B capacitor branch. The B branch can be switched or
unswitched.
Bits 1 and 0: PWR[1:0]. The power bits serve as encoding
for selecting one of four power levels. The block always
powers up in the off state.
For additional information, reference the ASDxxCR3 register
on page 117.
244
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
23. Continuous Time Block
This chapter discusses the Analog Continuous Time Block and its associated registers. This block supports Programmable
Gain or attenuation Opamp Circuits; Instrumentation Amplifiers, using two CT Blocks (Differential Gain); Continuous Time
high-frequency, anti-aliasing filters; and modest response-time analog comparators.
Table 23-1. Analog Continuous Time Block Registers
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
x,7xh
ACBxxCR3
x,7xh
ACBxxCR0
x,7xh
ACBxxCR1
AnalogBus
CompBus
x,7xh
ACBxxCR2
CPhase
CLatch
Bit 5
Bit 4
RTapMux[3:0]
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
LPCMPEN
CMOUT
INSAMP
EXGAIN
RW : 00
Gain
RTopMux
NMux[2:0]
CompCap
TMUXEN
RBotMux[1:0]
PMux[2:0]
TestMux[1:0]
PWR[1:0]
RW : 00
RW : 00
RW : 00
LEGEND
x,: An “x” before the comma in the address field indicates that the register exists in both register banks.
x: An “x” after the comma in the address field indicates that there are multiple instances of the register. For an expanded address listing of these registers, refer
to the “Analog Register Summary” on page 221.
23.1
Architectural Description
The Analog Continuous Time blocks are built around a railto-rail, input and output, low offset and low noise opamp.
There are several analog muxes controlled by register-bit
settings in the control registers that determine the signal
topology inside the block. There is also a precision resistor
matrix located in the feedback path of the opamp and is controlled by register-bit settings.
The block also contains a low power comparator, connected
to the same inputs and outputs as the main amplifier. This
comparator is useful for providing a digital compare output in
low power sleep modes, when the main amplifier is powered
off.
December 22, 2003
There are three discrete outputs from this block. These outputs connect to the following buses:
1. The analog output bus (ABUS), which is an analog bus
resource that is shared by all of the analog blocks in the
analog column for that block. This signal may also be
routed externally through an output buffer.
2. The comparator bus (CBUS), which is a digital bus that
is a resource that is shared by all of the analog blocks in
a column for that block.
3. The local output bus (OUT, GOUT and LOUT), which are
routed to neighboring blocks.
GOUT and LOUT refer to the gain/loss mode configuration of the block, and connect to GIN/LIN inputs of neighboring blocks.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
245
23. Continuous Time Block
TestMux
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
LPCMPEN
RefHi
RefLo
AGND
+
PMuxOut
Gain
ABUS
AnalogBus
CompCap
OUT
Power
CBUS
Latch
Block Inputs
Port Input
CBUS
Driver
Transparent,
PHI1 or PHI2
ABUS
GOUT
AGND
Vdd
PMux
NMux
RTopMux
Block Inputs
AGND
LOUT
RefHi, RefLo
RESISTOR
MATRIX
FB
Gain
RTapMux
RBotMux
CMOUT
GIN
LIN
AGND
SCBLK
Vss
Adjacent Column RBOTMUX
INSAMP
Figure 23-1. Analog Continuous Time Block Diagram
246
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
23.2
23.2.1
23. Continuous Time Block
Register Definitions
23.2.3
Bit 7: CPhase. This bit controls which internal clock phase
the comparator data is latched on.
ACBxxCR0 Register
Bits 7 to 4: RTapMux[3:0]. These bits, in combination with
the EXGAIN bit, B0, of the CR3 register, control the center
tap of the resistor string.
Bit 3: Gain. This bit controls whether the resistor string is
connected around the opamp as for gain (center tap to
inverting opamp input) or for loss (center tap to output of the
block). Note that setting Gain alone does not guarantee a
gain or loss block. Routing of the other ends of the resistor
determine this.
Bit 2: RTopMux. This bit controls the top end of the resistor
string, which can either be connected to Vdd or to the
opamp output.
Bits 1 and 0: RBotBux[1:0]. These bits, in combination
with the INSAMP bit, B1, of the CR3 register, control the
connection of the bottom end of the resistor string.
For additional information, reference the ACBxxCR0 register
on page 107.
23.2.2
ACBxxCR1 Register
Bit 7: AnalogBus. This bit controls the analog output bus.
A CMOS switch connects the opamp output to the analog
bus.
Bit 6: CompBus. This bit controls a tri-state buffer that
drives the comparator logic. If no block in the analog column
is driving the comparator bus, it will be driven low externally
to the blocks.
Bits 5, 4, and 3: NMux[2:0]. These bits control the multiplexing of inputs to the inverting input of the opamp. There
are seven input choices from outside the block, plus an
internal feedback selection.
Bits 2, 1, and 0: PMux[2:0]. These bits control the multiplexing of inputs to the non-inverting input of the opamp.
There are seven input choices from outside the block, plus
an internal feedback selection.
For additional information, reference the ACBxxCR1 register
on page 108.
December 22, 2003
ACBxxCR2 Register
Bit 6: CLatch. This bit controls whether the latch is active
or if it is always transparent.
Bit 5: CompCap. This bit controls whether the compensation capacitor is switched in or not in the opamp. By not
switching in the compensation capacitance, a much faster
response can be obtained, if the amplifier is being used as a
comparator.
Bit 4: TMUXEN. If the TMUXEN bit is high, then the value
of TestMux[1:0] determines which testmux input is connected to the ABus for that particular continuous time block.
If the TMUXEN bit is low, then none of the testmux inputs
are connected to the ABus regardless of the value of TestMux[1:0].
Bits 3 and 2: TextMux[1:0]. TestMux selects block bypass
mode.
Bits 1 and 0: PWR[1:0]. Power is encoded to select 1 of 3
power levels or power down (Off). The blocks power up in
the off state. Combined with the Turbo mode, this provides 6
power levels. Turbo mode is controlled by the HBE bit of the
Analog Reference Control Register.
For additional information, reference the ACBxxCR2 register
on page 109.
23.2.4
ACBxxCR3 Register
Bits 7 to 4: Reserved.
Bit 3: LPCMPEN. Each continuous time block has a low
power comparator connected in parallel with the block’s
main opamp/comparator. The low power comparator is used
in situations where low power is more important than low
noise, low offset, and high speed. The low power comparator operates when the LPCMPEN bit is set high. Since the
main opamp/comparator’s output is connected to the low
power comparator’s output, only one of the comparators
should be active at a particular time. The main opamp/comparator is powered down by setting ACBxxCR2: PWR[1:0]
to 00b, or setting ARF_CR: PWR[2:0] to x00b. The low
power comparator is unaffected by the PWR bits in
ACBxxCR2 and ARF_CR.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
247
23. Continuous Time Block
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Bit 2: CMOUT. The analog array may be used to build two
different forms of instrumentation amplifiers. Two continuous
time blocks combine to make a 2-opamp instrumentation
amplifier (see Figure 23-2).
NON
+
-
OUT
RB
1ST CT
BLOCK
INV
RA
+
-
RA
RB
2ND CT
BLOCK
GAIN = 1+
Two continuous time blocks and one switched capacitor
block combine to make a 3-opamp instrumentation amplifier
(see Figure 23-3).
The 3-opamp instrumentation amplifier takes more
resources, but handles a larger common mode input range.
Bit2 (CMOUT) and bit1 (INSAMP) control switches are
involved in the 3-opamp instrumentation amplifier. If bit2
(CMOUT) is high, then the node formed by the connection of
the resistors between the continuous time blocks is connected to that continuous time block’s ABus. This node is
the common mode of the inputs to the instrumentation
amplifier. The CMOUT bit is optional for the 3-opamp instrumentation amplifier.
Bit 1: INSAMP. This bit is used to connect the resistors of
two continuous time blocks as part of a 3-opamp instrumentation amplifier. The INSAMP bit must be high for the 3opamp instrumentation amplifier (see Figure 23-3).
RB
RA
Figure 23-2. 2-Opamp Instrumentation Amplifier
1st CT Block
NON
+
-
RB
PHI1
PHI1
RA
1st
ABUS
2nd
ABUS
Cx
Cy
PHI2
CMOUT
PHI2
INSAMP
PHI1
+
-
INSAMP
PHI2
CMOUT
OUT
Cx
RA
PHI1
RB
INV
SC Block
Type C or D
+
-
2nd CT Block
GAIN = 1+
RB
RA
Cx
Cy
Figure 23-3. 3-Opamp Instrumentation Amplifier
248
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
23. Continuous Time Block
Bit 0: EXGAIN. The continuous time block’s resistor tap is
specified by the value of ACBxxCR3 EXGAIN combined
with the value of ACBxxCR0 RtapMux[3:0]. For RtapMux
values from 02h through 15h, the EXGAIN bit has no effect
on which tap is selected. See THE ACBxxCR0 register
details. The EXGAIN bit allows one additional tap selection
for RtapMux = 01h and a second additional tap selection for
RtapMux = 00h (see Figure 23-4).
For additional information, reference the ACBxxCR3 register
on page 106.
IN
+
-
OUT
RTapMux[3:0]
Fh
EXGAIN
X
R
R
Eh
X
R
R
R
Dh
X
1h
0
R
Total number
of unit
resistors = 48
R
R
0h
0
R
1h
1
R
0h
1
R
R
Figure 23-4. Continuous Time Block in Gain
Configuration
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
249
23. Continuous Time Block
250
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
SECTION F
SYSTEM RESOURCES
The System Resources section discusses the system resources that are available for the PSoC device and the registers
associated with those resources. This section encompasses the following chapters:
■
Digital Clocks on page 253
■
POR and LVD on page 277
■
Decimator on page 259
■
Internal Voltage Reference on page 279
■
I2C on page 261
■
System Resets on page 281
Top-Level System Resources Architecture
The figure below displays the top-level architecture of the PSoC’s system resources. Each component of the figure is discussed at length in this section.
SYSTEM BUS
Digital
Clocks
Decimator
I2C
POR and LVD
System Resets
Internal
Voltage
Reference
PSoC System Resources Block Diagram
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
251
SECTION F SYSTEM RESOURCES
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
System Resources Register Summary
The table below lists all the PSoC registers that the system resources of the device and its individual blocks use.
Summary Table of the System Resource Registers
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
DIGITAL CLOCK REGISTERS
0,DAh
INT_CLR0
VC3
Sleep
GPIO
Analog 1
V Monitor
RW : 00
0,E0h
INT_MSK0
VC3
Sleep
GPIO
Analog 1
V Monitor
RW : 00
1,DEh
OSC_CR4
1,DFh
OSC_CR3
1,E0h
OSC_CR0
1,E1h
OSC_CR1
1,E2h
OSC_CR2
VC3 Input Select[1:0]
VC3 Divider[7:0]
32k Select
PLL Mode
No Buzz
RW : 00
RW : 00
Sleep[1:0]
CPU Speed[2:0]
VC1 Divider[3:0]
RW : 00
VC2 Divider[3:0]
PLLGAIN
EXTCLKEN
IMODIS
RW : 00
SYSCLKX2
DIS
RW : 00
DECIMATOR REGISTERS
0,E4h
DEC_DH
Data High Byte[7:0]
0,E5h
DEC_DL
Data Low Byte[7:0]
0,E6h
DEC_CR0
0,E7h
DEC_CR1
IGEN[3:0]
ECNT
RC : XX
RC : XX
ICLKS0
IDEC
DCOL[1:0]
DCLKS0
RW : 00
DCLKS1
RW : 00
Enable
Master
Enable
Slave
RW : 00
LRB
Byte
Complete
R : 00
ICLKS1
I2C REGISTERS
0,D6h
I2C_CFG
0,D7h
I2C_SCR
0,D8h
I2C_DR
0,D9h
I2C_MSCR
1,E3h
VLT_CR
1,E4h
VLT_CMP
Bus Error
PSelect
Bus Error IE
Stop IE
Lost Arb
Stop
Status
ACK
Clock Rate
Address
Transmit
Data[7:0]
Bus Busy
RW : 00
Master
Mode
Restart Gen
Start Gen
R : 00
POR AND LVD REGISTERS
PORLEV[1:0]
LVDTBEN
VM[2:0]
LVD
RW : 00
PPOR
R : 00
INTERNAL VOLTAGE REFERENCE REGISTER
1,EAh
BDG_TR
0,FEh
CPU_SCR1
0,FFh
CPU_SCR0
TC[1:0]
V[3:0]
RW:00
SYSTEM RESET REGISTERS
GIES
WDRS
PORS
Sleep
IRAMDIS
RW : 00
STOP
RW : XX
LEGEND
C: Cearable register or bits.
X: The value for power on reset is unknown.
252
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
24. Digital Clocks
This chapter discusses the Digital Clocks and its associated registers. It serves as an overview of the clocking options available in the PSoC devices. For detailed information on specific oscillators, see the individual oscillator chapters in the section
called “CORE ARCHITECTURE” on page 31.
Table 24-1. Digital Clocking Registers
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
0,DAh
Address
INT_CLR0
VC3
Sleep
GPIO
Analog 1
0,E0h
INT_MSK0
VC3
Sleep
GPIO
Analog 1
1,DEh
OSC_CR4
1,DFh
OSC_CR3
1,E0h
OSC_CR0
1,E1h
OSC_CR1
1,E2h
24.1
Name
OSC_CR2
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
V Monitor
RW : 00
V Monitor
RW : 00
VC3 Input Select[1:0]
VC3 Divider[7:0]
32k Select
PLL Mode
No Buzz
Sleep[1:0]
CPU Speed[2:0]
VC1 Divider[3:0]
RW : 00
VC2 Divider[3:0]
PLLGAIN
RW : 00
RW : 00
EXTCLKEN
RW : 00
IMODIS
SYSCLKX2
DIS
RW : 00
Architectural Description
TMODE
The PSoC M8C core has a large number of clock sources
that increase the flexibility of the PSoC mixed signal arrays,
as illustrated in Figure 24-1.
32K Select
TCLK
I32K
24.1.1
Internal Main Oscillator
The Internal Main Oscillator (IMO) is the foundation upon
which almost all other clock sources in the PSoC mixed signal arrays are based. The default mode of the IMO creates a
24 MHz reference clock that is used by many other circuits
in the chip. The IMO may also be configured to operate in a
PLL mode where the oscillator is locked to a precision
32.768 kHz crystal reference. The PSoC device has an
option to replace the IMO with an externally supplied clock
that will become the base for all of the clocks the IMO normally serves.
Whether the external clock or the internal main oscillator is
selected, all chip functions are clocked from a derivative of
SYSCLK or are re-synchronized to SYSCLK. All external
asynchronous signals (through row inputs), as well as the
selected 32K oscillator, are resynchronized to SYSCLK for
use in the digital blocks.
The IMO is discussed in detail in the chapter “Internal Main
Oscillator (IMO)” on page 63.
December 22, 2003
32 kHz
X32K
Phase
Detector
PLL Mode
CLK48EN_
Oscillator
Divider (CPU)
SYSCLK
48 MHz
24 MHz
CPU CLK
Divider (24V1)
VC1
Divider (24V2)
VC2
Divider (24V3)
VC3
SYSCLKX2
24V3SEL
Figure 24-1. Overview of PSoC Clock Sources
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
253
24. Digital Clocks
24.1.2
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Internal Low Speed Oscillator
The internal low speed oscillator (ILO), or sometimes
referred to as the Sleep Oscillator, is always on unless the
device is operating off a crystal. The ILO is available as a
general clock, but is also the clock source for the sleep and
watchdog timers.
The ILO is discussed in detail in the chapter “Internal Low
Speed Oscillator (ILO)” on page 65.
24.1.3
32 kHz Crystal Oscillator
The Crystal Oscillator is discussed in detail in the chapter
“32 kHz Crystal Oscillator (ECO)” on page 67.
External Clock
The ability to replace the 24 MHz internal main oscillator
(IMO), as the device master system clock (SYSCLK) with an
externally supplied clock, is a feature in the PSoC mixed signal arrays.
Pin P1[4] has been chosen as the input pin for the external
clock. This pin was chosen because it is not associated with
any special features such as analog IO, crystal, or In System Serial Programming (ISSP), and it is also not physically
close to either the P1[0] and P1[1] crystal pins.
The user is able to supply an external clock with a frequency
between 1 MHz and 24 MHz. The reset state of the EXTCLKEN bit is ‘0’, and therefore, the device always boots up
under control of the IMO. There is no way to start the system
from a reset state with the external clock.
When the EXTCLKEN bit is set, the external clock becomes
the source for the internal clock tree, SYSCLK, which drives
most chip clocking functions. All external and internal signals, including the 32 kHz clock, whether derived from the
internal low speed oscillator (ILO) or the crystal oscillator,
are synchronized to this clock source.
24.1.4.1
21 ns Nominal
Extenal Clock
SYSCLKX2
The PSoC may be configured to use an external crystal.
When configured in this way the internal low speed oscillator
is turned off and the crystal becomes the clock source for all
32 kHz clocks.
24.1.4
bler is fixed at 21 ns, so the duty cycle of SYSCLKX2 will be
proportional to the inverse of the frequency, as shown in
Figure 24-2. Regardless of the input frequency, the high
period of SYSCLKX2 is 21 ns nominal.
Clock Doubler
One of the blocks driven by the system clock is the clock
doubler circuit that drives the SYSCLKX2 output. This doubled clock, which is 48 MHz when the IMO is the selected
clock, may be used as a clock source for the digital blocks.
When the external clock is selected, the SYSCLKX2 signal
is still available and serves as a doubler for whatever frequency is input on the external clock pin.
Figure 24-2. Operation of the Clock Doubler
24.1.4.2
Switch Operation
Switching between the IMO and the external clock may be
done in firmware at any time and is transparent to the user.
Since all chip resources run on clocks derived from or synchronized to SYSCLK, when the switch is made, analog and
digital functions may be momentarily interrupted.
When a switch is made from the IMO to the external clock,
the IMO may be turned off to save power. This can be done
by setting the IMODIS bit and may be done immediately
after the instruction that sets the EXTCLKEN bit. However,
when switching back from an external clock to the IMO, the
IMODIS bit must be cleared, and a firmware delay implemented. This gives the IMO sufficient start-up time before
the EXTCLKEN bit may be cleared.
Switch timing depends on whether the CPU clock divider is
set for divide by 1, or divide by 2 or greater. In the case
where the CPU clock divider is set for divide by 2 or greater,
as shown in Figure 24-3, the setting of the EXTCLKEN bit
occurs shortly after the rising edge of SYSCLK. The
SYSCLK output is then disabled after the next falling edge
of SYSCLK, but before the next rising edge. This ensures a
glitch free transition and provides a full cycle of setup time
from SYSCLK to output disable. Once the current clock
selection is disabled, the enable of the newly selected clock
is double synchronized to that clock. After synchronization,
on the subsequent negative edge, SYSCLK is enabled to
output the newly selected clock.
In the 24 MHz case, as shown in Figure 24-4, the assertion
of IOW_ and thus the setting of the EXTCLKEN bit occurs
on the falling edge of SYSCLK. Since SYSCLK is already
low, the output is immediately disabled and therefore, the
setup time from SYSCLK to disable is one-half SYSCLK.
Following the spec for the external clock input ensures that
the internal circuitry of the digital blocks, which is clocked by
SYSCLKX2, will meet timing. However, since the doubled
clock is generated from both edges of the input clock, clock
jitter will be introduced if the duty cycle deviates greatly from
fifty percent. Also, the high time of the clock out of the dou-
254
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
24. Digital Clocks
IMO
Extenal Clock
SYSCLK
CPUCLK
IOW_
EXTCLK bit
IMO is
disabled.
External Clock is
enabled.
Figure 24-3. Switch from IMO to the External Clock with a CPU Clock Divider of Two or Greater
IMO
External Clock
SYSCLK
CPUCLK
IOW
EXTCLK
IMO is
disabled
External
Clock is
enabled
Figure 24-4. Switch from IMO to External Clock with the CPU Running with a CPU Clock Divider of One
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
255
24. Digital Clocks
24.2
24.2.1
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Register Definitions
that when the ILO is the selected 32 kHz clock source, sleep
intervals are approximate.
INT_CLR0 Register
Table 24-2. Sleep Interval Selections
The INT_CLR0 register holds bits that are used by several
different resources. The digital clocks only use bit 7 of the
INT_CLR0 register for the VC3 clock and bits zero through
six are used by other resources. For a full discussion of the
INT_CLR0 register, see the INT_CLRx Register in the Interrupt Controller chapter.
For additional information, reference the INT_CLR0 register
on page 129.
24.2.2
INT_MSK0 Register
The INT_MSK0 register holds bits that are used by several
different resources. The digital clocks only use bit 7 of the
INT_MSK0 register for the VC3 clock and bits zero through
six are used by other resources. The Sleep bit (bit 6) controls whether the Sleep timer may be used as an interrupt
source. For a full discussion of the INT_MSK0 register, see
the INT_MSKx Register in the Interrupt Controller chapter.
For additional information, reference the INT_MSK0 register
on page 134.
24.2.3
OSC_CR0 Register
Bit 7: 32k Select. By default, the 32 kHz clock source is
the Internal Low-Speed Oscillator (ILO). Optionally, the
External Crystal Oscillator (ECO) may be selected.
Bit 6: PLL Mode. This bit, in the OSC_CR0 register, is the
only bit that directly influences the PLL. When set, this bit
enables the PLL. The EXTCLK bit should be set low during
PLL operation.
Bit 5: No Buzz. Normally, when the Sleep bit is set in the
CPU_SCR register, all chip systems are powered down,
including the Band Gap reference. However, to facilitate the
detection of POR and LVD events at a rate higher than the
Sleep Interval, the Band Gap circuit is powered up periodically for about 60 us at the Sleep System Duty cycle (set in
ECO_TR), which is independent of the Sleep Interval and
typically higher. When the No Buzz bit is set, the Sleep System Duty Cycle value is overridden, and the Band Gap circuit is forced to be on during sleep. This results in faster
response to an LVD or POR event (continuous detection as
opposed to periodic), at the expense of slightly higher average sleep current.
Bits 4 and 3: Sleep[1:0]. The available sleep interval
selections are shown in Table 24-2. It must be remembered
Sleep Interval
Sleep Timer
Clocks
OSC_CR[4:3]
00b (default)
64
01b
10b
11b
Watchdog
Period
Sleep Period
(nominal)
(nominal)
1.95 ms
6 ms
512
15.6 ms
47 ms
4096
125 ms
375 ms
32,768
1 sec
3 sec
Bits 2, 1, and 0: CPU Speed[2:0]. The PSoC M8C may
operate over a range of CPU clock speeds (Table 24-3),
allowing the M8C’s performance and power requirements to
be tailored to the application.
The reset value for the CPU Speed bits is zero. Therefore,
the default CPU speed is one-eighth of the clock source.
The internal main oscillator is the default clock source for
the CPU speed circuit; therefore, the default CPU speed is 3
MHz. See “External Clock” on page 254 for more information on the supported frequencies for externally supplied
clocks.
The CPU frequency is changed with a write to the
OSC_CR0 register. There are eight frequencies generated
from a power-of-2 divide circuit, which are selected by a 3bit code. At any given time, the CPU 8:1 clock multiplexer is
selecting one of the available frequencies, which is re-synchronized to the 24 MHz master clock at the output.
Regardless of the CPU speed bit’s setting, if the actual CPU
speed is greater than 12 MHz, the 24 MHz operating
requirements apply. An example of this scenario is a device
that is configured to use an external clock, which is supplying a frequency of 20 MHz. If the CPU speed register’s
value is 0b011, the CPU clock will be 20 MHz. Therefore,
the supply voltage requirements for the device are the same
as if the part was operating at 24 MHz off of the internal
main oscillator. The operating voltage requirements are not
relaxed until the CPU speed is at 12.0 MHz or less.
Table 24-3. OSC_CR0[2:0] Bits: CPU Speed
Divider Source Clock
Bits
Internal Main Oscillator
External Clock
000b
3 MHz
EXTCLK/ 8
001b
6 MHz
EXTCLK/ 4
010b
12 MHz
EXTCLK/ 2
011b
24 MHz
EXTCLK/ 1
100b
1.5 MHz
EXTCLK/ 16
101b
750 kHz
EXTCLK/ 32
110b
187.5 kHz
EXTCLK/ 128
111b
93.7 kHz
EXTCLK/ 256
For additional information, reference the OSC_CR0 register
on page 165.
256
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
24.2.4
24. Digital Clocks
OSC_CR1 Register
Table 24-5. OSC_CR1[3:0] Bits: VC2 Divider Value
Divider Source Clock
Bits 7 to 4: VC1 Divider[3:0]. The VC1 clock net is one of
the variable clock nets available in the PSoC M8C. The
source for the VC1 clock net is a simple 4-bit divider. The
source for the divider is 24 MHz system clock; however, if
the device is configured to use an external clock, the input to
the divider will be the external clock. Therefore, the VC1
clock net is not always the result of dividing down a 24 MHz
clock. The 4-bit divider that controls the VC1 clock net may
be configured to divide, using any integer value between 1
and 16. Table 24-4 lists all values for the VC1 clock net.
Table 24-4. OSC_CR1[7:4] Bits: VC1 Divider Value
Divider Source Clock
Bits
Internal Main Oscillator
External Clock
0h
24 MHz
EXTCLK / 1
1h
12 MHz
EXTCLK / 2
2h
8 MHz
EXTCLK / 3
3h
6 MHz
EXTCLK / 4
4h
4.8 MHz
EXTCLK / 5
5h
4 MHz
EXTCLK / 6
6h
3.43 MHz
EXTCLK / 7
7h
3 MHz
EXTCLK / 8
8h
2.67 MHz
EXTCLK / 9
9h
2.40 MHz
EXTCLK / 10
Ah
2.18 MHz
EXTCLK / 11
Bh
2.00 MHz
EXTCLK / 12
Ch
1.85 MHz
EXTCLK / 13
Dh
1.71 MHz
EXTCLK / 14
Eh
1.6 MHz
EXTCLK / 15
Fh
1.5 MHz
EXTCLK / 16
Bits
Internal Main Oscillator
External Clock
0h
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 1
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 1
1h
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 2
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 2
2h
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 3
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 3
3h
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 4
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 4
4h
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 5
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 5
5h
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 6
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 6
6h
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 7
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 7
7h
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 8
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 8
8h
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 9
(EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 9
9h
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 10 (EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 10
Ah
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 11 (EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 11
Bh
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 12 (EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 12
Ch
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 13 (EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 13
Dh
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 14 (EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 14
Eh
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 15 (EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 15
Fh
(24 / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 16 (EXTCLK / (OSC_CR1[7:4]+1)) / 16
For additional information, reference the OSC_CR1 register
on page 166.
24.2.5
OSC_CR2 Register
Bit 7: PLLGAIN. This is the only bit in the OSC_CR2 register that directly influences the PLL. When set, this bit keeps
the PLL in a low gain mode.
Bits 6 to 3: Reserved.
Bits 3 to 0: VC2 Divider[3:0]. The VC2 clock net is one of
the variable clock nets available in the PSoC M8C. The
source for the VC2 clock net is a simple 4-bit divider. The
source for the divider is the VC1 clock net. The 4-bit divider
that controls the VC2 clock net may be configured to divide,
using any integer value between 1 and 16. Table 24-5 lists
all values for the VC2 clock net.
Bit 2: EXTCLKEN. When the EXTCLKEN bit is set, the
external clock becomes the source for the internal clock
tree, SYSCLK, which drives most chip clocking functions. All
external and internal signals, including the 32 kHz clock,
whether derived from the internal low speed oscillator (ILO)
or the crystal oscillator, are synchronized to this clock
source. If an external clock is enabled, PLL mode should be
off.
Bit 1: IMODIS. When set, the Internal Main Oscillator is disabled. If the doubler is enabled (SYSCLKX2DIS=0), the
Internal Main oscillator will be forced on.
Bit 0: SYSCLKX2DIS. When set, the Internal Main Oscillator’s doubler is disabled. This will result in a reduction of
overall device power, on the order of 1 mA. It is advised that
any application that does not require this doubled clock
should have it turned off.
For additional information, reference the OSC_CR2 register
on page 167.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
257
24. Digital Clocks
24.2.6
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
OSC_CR3 Register
24.2.7
Bits 7 to 0: VC3 Divider[7:0]. As an example of the flexibility of the clocking structure in PSoC devices, consider a
device that is running off of an externally supplied clock at a
frequency of 93.7 kHz. This clock value may be divided by
the VC1 divider to achieve a VC1 clock net frequency of
5.89 kHz. The VC2 divider could reduce the frequency by
another factor of 16, resulting in a VC2 clock net frequency
of 366.02 Hz. Finally, the VC3 divider may choose VC2 as
its input clock and divide by 256, resulting in a VC3 clock net
frequency of 1.43 Hz.
Table 24-6. OSC_CR3[7:0] Bits: VC3 Divider Value
Divider Source Clock
Bits
SYSCLKX2
SYSCLK
VC1
VC2
00h
SYSCLKX2
SYSCLK
VC1
VC2
01h
SYSCLKX2 / 2
SYSCLK / 2
VC1 / 2
VC2 / 2
02h
SYSCLKX2 / 3
SYSCLK / 3
VC1 / 3
VC2 / 3
03h
SYSCLKX2 / 4
SYSCLK / 4
VC1 / 4
VC2 / 4
...
...
...
...
...
FCh
SYSCLKX2 / 253 SYSCLK / 253
VC1 / 253
VC2 / 253
FDh
SYSCLKX2 / 254 SYSCLK / 254
VC1 / 254
VC2 / 254
FEh
SYSCLKX2 / 255 SYSCLK / 255
VC1 / 255
VC2 / 255
FFh
SYSCLKX2 / 256 SYSCLK / 256
VC1 / 256
VC2 / 256
As mentioned previously the VC3 clock net can generate a
system interrupt. Once the input clock and the divider value
for the VC3 clock are chosen, only one additional step is
needed to enable the interrupt; the VC3 mask bit needs to
be set in register INT_MSK0[7]. Once the VC3 mask bit is
set, the VC3 clock generates pending interrupts every number of clock periods equal to the VC3 divider register value
plus one. Therefore, if the VC3 divider register’s value is 05h
(divide by 6), an interrupt would occur every six periods of
the VC3’s input clock. Another example would be if the
divider value was 00h (divide by 1), an interrupt would be
generated on every period of the VC3 clock. The VC3 mask
bit only controls the ability of a posted interrupt to become
pending. Because there is no enable for the VC3 interrupt,
VC3 interrupts will always be posting. See the Interrupt Controller chapter for more information on posting and pending.
OSC_CR4 Register
Bits 7 to 2: Reserved.
Bits 1 and 0: VC3 Input Select [1:0]. The VC3 clock net is
the only clock net with the ability to generate an interrupt.
The VC3 is most similar to the VC2 in that its input clock
comes from a configurable source. As shown in Figure 24-1
on page 253, a 4-to-1 multiplexer determines the clock that
will be used as in the input to the VC3 divider. The multiplexer allows either the 48 MHz, 24 MHz, VC1, or VC2
clocks to be used as the input clock to the divider. Because
the selection of a clock for the VC3 divider is performed by a
simple 4-to-1 mux, runt pulses and glitches may be injected
to the VC3 divider when the OSC_CR4[1:0] bits are
changed. Care should be taken to ensure that blocks using
the VC3 clock are either disabled when OSC_CR4[1:0] is
changed or not sensitive to glitches. Unlike the VC1 and
VC2 clock dividers, the VC3 clock divider is 8-bits wide.
Therefore, there are 256 valid divider values as indicated by
Table 24-6.
Table 24-7. OSC_CR4[1:0] Bits: VC3
Bits
Multiplexer Output
00b
SYSCLK
01b
VC1
10b
VC2
11b
SYSCLKX2
It is important to remember that even though the VC3 divider
has four choices for input clock, none of the choices have
fixed frequencies for all device configurations. Both the 24
MHz and 48 MHz clocks may have very different frequencies, if an external clock is in use. Also, the divider values for
the VC1 and VC2 inputs to the multiplexer must be considered.
For additional information, reference the OSC_CR4 register
on page 163
For additional information, reference the OSC_CR3 register
on page 164.
258
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
25. Decimator
This chapter briefly explains the PSoC Decimator and its associated registers. It serves as an overview of the clocking
options available in the PSoC devices. The decimator block is a hardware assist for digital signal processing applications. The
decimator may be used for sigma-delta analog to digital converters and incremental analog to digital converters.
Table 25-1. Decimator Registers
Address
Name
0,E4h
DEC_DH
0,E5h
DEC_DL
0,E6h
DEC_CR0
0,E7h
DEC_CR1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Data High Byte[7:0]
Data Low Byte[7:0]
IGEN[3:0]
ECNT
IDEC
Access
RC : XX
RC : XX
ICLKS0
DCOL[1:0]
ICLKS1
DCLKS0
RW : 00
DCLKS1
RW : 00
LEGEND
C: Cearable register or bits.
X: The value for power on reset is unknown.
25.1
Architectural Description
The decimator may perform either a single or double integration of the discrete-time, discrete-amplitude signal
applied to the data input pin of the block. The integrated
value may be up to 16-bits long and is read or cleared by
way of a register interface.
Because the data input to the decimator is only one bit, the
input signal's amplitude can only be one of two values:
Encoding
Weight
0
-1
1
+1
Because the input signal is a discrete-time signal, the weight
of each encoding is analogous to the area under the signal
for that instant in time. Therefore, to integrate the signal, the
sum of the weights needs to be calculated over a period of
time. When the decimator is configured as a single integrator this is exactly what happens. For each period of the input
clock the current area (integral value) is either increased by
one (weight = +1, encoding = 1) or decreased by one
(weight = -1, encoding = 0).
December 22, 2003
25.2
25.2.1
Register Definitions
DEC_DH Register
The Decimator Data High register (DEC_DH) is a dual purpose register. When the register is read the most significant
byte of the 16-bit decimator value is returned. Depending on
how the decimator is configured, this value is either the
result of the second integration or the high byte of the 16-bit
counter. The second function of the DEC_DH register is
activated whenever the register is written: That function is to
clear the decimator value. When the DEC_DH register is
written, the decimator's value will be cleared regardless of
the value written. Either the DEC_DH or DEC_DL register
may be written to clear the decimator's value. Note that this
register does not reset to 00h. The DEC_DH register resets
to an indeterminate value.
For additional information, reference the DEC_DH register
on page 138.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
259
25. Decimator
25.2.2
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DEC_DL Register
25.2.4
The Decimator Data Low register (DEC_DL) is a dual purpose register. When the register is read the least significant
byte of the 16-bit decimator value is returned. Depending on
how the decimator is configured, this value is either the
result of the second integration or the lower byte of the 16bit counter. The second function of the DEC_DL register is
activated when ever the register is written: That function is
to clear the decimator value. When the DEC_DL register is
written the decimator's value will be cleared regardless of
the value written. Either the DEC_DL or DEC_DH register
may be written to clear the decimator's value. Note that this
register does not reset to 00h. The DEC_DL register resets
to an indeterminate value.
For additional information, reference the DEC_DL register
on page 139.
DEC_CR1 Register
Bit 7: ECNT. The ECNT bit is a mode bit that controls the
operation of the decimator hardware block. By default, the
decimator is set to a double integrate function, for use in
hardware DELSIG processing. When the ECNT bit is set,
the decimator block converts to a single integrate function.
This gives the equivalent of a 16-bit counter suitable for use
in hardware support for an Incremental ADC function.
Bit 6: IDEC. Any function using the decimator requires a
digital block timer to sample the current decimator value.
Normally, the positive edge of this signal will cause the decimator output to be sampled. However, when the IDEC bit is
set, the negative edge of the selected digital block input will
cause the decimator value to be sampled.
Bits 5 and 4: Reserved.
25.2.3
DEC_CR0 Register
This register contains control bits to access hardware support for both the Incremental ADC and the DELISG ADC.
For Incremental support, the upper four bits, IGEN[3:0],
select which column comparator bit will be gated by the output of a digital block. The output of that digital block is typically a PWM signal; the high time of which corresponds to
the ADC conversion period. This ensures that the comparator output is only processed for the precise conversion time.
The digital block selected for the gating function is controlled
by ICLKS0 in this register and ICLKS1 in DEC_CR1. Up to
one of 16 digital blocks may be selected, depending on your
specific chip resources.
Bit 3: ICLKS1. The ICLKS1 bit in this register selects the
digital block sources for Incremental and DELSIGN ADC
hardware support (see the DEC_CR0 register).
Bits 2 and 1: Reserved.
Bit 0: DCLKS1. The DCLKS1 bit in this register selects the
digital block sources for Incremental and DELSIGN ADC
hardware support (see the DEC_CR0 register).
For additional information, reference the DEC_CR1 register
on page 141.
The DELSIG ADC uses the hardware decimator to do a portion of the post processing computation on the comparator
signal. DCOL[1:0] selects the column source for the decimator data (comparator bit) and clock input (PHI clocks).
In addition, the decimator requires a timer signal to sample
the current decimator value to an output register that may
subsequently be read by the CPU. This timer period is set to
be a function of the DELSIG conversion time and may be
selected from up to one of 16 digital blocks (depending on
your specific chip resources) with bit DCLKS0 and DCLKS1
in DEC_CR1.
For additional information, reference the DEC_CR0 register
on page 140.
260
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
26. I2C
This chapter explains the I2C block and its associated registers. The I2C communications block is a serial processor
designed to implement a complete I2C Slave and/or Master.
Table 26-1. I2C Registers
Address
Name
0,D6h
I2C_CFG
0,D7h
I2C_SCR
0,D8h
I2C_DR
0,D9h
I2C_MSCR
Bit 7
Bus Error
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
PSelect
Bus Error IE
Stop IE
Lost Arb
Stop
Status
ACK
Functionality requirements include:
■
■
■
■
■
■
Master/Slave, Transmitter/Receiver Operation
Byte processing for low CPU overhead
Interrupt or Polling CPU interface
Master Clock Rates: 50K, 100K, 400K
Multi-Master Clock Synchronization
Multi-Master Mode Arbitration support
7- or 10-bit addressing (through firmware support)
SMBus operation (through firmware support)
Hardware functionality provides basic I2C control, data, and
status primitives. A combination of hardware support and
firmware command sequencing provides a high degree of
flexibility for implementing the required I2C functionality.
Hardware limitations:
1. There is no hardware support for automatic address
comparison. When Slave mode is enabled, every slave
address will cause the block to interrupt the host and
possibly stall the bus.
December 22, 2003
Clock Rate
Address
Transmit
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
Enable
Master
Enable
Slave
RW : 00
LRB
Byte
Complete
R : 00
RW : 00
Master
Mode
Bus Busy
The I2C block will directly control the data (SDA) and clock
(SCL) signals to the external I2C interface, through connections to two dedicated GPIO pins. The host firmware will
interact with the block through IO register reads and writes,
and firmware synchronization will be implemented through
polling and/or interrupts.
■
Bit 2
Data[7:0]
The I2C communications block is a serial to parallel processor designed to interface to the two-wire I2C serial communications bus. The block provides I2C specific support for
status detection and generation of framing bits, to eliminate
the need for excessive host processor intervention and
overhead.
■
Bit 3
Restart Gen
Start Gen
R : 00
2. Since receive and transmitted data is not buffered, there
is no support for automatic receive acknowledge. The
host processor must intervene at the boundary of each
byte and either send a byte or ACK received bytes.
26.1
Architectural Description
The I2C block is designed to support a set of primitive operations and detect a set of status conditions specific to the
I2C protocol. These primitive operations and conditions are
manipulated and combined at the firmware level to support
the required data transfer modes. The host will set up control options and issue commands to the unit through IO
Writes and obtain status through IO Reads and interrupts.
The block operates as either a Slave, a Master, or both.
When enabled in Slave mode, the unit is always listening for
a Start condition, or sending or receiving data. Master mode
can work in conjunction with Slave mode. The Master supplies the ability to generate the START or STOP condition
and determine if other masters are on the bus. For Multi
Master mode, clock synchronization is supported. If Master
mode is enabled and Slave mode is not enabled, the block
does not generate interrupts on externally generated Start
conditions.
26.1.1
Basic I2C Data Transfer
Figure 26-1 shows the basic form of data transfers on the
I2C bus with a 7-bit address format. (For a more detailed
description, see the I2C Specification, Version 2.1, by Phillips Semiconductor).
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
261
26. I2C
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
A Start condition (generated by the Master) is followed by a
data byte, consisting of a 7-bit slave address (there is also a
10-bit address mode) and a R/W bit. The R/W bit sets the
direction of data transfer. The addressed slave is required to
acknowledge (ACK) the bus by pulling the data line low during the 9th bit time. If the ACK is received, the transfer may
START
7-Bit Address
1
R/W
7
8
proceed and the master can transmit or receive an indeterminate number of bytes, depending on the R/W direction. If
the slave does not respond with an ACK for any reason, a
Stop condition is generated by the master to terminate the
transfer or a Restart condition may be generated for retry
attempt.
ACK
9
8-Bit Data
1
ACK/
NACK
7
8
STOP
9
Figure 26-1. Basic I2C Data Transfer with 7-Bit Address Format
262
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
26.2
26. I2C
Application Description
26.2.1
address byte and compare it to its own address. It will issue
an ACK or NACK command based on that comparison.
Slave Operation
Assuming Slave mode is enabled, it is continually listening
on the bus for a Start condition. When detected, the transmitted Address/R/W byte is received and read from the unit
by firmware. At the point where eight bits of the address has
been received, a byte complete interrupt is generated. On
the following low of the clock, the bus is stalled by holding
the SCL line low, until the host has had a chance to read the
If there is an address match, the R/W bit determines how
the host will sequence the data transfer in Slave mode as
shown in the two branches of Figure 26-2. I2C handshaking
methodology (Slave holds the SCL line low to “stall” the bus)
will be used as necessary, to give the host time to respond
to the events and conditions on the bus. Figure 26-2 is a
graphical representation of a typical data transfer from the
slave perspective.
Master may
transmit
another byte
or STOP.
Host writes
(ACK) to
I2C_SCR
register.
SLAVE Transmitter/Reciever
START
7-Bit Address
STOP
(R
X)
ACK/
NACK
1
7
8
9
NACK =
Slave says no
more
R/W
SHIFTER
1
7
ACK = OK to
receive more
8-Bit Data
ACK
W
A byte interrupt is
generated. The SCL line
is held low.
Host issues ACK/
NACK command
with a write to the
I2C_SCR register.
An interrupt is generated
on byte complete. The
SCL line is held low.
Host reads the
received byte from
the I2C_DR register.
8
R
X)
(T
SHIFTER
An interrupt is generated
on a complete byte +
ACK/NACK. The SCL line
is held low.
Host writes
(ACK | TRANSMIT) to
I2C_SCR register.
Host reads the
received byte from the
I2C_DR register and
checks for “Own
Address” and R/W.
8-Bit Data
ACK
ACK/
NACK
SHIFTER
9
1
7
Host writes the
byte to transmit
to the I2C_DR
register.
8
Host writes a new byte to the
I2C_DR register and then writes
a TRANSMIT command to
I2C_SCR to release the bus.
NACK = Master
says end-of-data
STOP
9
ACK = Master
wants to read
another byte.
Figure 26-2. Slave Operation
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
263
26. I2C
26.2.2
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Master Operation
To prepare for a Master mode transaction, the host must
determine if the bus is free. This can be done by polling the
BusBusy status. If busy, interrupts can be enabled to detect
a Stop condition.
Once it is determined that the bus is
available, firmware should write the address byte into the
I2C_DR register and set the Start Gen bit in the I2C_MSCR
register.
If the Slave sub-unit is not enabled, the block is in Master
Only mode. In this mode, the unit does not generate interrupts or stall the bus on externally generated Start conditions.
In a Multi-Master environment there are two additional outcomes possible:
1. The host was too late to reserve the bus as a Master and
another Master may have generated a Start and sent an
Address/R/W byte. In this case, the unit as a Master will
fail to generate a Start and will be forced into Slave
mode. The Start will be pending and eventually occur at
a later time when the bus becomes free. When the interrupt occurs in Slave mode, the host can determine that
the Start command was unsuccessful by reading the
I2C_MSCR register Start bit, which will be reset on successful Start from this unit as Master. If this bit is still a ‘1’
on the Start/Address interrupt, it means that the unit is
operating in Slave mode. In this case, the data register
will have the master’s address data.
2. If another Master starts a transmission at the same time
as this unit, arbitration will occur. If this unit loses the
arbitration, the LostArb status bit will be set. In this case,
the block will release the bus and switch to Slave operation. When the Start/Address interrupt occurs, the data
register will have the winning master’s address data.
Figure 26-3 is a graphical representation of a typical data
transfer from the master perspective.
Master Transmitter/Receiver
Host issues a
command to the
I2C_SCR register.
Host issues
Generate
START
command to
I2C_MCR.
An interrupt is generated
on completed reception
of the byte. The SCL line
is held low.
8
8
9
X)
NACK = Host
master indicates
end-of-data
d
SHIFTER
Host reads the
received byte from
I2C_DR register.
9
W
SHIFTER
7
7
(R
R/W
ACK
1
STOP
ACK/
NACK
R
ea
7-Bit Address
ACK = Host
master wants
more
8-Bit Data
A Start/Address compete
interrupt is generated.
The SCL line is held low.
1
START
Host issues ACK/
NACK command to
the I2C_SCR
register.
rit
e
X)
(T
Host writes address
byte to the I2C_DR
register.
An interrupt is generated
on complettion of the byte
+ ACK/NACK. The SCL
line is held low.
Host issues TRANSMIT
command to the
I2C_SCR register.
8-Bit Data
ACK/
NACK
1
7
SHIFTER
Host writes a byte to
transmit I2C_DR
register.
8
Host issues STOP
command
NACK =
Slave says no
more.
STOP
9
ACK = Slave
say OK to
receive more.
Master wants
to send more
bytes.
Figure 26-3. Master Operation
264
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
26.3
26. I2C
Register Definitions
The I2C block contains four registers, all of which reside in
User IO space: Configuration Register (I2C_CFG), Status
and Control Register (I2C_SCR), Master Status and Control
Register (I2C_MSCR), and Data Register (I2C_DR).
The Configuration register is used to set the basic operating
modes, baud rate, and selection of interrupts. The Status
and Control register is used by both Master and Slave to
control the flow of data bytes and to keep track of the bus
state during a transfer. Data and address bytes are written
to and read from the Data Register. The Master Status and
Control register implements I2C framing controls and provides Bus Busy status.
26.3.1
I2C_CFG Register
This register is the I2C configuration register and contains
the configuration bits for both Master and Slave mode operation. These bits control baud rate selection and optional
interrupts. These values are typically set once for a given
configuration. The bits in this register are all R/W.
Table 26-2. I2C_CFG Configuration Register
Bit
Access
Description
Mode
0
R/W
Enable Slave
Master/
Slave
‘0’ = Disabled
‘1’ = Enabled
1
R/W
Enable Master
Master/
Slave
‘0’ = Disabled
‘1’ = Enabled
3:2
R/W
Clock Rate
Master/
Slave
00 = 100K, Standard Mode
01 = 400K Fast Mode
10 = 50K Standard Mode
11 = Reserved
4
R/W
Stop IE
Master
Only
Stop interrupt enable.
0 = Disabled.
1 = Enabled. An interrupt is generated on
the detection of a Stop Condition.
5
R/W
Bus Error IE
Master/
Slave
Stop interrupt enable.
0 = Disabled.
1 = Enabled. An interrupt is generated on
the detection of a Bus Error.
6
R/W
I2C Pin Select
0 = P1[7], P1[5]
Master/
Slave
1 = P1[1], P1[0]
Bit 7: Reserved.
Bit 6: PSelect. With the default value of zero, the I2C pins
are P1[7] for clock and P1[5] for data. When this bit is set,
the pins for I2C switch to P1[1] for clock and P1[0] for data.
This bit may not be changed while either the Enable Master
or Enable Slave bits are set. However, the PSelect bit may
be set at the same time as the enable bits. The two sets of
pins I2C may be used on are not equivalent. The default set,
December 22, 2003
P1[7] and P1[5], are the preferred set. The alternate set,
P1[1] and P1[0], are provided so that I2C may be used with
8-pin PSoC parts.
If In-circuit System Serial Programming (ISSP) is to be used
and the alternate I2C pin set is also used, it is necessary to
take into account the interaction between the PSoC Test
Controller and the I2C bus. The interface requirements for
ISSP should be reviewed to ensure that they are not violated.
Even if ISSP is not going to be used, pins P1[1] and P1[0]
will respond differently to a POR or XRES event than other
IO pins. After an XRES, event both pins will be pulled down
to the ground by going into the resistive zero drive mode
before reaching the High-Z drive mode. After a POR event,
P1[0] will drive out a one, then go to the resistive zero state
for some time, and finally reach the High-Z drive mode state.
After POR, P1[1] will go into a resistive zero state for a while
before going to the High-Z drive mode.
Another issue with selecting the alternate I2C pins set is that
these pins are also the crystal pins. Therefore, a crystal may
not be used when the alternate I2C pin set is selected.
Bit 5: Bus Error IE (Interrupt Enable). This bit controls
whether the detection of a Bus Error will generate an interrupt. A Bus Error is typically a misplaced Start or Stop. See
the Bus Error status bit description for a definition.
This is an important interrupt with regards to Master operation. When there is a misplaced Start or Stop on the I2C bus
all Slave devices (including this device, if Slave mode is
enabled) will reset the bus interface and synchronize to this
signal. However, when the hardware detects a Bus Error in
Master mode operation, the device will release the bus and
transition to an idle state. In this case, a Master operation in
progress will never have any further status or interrupts
associated with it and therefore the Master may not be able
to determine the status of that transaction. An immediate
bus error interrupt will inform the Master that this transfer did
not succeed.
Bit 4: Stop IE (Interrupt Enable). When this bit is set, a
Master or Slave can interrupt on Stop detection. The status
bit associated with this interrupt is the Stop Status bit in the
Slave Status and Control register. When the Stop Status bit
transitions from ‘0’ to ‘1’, the interrupt is generated. It is
important to note that the Stop Status bit is not automatically
cleared. Therefore, if it is already set, no new interrupts will
be generated until it is cleared by firmware and a subsequent Stop condition is generated.
Bits 3 and 2: Clock Rate. The Clock Rate bits offer a
selection of four sampling and bit rates. All block clocking is
based on the SYSCLK input, which is nominally 24 MHz.
The sampling rate and the baud rate are determined as follows:
■
■
Sample Rate = SYSCLK/Pre-scale Factor
Baud Rate = 1/(Sample Rate X Samples per Bit)
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
265
26. I2C
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
The nominal values, when using the internal 24 MHz oscillator, are shown in Table 26-3.
When clocking the input with a frequency other than 24 MHz
(e.g., clocking the PSOC chip with an external clock), the
baud rates and sampling rates will scale accordingly.
Whether the block will work in a Standard mode or Fast
mode system depends on the sample rate. The sample rate
must be sufficient to resolve bus events, such as Start and
Stop conditions. (See the I2C Specification, Version 2.1, by
Phillips Semiconductor, for minimum Start and Stop hold
times.)
Table 26-3. I2C Clock Rates
Clock Rate [1:0]
I2C Mode
SYSCLK Pre-scale
Factor
Samples per Bit
Internal Sampling
Freq./Period
(24 MHz)
Master Baud Rate
(nominal)
Start/Stop Hold
Time
(8 clocks)
00b
Standard
/16
16
1.5 MHz/667 ns
93.75 kHz
5.3 us
01b
Fast
/4
16
6 MHz/167 ns
375 kHz
1.33 us
10b
Standard
/16
32
1.5 MHz/667 ns
46.8 kHz
10.7 us
11b
Reserved
Bit 1: Enable Master. When this bit is set, the Master Status and Control register is enabled (otherwise it is held in
reset) and I2C transfers can be initiated in Master mode.
When the Master is enabled and operating, the block will
clock the I2C bus at one of four baud rates, defined in the
Clock Rate register. When operating in Master mode, the
hardware is multi-master capable, implementing both clock
synchronization and arbitration. If the Slave Enable bit is not
set, the block will operate in Master Only mode. All external
Start conditions will be ignored (although the Bus Busy status bit will still keep track of bus activity). Block enable will
be synchronized to the SYSCLK clock input (see “Timing
Diagrams” on page 270).
Bit 0: Enable Slave. When the Slave is enabled, the block
generates an interrupt on any Start condition and an
address byte that it receives, which indicates the beginning
of an I2C transfer. When operating as a Slave, the block is
clocked from an external Master and therefore, will work at
any frequency up to the maximum defined by the currently
selected Clock Rate. The internal clock is only used in Slave
mode to ensure that there is adequate setup time from data
output to the next clock on the release of a Slave stall. When
the Enable Slave and Enable Master bits are both ‘0’, the
block is held in reset and all status is cleared. See
Figure 26-4 for a description of the interaction between the
Master/Slave Enable bits. Block enable will be synchronized
to the SYSCLK clock input (see “Timing Diagrams” on
page 270).
Table 26-4. Enable Master/Slave Block Operation
Enable
Master
No
Enable
Slave
No
The block is disconnected from the GPIO pins,
P1_5 and P1_7 (the pins may be used as general
purpose IO). When either the Master or Slave is
enabled, the GPIO pins are under control of the I2C
hardware and are unavailable.
All internal registers (except I2C_CFG) are held in
reset.
No
Yes
Slave Only Mode:
Any external Start condition will cause the block to
start receiving an address byte. Regardless of the
current state, any Start resets the interface and initiates a receive operation. Any Stop will cause the
block to revert to an idle state
The I2C_MSCR register is held in reset.
Yes
No
Master Only Mode:
In this mode, external Start conditions are ignored.
No Byte Complete interrupts on external traffic are
generated, but the Bus Busy status bit continues to
capture Start and Stop status and thus, may be
polled by the Master to determine if the bus is available.
Full multi-master capability is enabled, including
clock synchronization and arbitration.
The block will generate a clock based on the setting
in the Clock Rate register
Yes
Yes
For additional information, reference the I2C_CFG register
on page 125.
266
Block Operation
Disabled:
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
Master/Slave Mode:
In this mode, both Master and Slave may be operational. The block may be addressed as a Slave, but
firmware may also initiate Master mode transfers.
In this configuration, when a Master loses arbitration
during an address byte, the hardware will revert to
Slave mode and the received byte will generate a
Slave address interrupt.
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
26.3.2
26. I2C
I2C_SCR Register
Table 26-5. I2C_SCR Status and Control
Register (continued)
This register is the I2C status and control register and is
used to control both Master and Slave data transfer. It contains status bits for determining the state of the current I2C
transfer, and control bits, which determine the actions for the
next byte transfer. At the end of each byte transfer, the I2C
hardware will interrupt the host processor and stall the bus
on the subsequent low of the clock until the host intervenes
with the next command. This register may be read as many
times as necessary, but on a subsequent write, the bus stall
will be released and the current transfer will continue.
There are six status bits: Byte Complete, LRB, Address,
Stop Status, Lost Arb, and Bus Error. These bits have Read/
Clear (R/C) access, which means that they are set by hardware but may be cleared by a write of ‘0’ to the bit position.
Under certain conditions, status is cleared automatically by
the hardware. These cases are noted in Table 26-5.
There are two control bits: Transmit and ACK. These bits
have R/W access. These bits may also be cleared by hardware, as noted.
Bit
Access
Description
Mode
4
R/W
ACK
Master/
Slave
Acknowledge Out
0 = NACK the last received byte.
1 = ACK the last received byte.
This bit is automatically cleared by hardware on the following Byte Complete
event.
5
R/C
1 = A Stop condition was detected.
6
R/C
Access
Description
Mode
0
R/C
Byte Complete
Master/
Slave
Transmit Mode:
1 = 8 bits of data have been transmitted
and an ACK or NACK has been received.
Receive Mode:
1 = 8 bits of data have been received.
Any Start detect will automatically clear
this bit.
R/C
LRB
Last Received Bit. The value of the 9th bit
in a Transmit sequence, which is acknowledge bit from the receiver.
Master/
Slave
0 = Last transmitted byte was ACKed by
the receiver.
1 = Last transmitted byte was NACKed by
the receiver.
Any Start detect will automatically clear
this bit.
2
R/W
Transmit
Master/
Slave
0 = Receive Mode.
1 = Transmit Mode.
This bit is set by firmware to define the
direction of the byte transfer.
Any Start detect will automatically clear
this bit.
3
R/C
Address
1 = The transmitted or received byte is an
address.
This status bit must be cleared by firmware
with write of ‘0’ to the bit position.
December 22, 2003
Lost Arb
1 = Lost Arbitration.
Master/
Slave
Master
Only
This bit is set immediately on lost arbitration; however, it does not cause an interrupt. This status may be checked after the
following Byte Complete interrupt.
Any Start detect will automatically clear
this bit.
7
R/C
Bus Error
1 = A misplaced Start or Stop condition
was detected.
Bit
Master/
Slave
This status bit must be cleared by firmware
with write of ‘0’ to the bit position. It is
never cleared by the hardware.
Table 26-5. I2C_SCR Status and Control
Register
1
Stop Status
Master
Only
This status bit must be cleared by firmware
with write of ‘0’ to the bit position. It is
never cleared by the hardware.
Bit 7: Bus Error. The Bus Error status detects misplaced
Start or Stop conditions on the bus. These may be due to
noise, rogue devices, or other devices that are not yet synchronized with the I2C bus traffic. According to the I2C
specification mentioned previously, all compatible devices
must reset their interface on a received Start or Stop. This is
a natural thing to do in Slave mode, because a Start will initiate an address reception and a Stop will idle the Slave. In
the case of a Master, this event will force the Master to
release the bus and idle. However, since a Master does not
respond to external Start or Stop conditions, an immediate
interrupt on this event allows the Master to continue to keep
track of the bus state.
A bus error is defined as follows. A Start is only valid if the
block is idle (Master or Slave) or a Slave receiver is ready to
receive the first bit of a new byte after an ACK. Any other
timing for a Start condition causes the Bus Error bit to be
set. A Stop is only valid if the block is idle or a Slave receiver
is ready to receive the first bit of a new byte after an ACK.
Any other timing for a Stop condition causes the Bus Error
bit to be set.
Bit 6: Lost Arb. This bit is set when I2C bus contention is
detected, during a Master mode transfer. Contention will
occur when a Master is writing a ‘1’ to the SDA output line
and reading back a ‘0’ on the SDA input line at given sampling point. When this occurs, the block immediately
releases the SDA, but continues clocking to the end of the
current byte. On the resulting byte interrupt, firmware can
determine that arbitration was lost to another master.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
267
26. I2C
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
The sequence occurs differently between Master transmitter
and Master receiver. As a transmitter, the contention will
occur on a data bit. On the subsequent Byte Complete interrupt, the Lost Arbitration status will be set. In receiver mode,
the contention will occur on the ACK bit. The Master that
NACKed the last reception will lose the arbitration. However,
the hardware will shift in the next byte in response to the
winning Master’s ACK, so that a subsequent Byte Complete
interrupt occurs. At this point, the losing Master can read the
Lost Arbitration status. Contention is checked only at the
eight data bit sampling points and one ACK bit sampling
point.
Bit 5: Stop Status. Stop status is set on detection of an I2C
Stop condition. This bit is sticky, which means that it will
remain set until a ‘0’ is written back to it by the firmware.
This bit may only be cleared if Byte Complete status is set. If
the Stop Interrupt Enable bit is set, an interrupt will also be
generated on Stop detection. It is never automatically
cleared.
Using this bit, a Slave can distinguish between a previous
Stop or Restart on a given address byte interrupt. In Master
mode, this bit may be used in conjunction with the Stop IE
bit, to generate an interrupt when the bus is free. However,
in this case, the bit must have previously been cleared prior
to the reception of the Stop, in order to cause an interrupt.
Bit 4: ACK. This control bit defines the acknowledge data
bit that will be transmitted out in response to a received
byte. When receiving, a Byte Complete interrupt is generated after the eighth data bit is received. On the subsequent
write to this register to continue (or terminate) the transfer,
the state of this bit will determine the next bit of data that will
be transmitted. It is active high. A ‘1’ will send an ACK and a
‘0’ will send a NACK.
A Master Receiver normally terminates a transfer, by writing
a ‘0’ (NACK) to this bit. This releases the bus and automatically generates a Stop condition. A Slave Receiver may also
send a NACK, to inform the Master that it cannot receive
any more bytes.
Bit 3: Address. This bit is set when an address has been
received. This consists of a Start or Restart, and an address
byte. This bit applies to both master and slave.
In Slave mode, when this status is set, firmware will read the
received address from the data register and compare it with
its own address. If the address does not match, the firmware
will write a NACK indication to this register. No further interrupts will occur, until the next Address is received. If the
address does match, firmware must ACK the received byte,
then Byte Complete interrupts will be generated on subsequent bytes of the transfer.
This bit will also be set when address transmission is complete in Master mode. If a lost arbitration occurs during the
transmission of a Master address, indicated by the Lost Arb
bit, the block will revert to Slave mode if enabled. This bit
then signifies that the block is being addressed as a slave.
268
If Slave mode is not enabled, the Byte Complete interrupt
will still occur to inform the Master of Lost Arbitration.
Bit 2: Transmit. This bit sets the direction of the shifter for
a subsequent byte transfer. The shifter is always shifting in
data from the I2C bus, but a write of ‘1’ enables the output of
the shifter to drive the SDA output line. Since a write to this
register initiates the next transfer, data must be written to the
data register prior to writing this bit. In Receive mode, the
previously received data must have been read from the data
register before this write. In Slave mode, firmware derives
this direction from the R/W bit in the received slave address.
In Master mode, the firmware decides on the direction and
sets it accordingly.
This direction control is only valid for data transfers. The
direction of address bytes is determined by the hardware,
depending on the Master or Slave mode.
The Master Transmitter terminates a transfer by writing a
zero to the transmit bit. This releases the bus and automatically sends a Stop condition, or a Stop/Start or Restart,
depending on the I2C_MSCR control bits.
Bit 1: LRB (Last Received Bit). This is the last received
bit in response to a previously transmitted byte. In Transmit
mode, the hardware will send a byte from the data register
and clock in an acknowledge bit from the receiver. On the
subsequent byte complete interrupt, firmware will check the
value of this bit. A ‘0’ is the ACK value and a ‘1’ is a NACK
value. The meaning of the LRB depends on the current
operating mode.
Master Transmitter:
‘0’: ACK, the Slave has accepted the previous byte. The
Master may send another byte by first writing the byte to the
I2C_DR register and then setting the Transmit bit in the
I2C_SCR register. Optionally, the Master may clear the
transmit bit in the I2C_SCR register. This will automatically
send a Stop. If the Start or Restart bits are set in the
I2C_MSCR register, the Stop may be followed by a Start or
Restart.
‘1’: NACK, the Slave cannot accept any more bytes. A Stop
is automatically generated by the hardware on the subsequent write to the I2C_SCR register (regardless of the value
written). However, a Stop/Start or Restart condition may also
be generated, depending on whether firmware has set the
Start or Restart bits in the I2C_MSCR register.
Slave Transmitter:
‘0’: ACK, the Master wants to read another byte. The Slave
should load the next byte into the I2C_DR register and set
the transmit bit in the I2C_SCR register, to continue the
transfer.
‘1’: NACK, the Master is done reading bytes. The Slave will
revert to IDLE state on the subsequent I2C_SCR write
(regardless of the value written).
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
26. I2C
Bit 0: Byte Complete. The I2C hardware operates on a
byte basis. In Transmit mode, this bit is set and an interrupt
is generated at the end of nine bits (the transmitted byte +
the received ACK). In Receive mode, the bit is set after the
eight bits of data have been received. When this bit is set,
an interrupt is generated at these data sampling points,
which are associated with the SCL input clock rising (see
details in the Timing section). If the host responds with a
write back to this register before the subsequent falling edge
of SCL (which is approximately one-half bit time), the transfer will continue without interruption. However, if the host is
unable to respond within that time, the hardware will hold
the SCL line low, stalling the I2C bus. In both Master and
Slave mode, a subsequent write to the I2C_SCR register
will release the stall.
For additional information, reference the I2C_SCR register
on page 126.
26.3.3
I2C_DR Register
This register is the I2C data register and provides read/write
access to the shift register. It is not buffered and therefore,
writes and valid data reads may only occur at specific points
in the transfer. These cases are outlined as follows.
■
Master or Slave Receiver Data in the I2C_DR register
is only valid for reading, when the Byte Complete status
bit is set. Data bytes must be read from the register
before writing to the I2C_SCR register, which continues
the transfer.
■
Master Start or Restart Address bytes must be written
in I2C_DR before the Start or Restart bit is set in the
I2C_MSCR register, which causes the Start or Restart to
be generated and the address shifted out.
Master or Slave Transmitter Data bytes must be written to the I2C_DR register before the transmit bit is set in
the I2C_SCR register, which causes the transfer to continue.
■
For additional information, reference the I2C_DR register on
page 127.
26.3.4
I2C_MSCR Register
This register is the I2C master status and control register.
Table 26-6. I2C_MSCR Master Status and Control
Register
Bit
0
Access
R/W
Description
Mode
Start Gen
1 = Generate a Start condition and send a
byte (address) to the I2C bus.
Master
Only
This bit is cleared by hardware when the
Start generation is complete.
1
R/W
Restart Gen
Master
Only
1 = Generate a Restart condition.
This bit is cleared by hardware when the
Start generation is complete.
December 22, 2003
Table 26-6. I2C_MSCR Master Status and Control
Register (continued)
Bit
2
Access
RO
Description
Master Mode
This bit is set to ‘1’ when a start condition,
generated by this block, is detected and
reset to ‘0’ when a stop condition is
detected.
3
RO
Bus Busy
This bit is set to ‘1’ when any Start condition
is detected, and reset to ‘0’ when a Stop
condition is detected.
Mode
Master
Only
Master
Only
Bits 7 to 4: Reserved.
Bit 3: Bus Busy. This read only bit is set to ‘1’ by any Start
condition and reset to ‘0’ by a Stop condition. It may be
polled by firmware to determine when a bus transfer may be
initiated.
Bit 2: Master Mode. This bit indicates that the device is
operating as a Master. It is set in the detection of this block’s
Start condition and reset in the detection of the subsequent
Stop condition.
Bit 1: Restart Gen. This bit is only used at the end of a
Master transfer (as noted in Other Cases 1 and 2 above of
the Start Gen bit). If an address is loaded into the data register and this bit is set prior to NACKing (Master receiver) or
resetting the transmit bit (Master transmitter), or after a Master transmitter is NACKed by the Slave, a Restart condition
will be generated, followed by the transmission of the
address byte.
Bit 0: Start Gen. Before setting this bit, firmware must write
the address byte to send into the I2C_DR register. When
this bit is set, the Start condition is generated, followed
immediately by the transmission of the address byte. (No
control in the I2C_SCR register is needed for the Master to
initiate a transmission; the direction is inherently “transmit”.)
The bit is automatically reset to ‘0’ after the Start has been
generated.
There are three possible outcomes as a result of setting the
Start Gen bit:
1. The bus is free and the Start condition is generated successfully. A Byte Complete interrupt will be generated
after the Start and the address byte has been transmitted. If the address was ACKed by the receiver, the firmware may then proceed to send data bytes.
2. The Start command is too late. Another Master in a
Multi-Master environment has generated a valid Start
and the bus is busy. The resulting behavior depends
upon whether Slave mode is enabled.
Slave mode is enabled: A Start and address byte interrupt will be generated. When reading the I2C_MSCR,
the Master will see the Start Gen bit still set and the
I2C_SCR will have the Address bit set, indicating that
the block has been addressed as a Slave.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
269
26. I2C
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Slave mode is not enabled: The Start Gen bit will remain
set and the Start will be queued, until the bus becomes
free and the Start condition will be subsequently generated. An interrupt will be generated at a later time, when
the Start and address byte has been transmitted.
3. The Start is generated, but the Master loses arbitration
to another Master in a Multi-Master environment. The
resulting behavior depends upon whether Slave mode is
enabled.
Slave mode is enabled: A Start and address byte interrupt will be generated. When reading the I2C_MSCR,
the Master will see the Start Gen bit cleared, indicating
that the Start was generated. However, the Lost Arb bit
will be set in the I2C_SCR register. The Address status
will also be set, indicating that the block has been
addressed as a Slave. The firmware may then ACK or
NACK the address to continue the transfer.
Slave mode is not enabled: A Start and address byte
interrupt will be generated. The Start Gen bit will be
cleared and the Lost Arb bit will be set. The hardware
will wait for command input, stalling the bus if necessary.
In this case, the Master will clear the I2C_SCR register,
to release the bus and allow the transfer to continue, and
the block will idle.
Other cases where the Start bit may be used to generate a
Start condition are as follows:
1. When a Master is finished with a transfer, a NACK will be
written to the I2C_SCR register, in the case of the Master receiver, or the transmit bit will be cleared, in case of
a Master transmitter. Normally, the action will free the
stall and generate a Stop condition. However, if the Start
bit is set and an address is written into the data register
prior to the I2C_SCR write, a Stop, followed immediately
by a Start (minimum bus free time), will be generated. In
this way, messages may be chained.
2. When a Master transmitter is NACKed, an automatic
Stop condition is generated on the subsequent I2C_SCR
write. However, if the Start Gen bit has previously been
set, the Stop will be immediately followed by a Start conditon.
For additional information, reference the I2C_MSCR register
on page 128.
26.4
26.4.1
Timing Diagrams
Clock Generation
Figure 26-4 illustrates the I2C input clocking scheme. The
SYSCLK pin is an input into a four-stage ripple divider that
provides the baud rate selections. When the block is disabled, all internal state is held in a reset state. When either
the Master or Slave Enable bits in the I2C_CFG register are
set, the reset is synchronously released and the clock generation is enabled. Two taps from the ripple divider are
selectable (/4, /16) from the Clock Rate bits in the I2C_CFG
register. As an additional option, the block may be clocked
directly from SYSCLK, to achieve the highest baud rate. If
any of the two divider taps is selected, that clock is resynchronized to SYSCLK. The resulting clock is routed to all of
the synchronous elements in the design.
I/O W R ITE
SYSC LK
E N ABLE
BLO C K R ESET
2
4
8
16
R ESYN C CLO C K
D efault 16
Tw o SYSC LKS to first block clock.
Figure 26-4. I2C Input Clocking
270
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
26.4.2
26. I2C
Enable and Command Synchronization
Figure 26-5 illustrates an all block reset (except for the
I2C_CFG register) is asserted when the block is disabled.
When either the Enable Master or Enable Slave bit is set,
the block reset is negated on the next positive edge of
SYSCLK, which ensures a full SYSCLK cycle of setup time
on the next clock edge.
Figure 26-6 illustrates a Start Gen command or I2C_SCR
write after Byte Complete is resynchronized to the following
block clock edge. I2C processing continues on the selected
block clock following this resync clock edge.
IOW
BLOCK
CLOCK
IOW
SYSCLK
CMD_GO
I2C_RESET
STATE
PRESCALER
IDLE or WAIT
NEXT STATE
Figure 26-6. I2C Command
CLOCK
Figure 26-5. I2C Enable
26.4.3
Basic Input/Output Timing
Figure 26-7 illustrates basic input output timing that is valid
for both 16x sampling and 32x sampling. For 16x sampling,
N=4 and for 32x sampling N=12. N is derived from the half
CLOCK
SCL
SCL_IN
CLK CTR
SHIFT
SDA_IN
SDA_OUT
LOST ARB
STATUS
N
0
1
2
bit rate sampling of eight and 16 clocks, respectively, minus
the input latency of three (count of 4 and 12 correspond to 5
and 13 clocks).
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
N
0
1
2
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
N
0
Figure 26-7. Basic Input/Output Timing
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
271
26. I2C
26.4.4
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Status Timing
Figure 26-8 illustrates the interrupt timing for Byte Complete, which occurs on the positive edge of the ninth clock
(byte + ACK/NACK) in Transmit mode and on the positive
edge of the eighth clock in Receive mode. There is a maximum of three cycles of latency due to the input synchronizer/filter circuit. As shown, the interrupt occurs on the
clock following a valid SCL positive edge input transition
(after the synchronizers). The Address bit is set with the
same timing, but only after a Slave address has been
received. The LRB (Last Received Bit) status is also set with
the same timing, but only on the ninth bit after a transmitted
byte.
Max
3 Cycles
Latency
Figure 26-9 shows the timing for Stop status. This bit is set
(and the interrupt occurs) two clocks after the synchronized
and filtered SDA line transitions to a ‘1’, when the SCL line is
high.
CLOCK
SCL
SDA
SDA_IN
(Synced)
STOP DETECT
STOP IRQ
and STATUS
CLOCK
Figure 26-9. Stop Status and Interrupt Timing
SCL
Figure 26-10 illustrates the timing for bus error interrupts.
Bus Error Status (and interrupt) occurs one cycle after the
internal Start or Stop detect (two cycles after the filtered and
synced SDA input transition).
SCL_IN
(Synched)
IRQ
Transmit: 9th positive edge SCL
Receive: 8th positive edge SCL
Figure 26-8. Byte Complete, Address, LRB Timing
Misplaced Start
CLOCK
SCL
SDA
SDA_IN
(Synced)
START DETECT
BUS ERROR
and INTERRUPT
Misplaced Stop
CLOCK
SCL
SDA
SDA_IN
(Synced)
STOP DETECT
BUS ERROR
and INTERRUPT
Figure 26-10. Bus Error Interrupt Timing
272
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
26.4.5
26. I2C
Master Start Timing
When firmware writes the Start Gen command, hardware
resynchronizes this bit to SYSCLK, to ensure a minimum of
a full SYSCLK of setup time to the next clock edge. When
the Start is initiated, the SCL line is left high for 6/14 clocks
(corresponding to 16/32X sampling rates). During this initial
SCL high period, if an external Start is detected, the Start
sequence is aborted and the block returns to an IDLE state.
However, on the next Stop detection, the block will automatically initiate a new Start sequence.
I/O WRITE
CLOCK
CMD START
SDA
SCL
5 Clocks
START
DETECT
6/14 Clocks
8/16 Clocks
8/16 Clocks
to next SCL high
Figure 26-11. Basic Master Start Timing
CLOCK
SCL
SDA
SDA_IN
(Synced)
STOP/START
DETECT
STOP
START
BUS BUSY
SCL_OUT
8 Clocks
8 Clocks
SDA_OUT
OTHER
MASTER SDA
7 Clocks / 4.7 µs
6 Clocks / 4.0 µs
Minimum Bus Free
Minimum Start Hold
OTHER
MASTER SCL
Figure 26-12. Start Timing with a Pending Start
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
273
26. I2C
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
CLOCK
SCL
SDA
SDA_IN
(Synced)
STOP
STOP/START
DETECT
START
SCL_OUT
SDA_OUT
2 Clocks
5/13 Clocks
8/16 Clocks
Figure 26-13. Master Stop/Start Chaining
26.4.6
Master Restart Timing
8/16
8/16
8/16
8/16
SCL
SDA
MASTER TX: RX ACK/NACK
MASTER RX: TX NACK
Figure 26-14. Master Restart Timing
26.4.7
Master Stop Timing
Figure 26-15 shows basic Master Stop timing. In order to
generate a Stop, the SDA line is first pulled low, in accordance with the basic SDA output timing. Then, after the full
low of SCL is completed and the SCL line is pulled high, the
SDA line remains low for a full one-half bit time before it is
pulled high to signal the Stop.
CLOCK
SCL
SCL_IN
2 Clocks
SDA
8/16 Clocks
8/16 Clocks
Figure 26-15. Master Stop Timing
274
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
26.4.8
26. I2C
Master/Slave Stall Timing
When a Byte Complete interrupt occurs, the host firmware
must respond with a write to the I2C_SCR register to continue the transfer (or terminate the transfer). The interrupt
occurs two clocks after the rising edge of SCL_IN (see Status Timing). As illustrated in Figure 26-16, firmware has until
one clock after the falling edge of SCL_IN to write to the
I2C_SCR register; otherwise, a stall will occur. Once stalled,
the IO write will release the stall. The setup time between
data output and the next rising edge of SCL will always be
N-1 clocks.
I/O WRITE
CLOCK
SCL
SCL_IN
(Synced)
1 Clocks
N-1 Clocks
SDA_OUT
SCL_OUT
No STALL
STALL
Figure 26-16. Master/Slave Stall Timing
26.4.9
Master Lost Arbitration Timing
Figure 26-17 shows a Lost Arbitration sequence. When contention is detected at the input (SDA_IN) sampling point, the
SDA output is immediately released to an IDLE1 state. However, the master will continue clocking until the Byte Complete interrupt, which is processed in the usual way. Any
write to the I2C_SCR register will result in the master reverting to an IDLE state, one clock after the next positive edge
of the SCL_IN clock.
Next Byte or Stop
SDA
B4
B5
B6
B7
ACK
SDA_OUT
SCL
SCL_OUT
On input detection (SCL_IN) of this
positive edge, the device reverts to an
IDLE state on the following block clock.
IRQ
IOW to SCR
Contention detected at
data sampling point.
Regardless of low timing (whether you stall or not),
the device counts out the following IOW of the clock.
Figure 26-17. Lost Arbitration Timing (Transmitting Address or Data)
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
275
26. I2C
26.4.10
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Master Clock Synchronization
Figure 26-18 shows the timing associated with Master clock
synchronization. Clock synchronization is always operational, even if it is the only Master on the bus. In which case,
it is synchronizing to its own clock. In the wired AND bus, an
SCL output of ‘0’ will be seen by all Masters. When the hardware asserts a ‘0’ to the output, it is immediately fed back
from the chip pin to the input synchronizer for the SCL input.
The counter value (depending on the sampling rate) takes
into account the worst case latency for input synchronization
of three clocks, giving a net period of 8/16 clocks for both
high and low time. This results in an overall clocking rate of
16/32 clocks per bit.
In Multi-Master environments, when the hardware outputs a
‘1’ on the SCL output, if any other master is still asserting a
‘0’, the clock counter will hold until the SCL input line
matches the ‘1’ on the SCL output line. When matched, the
remainder of the high time is counted down. In this way, the
Master with the fastest frequency determines the high time
of the clock and the Master with the lowest frequency determines the low time of the clock.
Sync and
Filter
CLOCK
SCL
SCL_IN
N
0
1
2
3
...
N
0
1
2
3
SCL_OUT
Hold off counting until
the Input Clock is equal
to the Output Clock
Figure 26-18. Master Clock Synchronization
276
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
27. POR and LVD
This chapter briefly discusses the POR and LVD circuits and their associated registers.
Table 27-1. POR and LVD Registers
Address
Name
1,E3h
VLT_CR
1,E4h
VLT_CMP
27.1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
PORLEV[1:0]
Bit 3
Bit 2
LVDTBEN
Bit 1
LVD
Architectural Description
Power-on-Reset (POR) and Low Voltage Detect (LVD) circuits provide protection against low voltage conditions. The
POR function senses Vdd and holds the system in reset,
until the magnitude of Vdd will support operation to spec.
The LVD function senses Vdd and provides an interrupt to
the system when Vdd falls below a selected threshold.
Other outputs and status bits are provided to indicate important voltage trip levels.
Bit 0
VM[2:0]
Access
RW : 00
PPOR
R : 00
For additional information, reference the VLT_CR register
on page 168.
27.2.2
VLT_CMP Register
Bits 7 and 2: Reserved.
Bit 1: LVD. LVD reads the state of the low voltage detect
comparator. The trip point for LVD is set by VM[2:0] in the
VLT_CR register.
This block contains two registers: VLT_CR and VLT_CMP
(read only status bits).
Bit 0: PPOR. The PPOR bit reads back the state of the
PPOR output. This can only be meaningfully read with PORLEV[1:0] set to disable PPOR. In that case, the PPOR status bit shows the comparator state directly.
27.2.1
For additional information, reference the VLT_CMP register
on page 169.
27.2
Register Definitions
VLT_CR Register
The VLT_CR register is cleared by all resets, which can
cause reset-cycling during very slow supply ramps to 5V,
when the POR Range is set for the 5V range. This is
because the reset will clear the POR range setting back to
3V and a new boot/start-up occurs (possibly many times).
The user can manage this with sleep mode and/or reading
voltage status bits, if such cycling is an issue.
Bits 7 and 6: Reserved.
Bits 5 and 4: PORLEV[1:0]. PORLEV[1:0] sets the Vdd
level at which PPOR switches.
Bit 3: LVDTBEN. LVDTBEN is AND’ed with LVD to produce a throttle-back signal that reduces CPU clock speed
when low voltage conditions are detected.
Bits 2, 1, and 0: VM[2:0]. VM[2:0] sets the Vdd level of the
LVD Comparator switch.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
277
27. POR and LVD
278
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
28. Internal Voltage Reference
This chapter briefly discusses the Internal Voltage Reference and its associated register. The internal voltage reference provides an absolute value of 1.3V to a variety of subsystems in the PSoC device.
Table 28-1. Internal Voltage Reference Register
Address
1,EAh
28.1
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
BDG_TR
Bit 4
Architectural Description
The internal voltage reference is made up of two blocks: a
bandgap voltage generator and a buffer with sample and
hold. The bandgap voltage generator is a typical (VBE + K
VT) design.
The buffer circuit provides gain to the bandgap voltage, to
produce a 1.30V reference. A simplified schematic is illustrated in Figure 28-1. The connection between amplifier and
capacitor is made through a CMOS switch, allowing the reference voltage to be used by the system while the reference
circuit is powered down. The voltage reference is trimmed to
1.30V at room temperature.
VBG
+
-
Bit 3
Bit 2
TC[1:0]
S+H
VREF
Bit 1
Bit 0
V[3:0]
28.2
Access
RW:00
Register Definitions
The Internal Voltage Reference is trimmed for gain and temperature coefficient with a single write-only register,
BDG_TR.
28.2.1
BDG_TR Register
Bits 7 and 6: Reserved.
Bits 5 and 4: TC[1:0]. These bits are for setting the temperature coefficient inside the bandgap voltage generator.
10b is the design center for 0 TC.
Bits 3 to 0: V[3:0]. These bits are for setting the gain in the
reference buffer. Sixteen steps of 4 mV are available. 1000b
is the design center for 1.30V.
For additional information, reference the BDG_TR register
on page 172.
Figure 28-1. Voltage Reference Schematic
A temperature proportional voltage is also produced in this
block for use in temperature sensing.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
279
28. Internal Voltage Reference
280
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
29. System Resets
This chapter discusses the System Resets and its associated registers. The M8C supports several types of resets. The various resets are designed to provide error-free operation during power up for any voltage ramping profile, to allow for user-supplied external reset and to provide recovery from errant code operation.
Table 29-1. System Reset Registers
Address
Name
0,FEh
CPU_SCR1
0,FFh
CPU_SCR0
Bit 7
Bit 6
GIES
Bit 5
WDRS
Bit 4
Bit 3
PORS
Bit 2
Sleep
Bit 1
Bit 0
Access
IRAMDIS
RW : 00
STOP
RW : XX
LEGEND
XX: The reset value is 10h after POR/XRES and 20h after a watchdog reset.
When reset is initiated, all registers are restored to their
default states. Minor exceptions are explained below.
The following types of resets can occur:
■
■
■
■
Bit 6: Reserved.
Power-on Reset (POR). This occurs at low supply voltage and is comprised of multiple sources.
External Reset (XRES). This active high reset is driven
into the chip, on parts that contain an Xres pin.
Watchdog Reset (WDR). This optional reset occurs
when a timer expires, before being cleared by user firmware.
Internal Reset (IRES). This occurs during the boot
sequence, if the SROM code determines that Flash
reads are not valid.
The occurrence of a reset is recorded in the Status and Control Register (CPU_SCR, for POR/XRES/WDR), or in the
System Status and Control Register 1 (CPU_SCR1, for
IRESS). Firmware can interrogate these registers to determine the cause of a reset.
29.1
29.1.1
Register Definitions
Bit 5: WDRS. The WatchDog Reset Status bit is normally
zero, but set whenever a watchdog reset occurs. The bit is
readable and clearable by writing a zero to its bit position in
the CPU_SCR0 register. This bit may not be set.
Bit 4: PORS. The Power-On Reset Status (PORS) bit and
watchdog enable bit will be set automatically by a POR or
external reset. If the bit is cleared by user code, the watchdog timer will be enabled. Once cleared, the only way to
reset the PORS bit is to go through a POR or external reset.
Thus, there is no way to disable the watchdog timer, other
than to go through a POR or external reset.
Bit 3: Sleep. The Sleep bit is used to enter low power
Sleep mode when set, as described in this chapter.
Bits 2 and 1: Reserved.
CPU_SCR0 Register
The bits of the CPU_SCR0 register are used to convey status and control of events for various functions of a PSoC
device.
Bit 7: GIES. The Global Interrupt Enable Status bit is a
read only status bit and its use is discouraged. The GIES bit
is a legacy bit which was used to provide the ability to read
the GIE bit of the CPU_F register. However, the CPU_F register is now readable. When this bit is set, it indicates that
December 22, 2003
the GIE bit in the CPU_F register is also set which, in turn,
indicates that the microprocessor will service interrupts.
Bit 0: STOP. The STOP bit is readable and writeable.
When set, the PSoC M8C will stop executing code until a
reset event occurs. This can be either a POR, watchdog
reset, or external reset. If an application wants to stop code
execution until a reset, the preferred method would be to
use the HALT instruction rather than a register write to this
bit.
For additional information, reference the CPU_SCR0 register on page 144.
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
281
29. System Resets
29.1.2
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
CPU_SCR1 Register
29.2.3
The CPU_SCR1 register is used to convey status and control of events related to internal resets and watchdog reset.
Bits 7 to 1: Reserved.
Bit 0: IRAMDIS. The Initialize RAM Disable bit is a control
bit that is readable and writeable. The default value for this
bit is 0, which indicates that the maximum amount of SRAM
should be initialized on watchdog reset to a value of 00h.
When the bit is set, the minimum amount of SRAM is initialized after a watchdog reset. For more information on this bit,
see the “SROM Function Descriptions” on page 46 in the
SROM chapter.
Watchdog Timer Reset (WDR)
The user has the option to enable the WDR, by clearing the
PORS bit in the CPU_SCR0 register. Once the PORS bit is
cleared, the Watchdog Timer cannot be disabled. The only
exception to this is if a POR/XRES event takes place, which
will disable the WDR. See “Watchdog Timer (WDT)” on
page 79 for details of the watchdog operation.
For additional information, reference the CPU_SCR1 register on page 143.
When the watchdog timer expires, a watchdog event occurs
resulting in the reset sequence. Some WDR unique items
are as follows.
■ Chip reset asserts for one cycle of the CLK32K clock (at
its reset state).
■ The IMO is not halted during or after WDR, i.e., the part
does not go through a low power phase.
■ CPU operation re-starts one CLK32K cycle after the
internal reset de-asserts (see Figure 29-2).
29.2
WDR configures register reset status bits as shown in
Table 29-2.
29.2.1
Timing Diagrams
Power On Reset (POR)
A Power-on Reset (POR) is triggered whenever the supply
voltage is below the POR trip point. POR ends once the supply voltage rises above this voltage. Refer to the POR and
LVD chapter for more information on the operation of the
POR block.
POR consists of two pieces: an imprecise POR (IPOR) and
a Precision POR (PPOR). ‘POR’ refers to the OR of these
two functions. IPOR has coarser accuracy and its trip point
is typically lower than PPOR’s trip point. PPOR is derived
from a circuit that is calibrated (during boot), for very accurate location of the POR trip point.
During POR (POR=1), the IMO is powered off for low power
during start-up. Once POR de-asserts, the IMO is started
(see Figure 29-1).
POR configures register reset status bits as shown in
Table 29-2. PPOR does not affect the BandGap Trim Register (BDG_TR), but IPOR does reset this register.
29.2.2
External Reset (XRES)
A XRES reset is caused by pulling the Xres pin high. The
Xres pin has an always-on pull down resistor, so it does not
require an external pull down for operation and can be tied
directly to ground or left open. Behavior after XRES is similar to POR.
During XRES (XRES=1), the IMO is powered off for low
power during start-up. Once XRES de-asserts, the IMO is
started (see Figure 29-1).
XRES configures register reset status bits as shown in
Table 29-2.
282
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
29. System Resets
POR (IPOR followed by PPOR): Reset while POR high (IMO off), then 511(+)
cycles (IMO on), and then CPU reset released. XRES is the same, with N=8.
CLK32
IPOR
PPOR
Reset
Sleep Timer
(Follows POR / XRES)
0
0
1
511
N=512
IMO PD
IMO (not to scale)
CPU Reset
PPOR (with no IPOR): Reset while PPOR high and to the end of the next
32K cycle (IMO off); 1 cycle IMO on before CPU reset released. Note that at
the 5V level, PPOR will tend to be brief, because the reset clears the POR
range register (VLT_CR) back to the default 3V setting.
CLK32
PPOR
Reset
Sleep Timer
0
1
2
IMO PD
IMO (not to scale)
CPU Reset
XRES: Reset while XRES high (IMO off), then 7(+) cycles (IMO on), and then
CPU reset released.
CLK32
XRES
Reset
Sleep Timer
0
1
2
7
8
IMO PD
IMO (not to scale)
CPU Reset
Figure 29-1. Key Signals During POR and XRES
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
283
29. System Resets
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
WDR: Reset 1 cycle; then one additional cycle before CPU reset released.
CLK32
Reset
Sleep Timer
0
IMO PD
(Stays low)
1
2
IMO (not to scale)
CPU Reset
IRES: Reset 1 cycle; then 2048 additional cycles low power hold-off,
then 1 cycle with IMO on before CPU reset released.
CLK32
Reset
0
Sleep Timer
1
2
N=2048
IMO PD
IMO (not to scale)
CPU Reset
Figure 29-2. Key Signals During WDR and IRES
29.2.4
Reset Details
Timing and functionality details are summarized in Table 292. Figure 29-1 shows some of the relevant signals for IPOR,
PPOR, and XRES.
Table 29-2. Details of Functionality for Various Resets
Item
IPOR (part of POR)
PPOR (part of POR)
XRES
WDR
While POR=1
While PPOR=1, plus
30-60 us (1-2 clocks)
While XRES=1
30 us (1 clock)
Low Power (IMO off) during
reset?
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Low Power Wait
following Reset
No
No
No
No
512*
1
8*
1
All
All, except PPOR does not
reset Bandgap Trim Register
All
All
Set PORS
Clear WDRS
Clear IRAMDIS
Set PORS
Set PORS
Clear WDRS
Clear IRAMDIS
Set WDRS
On
On
On
On
Reset Length
CLK32K Cycles from end of
Reset to CPU reset deasserts**
Register Reset
(see next line for CPU_SCR,
CPU_SCR1)
Reset status bits in
CPU_SCR, CPU_SCR1
Bandgap Power
* This count can be up to one CLK32K cycle less, depending on relative timing between the reset and the CLK32K clock.
** CPU reset is released after synchronization with CPU Clock.
*** Note If IPOR and PPOR occur together on a power up, key acquire will occur due to the IPOR.
284
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
29.3
29. System Resets
Power Consumption
The ILO block drives the CLK32K clock used to time most
events during the reset sequence. This clock is powered
down by IPOR, but not by any other reset. The sleep timer
provides interval timing.
While POR or XRES assert, the IMO is powered off to
reduce start-up power consumption.
During and following IRES (for 64 ms nominally), the IMO is
powered off for low average power, during slow supply
ramps.
During and after POR or XRES, the bandgap circuit is powered up.
Following IRES, the bandgap circuit is only powered up
occasionally, to refresh the sampled bandgap voltage value.
This sampling follows the same process used during sleep
mode.
The IMO is always on for at least one CLK32K cycle, before
CPU reset is de-asserted.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
285
29. System Resets
286
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
SECTION G
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The Electrical Specifications section presents the DC and AC electrical specifications of the PSoC device. Specifications are
valid for -40oC ≤ TA ≤ 85oC and TJ ≤ 100oC as specified, except where noted. Specifications for devices running at 24 MHz
are valid at -40oC ≤ TA ≤ 70oC and TJ ≤ 82oC.
5.25
4.75
Voltage
3.00
93 kHz
Frequency
12 MHz
24 MHz
Voltage Frequency Graph
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
287
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
The following table lists the units of measure used in this section.
Symbol
Units of Measure
Symbol
Units of Measure
µs
microsecond
µV
microvolts
o
degree Celsius
AC
alternating current
dB
decibels
DC
direct current
mA
milliampere
fF
femto Farad
ms
millisecond
Hz
hertz
mV
millivolts
k
kilo, 1000
ns
nanosecond
K
210, 1024
nV
nanovolts
KB
1024 bytes
Ω
ohm
Kbit
1024 bits
pF
pico Farad
kHz
kilohertz
pp
peak-to-peak
kΩ
kilohm
ppm
parts per million
MHz
megahertz
sps
samples per second
MΩ
megaohm
σ
sigma: one standard deviation
µA
microampere
V
volts
C
µVrms
microvolts root-mean-square
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Symbol
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
TSTG
Storage Temperature
-65
–
+100
o
TA
Ambient Temperature with Power Applied
-40
–
+85
oC
Vdd
Supply Voltage on Vdd Relative to Vss
-0.5
–
+6.0
V
VIO
DC Input Voltage
Vss-0.5
–
Vdd+0.5
V
–
DC Voltage Applied to Tri-state
Vss-0.5
–
Vdd+0.5
V
IMIO
Maximum Current into any Port Pin
-25
–
+50
mA
IMAIO
Maximum Current into any Port Pin Configured as
Analog Driver
-50
–
+50
mA
–
Static Discharge Voltage
2000
–
–
V
–
Latch-up Current
–
–
200
mA
C
Notes
Higher storage temperatures will reduce data
retention time.
Operating Temperature
Operating Temperature
Symbol
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
TA
Ambient Temperature
-40
–
+85
o
TJ
Junction Temperature
-40
–
+100
oC
288
Notes
C
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
The temperature rise from ambient to junction is package specific. See “Thermal
Impedances” on page 30. The user must
limit the power consumption to comply with
this requirement.
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DC Electrical Characteristics
DC Chip-Level Specifications
The following table lists guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
DC Chip-Level Specifications
Symbol
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Notes
Vdd
Supply Voltage
3.00
–
5.25
V
IDD
Supply Current
–
5
8
mA
Conditions are 5.0V, 25 oC, 3 MHz, 48 MHz
disabled. VC1=1.5 MHz, VC2=93.75 kHz,
VC3=93.75 kHz.
ISB
Sleep (Mode) Current with POR, LVD, Sleep Timer,
and WDT.a
–
3
6.5
µA
Conditions are with internal slow speed oscillator, Vdd = 3.3 V, -40 oC <=TA <= 55 oC.
ISBH
Sleep (Mode) Current with POR, LVD, Sleep Timer,
and WDT.a
–
4
25
µA
Conditions are with internal slow speed oscillator, Vdd = 3.3 V, 55 oC < TA <= 85 oC.
ISBXTL
Sleep (Mode) Current with POR, LVD, Sleep Timer,
and WDT.a
–
4
7.5
µA
Conditions are with properly loaded, 1 uW
max, 32.768 kHz crystal. Vdd = 3.3 V, -40 oC
<= TA <= 55 oC.
ISBXTLH
Sleep (Mode) Current with POR, LVD, Sleep Timer,
and WDT.a
–
5
26
µA
Conditions are with properly loaded, 1 uW
max, 32.768 kHz crystal. Vdd = 3.3 V, 55 oC
< TA <= 85 oC.
VREF
Reference Voltage (Bandgap)
1.275
1.3
1.325
V
Trimmed for appropriate Vdd.
a. Standby current includes all functions (POR, LVD, WDT, Sleep Time) needed for reliable system operation. This should be compared with devices that have similar
functions enabled.
DC General Purpose IO (GPIO) Specifications
The following table lists guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
DC GPIO Specifications
Symbol
Description
Min
5.6
Max
8
Units
Notes
kΩ
Pull up Resistor
RPD
Pull down Resistor
4
5.6
8
kΩ
VOH
High Output Level
Vdd - 1.0
–
–
V
IOH = 10 mA, Vdd = 4.75 to 5.25V (80 mA
maximum combined IOH budget)
VOL
Low Output Level
–
–
0.75
V
IOL = 25 mA, Vdd = 4.75 to 5.25V (150 mA
maximum combined IOL budget)
VIL
Input Low Level
–
–
0.8
V
Vdd = 3.0 to 5.5
VIH
Input High Level
2.2
–
V
Vdd = 3.0 to 5.5
VH
Input Hysterisis
–
60
–
mV
IIL
Input Leakage (Absolute Value)
–
1
–
nA
Gross tested to 1 µA.
CIN
Capacitive Load on Pins as Input
–
3.5
10
pF
Package and pin dependent. Temp = 25oC.
COUT
Capacitive Load on Pins as Output
–
3.5
10
pF
Package and pin dependent. Temp = 25oC.
December 22, 2003
4
Typ
RPU
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
289
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DC Operational Amplifier Specifications
The following tables list guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
The Operational Amplifier is a component of both the Analog Continuous Time PSoC blocks and the Analog Switched Cap
PSoC blocks. The guaranteed specifications are measured in the Analog Continuous Time PSoC block. Typical parameters
apply to 5V at 25°C and are for design guidance only.
5V DC Operational Amplifier Specifications
Symbol
VOSOA
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Notes
Input Offset Voltage (absolute value) Low Power
–
1.6
10
mV
Input Offset Voltage (absolute value) Mid Power
–
1.3
8
mV
Input Offset Voltage (absolute value) High Power
–
1.2
7.5
mV
TCVOSOA
Average Input Offset Voltage Drift
–
7.0
35.0
µV/oC
IEBOA
Input Leakage Current (Port 0 Analog Pins)
–
20
–
pA
Gross tested to 1 µA.
CINOA
Input Capacitance (Port 0 Analog Pins)
–
4.5
9.5
pF
Package and pin dependent. Temp = 25oC.
VCMOA
Common Mode Voltage Range
0.0
–
Vdd
V
Common Mode Voltage Range (high power or high
opamp bias)
0.5
–
Vdd-0.5
The common-mode input voltage range is
measured through an analog output buffer.
The specification includes the limitations
imposed by the characteristics of the analog
output buffer.
–
–
dB
Specification is applicable at high power. For
all other bias modes (except high power,
high opamp bias), minimum is 60 dB.
GOLOA
VOHIGHOA
VOLOWOA
ISOA
PSRROA
290
Open Loop Gain
Power=Low
60
Power=Medium
60
Power=High
80
High Output Voltage Swing (worst case internal
load)
Power=Low
Vdd-0.2
–
–
V
Power=Medium
Vdd-0.2
–
–
V
Power=High
Vdd-0.5
–
–
V
Power=Low
–
–
0.2
V
Power=Medium
–
–
0.2
V
Power=High
–
–
0.5
V
Power=Low
–
150
200
µA
Power=Low, Opamp Bias=High
–
300
400
µA
Power=Medium
–
600
800
µA
Power=Medium, Opamp Bias=High
–
1200
1600
µA
Power=High
–
2400
3200
µA
Power=High, Opamp Bias=High
–
4600
6400
µA
Supply Voltage Rejection Ratio
60
–
–
dB
Low Output Voltage Swing (worst case internal
load)
Supply Current (including associated AGND
buffer)
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.3V DC Operational Amplifier Specifications
Symbol
VOSOA
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Input Offset Voltage (absolute value) Low Power
–
1.65
10
mV
Input Offset Voltage (absolute value) Mid Power
–
1.32
8
mV
Notes
High Power is 5 Volt Only
TCVOSOA
Average Input Offset Voltage Drift
–
7.0
35.0
µV/oC
IEBOA
Input Leakage Current (Port 0 Analog Pins)
–
20
–
pA
Gross tested to 1 µA.
CINOA
Input Capacitance (Port 0 Analog Pins)
–
4.5
9.5
pF
Package and pin dependent. Temp = 25oC.
VCMOA
Common Mode Voltage Range
0.2
–
Vdd-0.2
V
The common-mode input voltage range is
measured through an analog output buffer.
The specification includes the limitations
imposed by the characteristics of the analog output buffer.
GOLOA
Open Loop Gain
–
–
dB
Specification is applicable at high power.
For all other bias modes (except high
power, high opamp bias), minimum is 60
dB.
VOHIGHOA
VOLOWOA
ISOA
PSRROA
Power=Low
60
Power=Medium
60
Power=High
80
High Output Voltage Swing (worst case internal load)
Power=Low
Vdd-0.2
–
–
V
Power=Medium
Vdd-0.2
–
–
V
Power=High is 5V only
Vdd-0.2
–
–
V
Power=Low
–
–
0.2
V
Power=Medium
–
–
0.2
V
Power=High
–
–
0.2
V
Power=Low
–
150
200
µA
Power=Low, Opamp Bias=High
–
300
400
µA
Power=Medium
–
600
800
µA
Power=Medium, Opamp Bias=High
–
1200
1600
µA
Power=High
–
2400
3200
µA
Power=High, Opamp Bias=High
–
4600
6400
µA
Supply Voltage Rejection Ratio
50
–
–
dB
Low Output Voltage Swing (worst case internal load)
Supply Current (including associated AGND buffer)
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
291
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DC Analog Output Buffer Specifications
The following tables list guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
5V DC Analog Output Buffer Specifications
Symbol
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
VOSOB
Input Offset Voltage (Absolute Value)
–
3
12
mV
TCVOSOB
Average Input Offset Voltage Drift
–
+6
–
µV/°C
VCMOB
Common-Mode Input Voltage Range
.5
–
Vdd - 1.0
V
ROUTOB
Output Resistance
Power = Low
–
1
–
Ω
Power = High
–
1
–
Ω
.5 x Vdd + 1.1
–
–
V
.5 x Vdd + 1.1
–
–
V
Power = Low
–
–
.5 x Vdd - 1.3
V
Power = High
–
–
.5 x Vdd - 1.3
V
Power = Low
–
1.1
5.1
mA
Power = High
–
2.6
8.8
mA
Supply Voltage Rejection Ratio
60
–
–
dB
VOHIGHOB
High Output Voltage Swing (Load = 32 ohms to
Vdd/2)
Power = Low
Power = High
VOLOWOB
ISOB
PSRROB
Notes
Low Output Voltage Swing (Load = 32 ohms to
Vdd/2)
Supply Current Including Bias Cell (No Load)
3.3V DC Analog Output Buffer Specifications
Symbol
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
VOSOB
Input Offset Voltage (Absolute Value)
–
3
12
mV
TCVOSOB
Average Input Offset Voltage Drift
–
+6
–
µV/°C
VCMOB
Common-Mode Input Voltage Range
.5
-
Vdd - 1.0
V
ROUTOB
Output Resistance
Power = Low
–
1
–
Ω
Power = High
–
1
–
Ω
Power = Low
.5 x Vdd + 1.0
–
–
V
Power = High
.5 x Vdd + 1.0
–
–
V
Power = Low
–
–
.5 x Vdd - 1.0
V
Power = High
–
–
.5 x Vdd - 1.0
V
VOHIGHOB
VOLOWOB
ISOB
High Output Voltage Swing (Load = 1K ohms to
Vdd/2)
Low Output Voltage Swing (Load = 1K ohms to
Vdd/2)
Supply Current Including Bias Cell (No Load)
0.8
2.0
mA
Power = High
–
2.0
4.3
mA
Supply Voltage Rejection Ratio
50
–
–
dB
Power = Low
PSRROB
292
Notes
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DC Analog Reference Specifications
The following tables list guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
The guaranteed specifications are measured through the Analog Continuous Time PSoC blocks. The power levels for AGND
refer to the power of the Analog Continuous Time PSoC block. The power levels for RefHi and RefLo refer to the Analog Reference Control register. The limits stated for AGND include the offset error of the AGND buffer local to the Analog Continuous
Time PSoC block.
5V DC Analog Reference Specifications
Symbol
–
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
AGND = Vdd/2a
Vdd/2 - 0.043
CT Block Power = High
Vdd/2 - 0.025
Vdd/2 + 0.003
V
a. AGND tolerance includes the offsets of the local buffer in the PSoC block. Bandgap voltage is 1.3V ± 2%.
3.3V DC Analog Reference Specifications
Symbol
–
Description
AGND =
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Vdd/2a
Vdd/2 - 0.037
CT Block Power = High
Vdd/2 - 0.020
Vdd/2 + 0.002
V
a. AGND tolerance includes the offsets of the local buffer in the PSoC block. Bandgap voltage is 1.3V ± 2%
DC Analog PSoC Block Specifications
The following table lists guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
DC Analog PSoC Block Specifications
Symbol
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
RCT
Resistor Unit Value (Continuous Time)
–
12.24
–
kΩ
CSC
Capacitor Unit Value (Switch Cap)
–
80
–
fF
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
Notes
293
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
DC POR and LVD Specifications
The following table lists guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
DC POR and LVD Specifications
Symbol
VIPOR
Description
AVDD Value for IPOR Trip
Min
1.60
Typ
1.90
Max
2.30
Units
Notes
V
AVDD Value for PPOR Trip (positive ramp)
VPPOR0R
PORLEV1,PORLEV0=00b
VPPOR1R
PORLEV1,PORLEV0=01b
VPPOR2R
PORLEV1,PORLEV0=10b
2.908
–
4.394
V
–
4.548
V
V
AVDD Value for PPOR Trip (negative ramp)
VPPOR0
PORLEV1,PORLEV0=00b
VPPOR1
PORLEV1,PORLEV0=01b
VPPOR2
PORLEV1,PORLEV0=10b
2.816
–
4.394
V
–
4.548
V
V
PPOR Hysteresis
VPH0
PORLEV1,PORLEV0=00b
–
92
–
mV
VPH1
PORLEV1,PORLEV0=01b
–
0
–
mV
VPH2
PORLEV1,PORLEV0=10b
–
0
–
mV
AVDD Value for LVD Trip
VLVD0
VM2,VM1,VM0=000b
2.863
2.921
2.979a
V
VLVD1
VM2,VM1,VM0=001b
2.963
3.023
3.083
VLVD2
VM2,VM1,VM0=010b
3.070
3.133
3.196
VLVD3
VM2,VM1,VM0=011b
3.920
4.00
4.080
VLVD4
VM2,VM1,VM0=100b
4.393
4.483
4.573
VLVD5
VM2,VM1,VM0=101b
4.550
4.643
4.736b
VLVD6
VM2,VM1,VM0=110b
4.632
4.727
4.822
VLVD7
VM2,VM1,VM0=111b
4.718
4.814
4.910
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
a. Always greater than 50 mV above PPOR (PORLEV=00) for falling supply.
b. Always greater than 50 mV above PPOR (PORLEV=10) for falling supply.
294
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DC Programming Specifications
The following table lists guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
DC Programming Specifications
Symbol
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Notes
ICCP
Supply Current During Programming or Verify
–
5
25
mA
VILP
Input Low Voltage During Programming or Verify
–
–
0.8
V
VIHP
Input High Voltage During Programming or Verify
2.2
–
–
V
IILP
Input Current when Applying Vilp to P1[0] or P1[1]
During Programming or Verify
–
–
0.2
mA
Driving internal pull-down resistor.
IIHP
Input Current when Applying Vihp to P1[0] or P1[1]
During Programming or Verify
–
–
1.5
mA
Driving internal pull-down resistor.
VOLV
Output Low Voltage During Programming or Verify
–
–
Vss+0.75
V
VOHV
Output High Voltage During Programming or Verify
Vdd - 1.0
–
Vdd
V
FlashENPB
Flash Endurance (per block)
50,000
–
–
–
Erase/write cycles per block.
1,800,000
–
–
–
Erase/write cycles.
10
–
–
Years
FlashENT
Flash Endurance
FlashDR
Flash Data Retention
(total)a
a. A maximum of 36 x 50,000 block endurance cycles is allowed. This may be balanced between operations on 36x1 blocks of 50,000 maximum cycles each, 36x2
blocks of 25,000 maximum cycles each, or 36x4 blocks of 12,500 maximum cycles each (and so forth to limit the total number of cycles to 36x50,000 and that no
single block ever sees more than 50,000 cycles).
The PSoC devices use an adaptive algorithm to enhance endurance over the industrial temperature range (-40°C to +85°C ambient). Any temperature range within
a 50°C span between 0°C and 85°C is considered constant with respect to endurance enhancements. For instance, if room temperature (25°C) is the nominal
operating temperature, then the range from 0°C to 50°C can be approximated by the constant value 25 and a temperature sensor is not needed.
For the full industrial range, the user must employ a temperature sensor user module (FlashTemp) and feed the result to the temperature argument before writing.
Refer to the Flash APIs Application Note AN2015 at http://www.cypress.com under Application Notes for more information.
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
295
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
AC Electrical Characteristics
AC Chip-Level Specifications
The following table lists guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
AC Chip-Level Specifications
Symbol
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Notes
FIMO
Internal Main Oscillator Frequency
23.4
24
24.6a,c
MHz
Trimmed. Utilizing factory trim values.
FCPU1
CPU Frequency (5 V Nominal)
0.93
24
24.6a,b
MHz
FCPU2
CPU Frequency (3.3V Nominal)
0.93
12
12.3b,c
MHz
F48M
Digital PSoC Block Frequency
0
48
49.2a,b,d
MHz
F24M
Digital PSoC Block Frequency
0
24
24.6b,e,d
MHz
F32K1
Internal Low Speed Oscillator Frequency
15
32
64
kHz
F32K2
External Crystal Oscillator
–
32.768
–
kHz
Accuracy is capacitor and crystal dependent. 50% duty cycle.
FPLL
PLL Frequency
–
23.986
–
MHz
Is a multiple (x732) of crystal frequency.
Jitter24M2
24 MHz Period Jitter (PLL)
600
–
TPLLSLEW
PLL Lock Time
0.5
–
10
ms
TPLLSLEWS-
PLL Lock Time for Low Gain Setting
0.5
–
50
ms
TOS
External Crystal Oscillator Startup to 1%
–
1700
2620
ms
TOSACC
External Crystal Oscillator Startup to 100 ppm
–
2800
3800f
ms
Jitter32k
32 kHz Period Jitter
–
100
TXRST
External Reset Pulse Width
10
–
–
µs
DC24M
24 MHz Duty Cycle
40
50
60
%
Step24M
24 MHz Trim Step Size
–
50
–
kHz
Fout48M
48 MHz Output Frequency
46.8
48.0
49.2a,c
MHz
Jitter24M1
24 MHz Period Jitter (IMO)
–
600
FMAX
Maximum frequency of signal on row input or row out- –
put.
–
12
MHz
TRAMP
Supply Ramp Time
–
–
µs
Refer to the AC Digital Block Specifications below.
ps
LOW
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
0
ns
Trimmed. Utilizing factory trim values.
ps
4.75V < Vdd < 5.25V.
Accuracy derived from Internal Main Oscillator with appropriate trim for Vdd range.
3.0V < Vdd < 3.6V.
See Application Note AN2012 “Adjusting PSoC Microcontroller Trims for Dual Voltage-Range Operation” for information on maximum frequency for User Modules.
3.0V < 5.25V.
The crystal oscillator frequency is within 100 ppm of its final value by the end of the Tosacc period. Correct operation assumes a properly loaded 1 uW maximum
drive level 32.768 kHz crystal. 3.0V ≤ Vdd ≤ 5.5V, -40 oC ≤ TA ≤ 85 oC.
AC General Purpose IO (GPIO) Specifications
The following table lists guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
AC GPIO Specifications
Symbol
Description
Min
–
Max
12
Units
Notes
GPIO Operating Frequency
TRiseF
Rise Time, Normal Strong Mode, Cload = 50 pF
3
–
18
ns
Vdd = 4.5 to 5.5V, 10% - 90%
TFallF
Fall Time, Normal Strong Mode, Cload = 50 pF
2
–
18
ns
Vdd = 4.5 to 5.5V, 10% - 90%
TRiseS
Rise Time, Slow Strong Mode, Cload = 50 pF
10
27
–
ns
Vdd = 3 to 5.5V, 10% - 90%
TFallS
Fall Time, Slow Strong Mode, Cload = 50 pF
10
22
–
ns
Vdd = 3 to 5.5V, 10% - 90%
296
0
Typ
FGPIO
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
MHz
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
AC Operational Amplifier Specifications
The following tables list guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
Settling times, slew rates, and gain bandwidth are based on the Analog Continuous Time PSoC block.
5V AC Operational Amplifier Specifications
Symbol
TROA
TSOA
SRROA
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Power = Low
–
Power = Low, Opamp Bias = High
–
Power = Medium
–
Power = Medium, Opamp Bias = High
–
Power = High
–
Power = High, Opamp Bias = High
–
–
3.9
µs
Power = Low
–
Power = Low, Opamp Bias = High
–
Power = Medium
–
Power = Medium, Opamp Bias = High
–
Power = High
–
Power = High, Opamp Bias = High
–
0.72
–
0.62
µs
–
5.9
µs
µs
µs
0.92
–
0.72
µs
µs
µs
V/µs
–
V/µs
1.7
–
6.5
–
V/µs
V/µs
Power = High
Power = High, Opamp Bias = High
V/µs
Falling Slew Rate (20% to 80%)(10 pF load, Unity
Gain)
0.01
V/µs
–
V/µs
Power = Low, Opamp Bias = High
V/µs
0.5
–
4.0
–
V/µs
0.75
–
MHz
V/µs
Power = High
Power = High, Opamp Bias = High
Gain Bandwidth Product
Power = Low
Power = Low, Opamp Bias = High
MHz
Power = Medium
Power = Medium, Opamp Bias = High
MHz
3.1
–
Power = High, Opamp Bias = High
5.4
–
Noise at 1 kHz
–
200
Specification minimums for low power
and high opamp bias, medium power, and
medium power and high opamp bias levels are between low and high power levels.
MHz
Power = High
December 22, 2003
Specification minimums for low power
and high opamp bias, medium power, and
medium power and high opamp bias levels are between low and high power levels.
V/µs
Power = Medium
Power = Medium, Opamp Bias = High
Specification minimums for low power
and high opamp bias, medium power, and
medium power and high opamp bias levels are between low and high power levels.
V/µs
Power = Medium, Opamp Bias = High
Power = Low
Specification maximums for low power
and high opamp bias, medium power, and
medium power and high opamp bias levels are between low and high power levels.
µs
–
Power = Medium
ENOA
µs
Rising Slew Rate (20% to 80%)(10 pF load, Unity
Gain)
0.15
Notes
Specification maximums for low power
and high opamp bias, medium power, and
medium power and high opamp bias levels are between low and high power levels.
µs
–
Power = Low, Opamp Bias = High
BWOA
µs
Falling Settling Time from 20% of ∆V to 0.1% of ∆V
(10 pF load, Unity Gain)
Power = Low
SRFOA
Units
Rising Settling Time from 80% of ∆V to 0.1% of ∆V
(10 pF load, Unity Gain)
MHz
MHz
–
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
nV/rt-Hz
297
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
3.3V AC Operational Amplifier Specifications
Symbol
TROA
TSOA
SRROA
Description
Min
Typ
Max
–
Power = Low, Opamp Bias = High
–
Power = Medium
–
Power = Medium, Opamp Bias = High
–
–
0.72
µs
Power = High (3.3 Volt High Bias Operation not supported)
–
–
–
µs
Power = High, Opamp Bias = High (3.3 Volt High
Power, High Opamp Bias not supported)
–
–
–
µs
–
3.92
µs
Falling Settling Time from 20% of ∆V to 0.1% of ∆V
(10 pF load, Unity Gain)
–
Power = Low, Opamp Bias = High
–
Power = Medium
–
Power = Medium, Opamp Bias = High
–
–
0.72
µs
Power = High (3.3 Volt High Bias Operation not supported)
–
–
–
µs
Power = High, Opamp Bias = High (3.3 Volt High
Power, High Opamp Bias not supported)
–
–
–
µs
–
5.41
µs
Rising Slew Rate (20% to 80%)(10 pF load, Unity
Gain)
V/µs
–
V/µs
Specification minimums for low power
and high opamp bias, medium power, and
medium power and high opamp bias levels are between low and high power levels.
V/µs
V/µs
Power = Medium, Opamp Bias = High
2.7
–
Power = High (3.3 Volt High Bias Operation not supported)
–
–
–
V/µs
Power = High, Opamp Bias = High (3.3 Volt High
Power, High Opamp Bias not supported)
–
–
–
V/µs
Falling Slew Rate (20% to 80%)(10 pF load, Unity
Gain)
Power = Low
0.24
V/µs
–
V/µs
Power = Low, Opamp Bias = High
Specification minimums for low power
and high opamp bias, medium power, and
medium power and high opamp bias levels are between low and high power levels.
V/µs
Power = Medium
V/µs
Power = Medium, Opamp Bias = High
1.8
–
Power = High (3.3 Volt High Bias Operation not supported)
–
–
–
V/µs
Power = High, Opamp Bias = High (3.3 Volt High
Power, High Opamp Bias not supported)
–
–
–
V/µs
0.67
–
Gain Bandwidth Product
Power = Low
MHz
MHz
Power = Low, Opamp Bias = High
MHz
Power = Medium
298
Specification maximums for low power
and high opamp bias, medium power, and
medium power and high opamp bias levels are between low and high power levels.
µs
Power = Medium
ENOA
µs
Power = Low
0.31
Notes
Specification maximums for low power
and high opamp bias, medium power, and
medium power and high opamp bias levels are between low and high power levels.
µs
Power = Low, Opamp Bias = High
BWOA
µs
Power = Low
Power = Low
SRFOA
Units
Rising Settling Time from 80% of ∆V to 0.1% of ∆V
(10 pF load, Unity Gain)
Power = Medium, Opamp Bias = High
2.8
–
Power = High (3.3 Volt High Bias Operation not supported)
–
–
–
MHz
Power = High, Opamp Bias = High (3.3 Volt High
Power, High Opamp Bias not supported)
–
–
–
MHz
Noise at 1 kHz (Turbo Medium)
–
200
–
nV/rt-Hz
Specification minimums for low power
and high opamp bias, medium power, and
medium power and high opamp bias levels are between low and high power levels.
MHz
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
AC Digital Block Specifications
The following table lists guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
AC Digital Block Specifications
Function
Timer
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Notes
Capture Pulse Width
50a
–
–
ns
Maximum Frequency, No Capture
–
–
48
MHz
Maximum Frequency, With Capture
–
–
24
MHz
Enable Pulse Width
50a
–
–
ns
Maximum Frequency, No Enable Input
–
–
48
MHz
Maximum Frequency, Enable Input
–
–
24
MHz
Asynchronous Restart Mode
20
–
–
ns
Synchronous Restart Mode
50a
–
–
ns
a
50
–
–
ns
Maximum Frequency
–
–
48
MHz
4.75V < Vdd < 5.25V.
Maximum Input Clock Frequency
–
–
48
MHz
4.75V < Vdd < 5.25V.
Maximum Input Clock Frequency
–
–
24
MHz
SPIM
Maximum Input Clock Frequency
–
–
8
MHz
SPIS
Maximum Input Clock Frequency
–
–
4
ns
Width of SS_ Negated Between Transmissions
50a
–
–
ns
Transmitter
Maximum Input Clock Frequency
–
–
16
MHz
Receiver
Maximum Input Clock Frequency
–
16
48
MHz
Counter
Dead Band
4.75V < Vdd < 5.25V.
Kill Pulse Width:
Disable Mode
CRCPRS
4.75V < Vdd < 5.25V.
(PRS Mode)
CRCPRS
(CRC Mode)
4.75V < Vdd < 5.25V.
a. 50 ns minimum input pulse width is based on the input synchronizers running at 24 MHz (42 ns nominal period).
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
299
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
AC Analog Output Buffer Specifications
The following tables list guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
5V AC Analog Output Buffer Specifications
Symbol
TROB
TSOB
SRROB
SRFOB
BWOB
BWOB
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Notes
Rising Settling Time to 0.1%, 1V Step, 100pF Load
Power = Low
–
–
2.5
µs
Power = High
–
–
2.5
µs
Power = Low
–
–
2.2
µs
Power = High
–
–
2.2
µs
Power = Low
0.65
–
–
V/µs
Power = High
0.65
–
–
V/µs
Power = Low
0.65
–
–
V/µs
Power = High
0.65
–
–
V/µs
Power = Low
0.8
–
–
MHz
Power = High
0.8
–
–
MHz
Power = Low
300
–
–
kHz
Power = High
300
–
–
kHz
Falling Settling Time to 0.1%, 1V Step, 100pF Load
Rising Slew Rate (20% to 80%), 1V Step, 100pF
Load
Falling Slew Rate (80% to 20%), 1V Step, 100pF
Load
Small Signal Bandwidth, 20mVpp, 3dB BW, 100pF
Load
Large Signal Bandwidth, 1Vpp, 3dB BW, 100pF Load
3.3V AC Analog Output Buffer Specifications
Symbol
TROB
TSOB
SRROB
SRFOB
BWOB
BWOB
300
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Notes
Rising Settling Time to 0.1%, 1V Step, 100pF Load
Power = Low
–
–
3.8
µs
Power = High
–
–
3.8
µs
Power = Low
–
–
2.6
µs
Power = High
–
–
2.6
µs
Power = Low
.5
–
–
V/µs
Power = High
.5
–
–
V/µs
Power = Low
.5
–
–
V/µs
Power = High
.5
–
–
V/µs
Power = Low
0.7
–
–
MHz
Power = High
0.7
–
–
MHz
Power = Low
200
–
–
kHz
Power = High
200
–
–
kHz
Falling Settling Time to 0.1%, 1V Step, 100pF Load
Rising Slew Rate (20% to 80%), 1V Step, 100pF
Load
Falling Slew Rate (80% to 20%), 1V Step, 100pF
Load
Small Signal Bandwidth, 20mVpp, 3dB BW, 100pF
Load
Large Signal Bandwidth, 1Vpp, 3dB BW, 100pF Load
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
AC External Clock Specifications
The following tables list guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
5V AC External Clock Specifications
Symbol
Description
FOSCEXT
Frequency
–
–
–
Min
Typ
Max
Units
0
–
24.24
MHz
High Period
20.6
–
–
ns
Low Period
20.6
–
–
ns
Power Up IMO to Switch
150
–
–
µs
Notes
3.3V AC External Clock Specifications
Symbol
FOSCEXT
FOSCEXT
–
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Frequency with CPU Clock divide by 1
0
–
Frequency with CPU Clock divide by 2 or greaterb
0
–
24
MHz
High Period with CPU Clock divide by 1
41.7
–
–
ns
a
12
Notes
MHz
–
Low Period with CPU Clock divide by 1
41.7
–
–
ns
–
Power Up IMO to Switch
150
–
–
µs
a. Maximum CPU frequency is 12 MHz at 3.3V. With the CPU clock divider set to 1, the external clock must adhere to the maximum frequency and duty cycle requirements.
b. If the frequency of the external clock is greater than 12 MHz, the CPU clock divider must be set to 2 or greater. In this case, the CPU clock divider will ensure that
the fifty percent duty cycle requirement is met.
AC Programming Specifications
The following table lists guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
AC Programming Specifications
Symbol
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
TRSCLK
Rise Time of SCLK
1
–
20
ns
TFSCLK
Fall Time of SCLK
1
–
20
ns
TSSCLK
Data Set up Time to Falling Edge of SCLK
40
–
–
ns
THSCLK
Data Hold Time from Falling Edge of SCLK
40
–
–
ns
FSCLK
Frequency of SCLK
0
–
8
MHz
TERASEB
Flash Erase Time (Block)
–
15
–
ms
TWRITE
Flash Block Write Time
–
30
–
ms
TDSCLK
Data Out Delay from Falling Edge of SCLK
–
–
45
ns
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
Notes
301
SECTION G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
AC I2C Specifications
The following table lists guaranteed maximum and minimum specifications for the voltage and temperature ranges: 4.75V to
5.25V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, or 3.0V to 3.6V and -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 85°C, respectively. Typical parameters apply to 5V and 3.3V
at 25°C and are for design guidance only or unless otherwise specified.
AC Characteristics of the I2C SDA and SCL Pins
Standard Mode
Symbol
Description
Min
Fast Mode
Max
Min
Max
Units
FSCLI2C
SCL Clock Frequency
0
100
0
400
kHz
THDSTAI2C
Hold Time (repeated) START Condition. After this
period, the first clock pulse is generated.
4.0
–
0.6
–
µs
TLOWI2C
LOW Period of the SCL Clock
4.7
–
1.3
–
µs
THIGHI2C
HIGH Period of the SCL Clock
4.0
–
0.6
–
µs
TSUSTAI2C
Set-up Time for a Repeated START Condition
4.7
–
0.6
–
µs
THDDATI2C
Data Hold Time
0
–
0
–
µs
TSUDATI2C
Data Set-up Time
250
–
100
–
ns
TSUSTOI2C
Set-up Time for STOP Condition
4.0
–
0.6
–
µs
TBUFI2C
Bus Free Time Between a STOP and START Condition 4.7
–
1.3
–
µs
TSPI2C
Pulse Width of spikes are suppressed by the input filter.
–
0
50
ns
–
a
Notes
a. A Fast-Mode I2C-bus device can be used in a Standard-Mode I2C-bus system, but the requirement tSU;DAT ≥ 250 ns must then be met. This will automatically be
the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such device does stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data
bit to the SDA line trmax + tSU;DAT = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard-Mode I2C-bus specification) before the SCL line is released.
SDA
TLOWI2C
TSUDATI2C
THDSTAI2C
TSPI2C
TBUFI2C
SCL
S THDSTAI2C THDDATI2C THIGHI2C
TSUSTAI2C
Sr
TSUSTOI2C
P
S
Definition for Timing for F/S-Mode on the I2C Bus
302
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003
SECTION H REVISION HISTORY
Document Revision History
Document Title:
CY8C22113, CY8C22213 PSoC™ Mixed Signal Array Preliminary Data Sheet
Document Number: 38-12009
Revision
ECN #
Issue Date
Origin of Change
Description of Change
**
128180
06/30/2003
New Silicon.
New document – Advanced Data Sheet (two
page product brief).
*A
129202
09/16/2003
NWJ
New document – Preliminary Data Sheet (300
page product detail).
*B
130127
10/15/2003
NWJ
Revised document for Silicon Revision A.
*C
131679
12/05/2003
NWJ
Changes to Electrical Specifications section,
Miscellaneous changes to I2C, GDI, RDI, Registers, and Digital Block chapters.
*D
131803
12/22/2003
NWJ
Changes to Electrical Specifications and miscellaneous small changes throughout the data
sheet.
Distribution: External/Public
Posting:
None
December 22, 2003
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
303
SECTION H REVISION HISTORY
304
CY8C22xxx Preliminary Data Sheet
Document No. 38-12009 Rev. *D
December 22, 2003